| A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | # | Archive URL | Introduction | Reviews | Article Body | |||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | https://www.si.com/review/best-pickleball-paddle/ | While pickleball is a fairly easy sport to learn and play, players can easily turn fun games into competitive ones. Given this situation, players need a versatile paddle that’s great for both beginners and professionals. Not only that, the paddle also has to be durable and made of high-quality materials. Here are some of the best pickleball paddles in 2023. We have determined these paddles to be top-of-the-line because they: Have cushioned, absorbent grips that prevent slipping Feature enhanced designs for ultimate ball control Are made from durable materials, so they'll last for many games on end | Best Pickleball Paddle Worth Considering in 2023 niupipo Pickleball Paddle – Best Overall 1 Photo courtesy of Amazon Made with graphite carbon fiber face and honeycomb composition, this lightweight Niupipo pickleball paddle has an ideal level of strength and stiffness that’s perfect for control and power hitting. PROS The interiors are constructed with polymer honeycomb which are sandwiched between two sheets of fiberglass—making them durable The grips are perforated and designed to be sweat-absorbent and cushioned for comfortable, longtime play The overall design is suitable for both beginners and intermediate players CONS For those with larger hands, the paddle’s handle may be too short or too small Not the best option for professional players looking for more advanced specs There’s only one color option—not ideal for those who are not fans of the blue-black color combo BUY ON AMAZON Franklin Sports Pickleball Paddle – Great for All Skill Levels 2 Photo courtesy of Amazon The Franklin Sports Pickleball Paddle is a great choice for players of all skill levels. The set comes with two 7-ply wood paddles, designed for comfort as well as durability. The paddles feature a non-slip grip and are approved for competitive tournament play by USA Pickleball (USAPA). Also included in the set are two X-40 outdoor pickleballs. These high-quality balls are the official pickleballs of USA Pickleball, ensuring precision during competitive play. This set is perfect for beginners and experienced players alike. Everything you need to start playing pickleball is included in the box, making it easy to join the fun with your family and friends. The Franklin Sports Pickleball Paddle is an excellent choice whether you’re just starting out or already an experienced player. It’s a great way to equip yourself with quality equipment and join in on the pickleball action. PROS Comfortable handle and grip, even in hot weather Very affordable set, great for beginners Good value with two included pickleball balls CONS Handle isn’t durable BUY ON AMAZON Palms-O-Aces Pickleball Paddle – Runner Up 3 Photo courtesy of Amazon Our following recommendation achieves the ideal mix of power and accuracy with a top-quality surface layer and a polypropylene sandwich panel core. Weighing approximately eight oz., it is lightweight and straightforward to swing, reducing fatigue while allowing additional control. The innovative UV printing method creates a patterned paddle for improved ball control and spin, and the durable surface will outlast traditional colored pickleball paddles. A slightly longer handle gives you greater reach and power, and the punctured faux leather material wicks away sweat, so you always have a solid, non-slip grip on the pickleball racket. You will love the product because of the sturdy protective edge and the one-year warranty! PROS Great grip and texture Enhances serves and spins Well-made and lightweight CONS Not USA pickleball approved BUY ON AMAZON PickleballCentral Pickleball Paddle – Honorable Mention 4 Photo courtesy of Amazon This balance-focused paddle from Pickleball Central is made with a durable honeycomb composite polymer core to ensure powerful and smooth hits. It has a larger sweet spot with a ball-control edge. PROS It’s designed with a wide paddle face, edge guard hits will be minimized. The paddle face is also textured to help with enhancing spin and ball control With a larger sweet spot, performance is improved even during off-center shots Its weight of 7.7 to 8 ounces is ideal for players of all levels. The cushioned grip is ergonomically designed for maximum comfort and less slipping CONS With all the focus on performance and comfort, there’s no mention of materials used to make the paddle durable and long-lasting. So, there’s no guarantee if this material is as durable as it is powerful BUY ON AMAZON ONIX Pickleball Paddle – Most Convenient 5 Photo courtesy of Amazon Onix’s Pickleball Paddle is made with a graphite face and Nomex paper honeycomb core for speed and maneuverability. Not to mention, this design makes the paddle extra lightweight. PROS Its Nomex honeycomb core—designed to be lightweight and high strength—adds power to hits while ensuring control during gameplay Designed with a wide body shape, this oversized paddle is perfect for those looking to have a larger sweet spot The tennis handle design is ideal for players transitioning from tennis to pickleball CONS The paddle is a bit expensive compared to its competitors The materials used for the handle weren’t specified, so it’s best to double-check them before deciding to purchase BUY ON AMAZON Amazin’ Aces Pickleball Paddle – Also Consider 6 Photo courtesy of Amazon The Amazin’ Aces pickleball paddle utilizes a standard design with affordability and comfort in mind. The paddle is made with a polypropylene honeycomb core—designed to be quiet during play. PROS The grip is hand-stitched and contoured to allow maximum comfort and a better grip The set includes a mesh bag and free e-book for beginners—making an ideal affordable option CONS The materials used for the grip were not specified, hence, make sure that you double-check before making a purchase Since it’s more on the affordable side, the paddle is not guaranteed to last long | Pickleball Paddles Buying Guide Pickleball’s popularity has surged in recent years. With this surge in popularity, more people are picking up the sport. Whether you are a newbie or an old player of the sport, the availability of various types and brands of pickleball paddles can put you in a dilemma when picking out the best paddle. Our review of the best pickleball paddles available has given you a glimpse of the best paddles out there. This buying guide takes you to the nitty-gritty of pickleball paddles to help you choose the ideal paddle. The guide includes a section dedicated to frequently asked questions to answer common questions about pickleball paddles and pickleball as a whole. What Is the Difference Between a Tennis Racket and a Pickleball Paddle? Pickleball borrows from three distinct sports, table tennis (ping pong), badminton, and tennis, where players on opposing sides hit the ball over a net with a piece of equipment. Tennis players use a racket to hit the ball, while paddles are used in pickleball. The two are similar in that they both have a handle attached to the hitting surface. However, the size and the design of the hitting surfaces vary. The pickleball paddle is the smaller of the two – a pickleball paddle is closer to a ping pong paddle in size. A tennis racket’s hitting surface is considerably larger than a pickleball paddle’s. Also, a pickleball paddle’s hitting surface is made up of a flat material – wood or graphite while a racket’s hitting surface is made up of catgut or strings. What Are the Things to Consider Before Buying a Pickleball Paddle? Since there are various pickleball paddles available, choosing a paddle that best suits your needs could be a little difficult. Different variables that differ from one player to the other are involved. Below are the various factors you should consider before purchasing a paddle for pickleball. Weight The first factor to consider when choosing a pickleball paddle is the paddle’s weight. Pickleball paddles typically weigh between 4 and 14 ounces. A heavy paddle will drive the ball better than a light paddle. Conversely, a light paddle gives the player more control over the ball. However, players with a previous history of elbow or arm injuries should be wary of using a heavy paddle as it could aggravate their injury. Paddle material Paddles for pickleball are usually made of three materials – woods, graphite, and composite materials. Paddles made of wood are the most traditional of the three. They are also the cheapest option. However, they are quite heavy and may be difficult to use over long periods. Pickleball paddles made of graphite are the most expensive of all three types. They have the advantage of being lightweight and usable for long periods. Composite pickleball paddles are the middle ground between wooden paddles and graphite paddles. They are more expensive than wooden paddles but not quite as expensive as graphite paddles. Elongated paddle vs. Wide-body paddle The choice between elongated pickleball paddles and wide-body pickleball paddles has to do with the dimensions of the paddle’s hitting surface. Elongated paddles sacrifice width for a longer hitting surface. On the other hand, wide-body paddles have a wider hitting surface. Wide-body paddles are the most common of the two. Wide-body paddles are suitable for players that are just learning the game, while elongated paddles may help experienced players improve their reach. Grip size Getting a pickleball paddle with the correct grip size for the size of your hand is as important as getting the correct shoe size for your feet. A paddle with a larger grip gives you more stability and reduces the pressure on your arm. Using a paddle with a large grip may result in the paddle slipping from your hand when playing. Paddles with smaller grip sizes give you more control over the ball and allow you to add spin to your shots. Also, it is easier to switch hands when playing with a paddle with a small grip size. When in a dilemma between two pickleball paddles with different grip sizes, go with the smaller one. This is because you can upsize a paddle with a small grip size with over-grips. A paddle with a large grip size cannot be downsized. Color If you want to enter the court in style, you should consider your paddle’s color. Apart from the aesthetic import of your paddle’s color, choosing a distinct color could help you to pick out your paddle from a pool of paddles at tournaments. The color of the paddle’s face could also give you an advantage. It could make it difficult for your opponents to read your shot. For example, a yellow-colored paddle face blends with the ball’s color; this could help you catch your opponent unawares. How Much Do Pickleball Paddles Cost? The price of pickleball paddles varies from one brand to another. The price is majorly dependent on the type of material used to make the paddle. Wooden pickleball paddles cost between $15 and $35. To get composite pickleball paddles, you will spend between $40 and $100. Graphite pickleball paddles cost between $90 and $200. | |||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | https://www.si.com/review/meal-replacement-shake/ | Presently, many people are struggling with health issues like obesity and cardiac health complications with the reason solely being a sedentary lifestyle and lack of activity. An unhealthy lifestyle and weight can cause a series of health problems. While losing weight is a great way to help yourself, it does open a whole new series of unavoidable struggles on what to eat and what not to eat. Fortunately, we are blessed with a bundle of facilities to aid this change — meal replacement shakes. In this article, we have reviewed some of the best meal replacement shakes in 2022 to help you make an informed decision. They are designed to replace a regular meal with a drink with fewer calories but equal nutrition. Meal replacement shakes can be your knight in shining armor if you want to shed those extra pounds. Loaded with protein, these shakes help boost metabolism, manage appetite, and increase energy levels. Here is a list consisting of some of the best meal replacement shakes in the market. | Comparing the Meal Replacement Shakes of 2022 LYFE Fuel Meal Replacement Shake – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Nutirional Support: Provides optimal levels of essential vitamins and minerals Taste and Texture: Delicious vanilla and chocolate flavor options Convenience: Healthy meal substitute for busy, on-the-go, active, lifestyles Satisfying: Eliminates nagging hunger If you are looking for a complete blend of plant-based protein, then Essentials Meal Replacement Shake by LYFE fuel is a go-to product. This is an energy-enhancing meal replacement that will keep you full while providing enough energy to stay active during the day. This vegan meal replacement is great for busy, health-conscious individuals, scoring well on nutrition, taste, and convenience. CHECK ON AMAZON LOOK ON SITE Fit & Lean Meal Replacement Shake – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Loaded with healthy fruits and vegetables like kale, spinach, mango, pineapple, berries, carrots, beets, and bananas It has 500 million CFU probiotics to enhance your digestive health An ample amount of protein helps you shred fat and gain lean muscle It includes 250% DV of Vitamin D Natural ingredients like green tea, Green Coffee Beans, and Garcinia Cambogia help in boosting metabolism Are you looking for a bit of a kick to your weight loss plan? If yes, we suggest that you bring this fat shredder into your life. Fit & Lean Meal Shake comes with ample protein, probiotics, fiber, fruits, vegetables, and green tea that helps you lose weight. Besides assisting in weight loss, this scrumptious shake keeps you full for longer. It provides enough energy to function throughout the day. Cookies and cream — the flavor of gods, also help you cater to those unwanted cravings that come with obesity. CHECK ON AMAZON ViSalus Vi-Shape Meal Replacement Shake – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Sweet cream flavor to satisfy unwanted cravings It helps your heart health by being rich in Non-GMO soy protein isolate and fiber The shake is packed with over 23 vitamins and minerals It contains enzymes that improve your digestive system without going harsh on bowel movements The product is Isoflavone-free Formulated to shred fat and assist in weight loss Tasting cake while being on a weight loss plan seems like a far-fetched idea. However, with ViSalus by Vi-Shape, you can make your dreams come true. This nutritional shake is famous for its health benefits while giving you a cake-like taste. Packed with minerals that remove fat from the body, this shake can improve your cardiac health effectively. Whether you are looking for something like a regular part of your diet or just to energize your body while working out, this can be a perfect fit. While improving your digestive system, it doesn’t make any changes to estrogen activity in the body. CHECK ON AMAZON 310 Shake Meal Replacement – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Contains CFU of probiotics along with 17 vitamins and minerals to assist in health management It is a plant protein formula consisting of pea protein, brown rice protein, and hemp protein Comes in 4 different flavors; mocha, salted caramel, chocolate, and vanilla Blended with natural stevia leaf Soy-free, gluten-free product with zero processed sugars One of the best meal replacement shakes in the market; this high-quality product is loaded with a bundle of premium ingredients that energize your body and assist in losing weight. Perfect for people who want plant-based protein in their diet without compromising on taste. Additionally, this product is suitable for people who do not like sugar, gluten, and soy content in their diet. Add your favorite fruits to enhance nutritional value or just have it on its own to get a whiff of vivacity and confidence. CHECK ON AMAZON SlimFast Original Meal Replacement Shake 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Consists of 24 essential vitamins and minerals that help you lose weight The product is easy on the digestive system because of its high fiber ratio Gluten-free but not sugar-free Assisted with a separate SlimFast weight loss plan to regulate your diet and eating habits Who doesn’t like the authentic flavor notes packed in French vanilla? Probably no one. SlimFast Original weight loss powder is an impeccable treat not just on your tastebuds but on your health as well. Bursting with protein, vitamins, and minerals, this meal replacement offers you great nutritional value while suppressing hunger and cravings. The recommended serving is twice a day to maintain energy. You can quickly lose weight with the SlimFast weight loss plan. Easy to digest and easy on the pockets, the product does not have any gluten. All you have to do is pair it with your desired liquid, and voila! | Buying Guide for Best Meal Replacement Shakes in 2021 Choosing a meal replacement shake that matches your dietary and health requirements is a task that needs in-depth research and understanding. This buying guide will help you pick the best meal replacement shake for your health. Why should you buy a meal replacement shake? There are some undeniable pros of meal replacement that you must consider before buying one. Packed with nutrients Are you unable to eat enough? No problem, have a glass of your favorite meal replacement shake, and you will be loaded with healthy nutrients in no time. It is actually one of the best ways to give your body the required nutrition. Meal replacement shakes have a nutritional value equivalent to what you would get by eating healthy foods. Reasonable pricing It may look pricey when picking a bundle of packs, but their value in use is just equal (or sometimes less) than what you spend on a daily meal. A single serving of meal replacement shake is roughly comparable to the money spent on an unhealthy fast-food burger. Low in calories The most important thing in losing weight is to cut down on calories. This may seem a bit hard when you are consuming solid food. However, with meal replacement shakes, the calorie count of a single meal becomes significantly less despite fueling your body with essential nutrients and energy. Suppress cravings People suffering from obesity and hormonal issues suffer from cravings and unwanted hunger pangs. When adequate protein and essential fiber are provided through these shakes, the hunger volume is reduced significantly. Proven weight loss Studies have shown that people who replace meals with protein shakes can promptly lose weight, given that adequate lifestyle changes assist it. You can lose up to 8% of your body weight in 12 weeks by using a meal replacement shake and adding enough activity in life. What things should you consider when buying a meal replacement shake? To ensure that your meal replacement shake fits your health, consider the following things before buying. Quality A good meal replacement powder always has more protein than the number of carbs. No matter what the description says, don't forget to check the list of ingredients. Artificial ingredients Some companies offer shakes for a lesser value. Remember that they can be packed with artificial flavors and processed sugars. Always purchase a user-recommended shake at its genuine price from an authentic dealer. Allergens Suppose your body is prone to allergies like dairy, lactose, or gluten. In this case, you might want to go through all the labels and descriptions before purchasing. Contact the seller if you are still unsure. Are packaged meal replacement shakes better than homemade ones? While this is a long debate and many people have been confused between the two, high-quality packaged meal replacement shakes always have an edge. Reason being: Designed for weight loss They are designed and formulated to control weight with the best ingredients for the job. Meet nutritional requirement You always hit the nutritional requirement with a serving of packaged shakes, while the results of homemade shakes are uncertain. Recommended by professionals Most meal replacement shakes are recommended by certified healthcare experts and physical trainers for being extremely helpful towards weight loss. Flavor choice You get a choice of different flavors that suppress sugar cravings and the need to consume something packaged. Simple use Packaged items are simple and easy to make. Instead of cutting all that fruit and vegetable, simply put the powder in liquid, blend, and drink! Reasonable pricing A packaged shake is more reasonable in terms of pricing as compared to fresh ingredients in the market. What are some common flavors of meal replacement shakes? Sometimes it can be a bit confusing on what flavor to choose. There are just so many options! Let’s talk about some widespread flavors of meal replacement shakes to help you pick one. Chocolate Undoubtedly the most common flavor. Improves skin Reduces stress levels Boosts brain power and memory Diabetic-friendly Peanut butter The nutty deliciousness of nuts packed in a box. Twice the amount of protein High fiber content Brain booster Cookies and cream It makes you forget Oreos! Reduces cravings Added energy and performance Build more muscle Berries Loaded with berrylicious flavor notes. Reduce inflammation Healthy for skin High-fiber Diabetic-friendly Final words A sedentary lifestyle has left a lot of people unhealthy and even obese. This can ultimately hamper your lifestyle and also lead to various health complications. With a solution lying only in weight loss, you need to make some notable changes. Meal replacement shakes are a great way to shed some extra pounds, especially if you have a hard time cutting those additional calories. Besides being extremely low in calories, a meal replacement shake can fuel your body with essential nutrients that help you function throughout the day. There are plenty of options in the market, so if you are looking for something that meets your health requirements, make sure to check the labels first. Always go for authentic products from certified sellers. If you have health complications, make sure to ask your healthcare provider first. All these points will help you purchase the best meal replacement shakes that suit your health. | |||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | https://www.si.com/review/best-blood-pressure-watch/ | As we get older, tracking our health and daily activity becomes paramount to living a healthy life. Besides eating right, walking, practicing yoga, and exercising, monitoring your blood pressure is imperative for staying updated with ample health issues like heart disease and stroke that might be lurking beneath the surface. Moreover, high blood pressure (BP) can also lead to sexual dysfunction, sleeping issues, and optic nerve damage. This is where blood pressure watches come to the rescue. These gadgets instantly alert when you encounter high or low BP, allowing you to take necessary precautions or medications. These devices also enable you to track pulse rate, calorie consumption, and not to mention check time and date. While a myriad of smartwatches claim to monitor blood pressure accurately, a few of them are approved by FDA. Such scenarios can make the hunt to find a perfect gadget harder than ever. That’s why we have sifted through a lot of products in the market and reviewed the best blood pressure watches in 2022 to help you purchase a device that accurately tracks your health. | Comparing the Best Blood Pressure Watches for 2022 Yamay Smartwatch Fitness Tracker – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Bright and high-quality display Battery life lasts for up to 7 days IP68 waterproofing – ideal for swimming Compatible with Android as well as iOS The Yamay smartwatch is a reliable fitness tracker that accurately monitors your blood pressure, heart rate, and blood oxygen. This lightweight, waterproof and inexpensive gadget has the ability to track up to nine activities like walking, exercising, running, sleeping, and more. Moreover, it has a long battery life and works for up to 7 days on a single charge. It also seamlessly syncs with Android and iOS devices, allowing you to receive alerts for calls, texts, or emails from your mobile phone directly on the watch. On top of that, this device is available in five appealing colors, including black, blue, pink, green, and gray. Thus, you can grab one that suits most of your outfits. CHECK ON AMAZON PopGlory Smartwatch with Blood Pressure Monitor – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Full-touch screen watch Has seven sports modes Long battery life Supports iOS and Android This blood pressure watch from PopGlory is a relatively new and full-touch screen device that provides quick access to the data. Besides monitoring your blood pressure and blood oxygen, it allows you to track various all-day activities, including calories consumed, steps taken, distance covered, heart rate, and sleep status. This data is recorded in its companion app HeroBandⅢ now, enabling you to view your stats easily. Moreover, this device is compatible with Android and iOS. Thus, you can stay connected with your mobile through this smartwatch and get all the important notifications related to calls, texts, emails, and more. You can also switch between seven sports modes like cycling, skipping, running, walking, basketball, football, and badminton. It has a battery life of up to 10 days and standby of over 30 days, making this watch a perfect one to stay organized and live healthily. CHECK ON AMAZON Halfsun Fitness Tracker – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features High-quality HD display Lightweight, comfortable, and skin-friendly Automatically tracks blood pressure and heart rate IP67 waterproof GPS connectivity Equipped with a 1.3inch HD full-color display, this lightweight blood pressure watch from Halfsun is no less than a beauty. Thanks to its skin-friendly strap made of Lithe, you can comfortably wear it for long durations. It is also reinforced with robust features that allow you to monitor your blood pressure and heart rate accurately, and it also syncs with its dedicated mobile app automatically. Moreover, this watch comes with a sleep monitor, steps counter, and activity tracker to provide you with important insights about your health and wellbeing. If you are fond of walking and running, you can wirelessly connect it to the GPS in your phone. It will continuously show you run stats like distance, pace, and route map. Since it is certified with IP67 waterproof tech, you can use it underwater without the apprehension of damage. This fitness tracking watch is also suitable for women as it can track their menstruation period and help them in pregnancy planning. CHECK ON AMAZON AIKELA Smart Watch Fitness Tracker – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features TFT-LCD full touch screen of 1.3 inches 5ATM swimming waterproof Support Android and iOS Only compatible with smartphones Battery lasts for 7-9 days AIKELA smartwatch is integrated with a full-touch TFT-LCD screen measuring 1.3-inches that allows you to read your health data clearly. It is a waterproof device that can withstand rain and be used while swimming. Since this device monitors three important human body indicators, including heart rate, blood pressure, and blood oxygen, it has the potential to maintain your health efficiently. It also has nine sport modes such as riding, running, walking, fitness, and more. Besides, this blood pressure watch syncs with the VeryFitPro app, where you can easily view the stats related to your daily activities like sleep status, active time, steps, calories. It is only compatible with smartphones and supports Android 4.4 and iOS 8.0 and above. You can wirelessly connect this device to your phone and easily receive and read texts from various apps like Instagram, Whatsapp, and Facebook. It also comes with a battery life of 7-9 days, eliminating the hassle of charging it over and over again. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Blood Pressure Watch Buying Guide Wearing a blood pressure watch or fitness tracker has become a common trend among health-conscious people. This self-effacing device gives real-time insights into your overall health by monitoring your blood pressure, heart rate, calories consumed or burned, and more. Since a smartwatch can facilitate you in taking control of your health, getting your hands on a reliable device is often a good idea. However, the market is filled with a myriad of brands and models of blood pressure watches. Even if you have chosen a variant from the above list, you still need to consider a few factors before investing in it. So, read through this guide created by us to help you make a buying decision easily. What Should You Consider Before Purchasing a Blood Pressure Watch? Compatibility Firstly, you need to determine with which devices your watch is compatible. Most models can connect with a mobile phone, tablet, and laptop, while some only support smartphones. It will allow you to read texts and answer calls directly through your watch. You can also view the stats of your health collected by the smartwatch in an app installed on your connected device. These smart gadgets are usually compatible with Android and iOS. The best blood pressure watches can also connect wirelessly via Bluetooth and sync with your mobile device to automatically download health-related data on their dedicated Android/iOS app. Design Blood pressure watches come in various shapes, sizes, and colors. Since the main purpose of this device is to monitor your BP readings throughout the day, make sure to pick a design that matches your daily outfits. If you are not so concerned about whether it blends with your attire, then you must at least pay attention to the display size. Make sure it is not too small to read the stats easily. While you won’t want to buy something bulky, you should invest in a watch with an elegant design and screen big enough to comfortably read the content. Functionality Besides monitoring blood pressure, make sure your watch also has some additional built-in functionalities. Most devices come with a pedometer, calorie counter, sleep monitor, reminder, and heart rate monitor, along with a BP tracker. Water-Resistant A water-resistant blood pressure watch serves as a boon as you can wear it while swimming or jogging on a rainy day. You also don’t have to remove it while washing your hands. If you are concerned about the watch getting damaged due to water and want to leave no stone unturned to protect your new gadget, then you should add this feature to your list of considerations. Battery life Battery life plays a significant role when it comes to selecting a blood pressure watch. Most people don’t like charging their devices over and over again, at least not too frequently. If you are also one of them, get your hands on a watch with a long-lasting battery. Most of the gadgets mentioned in our list have a long-lasting battery life of at least seven days. Price We can’t deny the fact that high-tech blood pressure watches can be a bit expensive. Even though it is crucial to stay abreast of your blood pressure throughout the day, you need not invest in a watch that burns a hole in your pocket or settle for a low-quality gadget. Instead, you should go for an accurate, reliable, and durable watch that suits your budget. The average price of a good blood pressure watch ranges from $20 to $50. Final Words Blood pressure watches are rapidly gaining high momentum across the globe. Buying one not only allows you to take care of your health but also inspires you to achieve your health goals. With a smartwatch for checking your blood pressure, you will be able to monitor important health metrics 24/7 at your fingertips. All of the above recommendations and factors can help you choose the best blood pressure watch that will meet your needs. So take note of them meticulously! | |||||||||||||||||||
5 | 4 | https://www.si.com/review/ankle-brace/ | Ankle braces are some of the most popular and versatile gear for athletes of any sport and are typically used as external support to limit certain motions that can cause ankle injuries. They are also extremely beneficial for people who need more ankle support to get through their daily activities. It doesn’t matter if you have an average amount of everyday activity or partake in high-intensity training; having an ankle brace is helpful in either situation. Ankle pains can result from several issues, such as plantar fasciitis, tendonitis, and acute ankle injury. You may be experiencing general, unexplained discomfort in your ankle. Using a brace in such situations can provide you with the soothing compression, protection, and support that you need to subdue pain and continue your everyday activities. Many athletes use ankle braces regularly because it helps prevent ankle injuries and issues. Plus, if you’ve had an ankle injury in the past, using a brace may help prevent re-aggravation. For this reason, we will discuss some of the most reliable ankle braces in the market in this guide. We’ve picked our list based on the following criteria: Breathable, lightweight comfort Adjustable or multiple size options Premium quality material | Best Ankle Brace Worth Considering in 2022 TechWare Pro Ankle Brace – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Thin sleeve Non-slip fit design 80/20 nylon to spandex construction Unisex, available in three sizes If you are looking for an ankle brace that gives you suitable compression to address pain, then the TechWare Pro Ankle Brace Compression Sleeve may be your best choice. The ankle brace sleeve design helps relieve pain from sprains, arthritis, muscular fatigue, and fractures. The design is breathable, and the material is moisture-wicking. The ankle brace is comfortable and won’t slip off, even in high intensity movement. The tight fit is ideal for reducing ankle inflammation and improving blood circulation, and you can efficiently run, play sports, or join other kinds of physical activity while wearing this ankle brace. All in all, it is an excellent design that provides support and stability. CHECK ON AMAZON Bodyprox Ankle Support Brace – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Allows 11 inches arch circumference For acute and chronic ankle injury symptoms Features an open heel design Breathable neoprene material Washable This next brace offers exceptional ankle support and minimizes your risks of injury during activity. If you have acute or chronic injury symptoms, the support brace may reduce these symptoms and make everyday activities easier. It provides support to the joints and ankle tendons and keeps them from straining. It has an open heel design that allows you to retain ankle range of motion during most kinds of activities, such as exercising, hiking, or climbing. The breathable neoprene material can retain heat, helping to keep the joint warm while preventing skin irritation. It is comfortable to wear, durable, and washable. And if you are in the healing phase after an ankle injury, the support will improve your healing and give you compression for extra comfort. CHECK ON AMAZON Crucial Compression Ankle Brace – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Moisture-wicking fabric Breathable and lightweight Three separate male and female size options Made from rubber, nylon, and spandex Looking for a compression ankle brace sleeve for instant ankle relief and support? The compression on your ankle is embracing but not too tight which will help reduce swelling, pain, soreness, and discomfort quickly. It has an ankle stabilizer that helps improve your posture and balance, and the special protector compression design improves blood circulation. The material is lightweight and very breathable, so it won’t get too hot or feel too bulky on your feet. You can wear it every day without experiencing any discomfort. The snug fit makes it easier to wear under any kind of shoes or socks. So, if you’re experiencing swelling, ankle soreness, or an Achilles tendon injury we recommend Crucial Compression. CHECK ON AMAZON Rikeep Adjustable Ankle Brace – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Criss-cross strap design Adjustable size Non-slip Breathable and moisture-wicking material The Rikeep Adjustable Ankle Brace provides premium support and is designed for acute healing purposes rather than providing regular support. It has cross straps that you can attach anywhere on the sleeve according to your comfort levels. The ankle brace is made up of elastic nylon, a high-quality material that makes it stretchable and easy to use on any foot size. The adjustable design also ensures that you can use it on either foot with ease. The sleeve features silicon on the inside, which adds friction against the skin and helps prevent the brace from slipping off during your everyday activities. The material is breathable, so can easily wear the ankle brace for extended periods of time without experiencing discomfort. CHECK ON AMAZON Bitly Ankle Brace for Foot Support 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Designed for plantar fasciitis Nylon and spandex construction Workout friendly design Multiple size options available Bitly Ankle Braces are suitable for lasting pain relief as it gently applies pressure with compression to the center point of your foot. This pressure helps stimulate blood flow in feet, easing the pain and discomfort you may experience. The foot support design specifically applies pressure to the arch of the foot and provides support to your ankle’s fascia ligament. The foot support sleeve is easy to wear, light and non-bulky, and designed to be worn with any shoes or socks easily. It is also workout-friendly, so whether you’re running or standing it doesn’t slip off. The ankle support sleeve helps reduce the chances of injury and provides support and comfort during your training. The cloth is moisture-wicking and breathable, which makes it perfect for day and night usage. All in all, it is a reliable design for general purposes, which makes it a good purchase. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Ankle Brace Buying Guide Ankles are one of the most delicate joints, making them more susceptible to injuries. Ankle injuries are not uncommon, especially for more active people such as athletes, runners, or anyone who has a very demanding routine. An ankle brace is an important addition to a workout or recover by providing support to the ankle, relieving pain, preventing injuries, and helping your ankle recover faster. It gives you the confidence that you need to continue your routine without any hitches. But before we discuss how to buy the right ankle brace for you, we should discuss some of its benefits. Benefits of Ankle Braces If you’re still not convinced, here are the foremost benefits of wearing ankle braces: Injury prevention We can’t stress the importance of wearing ankle braces enough to prevent ankle injuries. While ankle injuries are most often more easily recovered and not as complicated as injuries to the wrists for example, there are still a few factors that you should look out for. There are seven tarsal bones in an ankle that give you the flexibility to move. The main motion of the ankle joint is flexion and extension, and ankle braces provide an external restriction for motions that can cause acute injuries. With proper ankle support, it helps keep everything in place and significantly reduces any chances of injuries and sprains. Pain reduction An ankle injury often limits your movement, and if you put weight on it before it has fully healed, it can reaggravate the injury. Using an ankle brace helps improve blood circulation and reduce swelling in your ankles and feet. It alleviates pain and provides your feet the extra support it needs to heal quickly. It also helps control acute and chronic ankle injury symptoms, and if you have had an injury in the past, it keeps it from reaggravating. Better mobility Many foot and ankle conditions can limit your movement and flexibility. This can include issues such as sprains, arthritis, inflammation, tendonitis, ankle fractures, and more. Wearing an ankle brace can help you move a little easier and keep your symptoms under control, giving you the confidence boost you need to walk and move without stress. Considerations When Buying an Ankle Brace Now that you understand the benefits of having an ankle brace, it is time to learn how to find an ankle brace suitable for you. Consider your reasons for buying one There are many reasons why you might need an ankle brace. It can be due to foot pain, sports injury, post-surgery healing, etc. Therefore, before buying an ankle brace, ask yourself why you need it and let that answer make your decision. For example, if you need an ankle brace to continue your sports training or any other rigorous activity, consider the one that provides high support and doesn’t slip off easily. Always consult a doctor about treatment for an injury. How long you need to wear it If you only need ankle support for a couple of hours, comfort doesn’t have to be your topmost priority. If you have to wear it all day long, you must buy a lightweight material, not bulky, breathable, and made up of moisture-wicking fabric. You should also consider if the brace is durable or not. Make sure that it doesn’t stretch easily and gives you the compression and support you need day after day. Choose the Type of Ankle Brace Ankle brace types: Tape support is light and flexible, but it can stretch out rather quickly. Ankle support socks act as a compression sleeve for your feet and are suitable for minor sprains and everyday use. Semi-rigid ankle braces limit your feet's movement, but they give support ideal for healing and recovery. Hinged ankle braces limit your side-to-side movement but still provide some level of mobility in the up and down motion. Rigid braces completely restrict your feet and ankle, and they keep your feet from any kind of movement. | |||||||||||||||||||
6 | 5 | https://www.si.com/review/best-bowling-ball/ | Having a good bowling ball won’t automatically make you a great bowler, but with lots of practice and dedication, it can make a significant difference in your game. If you are progressing your game or playing regularly, having your own bowling ball is one of the first things you want to invest in. Understanding some of the basic scientific principles behind bowling balls will help you choose the best fit and gain the most benefit from your ball. You need a bowling ball of the correct weight and Coverstock to suit your needs. To help you get one step ahead of the game, we’ve listed below the best bowling balls in 2022 for all level bowlers. And if your loved one is a bowling alley regular, we also mention some of the best bowling ball gifts to score you some points. Keep in mind, bowling balls do not come pre-drilled since they need to be custom drilled for you. | Here Are the Best Bowling Ball of 2022 Brunswick Tzone – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Polyester Coverstock with crown factory polish Very low hook potential (25 on a scale of 10-175) for pinpoint accuracy to catch spares Nine different ball colors are available with gorgeous galaxy swirl designs Available in 6 to 16 pounds weight range Brunswick T Zone balls have a 1-Year polyester bowling ball warranty Brunswick T Zone bowling balls are a cost-efficient addition as a spare ball for players of all skill levels and a perfect choice as a first ball for beginners. T Zone bowling balls have a durable polyester cover stock offering straight-line accuracy and consistency. With a somewhat cheaper price tag, beginner bowlers can use some of their budget for other needed accessories such as gloves and bowling shoes. As a spare bowling ball option for intermediate and expert bowlers, Brunswick T Zone balls are a great straight-shot second ball to finish frames off. The ball’s symmetrical core and low hook potential provide excellent lane length and ease in finding your spare shot mark consistently. CHECK ON AMAZON Pyramid Path Rising – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Pearl reactive coverstock with factory polish finish Symmetric core type and medium flare potential Versatile drilling options for various bowling styles Eight different ball colors are available Available in a 12-pound weight Pyramid Path Rising allows any style bowler to achieve peak performance in medium to medium-dry conditions. The ball is finished with a 1500-grit polish for a clean look and sharp ball reaction. The pearl reactive resin coverstock allows the ball to hook with subtlety. Pyramid Path Rising Bowling Balls are versatile with multiple drilling options, allowing you to tailor your ball to your skillset and needs. CHECK ON AMAZON Storm Phaze III – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Hybrid reactive coverstock Available in 12 to 16 pounds weight range Velocity symmetric core Suitable for all oil conditions Grapevine scented bowling ball The Storm Phaze III captures the best of bowling ball tech to give you a superb game experience. The Phaze III is wrapped in a hybrid reactive cover with a 1500-grit polished finish. It features the fast-revving Velocity symmetric core which powers the ball down the lane and saves up energy for where you need it without causing over-reaction. The ball is a great go-to for a variety of bowling styles and oil patterns. Although not as important as its performance, the grapevine scent is all the rave amongst reviewers. CHECK ON AMAZON Hammer Black Widow 2.0 – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Solid reactive coverstock Available in 12 to 16-pound weight range Ideal ball for medium to heavy oil conditions Hammer Black Widow 2.0 comes with a two-year ball warranty This matte-finish high-performance bowling ball features a solid reactive coverstock, showcasing the original black and red colors. This ball provides optimal traction on medium to heavy oil conditions, producing continuous ball motion which gives a lot of angles. The asymmetric gas mask core is wrapped in a carbon fiber outer layer providing power and durability. The Hammer Black Widow 2.0 is recommended for more experienced bowlers. CHECK ON AMAZON KR Clear Red Rose 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Polyester coverstock with high gloss polish Clear with large red rose design Performs best on dry lane conditions Available in a 14-pound weight only Although more of a novelty than a high-performance ball, KR’s Clear Red Rose bowling ball is what every bowler has wanted since Big Ern revealed his custom ball in the movie Kingpin. Due to the design of the ball, it only comes in a 14-pound weight but looks amazing in action. The ball performs best in dry lane conditions. The polyester coverstock is durable and less porous than other coverstock materials, resulting in low ball-lane friction. CHECK ON AMAZON Storm IQ Tour Emerald 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in 14, 15, and 16 pounds Pearl reactive coverstock Medium flare potential Melon mint scent Comes with a one-year ball warranty The Storm IQ Tour Emerald features the perfect balance of mid-lane control and backend hook. It has an excellent average 5-star rating from users with a C3 centripetal control core that provides a smooth change of direction downline. The pearl reactive coverstock has a 1500-grit finish and does not come predrilled, allowing you to customize the ball to your style and needs. The dark green sphere looks great in action and has a melon mint scent. CHECK ON AMAZON Motiv Venom Shock 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Solid reactive coverstock with 4000 grit sanded factory finish Gear symmetrical core Available in 12 to 16-pound weight range The Motiv Venom Shock bowling ball comes in a marbled purple only with bright orange and green accents which pop beautifully on the lane Medium-low flare potential Best for light to medium oil conditions The Motiv Venom Shock is a versatile advanced-performance bowling ball for low-speed and high-speed bowlers alike. With a steady down-lane motion, it builds energy and transfers through the pins well, remaining consistently reactive across a wide variety of oil patterns. While Motiv Venom Shock doesn’t have extreme features, it is consistent and simply does a lot of things well, making it an excellent addition to your bowling kit. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Bowling Ball Buying Guide Whether you are new to bowling or just buying your own ball for the first time, it may be tempting to pick the most stylish ball off the shelf. However, this ball-buying tactic will not get your game very far. Choosing the right bowling ball can make a significant difference to your game. There are many specifications and manufacturing details that need to be considered when choosing the best bowling ball for you. Its color is unfortunately not as important. So instead of just grabbing a big shiny ball off the shelf, we’ve put together everything you need to consider when choosing the best bowling ball to help you get a big shiny trophy instead. How to choose a bowling ball Every detail of your new bowling ball is going to play an important role in how it performs when it leaves your hands. Here are the things to consider when buying a bowling ball: Weight The most important consideration when choosing a bowling ball is the weight. One of the best ways to select the ball weight is to calculate 1 pound for every 10 pounds of body weight. Therefore, if you weigh around 120 pounds, you will choose a ball in the range of 12-13 pounds. This allows you to control the ball well without tiring too quickly. Test the weight you have chosen by having someone pass you the ball when stretching out your arm. This will determine if the ball is too heavy. When the ball is placed in your hands, it should not pull you off balance. If it does, it will be too heavy for you to control. In the same way, a ball that is too light will be hard to bowl straight or control effectively. If you are buying a ball for someone else and are not sure of their weight, you can make a rough estimation by age. Bowling balls can weigh anywhere between 6 to 16 pounds. Lighter balls weighing between 6 to 10 pounds are generally designed for children while 11-14 pound balls are suitable for teenagers. Adult females and senior players in general use 12-14 pound balls, while adult males use 15-16 pound balls, with the heaviest balls at 16 pounds being the maximum weight allowed in professional bowling. Coverstock The ball's coverstock, or shell, can be made from polyester, urethane, or reactive resin primary materials which affect the surface texture, hardness, and oil absorption. Here is a brief description of each coverstock type. Polyester Polyester or plastic coverstock is very durable and common in beginner balls. The smooth surface is less porous than other coverstock materials, results in low ball-lane friction, and has a low hook potential meaning it will go fairly straight. Urethane Urethane is used by beginners, intermediate, and professionals as it creates a lot of friction between the lane and the ball. It is easier to curve with a moderate hook potential. Although a little bit more expensive than other options, it is a good option for players who try to hit the pins from an angle. However, with more friction, you do trade-off some control which can be tricky on lanes with a lot of oil. Professional bowlers usually have more than one type of ball to compensate for varying lane conditions. Reactive resin Reactive resin balls are expensive but hook very well and are common in professional-grade bowling balls. They offer the most ball-lane friction and come in three types namely solid, pearl, and hybrid. The solid option offers an even rolling experience with a little more friction on oily lanes. The pearl reactive resin coverstock is not as reactive as the solid option. It still allows the ball to hook but with more subtlety. The hybrid option is a combination of pearl and solid reactive coverstocks. Cores A bowling ball can have a pancake, symmetrical, or asymmetrical core which will, amongst other factors, determine where you can drill finger holes. Pancake core Pancake core balls are easier to control down the lane with little technique adjustment required. They tend to stay straight for a smooth rolling experience which is ideal for beginners. Symmetrical core A bowling ball with an asymmetrical core is a little more advanced and is found in most bowling balls. Since it is balanced, you have more even control. Asymmetrical core Although most people prefer using a symmetrical core ball, an asymmetrical core allows you to create a more angular motion. This is beneficial if you need an angle to hit the pins. USBC approved Most recently manufactured bowling balls are USBC approved, which means that the weight is accurate, the ball is balanced, and you can use it for professional competitions. If you are not sure whether your ball is USBC approved, you can take it to a bowling shop to check the necessary aspects. Holes Bowling balls are usually purchased solid and require the holes to be drilled as per your specifications. This should be done at a bowling shop that can do it professionally using the correct measurements and understanding the geometry of the bowling ball. Additional considerations when choosing a bowling ball Additional brand logos on your bowling ball can sometimes result in a price spike without any real benefits. If you are budget-conscious, shop around. Once you have your ball ready, ensure to take good care of it by keeping it in a suitable protective bag and using the right cleaning products. The bowling balls in our list offer excellent value for money, so make sure to check those out too. | |||||||||||||||||||
7 | 6 | https://www.si.com/review/boxing-glove/ | Becoming a good boxer is all about putting in the required number of training hours and pushing yourself to the limit. However, without the right pair of boxing gloves, you are likely to sustain an injury or strain your hands and miss the opportunity to learn the proper punching techniques. Choosing the right pair of gloves can be tough, as there are many factors you must consider before settling on a pair. To help you decide, we have listed below our top picks of the finest boxing gloves of 2023. These ones are made with high-quality material, have durable construction, provide sufficient padding for optimal hand and wrist protection, and are available in various sizes so you can find the best fit. After careful consideration of numerous boxing gloves, we have chosen the following seven for this list because they: Offer maximum shock absorption Are durable and long-lasting Have snug yet comfortable wrist straps | Unparalleled Boxing Gloves Of 2023 Reviewed in Detail Everlast Pro Style Training Gloves – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 12oz size Made of faux leather material Two-layer foam These professional-style gloves are designed to provide the optimum punching experience with a shape that seamlessly contours to your fist. The dual-layer foam padding has sufficient density to provide exceptional shock absorption, preventing the onset of hand fatigue. You can learn and execute professional punching techniques with these boxing gloves, as all sides are fully padded including the front, back, and wrist. The synthetic leather material used to make these gloves ensures long-lasting durability. The gloves feature a hook-and-loop closing mechanism that makes them very easy to wear and take off. Considering the price, these gloves offer great value for money as they are likely to hold up even after hundreds of training sessions. BUY ON AMAZON Elite Sports 2021 Pro Boxing Gloves – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 8 oz boxing gloves for kids Velcro support for excellent wrist protection 3D cooling mesh The high-quality PU leather material used to make these boxing gloves keeps them lightweight while providing enhanced durability. The gloves have a unique structure that adjusts to the shape of your hands, allowing for a more comfortable and powerful punching experience. These gloves are available in around ten color options, so you can choose the pair that best matches your preference. The hook and loop closure makes these gloves very easy to wear and take off. In addition to the foam padding, these gloves also feature a triple-density gel that does a brilliant job of cushioning your hands to prevent strain or injury. The velcro wrist strap is easy to open and close and is also stretchable so it keeps the wrist stable and protected. BUY ON AMAZON Venum Contender Boxing Glove – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in multiple sizes ranging from 8 oz to 16 oz Hook and loop closure style Made of high-quality and durable synthetic material The top-quality synthetic leather material used in these boxing gloves ensures enhanced durability, while the high-density foam padding provides exceptional shock absorption so you can practice your punches without feeling any noticeable discomfort. The slightly curved anatomical shape of these boxing gloves allows you to indulge in any kind of versatile striking training and it promotes adherence to proper punching techniques. These gloves are suitable for use by both beginner and advanced players. You have the option to choose among two color variants, so you can pick one that suits your style. The triple-density foam provides excellent protection to your hands, while the large velcro closure delivers a perfect fit in addition to wrist protection for boxers who like to indulge in intense training sessions. BUY ON AMAZON Liberlupus Boxing Gloves – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in sizes from 10oz to 16oz Made of premium synthetic material Breathable nylon interior lining There are multiple layers of padding in these boxing gloves that provide matchless shock absorption to ensure your hands remain well-protected throughout the practice session or an actual match. The ultra-resilient synthetic leather covering on these boxing gloves provides long-lasting durability and makes the gloves very easy to clean with a damp cloth. The wrist strap securely grips your wrist with an adjustable hook-and-loop closure to ensure the gloves are easy to wear and take off and remain fixed in position. But perhaps the most noteworthy is the breathable mesh nylon lining on the inside of the gloves that repels moisture to keep your hands feeling cool, dry, and comfortable. BUY ON AMAZON Sanabul Essential Gloves 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in multiple color options 8 oz to 16 oz sizes available Gel-infused for impeccable shock absorption The snug fit of these boxing gloves delivers excellent protection to your hands, while the vivid color options allow you to pick a pair that best matches your style. The gloves are designed to be used by a boxer of any skill level, from beginner to advanced. The durable engineered leather material used in these boxing gloves can easily withstand high-intensity punching without showing any noticeable signs of wear and tear. The gloves are intelligently gel-infused to absorb shocks so you can feel comfortable during the practice session and punch as hard as you can without feeling any undeserved pain. The straps also provide enhanced protection to your wrist, in addition to delivering a snug fit. BUY ON AMAZON Trideer Pro Grade Boxing Gloves 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Training gloves available in sizes 8 oz to 16 oz Durable cover made of synthetic leather material Hook and loop wrist strap These boxing gloves are remarkably breathable as they feature a mesh lining to keep your hands cool and dry and to prevent sweat and odor from building up inside the gloves. The synthetic leather covering provides long-lasting durability, so these gloves are bound to last you for hundreds of practice sessions. The wrist strap on this pair of boxing gloves fully wraps around your wrists to keep them stable for enhanced safety and to provide a snug fit to the user. The hook-and-loop closure is also very easy to operate, making it super convenient to wear and take off the gloves. The innovative design of the gloves ensures your fist can close properly, allowing you to deliver high-impact punches every time. BUY ON AMAZON FIGHTR Boxing Gloves 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in three color variants Made with high-quality PU leather material Breathable material and well-ventilated design With a stability-enhancing design, these boxing gloves are made while keeping your safety in mind. The excellent combination of padding and design provides plenty of support to your hands with adequate shock absorption and keeps your wrists stable to minimize the risk of injury. These boxing gloves use top-quality PU leather material with strong stitching, providing sufficient durability to withstand high-impact punches for years without showing blatant signs of wear and tear. The gloves have an ergonomic design with a super-soft inner lining, so they feel very comfortable to wear. There is adequate padding on all parts of the gloves to ensure your hands and wrists remain well-protected, while the material is very breathable to prevent the buildup of sweat and odor inside the gloves. BUY ON AMAZON | Buying Guide: Boxing Gloves There is little doubt that boxing is a very tough sport, but it is also very rewarding. The thrill and excitement you get to experience as a boxer are unparalleled. Although there are many skills that you must master to become a good boxer, perhaps the most important one is learning how to throw a powerful punch. After all, the more powerful your punches, the quicker you can knock out your opponent. To ensure your punches are top-notch, you need a good pair of boxing gloves. Boxing gloves are designed to provide sufficient cushioning to your hands so you can throw high-impact punches without injuring them. The quality of the gloves you choose can have a major impact on the quality of your practice sessions. If you practice with ill-fitting and uncomfortable gloves, there is a good chance you will have a low-quality practice session due to discomfort and muscle aches. It is imperative that you get the best boxing gloves out there, but choosing a pair from among a sea of brands can be tough. However, if you know exactly what you want, it can become easier for you to choose. What Makes for a Great Pair of Boxing Gloves Here are a few factors that you must consider when shopping for boxing gloves. Durable outer layer Let’s start with the outer layer of the gloves. This layer is usually made of faux leather material, as real leather can be very expensive to procure and will have a significant impact on the price of the gloves. Faux leather provides sufficient durability and can maintain its form even if you practice high-impact punches every day for months. Also, make sure that the gloves have strong stitching so they will not come apart during use. In addition to durability, a faux leather outer is also easy to maintain. All they require to clean is a damp cloth that you can use to simply rub off any excess dirt and dust. Sufficient padding Padding is perhaps the most important component of boxing gloves, as it is this portion of the gloves that prevents your hands from sustaining injuries. You will be throwing some really powerful punches, hence you need at least a triple-layered foam padding to cushion the blows every time. Some gloves also feature gel-infused padding for some extra cushioning, although beginner-level players might not require such advanced padding so they are better off opting for gloves with non-gel padding. Comfortable inner lining The inner lining must be comfortable and skin-friendly, as it will remain in constant contact with your skin. An uncomfortable lining can cause friction, creating noticeable discomfort for the boxer. You must ensure that the gloves you choose offer a soft inner lining. Breathability It is very important that you air out your boxing gloves every time after use to prevent the buildup of sweat and odor inside. Luckily, some brands have started offering gloves that feature a mesh layer to quickly dispel sweat and prevent odor from building up inside the gloves. If the gloves offer proper breathability, they also feel more comfortable to wear as they keep your hands cool and sufficiently dry throughout the practice session or boxing match. Pre-curved design Although not all gloves offer this, there are many gloves on the market that are offering a pre-curved shape so the gloves fit perfectly over your hands and remain fixed in position so you can deliver accurate and powerful punches. This ergonomic shape of the gloves makes them feel like an extension of your arm, potentially resulting in superior boxing performance. Factors to Consider When Choosing Boxing Gloves Adequate wrist support Your gloves are not only meant to protect your hands but also your wrists against impact damage. When you make a hit, the shockwaves travel through your hand and wrist up to your arm and shoulder. While these shockwaves are easy for the arm and shoulder to handle, your wrist is at the forefront and must remain stable to minimize the risk of injury. A good pair of boxing gloves will provide adequate wrist support by having a hook-and-loop closure that can be adjusted to provide a secure fit that keeps your wrist perfectly stable during punches. Also, make sure the gloves provide some padding in this strap to provide an additional layer of protection to your wrists. Closing mechanism Most boxing gloves usually have a hook-and-loop strap closure that can be adjusted to fit most users. Also, this type of closing system is the most user-friendly, requiring only one hand to open and close and allowing you to wear the gloves without any assistance. Some gloves also come with a velcro strap that makes them very easy to use. Colors Although the color of your boxing gloves is a personal choice, do remember that the color you choose will have an impact on your persona as a fighter. You should choose a color that best matches your fighting style. For example, if you are an aggressive fighter, then colors like red or yellow/golden are good colors to choose as they are a bit threatening, while more strategic and agile fighters are better off choosing cooler/lighter colors like blue or orange. Of course, this is not the most important factor to consider, but it’s a choice you must make. Boxing Gloves Price Range The price of boxing gloves does vary with the size you choose, the larger sizes being more expensive than smaller ones. A solid pair of gloves for boxing should cost anywhere between $25-$35, although you can find more expensive or cheaper options in the market. Usually, price is not a good indicator of quality when it comes to boxing gloves, so you must evaluate gloves on non-price factors. | |||||||||||||||||||
8 | 7 | https://www.si.com/review/football-glove/ | Football is arguably the most popular sport in the U.S. From pee-wee to the NFL, no sport in America captures our interest quite like the intense plays and rivalries of football. Playing football requires a lot of different, specialty equipment. While football gloves are not a requirement for simple, backyard games, most football players use them to either protect their hands or make gripping and catching the ball easier. Finding the right pair of gloves is a challenge for every player, as some want padding (lineman) and others want grip (wide receiver). We've put together this guide to help you find the right gloves at the right price. | Detailing the Top Football Gloves of 2022 Seibertron Receiver Gloves – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The Seibertron Pro 3.0 ultra-stick football gloves have several features that push them towards the top of our list. They have a rubbery texture along the palm and fingertips for excellent grip. These gloves offer ultra grip and come in a range of sizes, from teens to adults. Like most receiver style gloves, they have sticky palms for maximum grip in harsh, wet weather. We’d consider these budget football gloves with lesser quality material and stitching, but if you’re in a pinch and need a pair of gloves for the rest of the season, these are a good option. PROS Withstands harsh weather Machine washable Excellent grip on the palms and fingers CONS As with any pair of football gloves, they are not as reliable when they’re wet CHECK ON AMAZON Under Armour Football Gloves – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features These gloves come with 3D print overlays for extra grip and support. Under Armour’s “GlueGrip” ensures longer-lasting stickiness, even in wet weather. Another great feature is the adjustable straps; they let you achieve a custom tight fit during the game. Under Armour’s gloves are made of high-quality, ultra-durable material that offers breathability to your fingers. Available in a number of sizes and colors, these gloves are ideal for any receiver that wants enhanced grip of the ball. Plus, they have the best style. PROS Comfortable and functional Provides sufficient ventilation for your palms Sizes range from x-small to x-large CONS The fit around the fingers is slightly smaller than expected CHECK ON AMAZON Cutters Game Day Football Gloves – Classic Pick 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The Cutters Game Day football glove has a palm made of silicone, which protects the hands and provides added grip. These lineman style football gloves offer ventilation and a skin-tight fit which increases comfort. The gloves are machine washable and low maintenance. Cutters is a name that brings back memories for old-school football fans as they were often the preferred brand for every position. Great in both wet and dry conditions, cutters are NHFS and NCAA approved. PROS Comfortable and perfect fit Breathable to keep sweat from building up A known name that specializes in football gloves CONS May need to be replaced after a month of use CHECK ON AMAZON Wilson NFL Football Glove – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The Wilson NFL football gloves come with a snug fit for most sizes due to the extra stretchy material used in production; the silicon palm provides a strong grip, and the poly lycra backhand allows for both breathability and flexibility. Wilson is a known sporting goods brand that builds the official football used in the NFL. These gloves are great for both youth football and NFL fanatics who want to sport their favorite team. The stretch-fit allows the gloves to expand as needed to provide a clean fit. PROS Stretchy and flexible All 32 NFL teams are represented CONS Users report a heavy weight to the gloves CHECK ON AMAZON Nike Vapor Football Glove 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features These Nike gloves come with a “magnigrip” palm that maximizes stickiness and easier ball security; they are made with a material that offers adequate ventilation for your fingers, too. The gloves also come with adjustable cuffs for a perfect fit and allow for thumb and finger flexibility. Nike’s Vapor football gloves are one of the most popular gloves on the market; turn on a college or pro game and we guarantee you’ll see someone wearing a pair! These gloves are ideal for skill positions or mobile quarterbacks with a lightweight, good breathability, and sticky surface. PROS Long-lasting gloves Easy to wash Comfortable gloves with a snug fit CONS As is typical of all Nike products, the gloves seem to run small CHECK ON AMAZON Adidas Adifast Football Gloves 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The Adidas Adifast football glove has a griptack palm that offers a strong fit in both wet and dry conditions. The material provides adequate support to the hand, and thanks to the adjustable rubber cuffs, they have a custom fit. Adidas designed these gloves with two things in mind: performance and a clean style. Being all white, the gloves give a pop to anyone’s gameday attire. With extra padding on the back and fabric made to keep your fingers cool, these are an excellent option for any position on the field. PROS Excellent grip in all weather conditions Adidas “Climalite” keep hands dry We love the look of the gloves CONS Does not offer a lot of finger ventilation CHECK ON AMAZON EliteTek Men’s Football Glove 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features EliteTek’s football gloves come with just enough grip to enhance your performance in all weather conditions. They are tightfitting, lightweight, and have pores that allow air to go through. Unlike any of the aforementioned gloves, these give you the opportunity to customize your number on the wrist to ensure there are no mix-ups. Last but not least are the EliteTek football gloves. These gloves come in various colors and sizes that provide an amazing skin-tight feel; they are also lightweight and come with enough padding so that all you have to do is focus on the game before you. PROS Great fit with a tacky grip Suitable to any football position A great budget pair of football gloves CONS Lower durability than many others CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer's Guide: Elite Football Gloves Football gloves are an important piece of equipment when practicing and playing the game. Seeing that there is a large variety of gloves available, choosing the right one isn't necessarily the most simple task. This buying guide lists out a couple of tips to make the whole process much easier for yourself so that you can spend more time on the field and less time online. Types of Football Gloves The first part of buying the right kind of gloves is making sure they are relevant to your position on the field. There are two basic types of football gloves to choose from here: Receiver/skill position gloves These gloves are specifically made for receivers, running backs, and defensive backs to help them hold and grip the ball better. They are designed to be lightweight and flexible with some extra grip around the fingers and thumb with some padding on the back. Lineman gloves These gloves are made for offensive and defensive linemen (we'll include linebackers here, too) who take on more of a "trench warfare" than any other position. For this reason, their gloves are built to be heavyweight so as to withstand hits and protect their hands from helmets, cleats, and 300-pound men. The gloves are made of more durable materials with extra padding on the palm and backhand. Also, there are rigid frames, finger stays, and no palm tackiness since the grip isn't necessarily important for the bigger guys. Why Do You Need Football Gloves? Enhanced performance Football gloves give you an added advantage on the field by promoting your grip on the ball as you try to catch or run. Protection Football is a violent sport. Every position on the field uses their hands in some capacity (okay, not the kicker, but you know what we mean) and protection from other players and the elements is an important, necessary aspect of preparation. Protecting your hands from the dangers associated with your position is something that can't be stressed enough! Confidence Wearing gloves gives you a certain amount of confidence as you step on the field. Whether you believe they give you an edge in the game or you like to look the part, it doesn't matter to us. What Should You Look Out for When Getting Gloves? Size A perfect fit is very important when getting football gloves. If the gloves are too big, you can lose control of them and your objective. If they are too small the gloves can affect your blood circulation and slow your response time. Hence, the need to know what size of hand you have. Most football gloves come in sizes that are a tad smaller than normal, so it is advisable to purchase a size slightly larger than yours. Trying gloves on before purchase is never a bad idea! Ventilation Because of the heavy texture and tight fit of gloves your palms may have the tendency to sweat and become clammy when worn for an extended period of time. To avoid this, you need a glove with pores or mesh between the fingers and around the back to promote airflow and keep your hands cool and dry. Padding There are many football injuries that can occur in the fingers, and it is important to protect them from hits by getting a glove that offers some sort of flexible padding in the backhand and finger areas. These paddings can cushion the impact of hits and keep your fingers safe. Material Football gloves should be made of high-quality materials that ensure their durability over several weeks of practice and games. In harsh weather conditions such as extreme cold, the materials should provide enough warmth; in warm weather, they should provide enough ventilation. Comfort Whatever glove you choose, if it doesn’t offer a manageable level of comfort, it should be replaced. The glove should be soft on your skin and should not be so thick that you cannot feel the ball. It should feel like a second skin and allow you the ability to maneuver your fingers around inside them. For linemen and linebackers, the gloves shouldn't be so heavy that they weigh down your hands since blocking is the most important part of being a lineman. Washable Gloves should not require a lot of maintenance or upkeep. A good pair of football gloves should be machine washable and quick to dry. How Much Do Football Gloves Cost? Usually, sports gear isn't cheap, especially if you are looking for high-quality equipment that will last you for a long period of time. This applies to football gloves as well. The price varies based on brand quality and type. Here is a breakdown of prices to help you manage your budget: Expensive Football gloves within this price range would span between $60-$100. Although these prices are high, you can be sure to get a glove made of high-quality materials that will last you for seasons. Mid-range The bulk of football gloves are in this category and sit around the $35-$60 price range. They are high-quality, durable, and will get the job done for at least one season of gameplay. Inexpensive Football gloves within this category are affordable, but their quality cannot necessarily be vouched for at the $15-$35 range. If you're buying for a child that may outgrow your gloves soon, we advise you shop in this range. | |||||||||||||||||||
9 | 8 | https://www.si.com/review/best-mini-basketball-hoop/ | When it comes to choosing the right indoor hoop, there are some subtleties to be on the lookout for to ensure it fits the needs of the intended space. So let’s drive to the paint and find the best indoor basketball hoop in 2022 for you. | Best Mini Basketball Hoops Reviewed In 2022 RAMgoal Indoor Mini Basketball Hoop – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This hoop mounts to the wall via two studs that are 16 inches apart. It has an adjustable height that can move vertically up to 13 inches. The backboard measures 24 by 16 with a 9 inch diameter breakaway rim. PROS Includes a 5 inch synthetic leather mini basketball The hoop is breakaway to prevent the rim from whipping or bending Backboard made from shatter resilient acrylic CONS Backboard may loosen from the frame after significant use The installation can be unruly depending on mount positioning Basketball included is small compared to competitive options CHECK ON AMAZON JustInTymeSports Mini Basketball Hoop – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This hoop is wall mountable via steel bracketed studs separated by 16 inches. It is equipped with a half inch solid steel rim with a 12 inch diameter and breakaway rim spring. The distance from the wall to the end of the rim is 22.5 inches and it includes a rubber basketball. PROS Breakaway hoop offers additional safety when dunking Comes in four different sizing options to better match its intended space Two stud brackets may prevent the backboard from tilting or shifting CONS The rubber ball arrives deflated and will need a pump On the more expensive end of the market Spring on the breakaway rim may be less durable than the rest of the hoop CHECK ON AMAZON Meland Indoor Mini Basketball Hoop – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This door mounted basketball hoop is 11.8 by 15.7 inches with an 8.3 inch hoop and includes three 5.5 inch rubber basketball. The backboard is shatter-resistant and the balls have thick shock-proof sponge strips to prevent damage to walls and doors. PROS Includes an air pump for the basketballs Rim has a bounce back design to offer a more authentic dunking experience Door mounting can allow for easier transport than wall mounted options CONS Sizing of the ball and rim may make shots more difficult to make than comparable options Might be less sturdy than wall mounted competitors CHECK ON AMAZON Lanos Basketball Electronic Hoop Shot – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This pair of basketball hoops comes with six balls for one-on-one arcade style shooting. The frame is made of 1.5 inch diameter powder-coated steel tubing powder-coated to better prevent rust and chipping. The dimensions are 91 inches long by 51 inches wide by 90 inches high. PROS Includes classic basketball gaming features like “Horse” and “Around the World” It’s foldable which can make for easier storage Assembly instructions with video available online CONS May not be compatible in tighter spaces Assembly may take longer than non-arcade style hoops Fabric might sag from wear over time CHECK ON AMAZON Little Tikes EasyScore Basketball Set 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This basketball hoop is adjustable from 2 feet to 4 feet and has a base that can be weighed down via sand or water. The oversized rim can make it easier for young athletes to make their shots and has a drop-down mechanism to provide better safety when performing dunks. PROS Adjustable height can allow for prolonged use even as kids grow taller The base can be drained making for potentially easier transport Includes a soft basketball and user manual CONS May acquire a crooked lean at its tallest adjustment Drop-down mechanism for the rim may lose stiffness over time and drop more frequently Potentially uneven base if used on soft services like carpet CHECK ON AMAZON | Indoor Basketball Hoop Buying Guide Getting one of the best indoor basketball hoops can be a game-changer. It doesn't matter if you are trying to practice some free throws in your spare time or training to become an expert; these hoops are pretty helpful. With the decision to buy a basketball hoop comes a couple of questions. You need to consider a few things before you buy your ring. In this guide, we will explore a few helpful tips to help you make the best choice. What Are the Different Types of Hoops? Once you have established that you want to get an indoor basketball hoop, you should know the types of hoop available to you out there. Note that each type of hoop has its unique advantages and is made for different categories of players. Portable This hoop is a stand-alone unit that comes with wheels to portability when moving them around. These hoops come designed with bases that range in capacity and size that is between 27 and 42 gallons. Many of such hoops are made with height adjustability settings, making portable hoops a unique option for parents and guardians who have younger players growing. In-Ground This type of hoop comes fastened to the ground with cement, thus making them perfect for families who intend to use the ring for a long time. In-ground hoops are designed with an adjustable height setting which helps it accommodate players of different skill levels and sizes, and they are durable and stable. Mounted The mounted hoops are a hoop and backboard mounted on a structure such as the exterior wall of your house. Such hoops give you superior stability while letting you create a court with limited room. Several mounted hoops are made with a fixed height, although you can get one with adjustable height. Factors to Consider Before Buying an Indoor Basketball Hoop Here are a few things you should consider before you purchase and install an indoor basketball hoop. Material used Basketball hoops are made of different materials makes. The moment you search it up on the internet or enter a shop, you will find various options available to you. But knowing the best material for you is essential. The best choice of hoop is one made using a steel frame. In case it is non-elastic or plastic, it is bound to break off with ease. The best nets are those made using nylon and are properly knitted without loose ends. The backboard should also be heavy-duty and well manufactured to carry the weight of the nylon net and rim. Durability Regardless of the material used in making the hoop, note that the more expensive products should be of more excellent quality than the rest. Buying a good quality material will help boost the hoop's lifespan. There is a chance that you have experienced complaints about the rim breaking off from its attachment point with the backboard. Sometimes the backboard may split into two pieces after a few months. When all these happen, it makes the product nearly useless. Investing in a top-quality hoop will save you many stress and resources in the long run. Size Before you buy an indoor hoop, you need to consider where you intend to mount it. If you want to buy one for home use in your room, you should consider how large your room is. Is your room big enough to accommodate a hoop set with a base and pole? There are mini hoop sets specially designed for your mini room, although the size does not indicate its quality. Such mini hoop units come with unique playability and quality. Mini hoops also help save space as well. Method of installation Assembling the hoop is not difficult as all you need to do is fix the net in the rim and then connect the edge to the backboard. Also, many of the hoops often come with the required tools for installation and assembling. It shouldn't take you more than 15 minutes to assemble a proper hoop. Before you pay for the hoop, you need to check whether the package comes with all the required hardware and the necessary guidelines. Breakaway rim One other factor to consider is whether the hoop you are purchasing comes with a breakaway rim. The compression breakaway edge comes with a spring that comes screwed to the backboard. Usually, a snap-back rim is made to produce better performance than others. With this type of rim, you will be able to shoot and slam dunk without bothering about incurring injuries. How Much Does An Indoor Basketball Hoop Cost? A basketball hoop's cost depends on what you intend to use it for. The high-end hoops will give you better performance. However, if you are operating on a low budget, you should consider getting an affordable hoop. If you want a pretty reasonable hoop, a budget of around 50 dollars should suffice. If you aim for an expensive basketball hoop with high quality, you should budget about $200. Final Thoughts An indoor basketball hoop can serve as the perfect boredom killer. With the right hoop, you can have fun, exercise while sharpening your basketball skills. Thus, choosing the right hoop is very important. The tips in this guide will make the selection process more manageable if properly adhered to. | |||||||||||||||||||
10 | 9 | https://www.si.com/review/best-heavy-bag/ | If you are on the market for the highest-rated heavy bags in 2022, this guide is for you. Whether you are a novice or experienced boxer, fighter, or mixed martial artist, you will always have to use a heavy bag for your training. Heavy bags are exceptionally versatile to a host of combat sports and allow you to improve your form and technique to unleash all your striking power without having to hold back like you would with a sparring partner. Heavy bags are typically suspended from a ceiling and are exactly what you first picture when you think of a punching bag. Heavy bags also come with a wide variety of weight specifications (typically between 20-200 lbs.), unlike other combat bags with fixed weights. The ideal heavy bag should be exceptionally durable to survive the heaviest punches and kicks. It should also absorb and distribute the strike force safely, be stylish, easy to install, and not cost a fortune. We have done the hard work for you and compiled a list of the finest heavy bags that check all these boxes and some more. Our list also features heavy bags with different profiles and specifications to suit different fighters and their needs. Our team has selected these premium bags because of the following features: They have quick rebound speeds They come with the necessary accessories for getting started They are built to last | Hear From the Expert The heavy bag is going to depend on what you are practicing and your fighting style. The heavyweights are usually going to work on their punch, while I was always working on my speed. The lighter bags come back towards you so you need to move and work on your feet; these bags are also going to naturally be lighter, with less compact sand. A heavier, thicker bag is going to be more compact and stable as you work on your punch strength (not so compact that you hurt yourself, keep that in mind). There are bags that are more like the size of a human and others that are smaller, giving you something like a target. A lot of what you’re going to look for in both gear and training products depend on how you fight and your weight class. Heavy bags are no different! By Boyd "The Rainmaker" Melson author-image Comparing The Top Heavy Bags of 2022 FITVEN Freestanding Heavy Bag – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 10-mm thick foam for shock absorption 12 strong suction cups to keep the heavy bag in place Tear-resistant PU leather for durability The springs can be removed for less bounce The FITVEN heavy bag kit comes as a freestanding unit and weighs 200 pounds, excellent for trainers of all experience levels. This freestanding heavy bag kit is an ideal choice for fitness spaces with no suspension platforms. The heavy bag is 70 inches tall and stands on a quick-rebound base supported by springs and a suction base for balance. It features multi-layer construction for better balance, durability, and shock absorption. The base can be filled with sand for sturdiness so that you can box with confidence. It also comes with a pair of 10mm gloves for a complete boxing experience. CHECK ON AMAZON Sfeexun Punching Heavy Bag – Best Value Heavy Bag 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Complete with all punching and setup accessories Zippered closure for convenient assembly Thick PU leather construction Want to get more bang for your buck? Then this heavy bag set made with soft synthetic leather is right for you. The exceptionally budget-friendly punching bag comes empty with all the accessories you need for easy assembly. The Sfeexun heavy bag set comes as an empty bag with a stylish camo green and black finish. Its top zipper closure makes the heavy bag easy to fill, and the final weight will depend on what material you use to fill it. The bag itself comes with a three-layer oxford cloth construction and reinforcements. The set includes a pair of punching gloves, four exercise accessories, and suspension chains, so you’ll have everything you need to start your training right away. CHECK ON AMAZON Everlast Heavy Bag – Best for Martial Arts 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Premium synthetic leather provides excellent shock absorbency Heavy-duty nylon straps for durability Easy to set up as the bag comes pre-filled Need a niche-specific heavy bag? This is it. The Everlast heavy bag features a pre-filled synthetic leather bag with reinforced webbing for durability. This heavy bag is best suited to martial artists who want to build endurance and is built to survive unrelenting punches and kicks. At the core of this heavy bag is a blend of sanitized synthetic and natural fibers that provide excellent shock absorbance while its heavy-duty nylon straps hold up the bag nicely. The 31-inch long 12.75-inch wide heavy bag comes with a black, white, and yellow finish. CHECK ON AMAZON LastWorld Punching Heavy Bag – Best Heavy Bag on a Budget 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The 48-inch bag comes with suspension chains Zippered top for easy filling Made of heavy-duty canvas Shopping for a heavy bag on a budget? Then this is the best pick for you. LastWorld’s heavy bag comes in two sizes and is excellent for training boxers. With a bright cream and black finish, this heavy bag is shipped unfilled and weighs 3.1 pounds. The empty canvas bag can be filled with any material of your choice and hung from the suspension chains that come with the 48-inch version. It is excellent for boxing and also features heavy-duty suspension hooks for a solid hold. Unfortunately, the smaller 33-inch bag doesn’t come with any chains. CHECK ON AMAZON RDX Training Heavy Bag – Most Versatile Heavy Bag 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The bottom hook can be linked to a floor anchor to prevent swinging It comes with a host of accessories for easy setup It is made of non-tear Maya hide leather This complete heavy bag set comes with everything you’ll need right out of the box for quick installation. The non-tear Maya hide leather is made to endure heavy blows and kicks without losing its structural integrity. The RDX heavy bag weighs 18-20 kg and can be filled to a maximum weight of 50 kg. It is filled with gel foam padding for good shock absorbance and even force distribution. The set includes a host of accessories such as boxing mittens, hand wraps, steel chains, a swivel joint, jump ropes, and much, much more. It also comes with a bottom hook that can be linked to a floor anchor to prevent the bag from swinging. CHECK ON AMAZON Jayefo Sports Hanging Heavy Bag – Best Low-Profile Heavy Bag 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features PU leather shell can be cleaned easily with a wet cloth Zippered closure for easy filling Reinforced stitching offers more durability This industrial-strength punching bag is made of a heavy-duty outer shell and stainless steel chains. The manufacturer also backs up the heavy bag’s durability with a 10-year warranty. The reinforced stitching makes it an ideal low-profile option for fitness spaces so that you can throw punches freely without worrying about damaging or ripping the bag. The Jafeyo heavy bag comes as an empty 4-inch long bag that can be filled to a 70-100 lbs weight. It features a heavy-duty PU leather shell that can be cleaned easily with a wet cloth. It also has a zippered closure, reinforced harnesses, and a clip for suspension that makes it easy to install. CHECK ON AMAZON Ringside Powerhide Heavy Bag – Also Consider 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 2-inch foam liner feels soft against the skin Bottom D-ring for more stability The heavy bag comes pre-filled Many heavy bags don’t come pre-filled, but this 100-pound one does, making it ideal for both home and professional gym spaces. This heavy bag is 42 inches long and comes with the company ‘Powerhide’ shell for added durability. It includes mounting access, a suspension chain and swivel, heavy-duty clips, and a bottom D-ring for a floor anchor to prevent the bag from swinging as you punch it. The heavy bag also comes with a 2-inch foam liner to provide cushioning and prevent injuries or bruises. CHECK ON AMAZON | Buying Guide: Heavy Bags Heavy bags are the most versatile and most popular training bags used by combat sports enthusiasts. Most heavy bags come as suspended units that are hung from ceilings or brackets, but the line between heavy bags and other categories is thinning – some freestanding bags are also classified as heavy bags. However, not all heavy bags are made equal. They come in so many different types, designs, styles, weight capacities, and price ranges that the options can quickly overwhelm you. Earlier on, we gave you an outline of the best heavy bags that stand out from the rest, but it's perfectly natural for you to need a bit more help to make the right choice. In the rest of this buying guide, we will take a look at some considerations you want to make and qualities you want to see in a heavy bag. This should help you identify the most suitable heavy bag for your needs. What Are the Different Types of Heavy Bags? Heavy bags are classified into different categories based on the different types and their intended use. Based on shape Based on shape, heavy bags are classified as traditional heavy bags, banana heavy bags, teardrop heavy bags, and angled heavy bags. Traditional heavy bags Traditional or standard heavy bags are the most common heavy bags with a uniform cylindrical shape. The top, middle, and bottom are all the same diameter. They are also the most versatile and can be used for boxing, kickboxing, martial arts, Muay Thai, and more. Banana heavy bags Banana heavy bags are very long and banana-shaped. They are often suspended with their bottoms touching the ground. They are especially great for kickboxers and martial artists who want to practice low kicks. Teardrop heavy bags Teardrop heavy bags come with a teardrop shape and are usually hoisted high to help the trainer improve evasive reflex and head defense. They are great for different types of punches and can also be used for kickboxing. Angled heavy bags Angled heavy bags come with a shape that’s wide on top and tapers towards the smaller bottom. They are great for boxing-kickboxing training and for improving punching form. Based on mount Heavy bags are also classified based on the mounts as freestanding heavy bags and suspended heavy bags. Freestanding heavy bags Freestanding heavy bags are designed to stand on the floor and are used when there is no place to hang them. They are also great for martial arts to simulate a real opponent. Freestanding heavy bags usually come with the main punching bag and a standing base linked by a shock absorption joint. Many freestanding heavy bags come with a spring mechanism that swings the bag back at the user after a punch or kick. Freestanding heavy bags are typically more expensive than suspended heavy bags. Suspended heavy bags Suspended heavy bags are the most common types of heavy bags and are hung from a ceiling or top-mounted bracket. They swing naturally and are more reliable than a freestanding heavy bag. Unless a freestanding heavy bag is weighted or comes with suction cups, it is prone to falling with powerful strikes. Suspended heavy bags don’t have this flaw. What Factors Should I Consider Before Buying a Heavy Bag? Unfilled vs. pre-filled heavy bags Heavy bags either come unfilled or pre-filled. Unfilled heavy bags are the most popular and you will need to fill them yourself with the recommended material. As the bags are compact, you get to save on delivery costs. Pre-filled heavy bags, on the other hand, come with the core material already stuffed in them. They save the hassle of worrying about filling them but can attract heavy delivery costs. They are also typically more expensive. Size and weight Another factor you want to consider before buying a heavy bag is the size and weight. Heavy bags come in different sizes and weights, and your choice will depend on your intended use and the user. For boxing, it is recommended that the heavy bag is half the weight of the user. So, a trainer weighing 160lbs should use an 80lbs heavy bag for boxing-related training. There is no exact figure for martial arts, but you can expect to go heavier as the legs pack a stronger punch than the hands. Filling material The core material used to fill the heavy bag is another important factor to consider. It should be durable, easy-shifting, and should absorb and distribute the striking force safely so that you don’t get injuries. If your heavy bag doesn’t come pre-filled, never fill your heavy bag with hard materials. Sand is at the extreme for high-intensity training. Instead, think of grains, plastic bags, old clothes, cotton, etc. Included accessories You must consider the included accessories that come with any heavy bag you are considering. The ideal heavy bag should come with mounting accessories like chains, a swivel, and a bracket. It should also feature mounting clips. Some heavy bags also include a bottom clip to which a floor anchor can be attached to control its swing. And heavy bags that still go further and include boxing gloves and other exercise accessories stand at the top. How Much Do Heavy Bags Cost? Heavy bags sit between $30 for low-end standalone units and up to $400 for freestanding units that include great accessories. | |||||||||||||||||||
11 | 10 | https://www.si.com/review/ice-pack/ | Many of us have to resort to dripping ice bags made at home or a frozen pack of veggies when we need an ice pack. This is not the best decision, as a bag of frozen peas will not serve the purpose of custom-made ice packs for pain and swelling. Similarly, when in need of a cooler chiller, nothing works better than a legitimate ice pack. That is why it is important to pick the right ice pack for your needs and ensure that you're happy with all its attributes. Each circumstance calls for a specific ice pack, whether it's for pain, swelling, or keeping your food fresh. We bring you a thoroughly reviewed list of the best ice packs in 2022 to meet your specific everyday needs. Let's get started. | Top Ice Packs of 2022 Reviewed in Detail Medvice Reusable Hot and Cold Ice Pack – Best Overall Ice Pack 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This reusable hot and cold compress works as an ice pack and a hot compress to support sore muscles, aching joints, inflammation, cramps, and therapy. The gel pack comes with an adjustable band that allows full-body support and easily clamps around your back or limbs to improve circulation and relieve pain. The gel pack is easy to use. You can freeze it when you need an ice pack, and you can microwave it to turn it into a hot compress ideal for pain relief and cramps. The gel pack is made of skin-safe fabric, eliminating any risk of allergies or reactions to the skin. CHECK ON AMAZON The Coldest Knee Ice Pack – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The coldest knee wrap is designed specifically for healing from discomfort, strains, and sprains. The gel ice pack is flexible and conforms to the shape of your knee. Cold therapy is a potent and effective treatment option for many injuries and ailments. Hands-free application of ice and compression therapy helps you get back there sooner by lowering the pain and swelling associated with the injury or surgery. This ice pack has a longer shelf life and may be reused repeatedly. It makes use of the coldest webbing technology available in the market. The unique webbing enhances the transport of cold to the knee during exercise. It stays cooler for a longer time, which helps alleviate muscular discomfort. It is super flexible and offers firm support. CHECK ON AMAZON NatraCure FlexiKold Gel Ice Pack – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The FlexiKold Gel Ice Pack is a pack of two reusable cold gel packs that come with enhanced cooling and longevity to provide hundreds of ice therapy sessions. The gel remains cold for longer and provides instant relief. The elasticity of the gel allows it to conform to any body shape or part, no matter how frozen the pack is. You can use it to treat pain and swelling in your knees, shoulder, back, hips, limbs, and neck. The extra thick nylon exterior of the packs with cautious double-folded seams allows the gel pack to remain functional for a long time. CHECK ON AMAZON Magic Gel Ice Pack – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The best approach to decrease inflammation, according to spinal therapists, is to use heat and cold packs for therapy. The Magic Gel pad and strap provide targeted compression for upper and lower back problems. The gel packs are velcro-attached and curve over your belly and sides around the waist. It may be applied to the hip, the back of the body, the belly, and other areas. The neoprene is breathable, which means it won’t itch, and it may be worn directly against the skin or under clothing. If you’re recuperating from surgery, experiencing general aches and pains, or experiencing spinal or cervical discomfort, this pack and wearing a brace can help you get back on your feet faster and with less pain. CHECK ON AMAZON Thrive Reusable Gel Instant Pain Relief Ice Pack 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon We couldn’t miss the Thrive reusable ice gel pack on our list of the best ice packs. These gel ice packs are made of high-quality, durable PE vinyl that makes them long-lasting. The non-toxic gel within the pack keeps it flexible and pliable, unlike standard gel packs that become rock hard on freezing. You can use these gel packs for dozens of cold therapy sessions. The gel packs are versatile and can be used on any body part, from your back, neck, limbs, and face, treating bruises, pain, and swelling immediately. The gel packs also come with a storage bag that you can use to carry the packs when traveling, CHECK ON AMAZON Rester’s Choice Injuries Reusable Ice Pack 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon You can use Rester’s Choice Ice Pack for both cold and hot therapy. Specially made for injuries and swelling, this ice pack can freeze quickly to give you quick results and instant relief. The pads are full to the brim with gel that allows them to retain the required temperature longer. High-quality, strong binding eliminates the risk of any tears or leakage, ensuring you get the most of the product. For instant relief, the ice pack remains flexible and elastic even when it’s frozen. This allows you to wrap it around tender tissues without much trouble or pain. CHECK ON AMAZON | Ice Packs - A Comprehensive Buying Guide Choosing the right ice pack is not as easy as it sounds. Ice packs serve different purposes and may come in different shapes and sizes. You need to figure out why you need an ice pack before you can make an informed decision regarding choosing an ice pack for yourself. This buyer’s guide for the best ice packs in 2021 will help you determine the right ice pack for yourself. Why Do We Need Ice Packs? Ice packs are used for several reasons in your everyday life. The most common usage of ice packs is in medical conditions such as pain, swelling, or inflammation. A chilled ice pack or a heated gel pack can help relieve pain and reduce swelling. There are many applications of ice packs within the medical field. You can also use them on most body parts to ease discomfort and pain. The other purpose of an ice pack is to keep your drinks cool and your food fresh. Drink coolers mostly contain ice packs that retain their cold temperature and keep them cold for a long time. Ice packs also provide a cool environment for storing food to prevent it from going bad. How to Choose the Best Ice Pack Now that we know how crucial ice packs are and how many benefits we can reap from them, let's talk about choosing the right ice pack for your needs. Size The first factor to consider is the size of the ice pack. Whether you need an ice pack for pain relief or keep your picnic fresh, you will have to choose an appropriately sized ice pack. You can use smaller ice packs for your limbs, but if you need them for larger body parts like your back, your ice pack needs to be brawnier. For coolers, bigger ice packs might be more suitable than those you need for your lunch. Also, consider your storage limitations as you will have to keep the ice pack in your freezer. Material For medical use, make sure that you choose an ice pack that is rugged but pliable. This means that the ice pack should have strongly sewn seams, and the material should be soft, non-toxic, and skin-friendly. The gel should also be flexible so that even when it's frozen, it can provide you with maximum comfort. For usage with food and drinks, you should focus on a rugged material that will not give way and remain intact during travel. The gel should also be filled enough to provide maximum support. Make sure the material of the ice pack is non-toxic. Longevity It’s important to consider how long the ice pack remains effective once you start using it. You will want an ice pack that remains cold for a longer time, whether for your body or food. Go over customer reviews to find out how long-lasting the ice pack is. Frequency of usage How frequently will you be using the ice pack? Do you need it just for one-time use, or will you need it long-term? These considerations can help you find the right kind of ice pack with respective attributes for frequent use. Budget Your budget plays a great role in deciding what kind of ice pack you choose. This might be the first thing to consider when hunting for a good ice pack. All other attributes should be relative to the budget you've set. You can get a good quality ice pack for a decent amount of money since they aren't very costly. If you lean towards a cheaper option, remember the quality will reflect the value of the ice pack. | |||||||||||||||||||
12 | 11 | https://www.si.com/review/knee-brace-for-running/ | Running. A basic human activity turned sport that every track and field athlete must hone if medals and glory on the field are to be earned. It is also an excellent way to stay in shape, improve cardiovascular endurance and mental health, and strengthen body muscles. However, for all its positive effects, running can be tough on your knees, especially if you have a history of knee injuries. This is where knee braces come in. In simple terms, they are designed to protect your knees from pain and damage during physical activities. Knee braces are simple running gear, so it's no surprise that there are many types out there. In this buying guide, we'll be narrowing down the horde of options to some of the best knee braces for running in 2021, with tips on what to look out for when buying one. | What are the top running knee braces of 2021? POWERLIX Knee Brace – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features An anti-slip system featuring two silicone gel strips that keeps it in position The POWERLIX Knee Brace is sweat-absorbent Its base material is 80% Nylon and 20% spandex – an ideal combination for an elite knee brace A tight and breathable compression design that keeps the joints in position during rigorous physical activity There aren’t many compression sleeves as versatile and practical as the POWERLIX Knee Brace. This unique running gear provides exceptional knee support for knee-stressing activities like running, hiking, basketball, and weightlifting. It is also perfect for casual, everyday use. It is uniquely designed to hold the knee in place without limiting mobility, and unlike some knee braces, this one doesn’t cause any itching or discomfort. In addition, it comes in multiple colors and designs for an aesthetic touch. CHECK ON AMAZON Modvel 2-pack Knee Brace – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A material combination of spandex, nylon, and latex fiber, which is as good as it gets The Modvel 2-pack Knee Brace is produced in multiple sizes to fit a wide range of athletes and users It comes as a 2-pack for versatile functionality An ergonomic build that makes it effective when in use The Modvel 2-pack Knee Brace embodies what any ideal knee support gear should look and function like. It can be worn casually and for sporting activities like baseball, basketball, golf, and tennis. It’s also great for hiking! No matter the activity, this knee brace is sure to keep pain and knee stress at bay. It is made of soft and breathable material, making it a comfy choice for all users. In addition, this knee brace provides knee support without impeding mobility – something not all models can pull off. CHECK ON AMAZON NEENCA Professional Knee Brace – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A lightweight design for optimal movement Spring knee support technology featuring contoured patella gel pads and double-sided metal spring stabilizers for unmatched knee comfort and support An anti-slip system featuring non-slip silicone strips and super elastic fabric A high-precision 3D cutting technology that makes it a perfect fit for the 360° kneecap curves The NEENCA Professional Knee Brace stands out from the rest by featuring custom technology that makes it an ergonomic and pain-liberating choice for all athletes. It’s also designed to absorb sweat instantly and stay in position no matter the activity. It is a medical-grade knee support sleeve suitable for managing ACL and meniscus tear, joint pain, and arthritis, making it great for injury recovery. It is extra thick for added knee reinforcement and wraps around the knee for a joint lubricating effect that eases pain. CHECK ON AMAZON CAMBIVO 2-Pack Knee Brace – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A non-slip silicone material that ensures it stays in place Elite 3D knitting technology for optimal knee compression and support Base material is 65% nylon, 20% latex, and 15% spandex, a combination that makes it super comfy and durable It comes as a 2-pack package for extra knee support options The CAMBIVO 2-pack Knee Brace is a superb option for men and women hoping to exercise or simply go about their day-to-day activities free of knee pain. It provides unmatched knee comfort and support and causes no discomfort when worn. This knee brace is versatile, making it suitable for all kinds of sporting activities such as cycling, weightlifting, basketball, and football. It offers optimal knee compression and, by design, doesn’t slip away from the intended region. In addition to the knees, this gear also supports and protects the elbows and calves of users. CHECK ON AMAZON Powerlix Compression Knee Sleeve 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A combination of 80% nylon and 20% spandex material for comfort and durability A double silicone anti-slip fabric and stitch design so it doesn’t fall off or slip away An ergonomic design that makes it easy to put on, exercise with, and take off It comes in two shades: blue and gray to add an aesthetic touch to its knee reinforcement prowess Knee braces don’t get better than the Powerlix Compression Knee Sleeve. It offers solid knee support and protection and is also ideal for injury recovery. Unlike some designs, this knee brace doesn’t restrict mobility when worn, and neither does it cause any discomfort or itching. Although sweat-absorbent, it reduces the chances of sweating in the first place, courtesy of its breathable design. This knee brace is designed not to slip off even during vigorous physical activity, and it is so comfy that it can be worn all day long with zero discomforts. CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer's Guide to Finding an Optimal Knee Brace for Running Many athletes have seen their track and field careers end prematurely because of lingering knee pain or injury that won’t heal. But you and other athletes need not share the same fate, courtesy of running gear known as knee braces. These running gear are designed to protect knee joints, soothe sore knees, and aid/speed up injury recovery. Knee braces are also used by professional runners to prevent injuries that could originate from constantly running on hard surfaces. While it is true that there's a knee brace for everyone, you can't just waltz into any fitness store and pick up the first one you see. Therefore, it is essential to know what type of brace is most appropriate for your needs before buying one and this buying guide will help you do just that, as well as provide answers to frequently asked questions about this versatile running gear. What Are the Factors to Consider When Buying a Knee Brace for Running? If you are experiencing knee pain and want to find relief from it, there are many different braces available in the market that can help you out. However, you must know that certain elements determine a knee brace's quality, performance, and compatibility. We'll be highlighting some of them below to aid you in your quest to find the perfect knee brace. Size You wouldn't get a pair of sneakers larger or smaller than your feet, right? Well, the same logic applies here. Knee braces come in different sizes, and while sizing differs based on brand, it's typically designated small, medium, and large. Alternatively, you could go for a one-size-fits-all model that would fit you no matter your size. Consult your physiotherapist or doctor to determine the right size for you. Style There are two significant styles of knee braces: open and closed patella. The major difference between both styles is that the former is cut open at the front of the knee. Open patellas will keep your knee in tight shape by restricting movement during physical activity and, by design, are ideal for long periods of exercise. Closed patellas, on the other hand, are covered by fabric all through - a design that allows free movement of the knees while still providing solid support. You may want to lean towards closed patellas because they offer slightly more support than the alternative and aid in proper blood circulation. Weight The best knee braces for running are always lightweight. Heavy knee braces may impede your recovery and distort the pain-relieving functions of a typical knee sleeve; plus, they'll also hinder your movement. Of course, you can always try on the knee brace to ensure that it doesn't carry any unnecessary weight before paying for it. Material The best materials for knee braces are neoprene, polyester, and nylon. There's no doubt that all these materials are excellent; however, they feel and function differently. If you're looking for something rigid and thick for extra knee support, a neoprene knee brace is your best bet. However, note that it won't offer much in terms of breathability, meaning sweat will not evaporate and dry quickly and this can lead to the buildup of foul odors if worn for too long. Nylon and polyester are similar in feel and function, and although softer than neoprene, they still offer excellent knee support. Plus, they're highly breathable, so you can wear them all day long without fear of stench. If you want to enjoy the best of all these materials, simply go for designs that combine them. Yes, some knee braces incorporate nylon, polyester, and neoprene in different proportions, and they're usually the best. Ergonomics Any good compression sleeve should be easy to put on, take off, and adjust. It is a common feature in the best knee braces and one you should look out for. In this regard, select only slip-on or velcro braces. Knee braces with velcro straps may be the better option here because they allow you to adjust tightness or looseness. Sweat absorption It is no news that physical activities like running, volleyball, weightlifting, and whatnot will lead to sweating at the knees, even if your brace is breathable. What you need to get rid of sweat quickly is a sweat-absorbent material, and not all knee braces come with one. All you have to do is check the description of the knee brace and confirm that it is sweat-absorbent before paying. Non-slip An anti-slip design is a staple feature in the best knee braces for running. Anything otherwise would require constant adjustment during physical activity, which can be quite tiring. A graver consequence of a shifting knee brace is that it won't protect the knees or ease pain optimally. The best anti-slip features to look out for are silicon straps and elastic fabric. They keep the knee brace in place even during vigorous activities. Level of knee support Knee braces generally support the knees, but at what level? There are four basic knee braces based on level knee support: basic, advanced, and elite knee braces. Basic knee braces are relatively cheap, super ergonomic especially with velcro straps, and are suitable for managing slight injury and knees with little support requirements. Things scale up with advanced knee braces. These braces are more robust than basic braces, more expensive, and are typically wrapped around the knee. If your knee requires an average level of support, then advanced knee braces are your go-to. Elite knee braces are custom-made for post-surgical recovery. They often feature hinges that confer lateral knee stability, which is great if you're dealing with ACL repair, ligament injuries, or cartilage tears. Usually, your doctor or physiotherapist will determine the level of knee support you require, but it's good to understand the concept. | |||||||||||||||||||
13 | 12 | https://www.si.com/review/compression-shirt/ | Athletes are constantly on the lookout for performance-enhancing gear. Anything that can help someone become faster, stronger, or more agile is in high demand. Many "performance-enhancing" products are just a sham with no truth to their claims; however, a few do work as advertised—compression shirts included. Those unfamiliar might only see a tight-fitting t-shirt, but compression shirts are much more than that. A compression shirt can help increase blood flow, keep you cool, prevent muscle fatigue, and help your muscles recover after a workout. The market is filled with mediocre compression shirts that do not work as intended. This makes finding the best ones a costly pursuit. Lucky for you, we went through the trouble of evaluating dozens of options available online. After a thorough review, we’ve narrowed down our search to the five best options that stood out to us for the following reasons: Machine washable fabric Moisture wicking Snug and breathable fit | Compare The Best Compression Shirts of 2022 Under Armour Short Sleeve Compression Shirt – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Machine washable fabric Lightweight construction Mesh underarm sections Short-sleeved design This shirt from Under Armour is one of the most popular ones on Amazon, and for a good reason. It has everything that one would expect from a quality compression shirt. The 84% Polyester 16% Elastane fabric is soft to the touch yet exceptionally durable. It will not show wear and tear even after months of heavy use. It also stretches 4-ways with negligible resistance, so you won’t even notice that you’re wearing a tight-fit shirt. Another great thing about this compression shirt is its HeatGear fabric technology. It wicks away moisture and keeps you cool no matter how intense the game gets. CHECK ON AMAZON DEVOPS Men’s Athletic Compression Shirts – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comes in a pack of three Four-way stretch fabric Non-abrasive spandex UPF 50+ sun protection rating This compression shirt from Devops is a great choice for those looking for quality on a budget, featuring durable fabric, stitching and a minimal design. The fabric quality is not the main reason behind its popularity. This particular compression shirt is a best seller because of its amazing price. You get three supreme-quality compression shirts for just under $20. If you have kids or wear through your workout gear quickly, this is a good deal. These are also some of the most versatile compression shirts out there. You can wear them for cycling, football, yoga, and more. CHECK ON AMAZON Eleady Compression Shirt Workout Tank Tops – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Sleeveless design Works as an undershirt Body shaping technology Moisture-wicking properties This men’s compression shirt from Eleady is a popular choice for gym workouts, especially weightlifting. The 60%-Rayon-40%-Spandex fabric makes the top stretchable and breathable. It is lightweight enough that you can wear it as an undershirt, in addition to wearing on its own. Many of the reviewers wear it under shirts, vests and even costumes. The thing that sets this apart from the rest is the body shaping technology. According to the manufacturer, the perfectly snug fit of their compression shirts helps fat reduction in the chest and stomach. CHECK ON AMAZON Neleus Men’s Athletic Compression Shirt – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Suitable for all sports Sleeveless design Available in five colors 85% Polyester, 15% Spandex fabric Next up, we have a three-pack of quality compression shirts from Neleus. At just under $20, these are a fantastic value. But why would anyone choose these over Devops? Well, the main reason to opt for Neleus compressions shirts is the sheer number of choices. First is the color. You can purchase individual shirts in blue, gray, red, white, and black. They are also available in three-packs of gray or white. There are also seven size options. You’ll be sure to find a Neleus compression shirt that fits you, no matter your weight or height. CHECK ON AMAZON TSLA Long Sleeve Compression Shirt 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Micro-fleece lining Suitable for both indoors and outdoors activities Breathable fabric Fully elastic construction Last on our list of the best compression shirts is a long-sleeved option. Long-sleeved compression shirts are not very common for athletes other than football players. Many say that they do not want fabric restricting their arm movements. Tesla Gear resolved this issue by creating an exclusive mix of polyester and spandex that hugs the body closely while also moving alongside the body. You won’t even be able to tell that you’re wearing a long-sleeved compression shirt, much less feel restricted by it. Even if you ignore its excellent fabric, this shirt is still worth considering, thanks to its perfectly cut design, incognito seams, and exceptional temperature regulation. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Compression Shirts Buying Guide Compression shirts are a mainstay of modern athletic equipment. No list of essential sports gear is complete without at least one compression shirt recommendation. They are also wildly popular among almost every sport that requires extensive physical activity. But why is that? Benefits of Wearing a Compression Shirt Compression shirts offer several benefits to their wearer. Here are a few of the most notable ones. Reduce muscle soreness Even the strongest athletes have their physical limitations. In the peak of the season or after an intense training session, muscles feel worn out. Compression shirts claim to reduce muscle soreness by increasing blood pressure, providing greater levels of oxygen to your muscles. Muscle soreness is often caused by inflammation, and compression shirts help circulate blood and prevent pooling. Increased comfort Not all fabrics are suitable for intense workouts. They may ride up, cause friction, and make the athlete feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, compression shirts eliminate these issues by hugging your body tightly. They also apply mild pressure on your body which feels comforting and secure. Moisture-wicking Sweat makes your skin slippery and turns normal t-shirts into sandpaper. Quality compression shirts resolve this problem by wicking away sweat. This has the added bonus of keeping you cool no matter how intense the workout gets. Better blood flow Blood is what brings fresh oxygen from your lungs to your muscles. So, you need good flow to train properly. The last thing you want is your muscle cells to be oxygen deprived. The mild pressure applied by compression shirts improves surface-level blood flow and allows fresh oxygen to reach throughout your body. Stylish look Most athletes purchase compression apparel for their health and performance benefits, but the aesthetic appeal of this clothing is not something to scoff at. If you’ve worked day and night to achieve a certain physique, it makes sense that you would like to show off your hard work. Compression shirts make this endeavor extremely simple. You get to show your sculpted form while also looking athletic and professional. How To Find the Right Compression Shirt? Whether a compression shirt is right for you or not depends on multiple factors. These are the main ones that you should consider. Material Compression shirts are usually made from a material that is a mix of polyester and spandex. What differentiates good compression shirts from bad ones is the ratio between these two. A standard mixture is 90% polyester and 10% spandex. Some manufacturers create their own unique blends with varying amounts of each fabric. Some even include a third type of fabric for durability or softness. If the manufacturer does not state the exact materials used in the compression shirt's construction, then look at the customer reviews. You will gain a proper insight into how the shirt feels as is and during working. Make sure to check positive reviews as well. Sleeve size There are three popular sleeve sizes available in compression shirts, long-sleeved, short-sleeved, and sleeveless. Sleeveless Sleeveless tank top compression shirts are some of the most popular, and it is easy to see why. They have zero restrictions on arm movement, and they also look cool. You can easily show off your gains while you work out. Short Sleeves Short sleeves are usually worn by athletes that do heavy cardio, like cyclists. The main reason behind that is their armpit sweat wicking. Other than that, they are not as restrictive as long-sleeved shirts. Long sleeves Speaking of which, long-sleeved compression shirts are a controversial topic. Some athletes avoid them because they become a hindrance to movement, but long-sleeved shirts are appropriate for certain sports, especially ones involving cardio. Long sleeves only become an issue if they don't fit properly or if you buy cheap ones with a bad fabric blend. Amount of compression Some athletes love a shirt that feels appropriately tight and snug, while others like a compression shirt that isn't even noticeable during play. Neither of these choices is better than the other, so pick whichever you feel is most comfortable. Your use cases Most compression shirts are universal. You can wear them during any activity, and they will provide several benefits listed above. Notably, there are compression shirts out there that are designed for one sport or activity. For example, compression shirts for football may include slim padding around the waist. One thing to keep in mind is that these specialized shirts tend to be more expensive than versatile ones. If you can afford one, then look for a shirt that is made for your use case; otherwise, general quality compression shirts would work perfectly fine. | |||||||||||||||||||
14 | 13 | https://www.si.com/review/best-pickleball-ball/ | Choosing the right equipment can be the difference between constantly needing to replace items throughout a season versus using them consistently over time. For pickleball players, the right ball can determine whether the game is frustrating or fun. We’ve highlighted some of the top pickleball balls for your next match. These pickleball balls are stand-out products on the market because they: Have ideal flight and bounce capabilities Feature reinforced seams to prevent splitting Come in bright colors for easy visibility | Pickleball Ball Onix Pickleball Ball – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Considering that pickle balls have holes in them, it’s important to pick a ball that is properly weighted so that it will fly straight rather than wobble into unpredictable arcs. This three-pack set from Onix isn’t just very affordable; it is also designed with added weight to improve flight even in windy conditions. The ball has been welded with excellent precision to resist cracks and damage after prolonged use. PROS Reinforced seam to resist splitting Uses authentic Bounce Technology Designed for aggressive play CONS Not approved for tournament play CHECK ON AMAZON Day 1 Sports Pickleball Ball – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon For serious pickleball players, finding the right ball that meets tournament specifications is critical. These pickleball balls from Day 1 Sports meet those requirements and are also designed with 40 precision holes to achieve consistent flight and bounce. You’ll appreciate the bright neon color of the balls which offers greater visibility in the field. The pickleball ball is made of high-quality resin to prevent damage over time. PROS Bright color for high visibility Meet tournament specifications For indoor and outdoor use CONS Seams may impact play CHECK ON AMAZON Franklin Sports Pickleball – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon If you play pickleball frequently or are concerned about misplacing your balls, this 12-pack from Franklin Sports is one of the most economical options in our guide. While it’s the most expensive, you get the best unit price per ball since other brands usually offer three or six per pack. These balls are USAPA approved for professional players and won’t crack easily thanks to the rotational molding used to make them. The pickleball balls are available in three striking colors for excellent visibility. PROS Economical 12-pack Available in multiple colors 40 precision-drilled holes for straight flight Rotational molding for durability CONS Outdoor use only CHECK ON AMAZON EasyTime Pickleball Ball – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon While most of the options in our guide are USAPA approved, these are the only ones that include indoor and outdoor pickleball balls. The pack consists of three yellow balls featuring 26 drilled holes and three orange ones with 40 holes to counterbalance wind disturbance. You’ll also appreciate the hot seam welding that creates a smooth exterior for a good bounce. The vivid color of the pickleball balls is also great for visibility when playing outdoor so that you don’t lose any of them, and even if you do, there are five more to choose from! PROS Includes indoor and outdoor balls Bright color for excellent visibility Good bounce with mid-range hardness CONS Color might differ from the pictures CHECK ON AMAZON | Pickleball Balls Buying Guide Only a few sports afford you the luxury of diving in with minimal preparation and equipment like pickleball does. You may already have a pickleball paddle, but what about the pickleball balls? These perforated polymer balls come in all kinds of makes and types and can thus overwhelm the best of us when we are in the market for one. So, we decided to compile this comprehensive buyer's guide to help you make sense of everything you need to know about pickleball balls, their types and features, and choosing the right one for yourself. What Are the Different Types of Pickleball Balls? Pickleball balls generally come in two types: Indoor pickleball balls Outdoor pickleball balls Now, we'll look at the aspects that make the two types distinct. Indoor pickleball Indoor pickleball balls weigh around 0.8 ounces and are softer and smaller when compared to their outdoor counterparts. They are meant for groups who prefer playing the sport indoors where the environment is more consistent and not prone to the whims of mother nature. Talking about these whims, pickleball balls feature holes that help them navigate the winds more consistently. Since indoor pickleball balls don’t need to brave the winds, they feature fewer, albeit bigger, holes, with the standard indoor pickleball balls boasting 26 holes. Fewer holes also enhance the overall airflow, allowing for better control, consistent bounces, and precise trajectories in indoor conditions. Their textured surfaces also make it easier for the player to give the ball more spin, and you can expect longer rallies when playing with one. However, the increased drag these types of pickleball balls boast makes them harder to slam or hit power shots with. Outdoor pickleball Elements, my dear Watson; the outdoors are all about elements. Irregular wind patterns, changing weather, and uneven playing surfaces shift the dynamics of pickleball. So, outdoor pickleball requires a ball that is specifically designed to adapt to and mitigate these elementary pressures and ensure they do not ruin the playing experience. Firmer than their indoor counterparts, outdoor pickleball balls weigh over 0.9 ounces. The smooth surface and weight make these balls less likely to wear and tear, although we do not recommend using one ball for more than ten outdoor matches since the elements are bound to cause deterioration in its spin and bounce. Talking about bounce, outdoor pickleball balls bounce better and are easier to hit power shots with. However, you may experience shorter rallies, less control, and less spin when playing with one. Let's talk about the design now, shall we? As we mentioned earlier, outdoor pickleball balls are constructed with the elements and terrain of the outside in mind. So, they feature more, yet small, holes with the standard outdoor pickleball boasting 40 holes drilled into it. The holes lessen the impact of wind and prevent the ball from deflecting due to it. Here’s a table that outlines the different types of pickleball balls: Specifications Indoor Pickleball Outdoor Pickleball Weight 0.8 oz 0.9 oz Number of Holes 26 40 Power Hits Difficult Easier Rally Length Long Short Elemental Resistance Low High Hardness Soft Hard Noise Quieter Louder Lifespan Last longer Shorter lifespan What to Look For When Buying a Pickleball Ball? We primarily looked at two factors when shortlisting the best pickleball balls that money can buy. Durability and longevity The longevity of pickleball balls generally varies from brand to brand. However, you may expect an outdoor pickleball to last at least ten games before starting to show cracks. The lifespan of indoor balls is more, considering the exposure to the elements that never occurs. While they usually do not crack, indoor pickleball balls develop soft spots when played with for extended times. Material Everyone knows that pickleball balls are made of plastic. So, why consider the material after all? The best pickleball balls, like the ones mentioned in our article, are made using only the best thermoset plastics like acrylic, epoxies, and melamine. These materials are heated and subsequently cooled, and molded into balls. Outdoor pickleball balls sometimes also have virgin plastic in their composition due to the superior quality that the material provides. Tips for Choosing the Right Pickleball Ball After meticulously testing dozens of pickleball balls, we compiled a list of tips that will help you make the right decision when buying one for yourself. Here they are! Outdoor or Indoor? Confused about whether to buy indoor or outdoor pickleball balls? We say don’t worry about it if all you’re looking for is a casual game with the lads. If, however, you're aiming to play competitively, how about you go for both? Keeping both the variants on hand would not hurt and will keep you ever ready for whatever type of match you come across. Color Pickleball balls come in a wide array of colors and shades. However, we recommend that you consider ones that boast one solid color, are bright, and easy to spot even in the absence of natural light. You'll be thanking us for this tip when you find yourself in a game of pickleball being played in poor light conditions! Diameter It is of paramount importance to get the diameter of your pickleball right. You can expect better performance with an optimum-sized pickleball since it will come off the paddle more efficiently. We recommend indoor pickleball balls with a diameter of around 2.8 inches. For outdoor pickleball balls, you may choose one with a 2.9 inches diameter. How Much Do Pickleballs Cost? It's incredible how much some people are willing to pay for pickleball balls, with ones from Dura, Jugs, and TOP costing $30 to more than $150 a pop. Are they worth it? Well, for someone who wants only luck and skill, and not ball balance and quality, to be the determinants of his game, yes, it is absolutely worth it. However, for the ordinary joes, a 12-ball pack that costs an average of $15 would be more than enough. Each ball may be expected to last around an hour when actively played with. | |||||||||||||||||||
15 | 14 | https://www.si.com/review/bowling-shoes/ | A good pair of bowling shoes can help you bowl better and get higher scores, providing increased stability and balance while also protecting your feet. Bowling shoes offer the proper slide and traction when needed. In addition, wearing bowling shoes helps maintain the surface quality of the bowling lane, keeping it free from markings and debris. When choosing bowling shoes, you should consider different factors depending on your age, skill level, bowling frequency, and size. If deciding sounds overwhelming, don’t worry! We’ve listed the best bowling shoes in 2022 to help you choose the most suitable pair for your needs and budget. Remember that you can always add your own insole for customized support and comfort. | Comparing the Best Bowling Shoe of 2022 KR Strikeforce Flyer Mesh – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in a regular and wide fit Fully textile lined with padded collar Non-marking rubber outsole Both shoes have microfiber slide pads with FlexSlide technology The shoes come with a 2 year warranty These Flyer Mesh bowling shoes from KR Strikeforce cater to medium and wide feet for optimal protection, comfort, and technique. The medium fit is available from size 6 to 15 while the wider fit comes in sizes 7 to 15. The Komfort-Fit construction is light and breathable with an engineered mesh upper. These bowling shoes have microfiber slide pads on both shoes with FlexSlide Technology for the perfect delivery. CHECK ON AMAZON Pyramid Path – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in size 7 to 13 in 5 different colors Both shoes have microfiber slide pads Removable comfort footpad for additional support Shoes have a lightweight outsole with raised rubber heel Pyramid Path provides a superior performance bowling shoe at an affordable price with this athletic Lite Mesh range. The seamless and lightweight design allows you to move around comfortably with a knitted upper to enhance breathability. The shoe fit is true to size so you can easily order your regular size for online purchases. With superior cushioning and support, the shoes can be worn by left or right-handed bowlers and they come with a 2 year warranty. CHECK ON AMAZON Brunswick Vapor – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in 3 color variations Foam padded collar and tongue Extra light molded EVA outsole Both shoes have microfiber slide pads Available in size 10 to 14 These synthetic and lightweight bowling shoes are super comfortable for hours of bowling. With microfiber slide pads, they allow beginners to control their footwork while still figuring out their shots. Brunswick Vapor bowling shoes feature a foam-padded collar and tongue with removable insoles if you prefer to insert your own for customized support needs. With a price under fifty dollars, these shoes are a great starting pair and definitely much better than using a rental shoe. CHECK ON AMAZON Dexter Men’s Kam Bowling Shoes – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in size 7 to 14 True to size fit Charcoal grey color The shoes have rubber heels and slip pads from the arch forward These stylish bowling shoes are available in sizes 7-14 in a charcoal grey color. Although they can easily be mistaken for non-bowling shoes, they have all the perks of quality, durability, and functionality. A molded removable EVA footbed provides optimum comfort and control during all stages of your approach. The shoes are slip-on so there are no laces to tie. For improved comfort, the slip-ons are vented on the sides for added breathability. CHECK ON AMAZON BSI Men’s #751 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in size 7 to 16 Sport leather uppers Comfort padded tongue and collar Regular non-marking sliding soles Embossed logo design These BSI Men’s bowling shoes are a classic black version of the traditional bowling shoe look. They offer everything you need in a good bowling shoe as a beginner or intermediate player – at a reasonable price. The shoes offer great comfort with a padded tongue and collar as well as a lightweight EVA midsole for support. The sliding soles are stitched and glued for lasting durability, ensuring your pair lasts you a number of seasons. CHECK ON AMAZON KR Strikeforce Flyer Black & Orange 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in sizes 6 – 15 Fully fabric-lined with padded collar Non-marking rubber outsoles Both shoes have microfiber slide pads with FlexSlide technology The KR Strikeforce black and orange Flyer bowling shoes are equipped with universal slide soles which allow you to slide on both shoes. The shoes have durable and soft uppers with Komfort-Fit construction and non-marking soles. For ultimate comfort during your game they are fully fabric lined with a padded tongue and collar. These trendy shoes come in at a great price under fifty dollars and have a 2-year warranty. CHECK ON AMAZON Bowlerstore Classic 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in sizes 6 to 16 Rubber sole with a non-marking raised heel Soft durable uppers Stitching and laces react in black light Blucher upper pattern for an adjustable shoe fit Feeling nostalgic for that old-school bowling alley style? This shoe is for you. If you found a great match with bowling alley rental shoes and don’t want to compromise your game by changing them up, get yourself the same pair for exclusive use. No more sharing. These classic style shoes have a non-marking sole and raised rubber heel. In traditional red, blue, and grey colors you’ll probably feel like a teenager again when you put them on. CHECK ON AMAZON Best Bowling Shoes Buying Guide Buying bowling shoes requires a little more thought than just picking the best-looking pair in your regular shoe size. A good pair of bowling shoes need to be comfortable, supportive and provide you with balance and stability. You need to consider the fit around your toes, ankle, and heel support as well as the arch of your foot. Of course, you also want a pair of shoes that will last at least one or two seasons. In this guide, we’ll outline everything you need to consider when buying a pair of bowling shoes to help you improve your game. How to Choose the Best Bowling Shoes Types of bowling shoes Bowling shoes come in different types depending on your style of bowling, age, and gender. Youth bowling shoes are slightly different from adult shoes as they are more lightweight and require less cushioning. If your kids enjoy bowling, having their own shoes will be a lot more comfortable than wearing the rental ones at the bowling alley. Wide-width shoes provide enough room and help relieve pressure when sliding at the foul line. These may be a little harder to find but are well worth it to look after your feet, ensure comfort, and prevent pain even after the game is over. Men's bowling shoes and ladies' bowling shoes are somewhat different in design according to the varying anatomy of feet. Men generally have wider feet while women have narrower and smaller feet. Right-handed only shoes mean that the left bowling shoe will be the sliding shoe whereas the right shoe provides grip on the approach. Left-handed only shoes are the opposite where the slide sole is on the right shoe and the grip sole is on the left. Universal bowling shoes allow you to slide on both shoes if you are comfortable sliding on your non-dominant hand as well. These shoes are generally more affordable and are a good choice if you are just starting or play mainly for fun. Bowling shoes with interchangeable soles allow you to change the sole according to the surface you are bowling on without having to have multiple pairs of shoes. They are a great option if you bowl in different types of bowling centers. What to Look for When Buying Bowling Shoes The sole One of the most important things to consider when choosing shoes for bowling is the sole of the shoe. You will notice that they are different from normal shoes. Sliding shoes have smooth soles. They are intended for sliding to help you with the delivery of the ball, improving your approach and follow-through. The problem with having a sliding shoe on both feet is that too much slide can cause you to go over the foul line unintentionally. For this reason, a lot of mid-range and high-end bowling shoes feature interchangeable heels and soles. This allows you to adjust the amount of slide. Beginner and cheaper bowling shoes usually have sliding soles on both the left and right foot that are not removable while more expensive shoes feature one sliding sole that is adjustable and one traction sole. Traction soles are often only featured on competitive and more expensive shoes, however, they can be key to producing more power in your throw. They also allow you to pivot more easily during the delivery phase. Traction shoes should be able to bend comfortably at the ball of your foot. They are recommended for bowlers who play often, however, if you are not a regular you probably won’t need them yet. If you are looking for a good pair of bowling shoes with traction, opt for a pair with one sliding sole and one traction sole. The sliding sole should be on the leading foot of your dominant hand and the traction sole should be on the other. Shoe anatomy Have a look at the smaller details of the shoe when choosing the most durable and comfortable option. Lining Shoes should be well-lined with a sock-like lining on the inside of the shoe, vamp, and quarter to offer added comfort. Uppers Many bowling shoes have either leather or synthetic uppers. If the material is not breathable, check for perforations that aid breathability. Toe caps and heel stabilizers Toe caps will help prevent wear on the toe when pivoting while heel stabilizers keep your heel secure and stable throughout the motions. Insole Insoles are important in any shoe for optimal support and comfort. They are often thin and removable so that you can add your own custom insole for your unique needs depending on the arch-type of your foot. Midsole and heel wedge The midsole provides extra cushioning while the heel wedge assists with less ankle flexion, keeping your feet in a position ready for pivoting. Heel cup and padded collar The heel cup locks your heel in place whereas a heavily padded collar offers comfort while giving you ankle support to keep your feet secure in the shoe. Non-marking outsole Non-marking soles may be a prerequisite at any bowling alley to prevent marking and damaging the floors. How to Get the Right Fit Bowling Shoes The right shoe should fit both the width and volume of your foot without any pain, discomfort, or chafing. There should be roughly an eighth of an inch space between the toe and shoe tip, with a snug fit that does not slip at the heel. When determining your size take into account the thickness of the socks you will be wearing when you play and consider whether the construction is flexible or stretches. You also want to ensure that there is even pressure over your arches, however, you may consider adding your own insoles for the perfect supporting fit. | Best Bowling Shoes Buying Guide Buying bowling shoes requires a little more thought than just picking the best-looking pair in your regular shoe size. A good pair of bowling shoes need to be comfortable, supportive and provide you with balance and stability. You need to consider the fit around your toes, ankle, and heel support as well as the arch of your foot. Of course, you also want a pair of shoes that will last at least one or two seasons. In this guide, we’ll outline everything you need to consider when buying a pair of bowling shoes to help you improve your game. How to Choose the Best Bowling Shoes Types of bowling shoes Bowling shoes come in different types depending on your style of bowling, age, and gender. Youth bowling shoes are slightly different from adult shoes as they are more lightweight and require less cushioning. If your kids enjoy bowling, having their own shoes will be a lot more comfortable than wearing the rental ones at the bowling alley. Wide-width shoes provide enough room and help relieve pressure when sliding at the foul line. These may be a little harder to find but are well worth it to look after your feet, ensure comfort, and prevent pain even after the game is over. Men's bowling shoes and ladies' bowling shoes are somewhat different in design according to the varying anatomy of feet. Men generally have wider feet while women have narrower and smaller feet. Right-handed only shoes mean that the left bowling shoe will be the sliding shoe whereas the right shoe provides grip on the approach. Left-handed only shoes are the opposite where the slide sole is on the right shoe and the grip sole is on the left. Universal bowling shoes allow you to slide on both shoes if you are comfortable sliding on your non-dominant hand as well. These shoes are generally more affordable and are a good choice if you are just starting or play mainly for fun. Bowling shoes with interchangeable soles allow you to change the sole according to the surface you are bowling on without having to have multiple pairs of shoes. They are a great option if you bowl in different types of bowling centers. What to Look for When Buying Bowling Shoes The sole One of the most important things to consider when choosing shoes for bowling is the sole of the shoe. You will notice that they are different from normal shoes. Sliding shoes have smooth soles. They are intended for sliding to help you with the delivery of the ball, improving your approach and follow-through. The problem with having a sliding shoe on both feet is that too much slide can cause you to go over the foul line unintentionally. For this reason, a lot of mid-range and high-end bowling shoes feature interchangeable heels and soles. This allows you to adjust the amount of slide. Beginner and cheaper bowling shoes usually have sliding soles on both the left and right foot that are not removable while more expensive shoes feature one sliding sole that is adjustable and one traction sole. Traction soles are often only featured on competitive and more expensive shoes, however, they can be key to producing more power in your throw. They also allow you to pivot more easily during the delivery phase. Traction shoes should be able to bend comfortably at the ball of your foot. They are recommended for bowlers who play often, however, if you are not a regular you probably won’t need them yet. If you are looking for a good pair of bowling shoes with traction, opt for a pair with one sliding sole and one traction sole. The sliding sole should be on the leading foot of your dominant hand and the traction sole should be on the other. Shoe anatomy Have a look at the smaller details of the shoe when choosing the most durable and comfortable option. Lining Shoes should be well-lined with a sock-like lining on the inside of the shoe, vamp, and quarter to offer added comfort. Uppers Many bowling shoes have either leather or synthetic uppers. If the material is not breathable, check for perforations that aid breathability. Toe caps and heel stabilizers Toe caps will help prevent wear on the toe when pivoting while heel stabilizers keep your heel secure and stable throughout the motions. Insole Insoles are important in any shoe for optimal support and comfort. They are often thin and removable so that you can add your own custom insole for your unique needs depending on the arch-type of your foot. Midsole and heel wedge The midsole provides extra cushioning while the heel wedge assists with less ankle flexion, keeping your feet in a position ready for pivoting. Heel cup and padded collar The heel cup locks your heel in place whereas a heavily padded collar offers comfort while giving you ankle support to keep your feet secure in the shoe. Non-marking outsole Non-marking soles may be a prerequisite at any bowling alley to prevent marking and damaging the floors. How to Get the Right Fit Bowling Shoes The right shoe should fit both the width and volume of your foot without any pain, discomfort, or chafing. There should be roughly an eighth of an inch space between the toe and shoe tip, with a snug fit that does not slip at the heel. When determining your size take into account the thickness of the socks you will be wearing when you play and consider whether the construction is flexible or stretches. You also want to ensure that there is even pressure over your arches, however, you may consider adding your own insoles for the perfect supporting fit. | |||||||||||||||||||
16 | 15 | https://www.si.com/review/hack-squat-machine/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 16 | https://www.si.com/review/best-gym-mat/ | You don’t necessarily need to go to a gym to get a full-body workout. In fact, body-weight exercises can be a great way to go about your workout without spending a lot of money on costly gym memberships! However, these exercises can get really tricky if you don't have the right mat backing you up! Once the hard floor starts causing discomfort, the happy endorphins you get from a workout reduce, and you end up in pain after the workout session. So, what do you do to remedy this? Getting a nice exercise mat that motivates you to do more is a great starting point! Lucky for you, we've put together a list of the comfiest exercise mats you'll ever lie down on. These do an excellent job at protecting your joints and back from discomfort and pain. We've also included a detailed buying guide in this article to help you choose an exercise mat that'll make a huge difference in your workout sessions. These exercise mats stand out from the rest on the market because they: Have ultimate cushion and padding Can be easily carried and moved Have an anti-slip surface | Hear From the Expert The biggest factor to consider is how much area you want to cover? Freestanding mats can be rolled up, tucked under beds, or placed on garage floors, decks and patios. Online, they’re generally between $50 and $500 and range from 3 by 4 feet to 10 by 10 feet. So it really just depends on how much area you want to cover, what kind of feel you want to have, and what type of flooring you’re protecting underneath? They're all around the same price per square foot. It just depends on how big you want it to be. Do you want it to be able to be rolled up and tucked under something or stuck in the corner? Or do you just need a yoga mat? Or do you want to floor out your basement for lifting? The answer to those questions is all up to your preference. By Steve Feinberg author-image Our Top Picks: Exercise Mats BalanceFrom Tri-Fold Folding Exercise Mat – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Puncture-resistant vinyl exterior Comes with carrying handles Available in multiple colors Two-inch thickness Moisture-resistant and foldable Whether you’re doing floor exercises or practicing yoga, this two-inch thick exercise mat is a great way to give your body the extra padding you need to push through your workout. This tri-fold exercising mat comes in multiple colors. Its puncture-resistant vinyl exterior offers exceptional resilience that allows you to use it for all kinds of exercises. You’ll love the carrying handles that make this exercise mat easy to store or travel with. This product is backed up by a 2-year warranty! CHECK ON AMAZON Yoga Cloud Moisture-Resistant Exercise Mat – Runner-up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features One-inch thickness Non-slip Shock absorption properties Includes convenient carrying straps Planning to start yoga? You might be surprised by how much time you will actually end up spending on the ground. But with this excellent exercise mat, you can take your sessions to the next levels in terms of comfort and support. As the name suggests, the Yoga Cloud mat actually feels like a cloud, offering a more comfortable alternative to thin yoga mats. You’ll appreciate this one-inch thick yoga mat that’s made from high-density foam to be four times thicker than a traditional yoga mat for better shock absorption. Plus the non-slip surface ensures you can nail your poses without the risk of injury from a mat that shifts under your feet. CHECK ON AMAZON NewMe Fitness Exercise Mat – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features You will find this to be a good holiday gift for your yogi friends It is made with non-toxic materials that are earth-friendly too The PVC used in this material is phthalate- and BPA-free With illustrations that ostensibly demonstrate 70 yoga poses, the NewMe Fitness Yoga Mat only requires you to put on some comfy clothes and begin your yoga session. CHECK ON AMAZON Gaiam Essentials Thick Exercise Mat – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Textured grip Convenient carrying straps Made of non-toxic, 6P-free PVC It comes in 8 colors This exercise mat comes in a plethora of finishes and is meant for people who are used to attending classes regularly. With its textured grip, convenient carrying straps, and ideal thickness, the Gaiam Essentials exercise mat isn’t just functional, it also looks good! When you’re traveling with your mat in tow, something that’s ultra thick and bulky can be a pain — especially if you take mass transit to get to your yoga studio. This ⅖-inch thick mat still gives you plenty of cushioning but rolls up into a compact log. Moreover, it’s made of non-toxic, 6P-free PVC material. CHECK ON AMAZON Sunny Health & Fitness Gymnastic Exercise Mat 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Removable cover Tri-fold design Nylon handles 2-inch padding If you prefer a true exercise mat, this is a great option because it comes with a removable vinyl cover that makes it durable and super easy to clean—especially if you’re the type who really works up a sweat! This exercise mat has a tri-fold design to save space when not in use. Its nylon handles make storing and transporting this mat a breeze. The 2-inch padding for extra comfort doesn’t only make it a versatile choice for workouts but also a spare bed in times of need! CHECK ON AMAZON We Sell Mats Personal Fitness & Exercise Mat 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 2-inch thickness Comes in three different sizes Available in a variety of color options Easy to clean Extra-large exercise mats are ideal for those who aren’t satisfied with the standard size which is where this cushioned mat comes in handy. It is available in three sizes with a 2-inch thickness to keep your joints safe while working out. It’s easy to transport, allowing you to take your personal gym wherever you go. It serves as an excellent surface to support your elbows, knees, and back during bodyweight exercises or yoga sessions. Its ultra-durable material and exceptional thickness make it an ideal choice for even young gymnasts and cheerleaders. The exercise mat can be easily cleaned with a simple soap and water solution. CHECK ON AMAZON ProsourceFit Tri-Fold Folding Thick Exercise Mat 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Easy-to-clean design Comes with two carrying handles Foam interior Tri-fold design Available in three colors Time to make your workouts safer and more comfortable with the ProsourceFit Tri-fold exercise mat. It has an easy-to-clean surface and the mat is low maintenance, allowing children, enthusiasts, and even adults to make the most out of their activities! With a cushioned surface, this exercise mat also has a tri-fold design that makes it easy to transport. Like others, this mat also includes two carrying handles that make it easy to carry. However, what makes it stand out is its strong and resilient foam interior that keeps the mat in its shape even after consistent use. The mat comes in three colors; blue, grey, and black. CHECK ON AMAZON HemingWeigh Extra Thick Foam Exercise Mat 8 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made from non-toxic NBR Easy to clean Comes with carrying straps Anti-tear material Long and stretchy We’re in love with this all-purpose exercise mat that is eco-friendly, easy to clean, and can be packed and carried easily for any indoor or outdoor use. This non-slip exercise mat offers extra padded and cushioning comfort to support your joints, making every workout session enjoyable. It is made from high-quality, premium materials that won’t rip, tear, or fray, unlike cheaper alternatives. It also comes with a two-year warranty in case of damage. CHECK ON AMAZON TOPLUS Exercise Mat 9 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 1/4-inch thickness Eco-friendly and non-slip Comes with carrying straps Available in a wide range of colors A dual-layer, tear-proof design Take your yoga sessions to a whole new level with this classic 1/4-inch professional-grade yoga mat. Made from premium TPE this mat is eco-friendly and has a non-slip surface, making it an ideal choice for all yoga enthusiasts. Available in a wide range of colors to suit every preference, this exercise mat can be easily rolled up and carried around with the strap that comes with the purchase. The exercise mat can be cleaned easily with a damp cloth, mild detergent, and some water but it should not be exposed to the sun for long periods of time. CHECK ON AMAZON AmazonBasics Exercise Mat with Foam Interlocking Tile 10 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comes in a pack of six Interlocking tile design Made with high-density foam Snaps together easily This exercise mat stands out from the crowd for its versatility, designed in the shape of large, interlocking, puzzle-style pieces that can snap together, helping you create a large or small space for your workouts! In addition to its excellent utility for any workout, this exercise mat can be used as a soft and safe surface for playrooms and other everyday purposes! It’s super soft and padded for your protection. The high-density foam creates non-slip cushioning and it comes in a pack of 6, covering 24 square feet in total. CHECK ON AMAZON Premium Large Exercise Mat 11 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has an 8mm high-density padding Comes with a towel, carry-bag, and straps Easy to clean Extra-large size Double-sided performance design Compresses and expands easily for storage One of the longer and more expensive options out there, this 84-inches exercise mat is thick and comfortable to support all types of movements without any joint pain or discomfort. With high-density, double-thick padding, this exercise mat offers stable support and has a sticky texture. It has a double-sided performance design and is made of eco-friendly, non-toxic materials. The exercise mat can be rolled up and pinned with straps when not in use. It compresses easily but expands quickly once the pressure is relieved, making it a great space-saver in your home gym. CHECK ON AMAZON | Exercise Mats Buying Guide Exercise mats can be your best companion for at-home workouts or yoga sessions, but how do you know which one to choose? If you're having trouble finding an exercise mat that suits your needs from the plethora of options available in the market, we're here to guide you. This part of the buying guide will outline the different types of exercise mats available and some of the important features you should look out for before making a purchase. Important Features to Consider in an Exercise Mat Exercise mats have made maintaining an active lifestyle easy; you can enjoy a workout anywhere and at any time of the day without having to go to the gym! But, picking the right yoga mat is important if you have specific needs. Here's what you will need to consider before buying one. Size The size of your exercise mat should be directly proportional to your height and the type of exercise you plan on doing. The tallet you are, the bigger the mat should be. The best yoga mat is the one with a suitable length that matches your height as well as a decent width that accommodates all your movements. Thickness Fitness mats can be thick or thin depending to accommodate different types of movements. Different exercise mats have different thickness levels so picking the right one will require some experimentation on your part. Ideally, 3mm to 8mm is considered a normal, comfortable thickness for an exercise mat. Weight The weight of an exercise mat depends on its thickness. The thicker it is, the heavier it will be. Pick a yoga mat with the appropriate weight to suit your lifestyle and how you plan to use it. For example, if you'll be carrying it around to your yoga/exercise classes every day you'll need a lightweight mat that allows you to do so easily! Budget The first thing to consider when you buy something is to make sure that the purchase fits your budget. This is why we have included exercise mats at varying price points, from economical to premium, so that you can find one that fits your wallet. How Much Do Exercise Mats Cost? The prices of yoga mats usually differ from one product to another. If you buy one of lower quality, it will probably save you a few extra bucks but the mat might not be long-lasting or able to withstand the rigors of your workout routine. If you want to get good quality exercise mat, you may pay a little more. Overall the fitness mats are not very expensive and can normally range from $20 to $200. Different Types of Exercise Mats Exercise mats are a useful piece of equipment for protecting you from slipping or getting injuries. These fitness mats turn a rocky-hard surface into a safe heaven for workout sessions, ensuring comfort and maximum results. However, there are different types of fitness mats suited for different workouts so let's look at what each one of them does. Exercise mats Exercise mats are usually thick and large. They are generally one inch thick and about six feet long. These types of mats are mostly used for stretching or low-impact movements like yoga. They are made up of Vinyl covers so that they can be cleaned easily. Gym floor-protection mats Floor-protecting mats are used to protect your gym floor. You are not supposed to perform a workout on them; rather, they are under the exercise mat that you are using actually. The purpose of this mat is to protect the gym floor from scratches; it also keeps gym-goers safe so that they don't hurt themselves while working out on hard surfaces. Pilates or exercise mats Pilates is a completely different type of movement but its mats are not much different from a regular exercise mat. Pilates strengthens tensed muscles, so a Pilates-specific mat requires a little more thickness than its regular counterpart. | |||||||||||||||||||
18 | 17 | https://www.si.com/review/athletic-tape/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
19 | 18 | https://www.si.com/review/best-cornhole-set/ | Cornhole is an entertaining game you can play with friends and family on a lazy summer’s day. While many play it from the comfort of their own yards, the game has increasingly become a professionalized sport with premium bags and boards to match. Whether you’re a casual player or a pro, there are a lot of options for you out there. We’ve made a list of the best cornhole sets in 2022 sets to help you get started. The sets on this list will make a great addition to your repertoire of outdoor games because they: Will provide hours of fun for your friends and family Are made with excellent craftsmanship Can be customized or have attractive designs | Best Cornhole Set GoSports Solid Wood Premium Cornhole Set – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon You can personalize the boards and bean bags in any way you want. You can also paint or add your own decals. After every game, you can keep the bags inside its draw-string case so you won’t lose any pieces. PROS 2 regulation size boards 8 high-quality bean bags Heavy-duty case CONS Boards are a little heavy CHECK ON AMAZON Backyard Champs Corn Hole Outdoor Game – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Both boards have no prints or colors, making them easier for you to personalize. As they are built with fasteners, you can tuck their legs inside their frames for convenient transport and storage. PROS Boards have hide-away legs Tournament-ready set Solid, finely sanded boards CONS Should be used and stored in dry environments CHECK ON AMAZON Himal Collapsible Portable Corn Hole Board – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon From 3’x2’, you can fold and fit the boards into a 1.25’x1.25’ case. You can conveniently carry the pop-up boards anywhere you want, whether to the beach or a tailgate. PROS Sturdy, tear-resistant bean bags Lightweight and travel-friendly Durable carrying case CONS Not designed for all weather conditions CHECK ON AMAZON Victory Tailgate American Flag Cornhole Set – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Aside from its cabinet-grade boards, it has eight duck cloth bags. Four have red and white stripes, while the remaining four bags are blue with white stars. PROS High-quality prints Regulation-size cabinet-grade boards Durable draw-string case CONS Boards can’t be personalized CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Cornhole Sets Buying Guide Cornhole is such a simple yet compelling game; it's perfect for any occasion. Anyone can get to play, from the smallest kid to the oldest grandpa. It's pretty easy to set up, and you'll be able to start playing in no time. You can't play the game without a cornhole set, though. As the popularity of the cornhole game grows, so does the number of manufacturers and companies selling cornhole boards and products. Whether you just want to enjoy the game in your backyard or you want to play for professional tournaments, you need to buy a cornhole set that will fit you the best. We will do that through this article- helping you choose the best cornhole set. Most of the cornhole sets will feature a cornhole board and bags. There are a few things you should consider before purchasing cornhole sets. It is also important to remember that some cornhole sets are better than others. This buyer's guide covers all the information you need to choose a cornhole set that will be most suitable for you and your intended purposes. Read on! What to Consider Before Buying Cornhole Sets? Consider your skill level Before you consider factors like surface material and size, it is pretty crucial to pay attention to your skill level. Beginner - if you play cornhole just for fun with your family, or perhaps you've tried playing it at a party, and now you want to buy one for yourself, you're considered a beginner. In this case, you don't need to spend a lot of money on a cornhole set that you will hardly use. Medium - the medium-level corn holders are better than the average cornhole players. If you consider yourself a medium player and want to upgrade your skills, you should invest in a cornhole set approved by American Cornhole Association. (ACA) Professional - professional corn holders are the top enthusiasts of the game, and they possibly know all the ins and outs of the game – from the numerous cornhole slang terms to the whole story of the game. They might have even competed (and won) in a few professional games, with further plans to strive in more competitions. If you consider yourself a professional, it is worth spending a lot more money to get the best cornhole set. Size If you're a professional and take this game seriously, then you will need to get regulation cornhole boards that are 24″ x 48″. And the regulation bean bag toss should be 6 inches square and is required to be filled with corn. These are the recommended sizes by the ACA. And if you are only playing for fun, we suggest you stick with the tailgate size boards. These can be any size, but they usually come in around the 24″ x 36″ mark. You can use these smaller boards on a smaller court, and they are a lot more suitable for younger players. Material Another critical factor to consider is the material because it can significantly affect your gameplay. Although modern Cornhole boards are available in plastic and metal, it is always best to buy traditional wooden boards. And if you're a professional who wants to compete in the league, you will need to buy Cornhole boards made out of plywood because it is the only material the ACA approves. The cornhole bags consist of duck cloth material on one side and microfiber on the other side. Surface The texture of the board surface is also extremely important- it should be smooth and sanded correctly. Otherwise, the bean bags may bounce and slide on the surface, negatively impacting the gameplay experience. How Much Do Cornhole Sets Cost? Depending on many factors, the cornhole set can cost you from as little as $50 to as high as $500. So the price will really depend on how you plan on using it and your skill level. If you're a professional player, it is worth spending at least $300 or even more, but if you only use it with your family and friends, don't spend more than $200. What Are Some Important Features of Cornhole Sets? Carrying Bag Many manufacturers also opt to feature a carrying bag with the bean bags included in cornhole sets. A quality bag will help you keep your bean bags together much easier and allow you to move them around without losing them easily. LED Light Some of the cornhole bags include light-up LED lighting as a feature. This will allow you to enjoy playing the game with your friends and family even when the sun goes down. Waterproof If you usually set up your cornhole boards in the yard and leave them out during the summer, make sure you pick boards and bags made out of waterproof or water-resistant materials. But if you mainly play indoors, then a waterproof design may not matter as much. Design You want to think about the appearance of the board. You can get a basic board and design the board yourself, which will be a lot of fun. Your friends, family, and yourself will be using these boards for years to come. But many people prefer to get completely done boards, with the design already applied. Most designs of the cornhole boards are NFL team and college team logos and the American flag. How Did We Pick the Best Cornhole Sets? To provide our readers with the most precise and accurate information, we spoke with experts about their favorite bags, reviewed the most successful bag brands, and managed to pick out the top cornhole sets. When making the final placement, we have considered the following factors: brand, quality, material, price range, warranty, customer reviews, etc. Every product on our list is individually tested so that you won't have to waste your time and do further research. Conclusion There's no cornhole set that's best for each player; some of them may be perfect for beginners but not for an intermediate player trying to advance their cornhole technique. So the essential rule is to consider your personal needs and preferences before choosing a set. After examining all these factors, you can check out our list of the best cornhole sets for some buying inspiration. | |||||||||||||||||||
20 | 19 | https://www.si.com/review/best-volleyball-knee-pad/ | Volleyball is a great sport popular in high school and college and is even played in the Olympics. This intensive full-body sport sends you running and diving for the ball throughout the game, sometimes leading to accidents and injuries. To keep your knees safe from occasional falls while playing volleyball, you need a pair of premium volleyball knee pads that will protect you from long-term damage. Check out the ones we have rounded up below to find the best options in the market that are worth investing in. The four pairs of kneepads on this list are the finest that money can buy because they: Have moisture-wicking properties to keep your knees dry Are not bulky yet offer enough protective cushioning Will not slip down your legs while you're playing | Premium Volleyball Knee Pad Mizuno Volleyball Knee Pad – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon No one likes bulky volleyball knee pads that prevent you from moving freely. These knee pads are designed with medium protection and are ideal for club, high school, and college-level athletes. Made with a blend of polyester, rayon, and elastic, these volleyball knee pads provide the right amount of stretchability to move freely. The VS-1 padding gives complete protection to the knees from high-impact falls. These low-rise pads have a no-fold design, so you won’t have to keep pulling them up during the game. PROS VS-1 padding in high-impact zone Available in small, medium, and large No-fold design CONS May wear quickly CHECK ON AMAZON Bodyprox Volleyball Knee Pads for Junior – Runner up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon These unisex volleyball knee pads are the perfect option for ensuring that young players are adequately protected while they’re performing. The anti-slip material is lightweight to prevent limiting a child’s range of motion, but they’re still breathable. The volleyball knee pads are made of high-density foam to prevent injuries and give your knee cushioning against impact. The breathable fabric is stretchy, yet sturdy, with an ergonomic design for complete freedom of movement. PROS Available in two different sizes Unisex design 360-degree protection around the knees Ergonomic design with cushioning for maximum protection CONS Fabric may irritate skin CHECK ON AMAZON Nike Essential Volleyball Knee Pad – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Playing a sport and getting sweaty go hand in hand. But that can also make you uncomfortable over time, impacting your performance. These volleyball knee pads are designed with a Dri-Fit liner to help wick moisture away and keep athletes cool and dry. The ergonomic knee sleeves have a streamlined look and an ergonomic design to give your knees the protection they need during an intense game. These knit volleyball knee sleeves are available in three sizes and two different colors for a custom fit. PROS Streamlined minimalist design Moisture-wicking Dri-Fit liner High-density protective foam pad construction CONS May wear quickly CHECK ON AMAZON ASICS Unisex-Adult Ace Low Profile Knee Pad – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Playing sports and not-so-fresh athletic gear tend to go hand in hand. These knee pads are designed to prevent odor buildup. Plus, they have dual-density padding and a 360-degree design to provide complete protection around the knees. The cotton, rubber, and nylon blend gives the volleyball knee pads excellent stretchability so that you can move without restriction during the game. The low-profile volleyball knee pads have an ergonomic design for a secure fit. The pull-on closure makes it easy to slip on the knee sleeves and take them off with ease. PROS Anti-microbial fabric construction Dual-density padding Cotton-blend material composition CONS Inconsistent sizing CHECK ON AMAZON | Volleyball Knee Pads Buying Guide For a casual game at the beach, volleyball knee pads aren’t really a thing. However, when you take things up a notch and it gets professional, that’s when you wouldn’t want to go to a volleyball game without appropriate gear. In this section, you’ll find out why is it important to wear volleyball knee pads and how can you find the best ones out there! Why Do You Need a Volleyball Knee Pad? While not all professional players wear volleyball pads, many do! But those who wear them, do it for a reason. You can never be too careful from the inevitable scratches and scrapes but it’s always a good idea to wear volleyball knee pads and be on the safe side of things. Moreover, depending upon the requirement and position of each player, there are a couple of volleyball knee pads out there and you must choose the one that best fits your needs; such as for setters, liberos, and youth players. Should I Wear a Volleyball Knee Pad? While wearing a volleyball knee pad is not an absolute necessity and you may have been fortunate enough to not come across an accident, it’s still a good idea to get used to them. Wearing them protects you from various types of injuries that may affect your knees in one way or the other. Here are a few common types of injuries caused in this regard: Torn ACL ACL (anterior cruciate ligament) is the most important knee ligament. You don’t want to tear it down just because you went too far while bending your knee or that you accidentally twisted it. This injury can keep you out for a long time and may even expose you to surgery depending upon its severity. Meniscus tears The meniscus tear may occur due to two reasons; twisting the knee during squatting or with a direct blow to the knee. The latter can occur during volleyball and can be easily prevented by a knee pad! The injury results in swelling, stiffing of the knee and limiting your range of motion. Jumper’s knee Patellar Tendonitis, simply known as the Jumper’s knee, is the result of the rupturing of the patella tendon. It causes stiffness and aching and can easily be prevented with a volleyball knee pad. Chondromalacia patella This problem occurs from injury or overuse of your knee, leading to surgery and ultimately making you unable to play volleyball. The thing with injuries is that they happen suddenly and there’s only regret afterward. That’s why a volleyball knee pad is a must if you want to excel at this game and enjoy your life to the fullest! How Do I Choose the Best Volleyball Knee Pad? Before you go about your purchase of a volleyball knee pad, there are a few important factors to consider that’ll help you in choosing the right fit. Here are a few things to get you going: Size You want to buy a kneepad that fits right or you don’t need one at all! Having a kneepad that’s too tight or too-lose will have you adjusting the pad during the game and you don’t want that. The best way to select a size is by measuring the circumference of your knee. And once you do that, you can use that, map it onto the size chart of the knee pad you like and then go with the right size! Padding The whole point of buying a knee pad is to protect your knees. And how do you do that? With comfortable, just the right amount of padding to keep you safe as well as active! Position Depending upon your position in your volleyball team, you may need a different type of knee pad. If you dive more than the others, your knee pads will have more padding than the others. Similarly, the grip of your knee pads should a bit tighter and firm so as to keep them fixed in their position! Durability You want your knee pads to last for a season as well as the practice games that come along. Otherwise, you’ll just keep adjusting to new knee pads every other month. Therefore, make sure the knee pad you’re going for is a durable one. Breathability Your kneepads should have ventilation and they should have enough breathability to save you from rashes. Plus, the sweating is inevitable but you can minimize the nasty smells if the knee pad has enough room for the air to pass through. This is one of the key factors to consider! How much do volleyball knee pads usually cost? The Volleyball Knee Pads usually cost anywhere between $10 - $50. Some of the products from renowned sports brands may even go higher. However, you can normally get a good pair of sports knee pads for under $50. | |||||||||||||||||||
21 | 20 | https://www.si.com/review/best-skateboard/ | Skateboarding has become one of the most popular means of transportation for kids and adults across the globe. Whether you are a student seeking a product to go around, an adult ready to embrace your inner child, or a skateboarding enthusiast, skateboards can entertain you in all the ways you want. Getting around in a city full of fumes and traffic can be trickier than you think. So, you should choose a perfect fit for yourself before hopping on a board and taking off. Most beginners grab the skateboard that they find appealing without getting into its nitty-gritty. This attitude can make you spend your money on a product that isn’t right for you. We have sifted through several boards and reviewed the top skateboards in the market to help you get your hands on the product that is a good match for you. After reviewing countless boards, we have selected the skateboards on this list as top-of-the-line because they: Have surfaces that are grippy to prevent slipping Feature cool designs on the underside of the board Are easy to maneuver and control | Our Favorite Skateboards Magneto Kids Skateboard – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available with three awesome graphic designs on the back, including our favorite, the ice cream bar, the skateboard features double kicktails coupled with a shallow concave in the middle of the board for added support while skating. Plus, the top deck is covered with high-quality grip tape that sticks to the user’s feet and provides extra traction while your kid is on the move. This newer generation of kids needs a push to go outside and engage in outdoor activities instead of being on their smart devices the whole day. And the perfect tool that’ll both motivate and teach your kid about the importance of outdoor activities is this kid-friendly skateboard from Magneto. PROS Shorter size makes it easier for kids to learn Locally made with premium quality material Seven hard plies of maple ensure durability Consists of polyurethane high traction wheels CONS Wheels could be a lot softer than they are CHECK ON AMAZON PlayWheels Ultimate Wood Cruiser Skateboard – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The deck of this skateboard is thick, sturdy, 21-inch long, giving the beginners enough space to start boarding with some room. The special grip surface and 6-inch width of the deck allow kids to plant their feet firmly and practice balancing hassle-free. It features a single kick-tail that is easy to maneuver and offers a safe way to stop the skateboard. The board is also reinforced with durable wheels and bearings that ensure a smooth ride wherever you go. PlayWheels is an excellent option for kids seeking a themed skateboard to learn to balance. It is designed for kids between the ages of five to ten and features a brightly colored deck with graphics of their favorite superhero. One factor that makes this product stand out is that it provides more control than other skateboards. PROS Has the best length for kids who want to learn to balance Ideal for young children Can sustain 100 pounds Has durable wheels CONS Has a short-term durability CHECK ON AMAZON WhiteFang Skateboard – Best Value 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This skateboard features high-speed wheels to offer super smooth skateboarding and the best balance control to the rider. It also comes with a non-slip, water-resistant surface that gives you a safe experience even in the rain. Other features like 95A high rebound PU bushing and ABEC9 precision bearings make this product ideal for taking sharp turns even at high speed. WhiteFang skateboard is specifically designed for kids and beginners and uses seven layers of Canadian maple deck to ensure strength and durability. It is the best tool for beginners and experienced skaters for learning new tricks. PROS Strong and durable construction Carries load up to 330 pounds Best skateboard for wet conditions Makes smooth turns CONS Not suitable for professionals CHECK ON AMAZON MINORITY 32inch Maple Skateboard – Honorable Mention 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The deck of this skateboard has a meditate concave that allows you to make sharp turns and pull off other tricks. Besides, it is strong enough to support up to 220 pounds. This product is also reinforced with high-performance materials like ABEC-9 precision bearings and 102A PU wheels that provide faster speed. Its affordable price will give you a smooth skating experience on a budget. Minority 32-inch Maple Skateboard is one of the best skateboards made of seven-ply solid rock maple, making it sturdy and durable. This skateboard has passed the maneuverability test on pools, ramps, and streets, which is the icing on the cake. PROS Perfect pocket-friendly mini cruiser Highest quality materials Excellent and safe for pulling off tricks Stable, sturdy, and well-built CONS Has average trucks CHECK ON AMAZON KPC Pro Skateboard Complete – Also Consider 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Owing to its ABEC-bearings with 52mm wheels and black aluminum trucks, the skateboard offers a smooth skating experience on a variety of terrains. Besides, the material of the wheels is way softer than other skateboards on the market. This lightweight board has 7.75-inch width and is easier to control, offering maximum balance support to riders. The KPC Pro skateboard is a high-quality product perfect for pro skaters on a tight budget. It features a 31-inch Canadian maple deck that will offer you maximum control, allowing you to learn new tricks quickly. The product is also robust enough to carry over 200 pounds. PROS Strong and sturdy deck Easy to control and maneuver Best for beginners and professionals Handle weight up to 200 pounds CONS Some people find the graphics boring CHECK ON AMAZON Merkapa Complete Skateboard 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This mini cruiser can carry kids who weigh up to 180 pounds. It also features LED light-up wheels that make this product eye-catching and serve as a safety precaution because the LED stops lighting up if the wheels are too loose. Moreover, the skateboard wheels are made of robust polyurethane materials, offering excellent shock absorption, grip, comfort, and fine abrasion resistance. Merkapa skateboard is another child-friendly product that comes with a 22-inch deck made of heavy-duty plastic. Since this product is light in weight, kids won’t have to struggle while carrying them around. PROS One of the most affordable skateboards for beginners Lightweight and easier to maneuver LED lights and colorful design add more fun to riding Can carry kids and adults up to 180 pounds CONS The deck can bend because it is made of plastic CHECK ON AMAZON Element Section Complete Skateboard 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The deck of this skateboard is made with the Featherlight method, which makes you feel like it is lighter than other boards. The product features aluminum trucks and fast wheels well-suited for skating in rougher pools, streets, pools, and parks. Though it is easy to slide, it also offers more control. Besides, the deck and trucks work in tandem to take all the shocks and trauma, saving your knees and ankles from injuries. Element Section skateboard is popular among beginners and long-time skating hibernators seeking a way to experience skateboarding again. This product boasts a cool red, black, and white theme with the names of natural elements printed on its deck bottom. Besides, it is durable enough to last for an entire season of tough ramp and concrete sessions. PROS Faster than its counterparts Easier to control Eye-catching design Strong and durable CONS Not ideal for advanced street tricks CHECK ON AMAZON Aceshin Complete Pro Skateboard 8 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The deck of this Aceschin Pro Skateboard is built with 9-ply solid maple, which can support up to 220 pounds. It is reinforced with super smooth wheels with PU bushings and ABEC-7 bearings that allow you to navigate through cities or the countryside smoothly. On top of that, it comes with black grip tape that provides a stable and robust grip while skateboarding. If you are looking for a high-rated skateboard made with the finest quality materials, then the Aceschin Pro skateboard is perfect. This concave-shaped product is considered the best board for pulling off basic tricks like 360s, OL action, and more. PROS Support up to 220 pounds Made with the highest quality materials Smooth and safe riding Ideal for tricks CONS The grip tape peels after prolonged use CHECK ON AMAZON | Skateboards Buying Guide Every skateboard mentioned above comes with its own set of features. So, it is always advisable to scrutinize the entire market before spending your hard-earned money on a skateboard. You must always pick one that suits your skillset and your budget. If you purchase a skateboard for the first time, it can be an overwhelming experience. This guide will shed light on essential factors that can help you make an informed decision and get your hands on the best skateboard. What Factors Should You Consider Before Choosing a Skateboard? Deck size Look for a skateboard with a deck width proportionate to the size of your shoe. If your shoe size ranges between 6.5 to 9 inches, the deck should be 7.5 to 8 inches. The deck size also varies depending upon the surface you will be riding on. Generally, a deck of 8-inch wide and 30-inch long is considered suitable for most people. However, wider boards are perfect for beginners as they offer the best balance control and allow you to have a firm standing position. Trucks The size of the trucks depends on your deck size. If the length of the axle matches the deck width, it will ensure the trucks will fit the broadness of the board. Thus, the proper alignment will lead to the smooth sliding of the wheels. Wheels Wheels determine the speed limits of your mini cruiser. Typically, the best skateboard comes with mid-sized wheels that fall in the range of 52 mm to 54 mm are easier to be fixed on the trucks, eliminating the need for a riser pad. However, boards with wheels bigger than this range require a riser pad to sit beneath the trucks to offer swift turning. Bearings Bearings are the key to spinning the wheels. The inner diameter of the bearings of a standard skateboard is 8mm. You should also consider the ABEC rating system of the bearings as it determines their tolerance as well as physical limit. Besides, you also have to keep the bearings clean and oiled to maintain them and extend their durability. How to Choose Your Size in Skateboards If you are purchasing a skateboard for the first time, you probably don’t know which size is perfect for you. Typically, skateboards are available in four different sizes such as: Micro-skateboard This skateboard is suitable for kids aged around five years, having a shoe size of 3 or less. The width of these mini cruisers usually falls between 6.5 to 7 inches, while their length may range between 27 to 28 inches. Mini-skateboard This skateboard is popular among children between 6 to 8 years old with a shoe size of 4 to 6. The width of this variant is seven inches approximately, while its length is usually around 28 inches. Mid-sized skateboard The mid-sized skateboards are ideal for individuals between 9 and 12 years old with a shoe size of 7 to 8. Their width is usually around 7.5 inches, while their length can be nearly 28 inches. Full-sized skateboard These skateboards are preferred by teenagers with a shoe size of 9 or more. The width of this sports equipment usually lies between 7.5 to 8 inches, while their length ranges between 29 to 32 inches. Final Words Skateboarding is not a sport that you can learn quickly. You have to invest a lot of time and effort to get adept at basic skills like balancing and some tricks. Getting the right skateboard can make all the difference in your learning and skating experience. We hope the products we have reviewed and our buying guide help you choose the perfect skateboard that meets your expectations. | |||||||||||||||||||
22 | 21 | https://www.si.com/review/best-longboard/ | Longboarding involves a vast range of skateboarding styles. The longer-than-usual skateboards come in various shapes and sizes, adapted with plenty of optimized features. The most common are drop-throughs, pintails, drop-downs, and dancing longboards. More specialized varieties include downhill, freeride, and pumping boards. With so many options available, choosing a good board for your size and level of skateboarding can be overwhelming. We’ve simplified the process for you by rounding up an incredible selection of longboards to choose from. Check out our top picks below and a complete guide on choosing a longboard to match your style. After reviewing a wide range of boards, we have identified the longboards on this list as being of the highest quality because they: Are made from premium, beautiful hardwood Have sand grit grips to provide stability Feature smooth-gliding wheels | Our Favorite Longboards Magneto Kicktail Cruiser Longboard – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This bamboo longboard is an excellent option for beginners and pros alike. The hard maple deck is durable and features a sand grit finish providing a good grip for your feet. The board is designed for cruising with a stable deck and less flexibility, making it easy to ride. The longboard weighs 8 pounds and has a load capacity of 275 pounds. Great for cruising, the board features high rebound bushings (medium stiffness) and gravity cast aluminum trucks that are strong and durable. PROS The wheels are soft for extra grip when turning Rides smoothly over rough roads Kicktails make the board functional for all types of riding styles Waterproof, anti-slip grip for safety CONS The length of the board is not great for portability CHECK ON AMAZON APOLLO Longboard – Best Value 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon If you’re a cost-savvy shopper that doesn’t want to spend a bunch of money on their purchase, then you should look at the brand-new model of the APOLLO Longboard. It is equipped with a 39-inch deck that’s manufactured from a three-layered bamboo for high strength and maximum stability. The low-end center of gravity makes this option ideal for both beginners that are joining the world of longboarding and experienced users that want to level up their cruising. On top of everything, it even comes with a convenient T-tool, so you can easily customize the truck stiffness on your longboard while on the go. In terms of colors, you can choose between a couple of intriguing options, including Nauro, Molokai, Galoa, Nevada, and a ton more. PROS Designed by professional skaters Incredibly durable and reliable CONS Needs better grip tape CHECK ON AMAZON WiiSHAM Drop Down Longboard – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This 42-inch drop-down longboard is ideal for cruising. It is made from 8-layer cold-pressed maple wood with high toughness and weight load. The board is supported by seven-inch aluminum alloy trucks. WiiSHAM’s longboard has a waterproof bottom printed pattern and high-quality PU wheels for excellent speed and a smooth ride. However, the board lasts longer as a cruiser. Its durability may not be as good if you are doing a lot of tricks or hard riding. PROS The slightly lower deck is great for stability Suitable for a variety of skateboarding styles High-friction and waterproof Anti-slip grip for safety CONS Might not be durable for hard riding CHECK ON AMAZON Junli Freeride Longboard – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This Junli longboard is built for freestyle, downhill, and speed. Its wide turning radius makes it great for developing strength and balance regardless of your experience level or age. The board is manufactured from 8-ply cold press maple wood with a maximum load of 330 pounds. It is supported by responsive 7-inch aluminum alloy trucks for control and stability. However, if you are planning some advanced riding, opt for a board with higher quality bearings and wheels because this one is more suited to beginners. PROS No assembly required Each board comes with an all-in-one T-tool Waterproof Anti-slip grip for safety Available in 12 different designs CONS Not suitable for advanced riding CHECK ON AMAZON Retrospec Zed Longboard 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon With 18 designs to choose from, Retrospec’s Zed pintail longboards promise a smooth cruise around town. The classic surfboard-shaped longboard is made from 8-ply Canadian maple. The longboard features sturdy 7-inch aluminum trucks designed for high speed and running accuracy. It also incorporates a bamboo deck, providing extra strength. PROS The board comes fully assembled Shock-absorbent polyurethane wheels and high-speed bearings Pintails with extra deck space, making it suitable for beginners CONS Less stable and harder to brake, slide, and push CHECK ON AMAZON FISH Skateboards Longboard 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This fantastic through deck longboard made from 8-ply, grade-A Canadian maple is suitable for skaters of all skill levels. The board is excellent for downhill, freestyle, and cruise riding. The longboard’s load capacity is 250 pounds with a maximum supporting capacity of 330 pounds, making it suitable for adults and children alike. The board’s unique shape allows for improved balance and push-power without the risk of wheel bite as you carve. It also features a high-friction, anti-slip grip for safety. PROS The board arrives pre-assembled Comes with a skate T-tool to tighten or fix your longboard Available in nine waterproof designs CONS Might indent or crack over time CHECK ON AMAZON PINESKY Longboard Skateboard 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Pinesky’s unique longboard is an all-rounder for cruising, downhill, freestyle, and carving. They are available in 12 extraordinary designs with a good shock absorption system making for smooth riding. The longboard is manufactured with high-speed stainless steel bearings and 8-inch aluminum trucks, ideal for all ages. It is also sturdy enough to sustain a load capacity of 330 pounds. However, the protective wrapping around the board for shipping is not all that protective. Luckily, customer service has received good reviews, and you can contact them if there is any damage or if you receive your longboard without the toolset PROS Includes a skate T-tool to tighten or fix your longboard The low design improves balance and push-power Concave deck increases grip and stability CONS The wrapping around the board isn’t very protective CHECK ON AMAZON Volador Maple Longboard 8 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This drop-through cruiser longboard has been designed for transport around campus and beginner needs. It is lightweight at 6.5 pounds with a load capacity of 250 pounds. The longboard is manufactured with rust-free carbon steel bolts and 7-inch aluminum trucks. It is slightly shorter than some other brands, making it portable and easy to carry. PROS The low design of the board allows for improved balance and push-power The deck has some flexibility to allow for better maneuvering capability The board is available in 10 different designs CONS The slight flex in the board may feel unstable CHECK ON AMAZON | Longboards Buying Guide There is a lot more to a longboard than wheels and a deck. Every component of the longboard will affect your ride including the shape, length, wheel bearings, manufacturing material, and height. Longboards come with a range of different features depending on the type of riding the board is intended for. This longboard buying guide will help you choose the perfect board whether you’re freestyling, flipping, or cruising through town. What to Consider When Buying a Longboard To choose the most compatible longboard for your needs you need to consider the riding style, board design, construction, and components. 4 Longboard Riding Styles Cruising Cruising and carving longboarding is about riding gradually sloped streets and long pushes on flat areas. Downhill This is all about speed and adrenaline. Mostly, you will be in a crouching position on your board to minimize wind resistance and increase stability. If you are new to riding, this is not the best starting option. Freeride Freeride longboarding includes hills with speed, curb hops, and some sliding. You need to have some basic skills to control the board and feel comfortable with high-speed descents. Freestyle Freestyle longboarding is technical and involves board tricks, dancing, and good control skills. Starting with simpler movements is a good way to learn the tricks of riding and advance your skills and confidence on the board. Longboard Design Directional longboards Directional longboards are only designed to go forward. They are mostly used for downhill and commuter riding. Twin (Symmetrical) Longboards Symmetrical longboards can maneuver both ways. They look and feel the same regardless of which way you are facing. These boards are a good choice for freestyle and freeriding. Deck style The deck style of a longboard will influence its stability and how easy it is to foot-brake or push on flat ground. The higher the board is off the ground (e.g. top mount longboards), the higher the center of gravity will be. This results in less stability and more fatigue while pushing and foot-braking. More stable, low-style designs such as drop through and drop deck boards, offer less leverage to toss quick carves. They are also more likely to bottom out on tight turns. Design Features Kicktail longboards Directional longboards usually have kick tails on just one end while symmetrical boards feature the upcurve on both ends. Kick tails are a necessity on freestyle longboards and are useful for last-second curb hops and pedestrian dodges on cruisers. Wheel cut-outs Wheel cut-outs are designed to prevent wheel bites on your longboard. Cut-outs allow you to turn harder because your wheels are less likely to make board contact, preventing you from being thrown off. Concave decks Concave decks offer a better grip. With the edges of the longboard deck being slightly higher than the board’s center, your feet will contour to the shape. This allows a greater contact area with your shoe and more grip. Wheelbase length Wheelbase length influences turning and board stability. Boards with longer wheelbases provide more stability at speed, however, they can’t turn as fast or tight as shorter wheel-based boards. Board flex Board flex is determined by the board material, degree of concave, laminates, and board length. Medium flex maintains stability at speed, provides a slight spring, and offers shock absorption over bumps. Stiff boards with less flex are more stable but less forgiving on bumpy rides. They are best for speed, freeriding, and bombing hills. Longboard construction The most common and inexpensive board construction uses multiple thin sheets (veneers), of maple or Baltic birch wood. The more veneers used, the heavier and stiffer the board is. The most expensive materials for longboard construction are composites such as carbon fiber. These boards are known for their rigidity and light weight, making them suitable for serious downhill riders. Longboard trucks and bushings Longboard trucks attach the wheels to the deck. They allow for turning and pivoting on the axle. Different from regular skateboard trucks, longboards have an inverted kingpin. This makes for better stability and control. They can be adjusted to suit your riding style. Looser trucks are better for turns, while tighter trucks are better for stability at high speed. Changing the hardness of the bushings will also affect the truck pivot. The bushings are the rubber pads between the kingpin, baseplate, and the hanger on a truck. Harder bushings yield a springier return to the center and better resistance for pumping. Softer bushings absorb impact, making turning easier. Longboard wheels The speed and cornering ability of your longboard will largely be affected by the wheels since they provide grip between you and the road. Wheel shape, width, height, and durometer is recommended as follows: Cruising and freestyle longboard wheels can be square or round with a durometer of 75a-80a. Cruising and carving wheel size with a diameter of 75 mm is recommended while freestyle longboards are better with a wheel size of 65-70 mm. Longboard wheels on downhill boards should have square edges with a durometer of 78a-83a. The best wheel size for downhill riding is a diameter of 70-75 mm. Longboard bearings Bearings make your wheels spin. Performing regular maintenance on your bearings will maintain their performance and durability. Remove the bearings, clean, re-lube, and re-install them after every 50 hours of riding (more often if you are riding in rain or wet conditions to prevent rust). Never use household lubricants since they will dry out the bearings, reducing their performance and lifespan. Do not over-tighten your bearings during installation. This can damage them. | |||||||||||||||||||
23 | 22 | https://www.si.com/review/best-tumeric/ | The human body is constantly repairing itself, and it needs proper support in the form of adequate nutrition to do a good job. Although much is said about the benefits of turmeric, still only a few people know that turmeric promotes a healthy inflammatory response in the body, encourages proper joint mobility, optimizes muscle health, and supports the immune system. Thankfully, there is an easy way to consume turmeric on a daily basis, and it’s in the form of turmeric supplements. However, you must steer clear of some types of supplements as they can be harmful due to improper manufacturing processes or inappropriate ingredient composition. To help you make the right choice, we have listed below the top turmeric supplements in 2022. | Hear From the Expert Turmeric has been used for centuries as a spice in Indian cuisine and is now popular around the world. There is conclusive evidence that Turmeric benefits athletes. When athletes exercise vigorously, they produce a high amount of something called free radicals. Free radicals generate dangerous oxidants that cause cell wall damage and decrease the chance of regeneration. Unfortunately, consuming large quantities of energy drinks won’t solve this problem, but turmeric can. Turmeric contains bioflavonoids such as curcumin, bisdemethoxycurcumin, and desmethoxycurcumin. The curcumin in turmeric has potent anti-inflammatory, antioxidant properties that can neutralize and protect your body from harmful free radicals. In addition, turmeric has antibacterial effects to help heal wounds that occur more frequently for athletes. Not to mention, its anti-inflammatory qualities have also been used to treat cancer, Alzheimer’s, and arthritis. By Rajeev Fernando author-image Premium Turmeric Supplements of 2022 Reviewed in Detail Qunol Turmeric Curcumin with Black Pepper – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Bio-enhanced turmeric complex ensures optimal absorption Non-GMO and gluten-free formula Improves your skin health The bio-enhanced turmeric complex in this dietary supplement ensures your body can extract the maximum benefits from each tablet. Diligently sourced from only the highest grade of curcumin on the market, these capsules support healthy inflammation responses as well as joint health benefits. It is designed with innovative hydrosoluble technology that makes it easier to digest, making it suitable for users with sensitive stomachs. The formula does not contain any gluten and is made with non-GMO ingredients. What’s more, each capsule contains 15 mg of black pepper extract, which enhances absorption and increases bioavailability. CHECK ON AMAZON Nutricost Turmeric Capsule – Best Quality 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It contains 2300mg turmeric curcumin per serving Enhanced absorption with Bioperine Gluten-Free Curcumin, the main ingredient in turmeric produced by Nutricost, is thought to have a broad range of biological activities. Using only chemical solvent-free procedures to meticulously extract and standardize turmeric, Nutricost ensures that the whole range of beneficial phytonutrients is delivered in their natural profile, ensuring the highest level of effectiveness. Nutricost turmeric offers a simple and economical way to take advantage of the numerous health advantages that this therapeutic spice has to offer. Each serving contains 2300mg of turmeric (40 Servings Per Bottle). Bottle contains 120 “Veggie” capsules (40 Servings). These powerful turmeric curcumin pills are of superior quality, soy-free, gluten-free and non-GMO. Moreover, this organic turmeric root powder with curcumin is manufactured in a facility that is GMP compliant, and FDA registered. CHECK ON AMAZON Purity Labs Organic Turmeric – Most Absorbent 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Relieve joint and back pain Reduces inflammation and dryness of the skin Helps with digestion Improve memory and brain function Boost your immune and nervous systems This herb is made from the roots of the Curcuma Longa plant and has been used for culinary and holistic health practices in many cultures for centuries. Turmeric contains curcumin, a beta-carotene-rich substance that stimulates your immune system and supports good skin. Because it is rapidly processed in the liver and intestinal wall, your body will not be able to absorb as much as you would want. It has incorporated black pepper in its organic proprietary recipe because black pepper includes piperine, which can help the body absorb turmeric more effectively. This natural composition provides a strong and highly absorbable Turmeric supplement with every serving. It promotes cardiovascular health and normal blood pressure. It stimulates the health of your eyes, skin, and hair. Moreover, it helps you improve your energy and mood. CHECK ON AMAZON BioSchwartz Turmeric Curcumin with BioPerine – Most Versatile 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Contain 1500mg turmeric curcumin per serving including approx. 140mg of curcuminoids Contains 10mg Bioperine for increased absorption Safe formula without allergens, gluten-free, non-GMO, preservative-free, and filler-free Tested by third parties for quality assurance High-quality manufacturing process These turmeric pills contain turmeric curcumin in the amount of 1500mg combined with 10mg of Bioperine. The Bioperine aids in the absorption as well as bioavailability of the formula, ensuring your body gets the most out of these pills. The pills are made with a completely preservative-free, non-GMO, and filler-free formula, so they can be safely consumed by almost anyone. The manufacturing process complies with GMP guidelines in the US, and each batch is tested by 3rd parties as a quality-assurance measure, so you can confidently consume each pill. Also, these pills are completely gluten-free and allergen-free. CHECK ON AMAZON Natures Nutrition Turmeric Curcumin with BioPerine 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Contains 180 tablets Includes 150mg of curcuminoids per serving Does not contain any allergens like gluten, wheat, or soy Vegan-friendly, the capsule is made of cellulose The 15mg Bioperine included in the formulation of this turmeric supplement helps boost absorption by up to 20x, allowing your body to get the most advantage out of it. Each tablet is made with non-allergen gluten-free ingredients, so it is safe to consume by almost everyone. The capsule is made with cellulose, so this dietary supplement is vegan-friendly. Each pill contains a total of a 1950mg turmeric blend that is composed of 1800mg turmeric root and 150mg of the active compound in turmeric called curcumin, providing you the optimal quantity to increase the body’s antioxidant production to reduce inflammation. CHECK ON AMAZON KOS Turmeric Capsule – Contender 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This product is soy, grain, and gluten-free Helps to boost your nervous and immune system A bottle contains 120 counts of dietary supplement If you are on the lookout for an effective and easily absorbent turmeric supplement, then this is the one to get. The KOS Turmeric curcumin supplement not only contains turmeric extract but also contains Bioperine (black pepper). This active ingredient helps to break down the capsules faster for easy absorption and swift results. This product only contains pure organics; it helps to relieve joint pain, arthritis, and morning stiffness. Its powerful blend with Boswellia provides a rich anti-oxidant that promotes joint health and anti-inflammatory responses, improves the immune system and cardiovascular health, reduces stress, and improves acne-prone skin. These turmeric capsules with black pepper are vegetarian friendly, GMP certified, and non-GMO. CHECK ON AMAZON NuVitality Turmeric Curcumin with Piperine – Also Consider 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Contains piperine that provides unrivaled absorption benefits in combination with turmeric Does NOT contain soy, gluten, milk, egg, shellfish, artificial colors, binders or preservatives Developed under strict GMP standards in an FDA registered facility Provides pain relief from arthritis and neuropathy These turmeric capsules come loaded with curcumin that helps with muscle pain, brain function, knee pain, lower back, inflammation, and stiffness. Coupled with black pepper extracts, this excellent supplement has the potential to become a miracle for your cardiovascular health, immune system, acne, and stress. The best part? NuVitality Turmeric pills help with detoxification and carry superior anti-inflammatory characteristics. Also, we love that NuVitality provides a 100% money-back guarantee on these capsules – if you aren’t satisfied, you’ll get a refund. CHECK ON AMAZON NatureWise Curcumin Turmeric 8 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features High-potency formula with 500mg curcuminoids per serving 15mg Bioperine per serving for optimal absorption Includes 105mg organic ginger root for enhanced benefits Gluten-free, vegan-friendly, and non-GMO formula If you are looking for a high-potency turmeric supplement, then this is the one to get. With 500mg curcuminoids per serving, you can give your body a wonderful boost of antioxidants that provide a range of health benefits. To help with absorption, each serving of this dietary supplement also contains 15mg Bioprene black pepper extract that is known to boost the absorption of curcumin by 20x, and 105mg of organic ginger root that can further enhance the benefits provided by curcumin. The tablets are made with a specialized formula so they can be consumed by everyone, containing ingredients that are non-GMO, vegan-friendly, and gluten-free. CHECK ON AMAZON Nature Made Turmeric Curcumin 9 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Low-potency capsules with 47.5mg curcuminoids One tablet per day is easy to consume Gluten-free formula Does not contain any harmful ingredients Supply for four months in one bottle makes it an economical choice You are only required to take one tablet per day of this turmeric supplement, making it very easy to consume. Just one bottle provides enough supply to last you up to four months, so it is a very economical choice. Each capsule contains a total turmeric blend of 500mg, which includes 47.5mg of curcuminoids, the active ingredient in turmeric that’s responsible for providing the antioxidants to relieve inflammation and promote joint mobility. The formula does not contain any preservatives, added color, or artificial flavors, and is made with gluten-free ingredients, making it safe for consumption by many users. CHECK ON AMAZON Pure By Nature Turmeric Curcuminoid 10 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features High-potency capsules with 1,140mg curcuminoids per serving Made with non-GMO vegan-friendly ingredients without any fillers Contains 10mg Bioperine per serving for optimal absorption 90 servings per container There are absolutely no fillers in the formulation of this turmeric supplement, so you can be sure that you are consuming only pure ingredients in each capsule. Each serving provides a whopping 1,200mg turmeric, with around 95% (1,140mg) curcuminoids. This quantity is more than double the daily recommended dose of curcuminoids, at 500mg, which is known to reduce inflammation and optimize gut health. The formula is completely vegan-friendly and is made with non-GMO ingredients. It also includes 5mg of Bioperine per capsule that helps enhance the absorption of this supplement. CHECK ON AMAZON Nature’s Bounty Turmeric Pill 11 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Low-potency supplement with around 95mg curcuminoids per serving Contains 5mg black pepper extract for optimal curcuminoids absorption One tablet per day is easy to consume Does not contain any allergens or artificial flavors/colors Although each serving of this dietary supplement contains 1,000mg turmeric, only around 95mg of that is curcuminoids, the active ingredient in turmeric known for its healing properties. Hence, this is a low-potency supplement that is suitable for users preferring a lower dose. Each serving also contains 5mg Bioperine black pepper extract that helps with optimal absorption of the curcuminoids by the body, effectively maximizing its benefits. You are only required to take one capsule per day of this supplement, making it very convenient to consume. Also, the formula does not contain any allergens like wheat, soy, gluten, fish, or yeast, and CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer's Guide: Finding the Highest-Rated Turmeric Supplements As you approach old age, your body starts to present new health challenges that you must overcome with diet, exercise, or medical intervention. A few major issues that affect most seniors are joint pain, arthritis, inflammation, and compromised gut health. Each individual experiences a unique mix of troubles and requires a more tailored corrective approach, but one thing that seems to have worked for almost everyone is a turmeric supplement. There are many known benefits of turmeric supplements, provided you get the right potency. Turmeric is said to be a rich source of antioxidants, and consuming it in sufficient quantities can help reduce inflammation, improve gut health, and relieve joint pain. There are many other possible benefits as well, making turmeric an amazing supplement to include in your diet. Although all turmeric supplements might look the same, there are key differences that you must consider while sifting through the various choices available in the market. Factors to Consider Here are some of the important factors that define whether a turmeric supplement is suitable for you. Amount of curcuminoids While you might be tempted to opt for a turmeric supplement that claims to provide the most amount of turmeric per serving, it is not the best choice. Instead of focusing on the total quantity of turmeric in a capsule, you should focus on the total quantity of curcuminoids. Curcuminoid is the active ingredient inside turmeric that is responsible for all the healing properties associated with turmeric. Some supplement manufacturers make an effort to ensure a standardized amount of curcuminoids per capsule and list the total quantity at the back. You should check this quantity to ensure you are getting the optimal amount of curcuminoids per serving. As a rule, it is said that at least 500mg per day of curcuminoids is needed to produce any effective healing results in your body, although this might differ according to your individual needs. It’s best to assess your daily curcuminoids requirement by consulting with your GP, and then finding a turmeric supplement that provides that amount. Presence of bioperine Another ingredient that you must look for in a turmeric supplement is Bioperine. This is a black pepper extract that is known to enhance the absorption of curcuminoids by up to 20x, and that’s why most manufacturers ensure to include some quantity of Bioperine in their formula. There is no exact quantity of Bioperine that a turmeric supplement should contain, but it should be proportional to the number of curcuminoids provided. Some supplements will contain around 5mg while others will provide up to 30mg per serving. Of course, opting for a higher quantity is advisable as you would want to promote optimal absorption of the supplement. Other ingredients Some supplements also contain additional ingredients as a way to increase the number of benefits provided by them. One such ingredient that you might come across is ginger root. Ginger root is known to improve gut health, and since consumption of turmeric and Bioperine can be a bit tough to digest for some users, having some ginger root in there might help ease the digestion process. Allergens and additives You must ensure that the turmeric supplement you choose does not contain any allergens that can cause a reaction in your body. Common allergens are gluten, soy, wheat, and nuts. You can verify this information by checking the bottle of the supplement. Also, some supplements contain additives like artificial flavors and colors that are generally unhealthy and should be avoided. Check to ensure that your chosen supplement is free from such artificial additives. Vegan friendly Not all turmeric supplements are vegan-friendly, as the capsule might be made from non-vegetarian materials. If you are vegan, it’s important to verify that the supplement you’ve chosen is vegan-friendly. Manufacturers will usually highlight this fact on their bottles, so it’s easy to verify. Ease of consumption and serving size This is an important consideration to make. Some supplements must be consumed three times a day, while others are one-a-day capsules. Naturally, the one-a-day capsules are easier to consume. Hence, you should choose a supplement that you can realistically and easily incorporate into your lifestyle. Also, the nutritional information at the back is given per serving size, not per capsule. If you plan to alter your intake, make sure you know the number of curcuminoids provided per tablet. That way, you can effectively manage your daily curcuminoid intake by changing the number of capsules you consume per day. Price Range of Turmeric Supplements It can be tough to assess the price range of turmeric supplements as the serving size and recommended consumption frequency varies by each brand. However, if you follow the daily dosage recommended by the manufacturer, you should be able to get a 30-day supply of turmeric supplements for around $20. Some supplements might be a bit cheaper, providing you a 60-day supply for around $30, or a 120-day supply for only around $12. However, beware that the cheaper supplements might contain a lower amount of curcuminoids per serving, so they might not be as effective as the more expensive variants. | |||||||||||||||||||
24 | 23 | https://www.si.com/review/ankle-brace-for-running/ | An ankle brace acts both as a protector and a healer. It protects your ankle bones from any improper movement during running. Also, it helps in healing a sprained ankle and preventing immobilization of the bones and ligaments in motion. These are long stretches of fabric that need to be wrapped around the ankle and the heel for better protection against sprains, torn ligaments, and many such unexpected injuries. In this article, we will explore our best picks further and learn their specialties! It's truly a wonder how a simple piece of fabric can help you run, walk, jog, and even indulge in other heavy-duty exercises and sports. Every sportsperson or athlete needs to have this protective gear. On this account, we have picked out the leading ankle braces in 2022 for you after doing a lot of research work. | What Are the Best Running Ankle Braces of 2022? Bodyprox Ankle Support Breathable Brace – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has an open-heel design for better foot movement Made from neoprene material for enhanced breathability Comes in a universal size of 11” for fitting both feet Reinforced with three strap belts for optimal adjustability If you want an ankle brace that can be wrapped around either foot, you should get your hands on this product. It has multiple Velcro straps, which increases its adjustability level. Moreover, you can wrap the strap around either foot due to its long length of 11”. To wear these braces, all you have to do is fasten the straps around the foot and then around the ankle. Once they are fixed and secured, you need to fasten the larger strap around your ankle. Besides, this protective brace comes with an open heel structure for unrestricted movement of the foot in all directions. It is also made from neoprene breathable fabric, which is capable of retaining the heat and providing cushion support to your ankle tendons. PROS One size fits all Good for chronic and acute ankle injuries Open heel design Breathable material CONS Might not fit in a shoe Can fit too tightly CHECK ON AMAZON TechwarePro Ankle Brace Sleeve – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made from spandex which makes it elastic for a perfect fit Can compress the tendons with a pressure of 20 to 30 mm of Hg Has an open-toe design for better movement of your feet Reinforced with anti-skid properties for preventing accidental slips Arthritis or muscle sprain in the ankle is a major cause of immobility for anyone, especially for athletes and runners. If you are suffering from any ankle bone or muscle injury, you can get this compression sleeve from the market. It’s best for therapeutic healing because its fabric can compress the tendons and muscles with a pressure of around 20 to 30 mm of Hg. In addition, its tight fit around the entire foot and the ankle will help in improving the blood flow. If you are concerned about slipping due to the sleeves, you can let go of the worries. They are made with nylon and spandex to reduce the chances of slipping while playing any game. PROS Multiple colors Strong compression Non slip CONS Can run small/tight Depending on fit, may not reach ankles CHECK ON AMAZON Candy Li Ankle Support Brace – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Manufactured from neoprene material that feels soft against the skin Comes with a crisscross strap design for a better fit around the ankle Equipped with silicone edges to prevent unexpected slips Has a universal fit design for any foot size Some ankle support braces come with a universal fit, and this product is one of them. It can be wrapped around both feet with ease. Its one end is equipped with a loop through which you need to slide in your foot till the ankle. Once secured around your foot, you have to wrap the long brace fabric around your ankle and foot while keeping the heel open. Once the wrapping is complete, you can attach the hook with the loop for a secured fit. Silicone is added to the strap’s edges to make it anti-slip and increase the friction force. PROS One size fits all Non-slip Silicone interior for greater comfort CONS Not as good as tape for ankle inversion Seam can be uncomfortable CHECK ON AMAZON Powerlix Ankle Brace Compression Sleeve – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Have a tight-fit design for improving the joints’ stability Made from anti-slip material to prevent further injuries Backed with flexible design for full-range movements in all directions Can absorb the sweat, thereby keeping your skin dry and cool Suppose you are involved in sports where you need to move your ankle a lot. In this case, having these brace support sleeves will help you relieve the pain from any injury. These sleeves will have a snug fit around your feet and ankles. They will apply the compression forces on the muscles and tendons in a way that can increase the ankle’s mobility. You won’t feel any discomfort after wearing the sleeves due to the high breathability of the fabric. Moreover, their design will offer a full-range ankle movement without causing excess pain in the bones, tendons, or sprained muscles PROS Superior support Aplpies even pressure for relief throughout 100% money back guarantee CONS Lacks true compression fit CHECK ON AMAZON SS Sleeve Stars Ankle Brace 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has an open-toe design for flexible foot movement Equipped with an additional strap for adjusting the tightness Absorb the sweat to keep odors away from your feet Unisexual braces that can be worn both by men and women The ankle straps are mainly used to compress the tendons and muscles to heal any injury and prevent improper joint movement. However, you can customize the compression force limit as per your requirement with this ankle brace strap. If you want to support the ankle bones and tendons, you can wrap this adjustable strap loosely. But to reduce the pain from an ankle injury, you can tighten the strap and increase the compression limit. One of the best features of these ankle straps is that you can use them during any work involving constant ankle movement. They are slim and soft, which is why you can wear them even with boots, sneakers, and other shoes. PROS Speeds up recovery Free support strap Premium quality CONS Not good for small feet CHECK ON AMAZON | CHECK ON AMAZON Running Ankle Braces: Buying Guide Ankle braces are of the utmost importance for those suffering from podiatric problems like a sprained ankle, plantar fasciitis, heel spurs, Achilles tendonitis, and many more. In this guide, we go over the different ankle support braces whose ultimate aim is to comfort and relieve any ankle and foot pain caused due to injury. However, each of them comes with different features, like aesthetic, compressive force amount, adjustability, size, etc. Hence, getting your hands on the best ankle brace for running is not easy, especially when you don't know how to choose the best product. Below you will find all the information you need to have top-quality braces. What Are the Different Types of Ankle Braces? There are two major types of ankle braces you will find in the market — straps, and sleeves. Even though they have the same function, you need to know certain differences between them to choose a worthier product. Ankle brace strap Usually, the straps have an open heel design which increases the range of ankle movements. From the name itself, you can understand that these braces have numerous straps with which you have to secure the protective cover around your ankles and feet. The number of straps can vary from one model to another. Ankle brace sleeve These products are similar to the socks you usually wear. However, they have a tight and snug fit with an open-toe design for providing better comfort to your feet. In addition, the sleeves are highly elastic and can fit around any foot size. Factors and Features to Consider Size First, you need to get an ankle brace that has the right size according to your foot size. For this, measure the length and the circular width of your foot to find the right size. It will ensure that the brace is neither too tight nor loose. Design Secondly, you have to focus on the design of the ankle support braces. As you know, there are two types of ankle support wear, and you need to consider the appearance. Some products usually have a completely black appearance, with no other color or print on the outer surface. On the other hand, you will find some straps or sleeves having stripes or smaller prints in different color combinations. Anti-skid feature No matter whether you are choosing the ankle strap or sleeve, it should have an anti-skid underside. This will prevent any further injury if you fall on the floor all of a sudden. Also, this feature will provide more stability to your stance even if you are suffering from a foot injury. Adjustability strap If you want to buy ankle brace straps for running or doing any other work, you need to check the straps, their durability, elasticity, and their type. For example, in some products, you will have Velcro straps attached to secure the ankle brace around your foot. However, in a few braces, the strap comes with a hook that needs to be connected with the looping structure for having a snug fit. Benefits of Wearing a Running Ankle Brace An ankle brace support can be used to reduce the pain from any recent foot injury like a sprained ankle, hairline fracture, displaced ankle bones, and so on. You can wear the braces to provide stability to the ankle joints while running or doing heavy-duty workouts involving constant foot motion. It will also help you in getting relief from plantar fasciitis, especially during running and walking. Thanks to the adjustable straps, you will be able to provide the exact amount of compression that the tendons in your feet need. Cleaning and Maintenance Cleaning and maintaining protective ankle braces are not rocket science. It's very easy to keep them in healthy conditions, both in terms of material functionality and looks. Here are some tips which will help you in taking proper care of the braces. If they are made from nylon and spandex, you can wash the braces with soap water. However, if silicone or any other material is used, you can spray soap solution on the surface and leave it to dry up completely. Ensure that you are not stretching the adjustable straps too much because that might cause early wear and tear in the ankle brace. Also, you have to make sure that the ankle brace sleeves are not stretched beyond their limit as they will lose their elasticity | |||||||||||||||||||
25 | 24 | https://www.si.com/review/best-compression-sock/ | Compression socks are all the rage these days for athletes, and it isn’t just some fad, either. These socks have actual benefits to the wearer, and they’re used by athletes and those recovering from injuries, too. These socks are much more effective and pragmatic than traditional socks. It’s a wonder why not a lot of people have hopped onto the trend of using them on a daily basis, especially with the best compression socks in 2022 feeling like regular socks, but better. If you want to make your feet and ankles feel great, these socks are great for athletes and office workers alike. From short socks to knee-highs, there’s a compression sock for just about anyone, so don’t be afraid to try them out for yourselves. Here are some of the best compression socks available on Amazon today. | Best Compression Socks of 2022 Reviewed Rymora Unisex Compression Socks – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A premium tailored blend of nylon, polyester, elastane Contains ventilation strips to ensure breathability Suitable for extended use Comes in different colors From the ankle to the knee, the socks’ compression is significantly reduced to avoid muscle soreness after rigorous training or sports activities. Your calves are supported and blood flow is boosted, resulting in more oxygen reaching the muscles of the legs, reducing weariness and cramping. The socks also feature foot and Achilles tendon cushioning to avert blisters and improve comfort. Perforated strips are also supplied in these spots to guarantee proper airflow, prevent chafing, and reduce sweat. When you take them off, there won’t be any marks on your legs. CHECK ON AMAZON CHARMKING Compression Socks – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Knee-high socks Comes in many colors For everyday use Very popular We’re starting off this list with one of the most popular compression socks on Amazon. With over 47,000 ratings and over 4 stars, it’s safe to say that thousands of people are satisfied with these socks. They’re knee-highs, making them great for a variety of situations, and the added coverage gives you compression therapy all the way up to your knees, which is an incredible feeling once you try them out for yourself. One of the best things about these compression socks is the variety available in their store. You have many sets to choose from with many different colors, allowing you to add variety to your everyday look. These socks were designed for casual use, though you can definitely wear them out for jogging or for a sports game, should you feel like doing so. CHECK ON AMAZON Copper Men’s & Women’s Compression Socks – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Nylon-based Imported Best-seller Money-back guarantee While not as popular as the previous item, this set of copper compression socks ended up being a #1 best seller in Men’s Novelty Socks on Amazon at the time of writing. That goes to show how popular this set of socks has become, and how popular the trend of compression socks is as of late. These socks are very similar to the previous one as well, with knee-highs that come in many different colors. These compression socks are made mainly out of nylon and can be machine-washed. They can be used in casual situations or while exercising and feel great to wear. If you’re ever unsatisfied with your purchase, you can also always just get your money back with their own 100% money-back guarantee. CHECK ON AMAZON FITRELL 3 Pairs Compression Socks – Breathable Knee-Highs 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Breathable fabric Comes in four shades/colors Knee-high Friction protection Those previous knee-high compression socks looked great and are loved by many, but there’s one issue with them – they’re not breathable. With a tight fabric covering your lower leg, you may feel hot and bothered. This can feel very uncomfortable when the socks are worn for long periods of time, especially while exercising. For these situations, you’ll want a fabric that allows air to pass through, such as this one. These compression socks may not be as cheap as other pairs of knee-high compression socks, but the extra cost goes into higher-quality materials and breathable fabric. You won’t even know they’re there until you look at them, making them great for jogging, playing sports, and much more. You won’t have many colors to choose from, but that’s a small price to pay for comfort and quality. CHECK ON AMAZON TechWare Pro Ankle Compression Socks – Colorful Ankle Socks 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Ankle-high Comes in a few colors Great for tired feet Relieves pain These compression socks are shorter than the ones we’ve covered so far, and that’s because they’re ankle-high socks. Ankle-high socks are great if you’re wearing slacks, pants, and other long clothing. The socks do have a few colors to choose from, ranging from black, white, and grey to brown and even pink. This allows you to match your socks with your wardrobe more effectively if you’re conscious about fashion. Another neat feature regarding these compression socks is that they can help soothe tired feet. When feet are tired and physically worn out, they swell, which never feels nice. The socks are designed to compress on the swollen feet, making them feel much better. Just be sure to pick the right size, and you’ll enjoy wearing these socks for sure. CHECK ON AMAZON SB SOX Plantar Fasciitis Compression Sock – Open Toe 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Open-toe design Great for indoor wearing Helps relieve pain Great for athletes Open-toe compression socks may look strange to some, but they’re surprisingly useful. If you’re staying at home, then wearing these without shoes or sneakers can feel great, as you have the added balance with your toes while still feeling compression. Aside from this, you could also wear these socks with typical footwear – toes don’t really benefit nearly as much from compression therapy as other parts of your foot, so they don’t really need to be covered. While the socks can be worn indoors, however, the best place to use these socks is in the gym, at a basketball court, or some other place you plan on getting physically active in. You’ll find that your feet feel surprisingly free, and the open-toe design will do wonders for keeping your toes nice and cool. It may take some time to get used to, but you’ll eventually love the feel of these kinds of compression socks. CHECK ON AMAZON Feetures Graduated Compression Sock 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 15-20 mmHg compression Five colors available Knee-high length Moisture-wicking material Feetures Graduated Compression Socks are available in five attractive colors. They are lightly cushioned and offer 15-20 mmHg of compression, lending themselves to a snug fit that never feels too tight. These socks have been designed to reduce the risk of blisters and other issues you may experience with running socks. You can use them as travel socks, office socks, or for basketball and hiking. The seamless toe is comfortable and prevents irritation, and the material helps you keep your feet dry and moisture-free. If you are looking for quality, you’ll want to invest in a pair of Feetures. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Compression Socks Buying Guide Compression socks are definitely great to wear, but you should do more than just buy the easiest available pair of compression of socks you see at the store. This guide should help you find a pair of compression socks you’ll be satisfied with wearing at all times. What Are Compression Socks? A compression sock is a type of sock that is worn on one’s foot like a traditional sock. However, unlike traditional socks, compressions socks apply more pressure on one’s foot and/or leg than usual, which is done for the purposes of compression therapy. This is said to help ease blood flow in the affected areas and help relieve certain joint and muscle pains. Why Is It Important to Have a Pair of Compression Socks? It promotes blood flow When you first put on a compression sock, the first thing you’ll notice is that the sock fits a lot more tightly around your foot and/or leg than a typical sock. This isn’t because the sock is a size smaller than what you ordered - it’s intentionally tight to apply constant pressure on your joints and muscles. Supposedly, the pressure helps ease the veins and arteries in your body, allowing blood to more easily flow throughout your system. Now, you may not think that this is useful for people that aren’t athletes, think again. Everybody who can walk will need their feet and legs to be functioning properly to move around, and by using compression socks, you can keep the blood in your feet flowing properly at all times, minimizing the risk of injury in the future. Of course, if you’re an athlete, you’ll definitely want some form of compression sock or sleeve. Keeping the blood flowing at all times is vital when exercising, as you want your feet to perform at maximum capacity while you’re in the middle of a game or while you’re going out for a jog outdoors. You don’t even need to wear them every day - as long as you wear them when needed, you’ll be able to reap their benefits. In fact, there’s a good chance you won’t notice they’re compressing on your feet while you’re exercising, so there’s no reason why you shouldn’t wear them while playing or working out. It reduces swelling Now, you may think that when we say, “it reduces swelling”, it refers to the tightness of the compression sock literally preventing the skin and muscles to swell. And while this is obviously the case, there’s much more to it than just that. You see, when one uses their legs for long periods of time, their feet start to swell. For most people, this happens immediately, but athletes and people who are active will have it happen after some rest. This swelling isn’t harmful by any means - it’s just annoying in the sense that it can be a little painful. With compression socks, the liquid that causes the swelling will end up being absorbed back by the feet, which will, as mentioned earlier, lessen swelling. So while compression socks do literally make the swelling less apparent, it’s far more effective and permanent than you may think. Things to Consider When Buying Compression Socks Breathability When buying a pair of compression socks, you want to consider how breathable the fabric is. The sock is designed to compress around your feet, which means that there’s less “breathing room” for your feet to feel cool. Most people can get away with any type of compression, as you won’t be doing too much physical activity on any given day. However, athletes may need to worry slightly more when it comes to this factor. You don’t want your feet to feel cramped and hot in the middle of an intense match or game. This is especially true if you’re wearing knee-highs. Knee-high socks are designed to cover your entire lower leg, and some compression socks don’t offer breathability at all, which can make the socks feel cramped to wear on a hot day. Luckily, other knee-highs are made with breathable fabrics while serving as compression socks, though they do cost more comparatively as a result. Length You’ll need to worry about the length of the sock just as much as you have to worry about the breathability, if not more. After all, quarter-high socks will always cover no more than the ankle bone, whereas knee-highs will still feel a little hot to wear in the lower legs no matter how breathable the fabric may be. Length can also be important to consider when choosing socks for fashion purposes, and not practical purposes. The main reason why you’d want to worry about length, however, is because these are compression socks, not typical socks. Compression socks will apply pressure on anything it covers, so knee-high socks will help with blood flow all the way up to your knee, whereas low-cut socks, for example, only cover your ankle and a little more. Be sure to consider what parts of your foot you want to be compressed before choosing an ideal length. Types of Compression Socks Athlete socks Athlete socks are socks that are designed to be worn by athletes and those who are physically active. They are made with breathable fabrics and are great for strenuous activity. They are also designed to minimize friction between the skin and the sock fabric. Casual socks Casual socks are more everyday-use than athlete socks. They’re not meant to be used in intense scenarios, and so they often don’t need to be that breathable or have fancy features. This results in casual compression socks being slightly cheaper than their athlete counterparts. | |||||||||||||||||||
26 | 25 | https://www.si.com/review/best-boxer-shoes/ | Boxing shoes can have a surprising influence on your success in the ring. A boxer needs their feet to be as swift as their fists during a match, and boxing shoes ensure proper balance, grip, and support. These are not your regular running shoes. They are manufactured with the sole purpose of helping boxers perfect their footwork and give them an edge on the canvas. Boxing shoes provide support for the feet, improve traction to avoid slippage, and make a boxer’s movements around the ring seamless. These shoes are meant to be lightweight, so they don't hinder a boxer’s footwork combinations. By the end of this guide, you'll know a lot more about boxing shoes, enough to make an informed purchase for yourself. So, let's review our carefully-curated list of the leading boxing shoes for 2022. We have chosen these boxing shoes and ranked them above all others because they: Provide an excellent grip Offer sturdy ankle support Are comfortable and well-padded | Comparing the Elite Boxing Shoes of 2022 Venum Boxing Shoe – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made of durable synthetic materials Rubber outsole for enhanced grip and stability Well-bonded insole to prevent slippage Comes in multiple colors If you want a pair of boxing shoes that offer style and function, these Venum boxing shoes are for you. These shoes have a stylish design that makes the wearer stand out without compromising on comfort. The best part? They’re available in multiple colors. These imported, 100% synthetic boxing shoes are made from three materials: Glossy PU (patented), PU Flex, and Mesh Honeycomb. It has a rubber outsole that increases the shoe’s grip, durability, and stability. The insole is bonded to the rest of the shoe well, so you don’t have to worry about slipping. It’s also important to note that the shoe size will be a half-size larger than standard US-sizing. So, if you normally go with a US size 9, you should be ordering a size 8.5. CHECK ON AMAZON Otomix Boxing Shoe – Most Durable Boxing Shoe 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Well-padded for enhanced comfort Rubber sole provides exceptional grip Wide foot box Enhanced ankle support These shoes can withstand the rigor of heavy use without tearing. They are well-padded for comfort and light on the feet. The Otomix Shoes work for all combat sports—boxing, MMA, weightlifting, or martial arts! Otomix Boxing Shoes are made from 100% polyester with a rubber sole and lightweight, durable fabric. They have an updated stingray featuring a wide toebox—ideal for those with wide feet. Also, these shoes come with nice ankle support and a thin sole that provides great grip. CHECK ON AMAZON Ringside Boxing Shoe – Best Unisex Boxing Shoes 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Gender-neutral design Available in several color options Gorgeous leather-vinyl finish Low-top ankle for easy movement The Ringside Diablo boxing shoe is not gender-specific, so be careful when selecting a size. You may want to measure your foot before buying. Once you’ve determined the right size, trust that these shoes are comfortable and long-lasting. Plus, they’re available in multiple colors. Style can influence your confidence and personality in the ring. These shoes are contemporary with a patented, leather-vinyl finish and a low-top ankle that allows for easy movement. These shoes are made with a breathable nylon mesh pattern and a non-slip rubber sole for added comfort and safety. These offer a great bang for your buck but watch out for the right size. CHECK ON AMAZON Adidas Boxing Shoe – Best Budget Boxing Shoes 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made of durable synthetic materials Open-mesh breathable shoes Gum-rubber outsole for impeccable grip Low-profile EVA midsole for comfort These boxing shoes from Adidas are an affordable option with an exceptional comfort level. The minimalistic, sleek design reflects what we love about Adidas. Made up of 100% synthetic materials, these single-layer, open-mesh shoes offer superior traction. They’re super lightweight and have a gum rubber outsole, offering reliable grip. The low-profile EVA midsole provides cushioned heels and light, easy midfoot. The suede overlays also contribute to a secure and comfortable fit. Moreover, they offer good breathability and ventilation, keeping your feet cool and dry throughout the match/training session. CHECK ON AMAZON Everlast Boxing Shoe 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Available in three color options Rubber sole for enhanced grip Innovative tread design Additional ankle support Everlast boxing shoes are built to offer unmatched grip in the gym and ring. They are lightweight, comfortable, and feature a hybrid boxing shoe design for both gym and in-ring use. They’re available in black, blue, and red color options, so you can pick one that appeals to you the most. Everlast Top Boxing Shoes have a rubber sole and a multi-purpose design, so you won’t have to purchase separate shoes for training and matches. These shoes offer maximum traction, flexibility, and support—thanks to the innovative tread design that prevents accidental slipping and ensures seamless side-to-side movement. The additional ankle strap also improves stability and support. CHECK ON AMAZON Title Boxing Shoes 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Gorgeous finishing Synthetic material build quality Durable nylon fill Available in multiple sizes and colors Title boxing shoes are designed to foster quick movement in the ring. These shoes are available in several eye-catching finishes and are crafted to help you move quicker and evade your opponent’s punches. Budget-friendly, lightweight, and massively comfortable, these shoes are an excellent choice when it comes to your next pair of boxing shoes. Made from synthetic leather and tight weave nylon fill, these shoes are super comfortable and fit like a glove. They are available in multiple sizes, colors, and can serve as an ideal pair if you want high-quality boxing shoes at an affordable price. CHECK ON AMAZON | Buying Guide: Boxing Shoes Most of us have probably read or heard about Muhammad Ali’s immortal quote, “Float like a butterfly, sting like a bee." This quote vouches for the importance of precise footwork in boxing. Delivering a stinging punch with your glove is not enough. You have to stay light on your feet and practically "float" to evade your opponent’s punches and ultimately tire them down before knocking them out to win the match. But what lies at the core of floating effortlessly in the ring? A pair of good boxing shoes. A well-supportive pair of boxing shoes helps boxers stay light on their feet to improve maneuverability. The aim of this buying guide is to inform you of the specifics of boxing shoes, so you can identify the most suitable pair of boxing shoes for you. What Are the Different Types of Boxing Shoes? Boxing shoes are divided into three types based on how far up the leg they go. There are low-top boxing shoes, mid-top boxing shoes, and high-top boxing shoes. Low-top boxing shoes Low-top boxing shoes are only as high as the ankle. They are not exactly ideal for offering leg or calf support. What they lack in leg support, they make up in speed and lightweight maneuverability. Mid-top boxing shoes As the name implies, mid-top boxing shoes end at the middle point between high-top shoes and low-top shoes. They extend higher than low-tops, at two or three inches above the ankle, but fall short of the height of high-tops. They offer a balance between support and speed. High-top boxing shoes High-tops offer the most leg and ankle support. They are ideal for boxers that are always on the offensive. The extra leg support helps them stay on their feet in the event of a punch that catches them off guard. It also helps them stay on the front by planting the feet firmly on the ground to deliver devastating punches. What Things Should You Consider Before Buying Boxing Shoes? There are many options to choose from, and all of them have subtle and marked differences to distinguish them. Here are a few factors you should primarily consider before making a choice. Comfort Comfort should be one of the most important factors when choosing a pair of boxing shoes. A good pair should offer maximum comfort to the wearer. Any discomfort caused by your boxing shoes would create unnecessary distraction whether you are sparring in the gym or slugging it out with an opponent in a real fight. Low-quality materials and an improper fit can also lead to foot sores and other problems. Therefore, before buying a pair, check that the shoe fits perfectly. It should be neither too big nor too small. A shoe that is too small will get your toes cramped up, and a big shoe will affect grip and traction. Weight Boxing shoes are generally lightweight for quick reaction times and fast footwork. However, some shoes are ultra-lightweight, which makes them even more suitable for boxers looking to improve their agility. The weight of your shoes can have a huge impact on the speed of your footwork, so opt for shoes that are the most lightweight. Sole The sole of the boxing shoe is the point of contact between the boxer’s feet and the canvas. It needs to be made in such a way that it gives the boxer a solid grip to avoid slipping. The thinner the shoe’s sole, the more firm the shoe's grip will be. Ankle support Your ankles will experience constant stress and pressure from the weight of jumping and constant movement. Ankle protection and support should be prioritized. Boxing shoes with ankle straps perform well on this front, as the ankle strap provides added support to reduce the risk of injury. Breathability The chances are high that your feet will be packed inside shoes for hours at a time. Breathable boxing shoes will reduce the temperature inside the shoes by allowing air to enter and leave. This will reduce sweating around the feet, offering a more comfortable experience, so you can keep boxing for hours without feeling any noticeable discomfort in your feet. Aesthetics The final factor to consider is the aesthetics of the shoes. An aesthetically pleasing shoe design does not necessarily translate to better performance, but it does help you make a statement and catch the attention of fans. Plus, you might be able to box better if you feel good about what you're wearing. What Are the Benefits of Wearing Boxing Shoes? This is like asking what the benefit of wearing soccer shoes is for a soccer player. The answer is straightforward. These shoes are specialized for combat fights in a boxing ring. They provide the support you need to perform at your highest level. Here are some specific benefits offered by boxing shoes: Balance Wearing boxing shoes helps improve a boxer’s balance the same way the cleats on soccer shoes help soccer players run on grass without falling. Ankle support Wearing boxing shoes supports the ankles of boxers by reducing the stress of constant movement and jumping. Ease of movement Boxing shoes are usually lightweight. This makes it easy for boxers to move quickly and alternate stances seamlessly. How Much Do Boxing Shoes Cost? Various factors influence the price of boxing shoes, such as brand name, aesthetics, and materials. On average, low-end boxing shoes cost between $50 and $200. The price of high-end shoes could be as high as $2,000 - even higher for some recognizable brands. | |||||||||||||||||||
27 | 26 | https://www.si.com/review/hand-wrap-for-boxing/ | Boxing is an intense sport that requires a lot of commitment, discipline, strength, and skill. Your primary weapons are your hands that you use to throw punches, hoping each one will land on your opponent in order to win the game. To protect your hands, you must wear boxing hand wraps underneath your boxing gloves. But, not all hand wraps are made equal. There are many factors that you must consider while picking out a pair for yourself like stretchability, breathability, and comfort, to name a few. To help you choose, we have listed the most-premium boxing hand wraps for 2022 below. These hand wraps promise to deliver exceptional support and stability to keep your hands and wrists sufficiently protected with excellent material quality and easy-to-wear design. After reviewing countless products, we have selected our seven favorite boxing hand wraps because they offer the ultimate: Protection and support Comfortable wearing experience Sweat- and moisture-wicking material | Comparing the Top Boxing Hand Wraps for 2022 Sanabul Elastic Professional 180 inch Handwrap – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Tons of color options to choose from Tested by professionals for durability 180″ wraps Fast-drying and breathable The long 180-inches length of these boxing hand wraps ensures you can provide sufficient coverage to your hands regardless of your unique wrapping style. The wraps offer adequate stretchability so they are easy to use and retain their shape for a long time. The wraps are made with high-quality polyester material that ensures phenomenal breathability to prevent sweat and odor buildup, dry up quickly after you take them off, require infrequent washing, and keep your hands cool and sufficiently dry during training sessions. The wraps have a semi elasticity so they feel very comfortable to wear, while the polyester material provides long-lasting durability. CHECK ON AMAZON Venum Boxing Hand Wrap – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Stretchable cotton material for improved comfort Velcro fasteners for better security Improved hand protection The excellent variety of colors available in these boxing hand wraps allow you to pick a pair that best matches your style. The thumb straps make these hand wraps very easy to use, while the sufficiently thick cotton material ensures your hands remain well-protected against impact damage. These hand wraps provide enough elasticity so you can easily wrap them according to your style, without running out of fabric. The cotton material used to make these wraps feels extremely comfortable against your skin, while the velcro fasteners ensure a secure fit. This pair comes in two sizes, long for knuckle/wrist support and short for only knuckle support, so you can choose one that best matches your needs. CHECK ON AMAZON Ringside Mexican Style Boxing Hand Wrap – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Tons of colors options to choose from 180″ length with elastic cotton Thumb loop for an excellent fit The excellent 180-inches length of these boxing hand wraps, combined with the slightly elasticized cotton material, allows you to completely wrap your hands and wrists with ease. Also, the soft cotton fabric feels very comfortable against your skin. The integrated thumb loop in these handwraps provides enhanced safety, while the easy-to-use hook and loop closing mechanism ensure you can take off the wraps within seconds. The hand wraps are made with cotton material that is amazingly breathable, so it keeps your hands cool and dry, and they are also machine washable, making them very easy to keep clean. Also, you have the option to choose between a variety of color options, so you can pick one that best suits your style. CHECK ON AMAZON Hayabusa Boxing Hand Wrap – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Ultra-soft with just enough stretch Comes with 2 wraps, each at 180″ length Washer and dryer safe Thumb loop for a better fit The perfect combination of cotton and elastane materials used to make these boxing hand wraps provides the perfect stretchability, making them easy to wear and providing necessary stability to your hands and wrists while keeping the fabric soft enough to feel comfortable against your skin. The hook and loop closure mechanism on these hand wraps is extra wide, allowing you to easily and securely fix them in position. The wraps also feature an integrated thumb loop that makes them easy to put on. Keeping these wraps clean is very easy too, as they are safe for both the washer and the dryer although you might need to place them in a mesh bag to prevent damage during the washing/drying cycle. CHECK ON AMAZON Jayefo Padded Speed Wrap 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Used for all combat sports 3-year warranty Machine wash friendly Extra padding for the knuckles The wrist strap on this pair of boxing hand wraps is extra-long, providing you more leverage to achieve a superb fit and while delivering excellent wrist support. The wraps are made with lightweight fabric so you can move with greater efficiency, while the half-finger design delivers exceptional grip. These wraps feature dual-layer gel-based padding for phenomenal knuckle protection, allowing you to train for hours even on a heavy bag. You can easily wash these wraps in the washing machine and they will come out looking good as new. The wrist strap measures an exceptional 36-inches, ensuring that your wrist remains as stable as possible throughout the training session. CHECK ON AMAZON Hawk Training Hand Wrap 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Velcro closure for a better fit Paddle knuckles Machine washable 3-year warranty These brilliantly padded boxing hand wraps provide excellent shock absorption to protect your knuckles, allowing you to box pain-free for a longer duration. The overlock stitching ensures long-lasting durability, even with regular and intensive use. These boxing hand wraps have a velcro closure that makes them very easy to put on and take off, while the wrist strap has been kept extra long to provide exceptional support and stability to prevent injury. The breathable cotton fabric material dries very quickly, preventing the buildup of sweat and odor, and feels very comfortable against your skin. The wraps are also machine washable, making them very easy to maintain. CHECK ON AMAZON Everlast Hand Wrap 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Machine washable Thumb loop for more secure wrapping Meets both amateur and professional requirements The combination of nylon and polyester materials used to make these boxing hand wraps ensures they are incredibly durable and machine washable, making them reliable and easy to maintain. Both the thumb loop and the velcro closing mechanism make it super easy for you to securely fix these hand wraps around your hands and wrists. The 120-inch length allows most users to achieve a stable and well-padded wrap, regardless of wrapping style. The fabric material is sufficiently breathable and to keep your hands cool and dry throughout the practice session, and has received antimicrobial treatment to prevent bacteria and odor buildup. CHECK ON AMAZON | Buying Guide: Boxing Hand Wraps Your hands can use all the protection you can give them during boxing practice. Whenever you throw a punch, your hands are ultimately the point of impact. Without sufficient protection, your hands can become injured or bruised, and you definitely want to avoid that if you wish to train consistently. Although boxing gloves provide plenty of padding to protect your hands and wrists, you still need more layers for adequate cushioning. This is why boxing hand wraps are absolutely essential for a boxer of any skill level to wear. Boxing hand wraps are a simple piece of long fabric that you can use to wrap around your hands and wrists for added protection and stability. However, not all hand wraps are made the same. In fact, there are many factors that you must consider before opting for a pair. What Makes for a Great Pair of Boxing Hand Wraps? Fabric quality, durability, and comfort Usually, hand wraps are made of either 100% cotton material or a combination of materials like cotton-elastane or nylon-polyester. All of these material combinations are good when it comes to hand wraps, as they provide phenomenal durability and feel comfortable against your skin due to their soft texture. If you want superb durability, opt for hand wraps that have reinforced stitching. Breathability Breathability is among the most important factors to consider when choosing the best pair of boxing hand wraps. Remember, you will be wearing these hand wraps under your regular boxing gloves, so your hands are bound to sweat a lot. With a breathable fabric, the hand wraps will pass through sufficient air to keep your hands cool and dry. Also, hand wraps with excellent breathability also dry quicker, reducing the onset of bacteria and odor buildup. Some manufacturers offer hand wraps that have gone through antimicrobial treatment as an added measure to prevent the buildup of bacteria and odor. If you don’t wish to wash your hand wraps too frequently, perhaps a pair that has received antimicrobial treatment is a perfect choice. Stretchability It can be tough to put on boxing hand wraps if the material is not adequately stretchy. You need some stretchability in the fabric to ensure it is wrapped securely around your hands and wrists. Without stretchability, you will have loose areas that can easily result in the hand wrap unraveling during your practice session. Usually, hand wraps take this factor into consideration and are made with a good combination of materials that provides sufficient stretchability. This combination can be cotton plus elastane, nylon plus polyester, or any other. Factors to Consider Before Buying Boxing Handwraps To help you make an informed buying decision, we have narrowed down the following key points that you must take into consideration while choosing a pair of boxing hand wraps. Length The length of boxing hand wraps depends entirely upon the size you choose. The maximum size you will find in the market is usually around 180-inches. This size is standard for a boxer of any skill level and allows you to easily wrap around your hands and wrists regardless of your unique wrapping style. It also provides impeccable wrist support, keeping your wrists stable to minimize the risk of injury. If you are looking for hand protection without wrist protection, then a 120-inches long hand wrap should also fulfill your needs. You will have enough fabric to completely cover the key areas of your hands for impeccable protection. Closure system Most, if not all, boxing hand wraps come with a velcro-based hook and loop closing system that allows you to easily open and close the wraps with just one hand. The velcro keeps the wrap securely fixed in position, ensuring it does not unravel during your practice session. Thumb loop If you are looking for hand wraps that can be fastened very easily and securely to your hands, then you must opt for ones that are offering a thumb loop. A thumb loop keeps the wrap hooked to the thumb, making it much easier to ensure a tight fit on your hands as you wrap the fabric all over your hands and wrists. Type: instant or full? If you want basic knuckle and wrist protection, then there are some quick options available. These options have a modern style and feature gel-based padding to provide excellent protection to your knuckles. Also, wearing these speed wraps is also very easy and quick, as you are only required to slide in your hand and close the wrist strap, taking only a few seconds to complete. The wrist strap is kept extra-long, usually measuring around 36-inches, and wrapping it around your wrists provides matchless stability during practice sessions and matches, helping prevent injuries. However, if you would like to stick with the old-fashioned hand wraps, then you have both the 180-inches option and the 120-inches option available at your disposal. These full options provide impeccable protection, although the smaller option might not appeal to boxers looking for adequate wrist coverage. Machine washable You are supposed to wear boxing hand wraps under boxing gloves, and this is bound to cause your hands to sweat a lot. The hand wraps will absorb most of the sweat, keeping your gloves relatively sweat-free. This means the hand wraps will need frequent washing, and this can be a hassle unless you get a pair that is made with machine-washable materials. Most hand wraps are machine washable, but still, make sure that the pair you choose can be machine washed as well. Boxing Handwraps Price Range You can easily get a pair of boxing hand wraps for as little as $6.99, although this is on the cheaper end of the price range. If you are looking for something pricier, then you can also find hand wraps for around $14.99. There is no correlation between the price of hand wraps and their quality, at least as far as the products we have listed above are concerned. Hence, you must evaluate each pair of hand wraps based on their individual merits. | |||||||||||||||||||
28 | 27 | https://www.si.com/review/pull-up-assist-band/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
29 | 28 | https://www.si.com/review/pulldown-machine/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
30 | 29 | https://www.si.com/review/gymnastic-bar-for-kids/ | Gymnastics bars are great tools for channeling children’s energy into something productive and healthy. Children are known to have an endless supply of energy, and a gymnastics bar gives them the needed platform to use their energy exhaustively. Our team extensively reviewed the available gymnastics bars to bring you the finest gymnastics bars in 2022. These bars were selected based on criteria like ease of use, flexibility, and stability. Gymnastics bars are not only meant for kids that have an interest in gymnastics, but also for kids who need something to play around with at home. Kids do not require elaborate gymnastics skills to use them, but you should still always be mindful of your child's safety. Gymnastics bars create a balance between fun and exercising for kids. Also, they make for a great birthday present. | Comparing the Top Kids Gymnastics Bar in 2022 Shiwei Gymnastic Bar – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Shiwei gymnastics bar allows kids to have fun without worrying about weight. It supports up to 330 lbs of weight and can extend to 5 feet in height, hence it can be used by almost any kid regardless of their weight or height. It’s made of fiberglass material that is lightweight yet sturdy, allowing you to move the bar easily and providing long-lasting durability. Also, it comes in both pink and blue color options, so you can pick a color that you believe would appeal to your child the most. PROS Thicker tubes for greater strength Double locking mechanism Fiberglass construction CONS Difficult for kids to adjust the height CHECK ON AMAZON Tepemccu Gymnastic Bar – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Tepemccu gymnastics bar features a foldable design that makes it easy to move the unit around and also requires little storage space. The bar is easy to set up, and the heights are adjustable to five varying lengths to suit the user (maximum height at 50.8″). Plus, it supports up to 140lbs in weight, making it suitable for use by most kids. There are four anti-slip foam rings at the base that provide enhanced stability to the structure, prevent slippage, and protect the floor against scratching. PROS Foldable for easy storage Adjustable height Easy set-up Money back guarantee CONS Limited color options CHECK ON AMAZON KidoGym Gymnastic Bar – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The KidoGym offers the full range of gymnastics bar functions at a pocket-friendly price. It has a stable base that supports users weighing up to 140lbs and adjusts to five different heights. The galvanized steel construction offers a stable structure that does wobble when the bar is being used. Also, when it must be moved, either for relocation or storage, you can easily fold it up. The adjustable height goes up to 51″, which should be good enough for children aged five to eight years old. PROS Easy assembly Easy to adjust for kids Built for stability Folds up CONS Paint is a bit fragile Prone to scratching CHECK ON AMAZON Safly Fun Gymnastic Bar – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Safly Fun is a flexible gymnastics bar with an adjustable height. The height can be adjusted low enough for short kids (34.8” lowest height) and high enough to accommodate taller ones (51” maximum height). Hence, this gymnastics bar is pretty perfect if you have a bunch of kids to entertain with it. You can even purchase this product with mats for added safety. Plus, it’s a foldable option, so you can neatly tuck it away in storage when it’s not needed, making it perfect for small spaces. PROS Adjustable height Easy assembly Holds up to 110lbs CONS Limited color options Not strong enough to accommodate kids more than eight years old CHECK ON AMAZON PreGymnastic Gymnastic Bar 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The PreGymnastic is a heavy-duty gymnastics bar. It has a sturdy base that supports the weight exerted on the horizontal bar up to 240 lbs. The bar is made of fiberglass and the adjustable legs are made of stainless steel, making it one of the most durable bars on our list (and on the market). Also, if you have kids with varying heights, this is a great option that provides nine height adjustments between 37-inches and 59-inches with two-inch intervals. In short, almost any kid can use this bar with ease, regardless of their height. PROS Rail made of sturdy and reliable fiberglass Stainless steel durable construction with powder coating Nine height adjustment levels CONS Some parts might require replacement after a few months CHECK ON AMAZON JC-Athletics Gymnastic Bar 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The JC-Athletics bar has a simple design and sturdy base. The bar features a solid horizontal rail that supports users weighing up to 260lbs of weight, which is practically any kid you can imagine. We love that the horizontal bar is made of beech wood and the adjustable legs are made from steel, which is the perfect combination that offers reliable use, enhanced stability, and long-lasting durability. Also, the durability is further enhanced with an anti-corrosion powder coating, so this bar might last you years if used properly. PROS Offers a greater weight support Twelve height adjustments between three to five feet Easy ten-minute assembly CONS Might rock if used by kids heavier than the stated weight limit CHECK ON AMAZON My Quality Life Gymnastic Bar 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This gymnastics bar sports an elaborate design that includes a triangular base to support the user’s weight. It is portable and can be folded up in seconds for easy carriage and storage. Keep in mind that this bar has a maximum load capacity of up to 150lbs, so it’s not a suitable option if your kid weighs more. The triangular structure provides remarkable stability simply due to its geometric properties, although it is made of strong steel material that is pretty reliable and stable on its own. The only downside is that it offers only four height adjustments. PROS Great for ages 3-7 Super easy to assemble Folds for easier storage Sturdy steel construction CONS Limited color options Small so kids may outgrow it quickly CHECK ON AMAZON | Buying Guide: Gymnastics Bar Gymnastics bars are essential tools for professional gymnasts – they simply can’t do without one. Gymnastics is a sport that needs constant practice to perfect the moves. Gymnastic bars help gymnasts perfect their skills and build confidence. For non-professional gymnasts, a gymnastics bar affords them the opportunity to safely exercise and have fun in the comfort of their homes. Surprisingly, when it comes to buying gymnastic bars for kids, there are similar considerations to make. For example, you require a gymnastics bar that offers more stability, has an adjustable height that can be set according to your kid's height, and has anti-slip foam at the base. As you have seen from the review of the best gymnastics bars, there are many brands of gymnastics bars for kids to choose from. This buying guide will help you to make the best choice of a gymnastics bar to buy. The guide contains helpful tips on how to use and install gymnastics bars for kids, the factors to consider when purchasing a gymnastics bar, and the price range you should expect to pay for some of the best options on the market. How Are Gymnastics Bars Installed? Since the structures of gymnastics bars differ from one brand to the other, there is no cast-in-stone rule on the best way to install them. However, you should ensure that you read the bar’s instruction manuals. As a general rule of thumb, you should not use the bar if any screw is missing – inform the manufacturers so that they can replace the missing screw or give you a new unit. This precaution is to avoid injuries. A regular part of the structure of gymnastics bars, irrespective of the brand, is the horizontal bar. Always ensure that the bar is in good shape when installing the gymnastics bar. All of the gymnastic bars for kids on our list have a solid structure that only requires you to place them on the floor. This allows kids to reach the bar easily without assistance, as the rail is elevated around 37" to 57" off the ground. Installing these gymnastic bars only requires you to assemble the pieces that come in the box, which should only take a few minutes of your time. Also, most bars have a foldable construction, allowing you to relocate and store them easily without much effort. Things to Consider Before Buying Gymnastics Bars for Kids? There are many gymnastics bars for kids available on the market, each claiming to be the best. Therefore, it is important to consider the following factors when buying a gymnastics bar to ensure you make a sound buying decision. Space Space is a factor you consider before buying your gymnastics bar in order to avoid injuries. The gymnastics bar needs a place to be kept both during and after use. Ideally, the bar should be placed where there is enough clearance to allow kids to swing in different directions without the fear of hitting a wall or surrounding objects. Also, there should be a dedicated space to keep the gymnastics bar when not in use. This is to avoid exposing the bar to substances that can damage it. Stability The gymnastics bar’s stability is another factor that should be considered when buying a gymnastics bar. The stability entails the bar’s firmness on the ground, the kind of materials used to make the frame, and how well the bar’s base can handle vibration. Thus, it would help if you look out for these features when purchasing a gymnastics bar. Weight capacity The gymnastics bar’s maximum weight capacity should also be considered when purchasing a gymnastics bar. The weight of the users that will potentially share the gymnastics bar with will help you to determine the suitable gymnastics bar with the right weight capacity. A gymnastics bar with a weight capacity lower than the user’s weight will get spoilt quickly and may even injure the user. Therefore, it is best to get a bar with a weight capacity that exceeds the user’s weight. Height The height of the gymnastics bar should also be on your list of priorities when purchasing a gymnastics bar. The height of most gymnastics bars is adjustable; this allows the user to adjust the bar’s height to their needs. Gymnastics bars have between 3 and 6 adjustable heights. However, you need to check to ensure that the bar’s lowest and highest adjustable heights meet the needs of your kids. Bar The material used to make the bar’s horizontal bar should also be considered when buying a gymnastics bar. Common materials used to make the bar are wood, fiberglass, and steel. The material used to make the horizontal bar affects its durability and carrying capacity. For example, horizontal bars made of wood are comfortable but have a low weight capacity. Extras Other extra features that could improve your experience with the gymnastics bar should also be considered. A gymnastics mat is one of such extras that will enhance the user experience. It provides a soft platform for your kids to land when they descend from the bar. It should be noted that these extras drive up the price of gymnastics bars. How to Use Gymnastics Bars Safely Safety should be prioritized when kids are using gymnastics bars. Below are helpful tips to keep in mind to avoid accidents. Ensure the gymnastics bar is placed on an even surface Endeavor to use gymnastics mats; it softens impact in case of slippage Kids should use the bar under the watch of an adult Regularly check the bar to ensure there are no loose bolts How Much Do Gymnastics Bars Cost? You can purchase a gymnastics bar for as low as $50, and there are gymnastics bars that cost as much as $600. The gymnastics bar’s maximum weight capacity, horizontal bar material, and other additional features influence the price. Gymnastics bars that fall within the $70 and $300 range offer a balance between cost and efficiency. | |||||||||||||||||||
31 | 30 | https://www.si.com/review/men-nike-running-shoe/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
32 | 31 | https://www.si.com/review/best-mini-exercise-bike/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
33 | 32 | https://www.si.com/review/best-hockey-puck/ | It’s time to zip and slide with finesse around the ice rink, frozen pond, or on the streets. Whether you’re a seasoned hockey player or simply learning the ropes for the first time, it is important to suit up with a hockey puck. Playing hockey without a good puck is like trying to fill up a weaved basket with water: pointless! When it comes to finding premium hockey pucks, there are a lot of factors to consider to ensure that you’re getting the right one for your needs. These factors include size, surface area, type of hockey game, and quality. Surfing through the internet and trying to select a hockey puck can be a tall order and has discouraged several people. We’ve made the search easier for you by creating this product review and buyer’s guide to help you select the best hockey pucks. The pucks in our guide are some of the finest that money can buy because they: Can be used by all skill levels Are versatile and can be used indoors or outdoors Glide easily and smoothly on the ice | Detailing the Best Hockey Puck in 2023 Franklin Sports Hockey Puck – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A pack contains 3 brightly colored hockey pucks. It is made with soft durable plastic. The Franklin hockey pucks can be played anywhere off the rink and pond. The pucks are constructed with durable ABS plastic and designed to have a little cushion. The brightly colored pucks improve visibility and can be found anywhere. It glows in the dark and is great for practicing shooting and puck handling skills. PROS Great for summer Glows in the dark Available in variety of colors CONS Not very durable BUY ON AMAZON Faswin Hockey Puck – Best Ice Hockey Puck 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A set contains 18 pieces of hockey pucks and 3 reusable mesh bags. It can be used for pond hockey or ice rink games. The Faswin Hockey puck meets the standard regulation size weight. It has a 3” diameter, is 1” thick, and weighs 166 grams. This hockey puck is made with high-quality smooth vulcanized rubber and can withstand the force of the hockey sticks. It can be used by both professionals and beginners. PROS Contains 18 pieces of hockey pucks Hard and smooth enough for accurate shots Smooth on all sides; it may not have enough traction for your hockey sticks Includes three reusable mesh bags CONS Smooth on all sides; it may not have enough traction for hockey sticks. BUY ON AMAZON Golden Sport Hockey Puck – Most Economical 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This product contains 25 pieces of hockey pucks. It is great for practice and classic training. The Golden sport hockey pucks are made of high-quality vulcanized rubber known for its resilience and hardness. The sides are smooth and flat for easy gliding. It is 3” in diameter, 1” thick, and weighs 6 oz. It meets the NHL regulation size and is suitable for beginners as well as professionals. It is surrounded by dimple patterns that provide friction between the puck and the hockey stick. PROS Multiple pucks available All pucks meet the standard regulations Beginner-friendly CONS Strong chemical odor BUY ON AMAZON A & R Sports Hockey Puck – Best Value 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A pack contains 6 pieces of ice hockey pucks. It also comes with a reusable mesh bag. The A & R hockey pucks were produced in Czech republic. They are made with vulcanized rubber and are durable. These hockey pucks have resistance against the force of the hockey stick. it is 3 inches in height, 3 inches in diameter, 1 inch thick and it weighs 2 lbs. PROS Meets NHL standards Made with vulcanized rubber Glides smoothly on ice CONS Strong chemical odor BUY ON AMAZON Green Biscuit Hockey Puck 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This green-colored lightweight hockey puck is made with plastic and is designed to lay flat on any surface. It is great for off-the-rink hockey. The Green biscuit Hockey pucks contain 2 pieces of hockey pucks. It is great for saucer pass, one-touch pass, and toe drag. It is 3” in diameter, 1” thick, and weighs 9.6 oz. It is ideal for beginners and can be used by professionals as well. It is great for street, roller, and off-the-rink hockey training. PROS It is beginner-friendly It can be played on any surface It has metal bolts and rubber spacers in between to reduce friction and vibration on concrete and asphalt CONS It may not be ideal for shooting BUY ON AMAZON CHECK PRICE ON CHEWY AceFox Hockey Puck 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features A set of 12 pieces of hockey pucks made with vulcanized black rubber that meets the regulating standards. It can be used on and off the ice rink or pond. The AceFox meets the NHL regulation size. It is 3” in diameter, 1″ thick, and weighs 6 oz. The texture around the sides of the hockey pucks makes it absorb the hockey stick and not slide off. It is of international standards and is suitable for adults and children above 8 years to practice with. PROS Has a smooth bottom that glides effortlessly on the ice A single pack comes with a dozen pucks Meets international standards CONS May have a strong chemical odor BUY ON AMAZON Mylec Hockey Puck 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It comes in a pack of 3 differently colored roller pucks; black, red, and orange. It is ideal for street and roller hockey games. The Mylec hockey pucks were built to perform like the ice hockey pucks. It is made with solid PVC material with 7 high-impact nylon glides on its surface for increased stability. It is made in the USA and great for outdoor use. PROS Plays on the street like real ice hockey pucks Great puck for beginners to start out with Lightweight and can be played with ease CONS It may not be ideal for shooting BUY ON AMAZON | Best Hockey Pucks Buying Guide Typically speaking, hockey is played on the ice rink or on a frozen pond. But the game has evolved so much that it can be played anywhere. Kids play hockey on the driveway, in the park, in school, etc. The sport has been remodeled to suit the needs of its player. Hockey is a game played with a puck and stick, and the aim of the game is to get the puck into the opponent’s goal post. When it comes to winter sports, there are few that can be compared with ice hockey. It can be a somewhat brutal battle sport complete with finesse and athletic beauty. For those watching hockey for the first time, you’ll notice that there aren’t any balls. Everyone’s trying their hardest to get a circular small object, usually black in color, into the goal post of the rival team. This circular small object is called a puck. In the game of hockey, everything revolves around the puck. If you’re curious about the hockey puck and are looking to buy the best hockey puck for a game, you’re in the right place. Here’s all you need to know about selecting the best hockey puck. What Are the Types of Hockey Pucks? Ice hockey pucks This is the official hockey puck for games and competitions on the ice rink or on ponds that are frozen over during winter. The ice hockey puck is black in color, flat and round, and is made of solid vulcanized rubber. These types of hockey pucks are frozen before any game to enable them to glide smoothly and not bounce on the rink. Hockey pucks are changed numerously throughout the duration of the game to ensure that it remains frozen. Training pucks These are hockey pucks that are heavier than the normal standard hockey pucks. The purpose of this hockey puck is to those newer to the game to perfect their playing skills. The training pucks are usually brightly colored and vary in weight. They are made with hard rubber just like the official ice hockey pucks. Youth pucks The youth hockey pucks are meant for junior ice hockey players that are too young to handle the weight of the standard puck. These pucks weigh less than the official pucks but are made of the same material. The youth puck is ideal for kids and teenagers who are still learning the ropes of hockey playing. Street and roller pucks The street and roller pucks are usually used off the ice rink. Street hockey is played on the streets, driveways, school courts while roller hockey can be played in any of these places but the players would have to have roller skates on. The pucks are made with hollow lightweight plastic and are usually always seen in fluorescent color. They have plastic tiny ball bearings on the surface to enable them to glide smoothly along the court or asphalt. They feature unique designs on them to keep the bouncing to a minimum. What Do the Colors of Hockey Pucks Mean? Black This is the official color of a standard ice hockey puck. It is usually used for games and competitions. The black puck is frozen before every game and can be changed as many times as possible to ensure that it glides instead of bounces on the ice rink. White The white puck can weigh the same as the black puck or it can weigh more. This puck is usually used for training, particularly stick handling and wrist training. When used on the ice rink, it is harder to see because of the color so players and goaltenders need to be alert and sharpen their concentration skills. Blue The blue puck weighs lighter than other pucks but is made of the same round flat hard rubber material. This hockey puck is meant for players at the introductory level, mostly pre-teen kids or anyone new to the sport. The weight allows players to get comfortable with the sport, learn and develop new techniques. A heavier hockey would tire out young players quickly. Other brighter colors These bright-colored hockey pucks are mostly used for street or inline hockey. The red-colored puck is made for kids who are 8 years old or younger. They are lightweight, move slower, and bounce the least. The orange-colored pucks are lightweight as well and are for kids aged between 9 to 10 years. The Green colored ball is meant for older kids aged 11 and above. It is important to note that these colors may not always be exact. Hockey pucks can also be classified based on their weight. For instance, if an orange puck weighs the same as a white puck then it may also be a training puck. What Do I Need to Know Before Buying a Hockey Puck? Size A standard hockey puck is always black in color and is 1 inch thick, 3 inches in diameter, and weighs 5.5 – 6 ounces. The blue ice puck for junior hockey players usually weighs 4 ounces. Other hockey pucks weigh more or less than the official ice hockey puck according to their usage and levels. What is a hockey puck made of? The standard ice hockey pucks are made with vulcanized rubber and bonding material. The vulcanization process makes the ball hard, durable, and smooth. While the street hockey pucks are made of brightly colored lightweight plastic material. The top and bottom of the hockey pucks can be decorated with the team logo. Quality control Standard hockey pucks are checked for their size and weight by NHL officials to ensure that they are up to NHL standards. If any puck does not meet the standard size required, it would be recycled and used to make another puck. The official standard size is 3” in diameter, 1” thick and weighs 6 oz. Hockey pucks are frozen and tested to ensure that they don’t bounce and are of the same quality. How much does a hockey puck cost? When buying a hockey puck, buying in bulk is the most cost-effective option. Hockey pucks are usually sold in sets. The least a set of hockey pucks can contain maybe 3 pucks and it could contain as many as 30 pucks. The price of a hockey puck depends on the type and level of play. A set of hockey may cost as low as $10 and as much as $50 or more. | |||||||||||||||||||
34 | 33 | https://www.si.com/review/running-compression-shorts/ | That’s why professionals always go for running pants that are designed to prevent any type of leg restriction. If you are a beginner or love marathons, then it is important to get the highest-rated compression shorts for running in 2022 to move with incredible speed and flexibility. They are designed with spandex and a mix of other fabrics that makes them breathable and long-lasting. However, there are innumerable such pants available on the market, and selecting one is a tough job. That’s why we have sifted and reviewed the top compression running shorts that will help you choose the perfect one for yourself. | Comparing the Best Running Compression Shorts of 2022 Runhit Compression Short – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Contains Polyester and Spandex Longer inseam for better groin support Large pockets for storing phones and keys Elastic bands on thighs and waist Compression shorts are made to improve your agility while working out, and this product will help you in doing that. It is designed with Polyester and Spandex, due to which, it is light in weight and does not cause chafing. Besides, these shorts are made as per four-needle six-line stitching or flatlock stitching to support your thighs and groin area perfectly. Moreover, the fabric is moisture-wicking and extremely breathable. Though the shorts are meant to stick to your thighs, they will help in improving blood flow and reduce muscle fatigue as well. PROS Lots of color choices Moisture wicking Great for any sport or activity Improved stitching CONS Pockets not secure CHECK ON AMAZON ATHILO Athletic Short – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Designed with non-abrasion fabric Can absorb moisture quickly and dry the shorts in no time Contains breathable inner lining for better airflow Graded with UPF 50+ to protect your skin from dangerous UV rays Sportswear is known to cost a lot due to the usage of different materials and construction. But, this set is the most affordable package of athletic shorts that you can get on the market. It contains three pairs of compression shorts made with non-abrasion fabric that maintains flexibility and prevents chafing. They are suitable for machine washing and can last for a long time. Besides, these shorts are reinforced with moisture-wicking technology and can protect your skin from harmful UV rays easily. They also have a two-way air circulation lining that improves airflow inside the fabric so that you don’t feel uncomfortable while wearing them. PROS Lots of colors True to size Non abrasive fabric CONS Lacking in compression CHECK ON AMAZON CompressionZ Men’s Short – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Designed with high-quality 85% Nylon and Spandex Fabric is four-way stretchable, improving your movement Easy to maintain and dries out real quick Contains anti-odor lining to prevent the shorts from stinking due to sweat If you are not much fond of Polyester shorts, then you should try out this product for sure. It is designed with Spandex and high-quality Nylon that make it super light and comfortable to wear. Besides, it has an amazing base layer that provides incredible support to your thigh muscles. On top of that, the fabric also has a moisture absorbing technique that soaks up sweat and dries the shorts in no time. However, it is quite expensive, and you need to go for one size above your measurements to ensure that the shorts fit perfectly. PROS Stretches 4 ways Designed for athletes for better quality High performance CONS Sizing difficulties CHECK ON AMAZON Neleus Men’s Compression Short – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Contains Dry-fit fabric that is breathable and absorbs moisture quickly Has thigh and waist bands that fits snugly on your body Two zippered pockets for storing keys, and other essentials Polyester and Spandex content are 85% and 15% respectively If you regularly hit the gym, then you definitely need these compression shorts, as they are designed for heavy-duty workouts. You get three pairs of running shorts made with Polyester and Spandex that fit perfectly without making your skin feel suffocated. Each of these shorts contains inseam stitching of 9 inches for comfortable fitting, along with big pockets to store any 6-inch phone. They also have elastic bands on the waist and thighs that remain stuck to the skin and improve blood flow in the area. PROS Big color variety one-size-fits-all doual pockets fro storage. CONS Sizing issues Random durability issues CHECK ON AMAZON Roadbox Compression Short 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Ergonomic structure with side pockets for storing essential items Longer inseam stitching for comfortable fitting Improves airflow by letting out the body heat Has moisture-wicking technology and dries out in no time This package comes in a set of three compression shorts for running, each made with 88% Polyester and 12% Spandex. The mixture, along with the designing technology, makes it easier to do all kinds of stretches without worrying about the shorts tearing apart. They also contain two unique pocket designs where you can keep your keys, phone, and other things. As the fabric is completely breathable and absorbs moisture quickly, it becomes easier to clean them. You can use them for running, doing yoga, playing basketball, rugby, and various other things. PROS Ergonomic design Great for all sports Gret for postoperative repair CONS Run small Potential for chafing CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer's Guide: Running Compression Shorts Compression running shorts are designed for people who love working out and regularly visit the gym. They provide flexibility, freedom to move and improve your muscle strength greatly. But, there are some characteristics of these shorts that you need to know before making a purchase. Here, we have noted down all essential factors about these shorts that will help you understand which one is better for you. Types of Running Compression Shorts Men’s running shorts Men’s running shorts are specifically designed for men’s body structure. They have a longer inseam with a built-in lining that provides support to the groin area. Besides, these shorts have wider waistbands and elastic on thighs to provide support to the muscles. Women’s running shorts/pants Women’s shorts are a lot different from the shorts designed for men. They have a shorter inseam and provide more support in the waist, hips, and thighs area. They also come with an inner lining to prevent chafing due to rubbing of the thighs. Unisex pants Unisex shorts, as the name states, are made for men and women. However, the design fits perfectly on a man due to the medium inseam that provides groin comfort. These shorts are affordable, but not comfortable. Features to Keep In Mind Material Compression shorts for running are basically made of Spandex, which makes the fabric stick to your skin. However, they are not entirely made with Spandex and contain Polyester or Nylon. These running shorts tightly hold the skin that further providing incredible support to the muscles and improving blood flow. Length When it comes to compression running shorts, you need to look for their length. That’s because, if they are too short, then you would have to wear loose clothes over them. Compression shorts should cover at least your mid-thighs so that you can work out easily without worrying about getting better coverage. Breathability If the shorts are not breathable, then they can cause chafing. Spandex is not a breathable fabric. That’s why manufacturers use Nylon and Polyester to increase airflow. Due to this, you don’t feel too hot or suffocated while wearing compression shorts. Price The average price of compression running shorts ranges from $10 USD to $25 USD. However, there are items that are tagged at a higher price. The cost factor of these shorts completely depends on the material, construction, stretchability, and brand. Moisture wicking A pair of compression shorts for running should contain moisture-wicking technology so that the material doesn’t stick to your skin due to sweat. It helps in absorbing moisture and sweat which are the major reasons for chafing. Besides, moisture-wicking fabric makes it easier to clean and dry these shorts within no time. Visibility stripes Compression shorts should contain visibility stripes so that while running in dim light conditions, any oncoming vehicles can see you and prevent collisions. They not only provide safety but also look stylish. Anti-bacterial The anti-bacterial fabric prevents the pants from smelling due to extreme sweat. As compression shorts stick to your skin, they increase body heat due to which you start sweating. Manufacturers add a lining of anti-bacterial fabric that absorbs the bacteria and diminishes the odor that usually occurs due to heavy sweating. What Advantages Will You Get By Using Compression Shorts for Running? Decreases muscle fatigue Compression shorts for running are known for reducing muscle fatigue that occurs due to heavy workouts. They focus more on the muscles of the thighs and increase blood flow in the area. Due to this, the muscles get more oxygen, and you don’t get to experience any pain in them. Increases blood flow By compressing or tightening the skin around the thighs and waist, the muscles start to contract a bit. Due to this, the concentrated muscles get a high amount of oxygen and blood for relieving pain. Provides muscle support Compression shorts contain elastic bands that focus on designated areas such as thighs, waist, and hips. Due to the usage of elastic bands, the pants are able to support the muscles so that you can easily do exercises that improve your muscle strength. | |||||||||||||||||||
35 | 34 | https://www.si.com/review/best-dark-chocolate/ | The world bites into about 7.2 million metric tons of chocolate each year and it’s no secret why – the enticement of chocolate makes sure that number doesn’t come down anytime soon. But, as if the thought of devouring a flavorsome chocolate bar wasn’t enough, dark chocolate brings you both, the scrumptiousness and the health benefits, in a single pack! We’re confident you’ve heard of it too; the positive health benefits of dark chocolate, lower blood pressure, improved cognitive function, stress buster, improved skin, and whatnot. However, while all of that is true, there’s definitely more to dark chocolate that you should know before you just go on and inhale the large bar that you just grabbed from Walmart. In this article, we’ve put together a list of the Best Dark Chocolates in 2021 as well as a detailed buying guide that will hook you up with a plethora of information around the topic and get you up to pace! | Best Dark Chocolates of 2021 Reviewed in Detail Hu Dark Chocolate Bar – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Each Hu dark chocolate bar is USDA certified organic and certified paleo This dark chocolate comes loaded with 70% cocoa It’s a vegan dark chocolate bar Each chocolate bar weighs 2.1oz This dark chocolate is available in a number of flavors and contains 70% cocoa, organic coconut sugar, and fair-trade cocoa butter. It’s a delicious paleo dark chocolate with no dairy, no refined sugar, and no soy lecithins. The Hu Salty Dark Chocolate bar in specific, is not only vegan, kosher, and gluten-free but also non-GMO project verified. You may use this little piece of heaven in your baked desserts, doll up your breakfast bowls of oatmeal, or bite into and savor this creamy rich paleo dark chocolate bar as a whole! PROS The Hu dark chocolate bars are available in dozens of flavors It’s free of refined sugars, palm oil, soy lecithin, and sugar alcohols CONS It’s a bit expensive CHECK ON AMAZON Lindt Excellence Extra Dark Chocolate Bar – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It comes in 70%, 85%, and 90% cocoa variations and is available in a bunch of flavors It contains bourbon vanilla beans, demerara sugar, cocoa butter, and cocoa powder The dark chocolate bar with 90% cocoa goes through the dutch-process Each bar is 3.5oz of dark chocolate and measures about 3.5” x 9.5” This Lindt Excellent bar is a full-bodied extra dark chocolate that is distinguished by powerful earthiness and notes of spice, licorice, and dried fruits. It comes with variations in cocoa percentage and this exact bar contains 85% cocoa! Moreover, each pack costs around $41 and comes loaded with individually packed bars. You may utilize its richness for baking, gifting, savoring it as a whole, or enjoying the sophisticated gourmet experience of it. PROS It’s available in a plethora of flavors, varying cocoa percentages, and premium ingredients; making it a diverse choice It contains caffeine and is dairy-free CONS Each bar may contain traces of tree nuts, peanuts, and soybean CHECK ON AMAZON Lily’s Dark Chocolate Bar – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It contains 70% cocoa and comes in a pack of 12 bars Each bar weighs around 2.8 oz This dark chocolate has low carbs, is keto-friendly, and is botanically-sweetened This Extra Dark Chocolate by Lily’s is a low-carb, keto-diet friendly bar with 70% cocoa. It comes loaded with its natural richness and contains stevia for sugar – a zero calorie botanical sweetener derived from the plant Stevia Rebaudiana. It contains non-GMO ingredients, is available in a couple of flavorings and is dairy-free. PROS The Lily’s Dark chocolate bars are available in 4 flavors This dark chocolate can be utilized for baking as well as snacking The 70% cocoa bars are 100% vegan CONS The orange flavor is negligible; little to no palate CHECK ON AMAZON Brookside Dark Chocolate Candy – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It contains lower percentage of coca and is processed with alkali (dutch-process) This candy contains soft, sweetened centers dipped in luscious dark chocolate This dark chocolate candy comes in a 21-ounce bag of flavored (acai and blueberry) candy The Brookside Chocolate candy packs the flavor of acai and blueberry and adds an elixir of fresh, chocolaty richness to your everyday breakfast and baked desserts! Whether you want to sprinkle these alongside your yogurt or enjoy it with your wine, these candies will add finger-lickin’ goodness to your day! PROS It’s on the lighter side of dark chocolate and comes loaded with flavory goodness; great for elevating snack mixes It’s available in Acai, Blueberry, and Pomegranate flavors CONS It is loaded with sugars and allergens CHECK ON AMAZON Bouchard Belgian Dark Chocolate 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It comes in 1-kg package and the chocolate contains 72% cacao The Bouchard Belgian Dark Chocolate is an excellent source of iron and fiber It contains 50% less sugar than average chocolate bar; delivers a rich, dark chocolate experience This non-GMO, vegan-friendly, keto-friendly dark chocolate is one of the best out there with only 28 calories per piece! Moreover, it’s an excellent source of natural flavonoids and antioxidants, qualifying as the go-to dark chocolate for maximum health benefits! PROS It has a luxurious deep color and touch with fine ridges that give you an intense burst of flavor that you need from a dark chocolate It comes in a probiotic flavoring as well CONS It needs to be stored well under suggested temperature conditions CHECK ON AMAZON Divine Exquisitely Rich Dark Chocolate 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Each bar weighs around 3 oz and measures 19.6” x 6.6” x 6.6” Each bar is almost two servings; each serving has 16g carb, 4g protein, 6g fiber, 6g sugar, and a total of 36g fat This dark chocolate may contain milk and nuts This dark chocolate contains 85% cocoa and is hands down one of the best you’ll ever taste. It comes loaded with a silky-smooth texture and at the same time it’s not bitter. It neither has palm oil nor soy; contains no artificial flavors. However, it may contain a bit of milk, nuts, and coconut. PROS This dark chocolate is healthy, creamy, and delicious It comes at a great price and offers good nutrition CONS It will not always be dairy-free; may contain milk, wheat, almond, hazelnut, and coconut CHECK ON AMAZON Endangered Species Dark Chocolate 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It’s available in multiple flavorings and cocoa content; the Forest Mint contains 72% cocoa They’re non-GMO verified, fair-trade certified, and vegan certified This dark chocolate is available in packs of 4, 8 and, 12 and each bar weighs 3oz The Endangered Species Chocolate bars are available in multiple flavor mashups and contain high levels of healthful antioxidants. Each bar contains over 70% cocoa and they come with all the essential certifications. It’s also important to know that 10% of the annual net profits generated by Endangered Species contribute in protecting wildlife and at-risk species. PROS The 10% giveback policy on the Endangered Species brand helps you spend amount for at-risk species It has a rich cocoa content, high nutrition, and interesting new flavors; lemon dark chocolate for instance CONS They’re not sweet at all; not for the sweet-toothed CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Dark Chocolate Buying Guide In this section, we’ll be shedding light on a few nutritional facts as well as a couple of tips and tricks about dark chocolates so you can easily go about your purchase! If you aren’t afraid to walk on the dark side, let’s dig in! What Should You Consider When Buying Dark Chocolate? A true dark chocolate lover may be able to determine the authenticity of it just by a pinch of its taste. However, as a beginner you’ll need a few metrics to determine the final grade of each bar. For starters, a true dark chocolate will never list sugar as one of its primary ingredients. Let’s look at a few more factors that will help you mark off authentic dark chocolates. Nutrition When it comes to breaking ties between milky chocolates, dark chocolates, and hardcore dark chocolates, you simply do that by comparing the amount of fat and sugar in the ingredients. Normally, you’ll find dark chocolates to be nutritionally similar all over; saturated fat, cocoa, some sugar to fight the natural tartness of cocoa, etc. However, it’s the amount of fat and sugar that’ll help you choose the best dark chocolate – the lesser the better! Clean Cocoa So, the percentage of cocoa in a truly dark chocolate bar is over 80% or at least greater than 70%. Plus, the cocoa must not have gone through the dutch process (it’s when alkalizing agent is used to reduce the natural acidity of cocoa, giving it a less bitter taste). It’s basically another layer of processing – certainly not good for your ideal dark choco. Texture and Taste Dark chocolate is anything but pale or chalky! It’s always rich, creamy, and silky-ish in texture. This happens due to the unprocessed cocoa and less sugar in the chocolate mix. What To Watch Out For When Buying Dark Chocolate? Just like a true dark chocolate will never flaunt its sugar percentage or artificial flavor, there are a couple more factors that define an ideal dark chocolate. However, keep in mind that it’s not a competition and it’s fine if your taste buds fall on the lighter side of the dark-chocolate-spectrum. However, if you’re aiming to claim maximum health benefits, you’d want to watch out for the following things in addition to sugar and fat content. Allergens Many a time, you’ll find dark chocolates labels saying, “It may contain milk” – this directly refers to dark chocolate being processed same as chocolate products containing milk. However, if you try hard enough, you’ll be able to find dark chocolates without milk as well – the ideal scenario if you’re lactose intolerant. Peanuts In addition to milk, some dark chocolates come loaded with traces of peanuts and may or may not have any labeling introducing so. Therefore, a good practice is to go through reviews to find out if they contain peanuts – and of course this is only suggested if you’re allergic. Heavy Metals There have been traces of Lead and Cadmium in chocolates in the recent years. However, the presence of these metals has to do with the presence of them in the soil in which cocoa is grown. This is only alarming if you’re consuming a lot of dark chocolate. Genetically Modified Ingredients Some manufacturers use GMO (genetically modified ingredients) in chocolates. This is normally soy lecithin which is a byproduct of processed soybeans and prevents water and fat from separating. Therefore, always go for non-GMO dark chocolate when you’re shopping for one. What Are The Primary Traits Of Healthy Dark Chocolate? To label a few top-of-the-head identifiers for a healthy dark chocolate, here you go: Always go for a cocoa percentage of over 70% and if you’re fond of the dark side, turn that into 80% The cocoa included should be free of the dutch-process The sugar included would either be organic, lowkey processed, or the chocolate may be botanically sweetened There would be fair-trade and non-GMO labels on your dark chocolate It would have been processed at a lower temperature It should have no preservatives or added flavor | |||||||||||||||||||
36 | 35 | https://www.si.com/review/ankle-compression-sleeve/ | Ankles are one of the most important points of the body. They’re the bridge between your leg and your foot and are crucial for movement and balance. These joints must be in tip-top shape at all times to allow you to move around. Unfortunately, some people end up with inflamed or damaged ankles either through excessive physical activity or injury. You’ll need the best ankle compression sleeves in 2022 to help ease the pain. That’s why compression therapy is such a popular method to relieve ankle pain. It applies gentle pressure to allow blood flow, giving your ankles better recovery and reducing any pains or swells that you may have. Even if you're not an athlete or don’t have any existing ankle problems, wearing these sleeves can be a great way to keep your ankles in peak condition. | Compare The Best Ankle Compression Sleeve of 2022 UFlex Athletics Ankle Compression Sleeve – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Simple to put on Fits securely and stays in place Ultra-lightweight design 3D knitting technology This ankle sleeve reduces ankle discomfort, swelling, and soreness associated with arthritis, Plantar Fasciitis, moderate injuries, and minor tears or overuse injuries sustained during sports. It improves proprioception by increasing the sensory abilities of the ankle, resulting in improved joint stability and support. The silicone inserts relieve pressure off malleoli and apply intermittent, regulated pressure to the joint’s soft tissues, boosting circulation and alleviating discomfort and swelling, while perfectly positioned breathable mesh prevents pinching. The ankle sleeve is suitable for men and women and does not add bulk to the foot, so it may be used with footwear, athletic shoes, ski boots, and cleats. CHECK ON AMAZON Copper Foot Recovery Ankle Compression Sleeves – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Simple design Comes in many sizes Easy to wear Comfortable One issue that some people have with ankle compression sleeves is that they’re needlessly fancy. Brands love to add designs and textures to the sleeves to make them stand out more, but many prefer the sleeves to look as simple as possible. You don’t really need aesthetic appeal for sleeves, and some may even argue that simple is best, with simpler designs looking far better than those with actual designs and textures. If you prefer minimal designs, then you’ll love this pair of foot sleeves. Worn like your average pair of socks, you wouldn’t know that these sleeves were actual ankle compression sleeves until you put them on. They’re sleek and fashionable and are very comfortable to wear. They come in small to extra large sizes, so anybody can try on this pair of simple yet stylish pair of sock sleeves. CHECK ON AMAZON SB SOX Ankle Compression Sleeves – Best For Daily Use 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Breathable fabric Comes in many colors Great for everyday use Fits many outfit styles When one thinks of ankle compression sleeves, one imagines sleeves that are supposed to be worn only in the event of ankle swelling or pain. And while these are indeed the best times to wear such sleeves, that doesn’t mean you can’t wear them every day, either. In fact, daily use of these SB ankle compression sleeves can help promote blood flow on a regular basis, which can be great for people who live sedentary lifestyles. These sleeves come in a variety of colors, ranging from the typical black to grey, green, and even purple. While there isn’t a true white color available, you have many other colors to choose from, so you could go wear these almost every day without compromising your outfit’s overall look. The fabric is nice and easy to wear, making them great for wearing throughout the day. CHECK ON AMAZON Raymora Plantar Fasciitis Foot Compression Sleeves – Honorable Mention 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Ergonomically designed 4 zone compression Double-layered base Flexible and light material Whether you’re experiencing intense or throbbing foot pain, provide instant support for your soles, curve, ankle, plantar fascia tendon, and achilles with these compression sleeves. They provide a full range of motion and may even be worn easily beneath regular socks – making them ideal for walking, running, and cycling, as well as for relaxing and snoozing. The discrete socks can also be used in conjunction with kinesiology tape, footbed, ligament aids, and orthotics. These foot sleeves have an added layer of cloth at the bottom to absorb stress with each stride; this is critical for alleviating foot discomfort. The innovative design of these compression sleeves offers comfort and support without being invasive. The customized combination of nylon, polyester, and elastane adds to breathability and elasticity. CHECK ON AMAZON TechWare Pro Ankle Compression Sleeve – Best For Athletes 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Extra tight fit Breathable fabric Great for physical activity Used by athletes Athletes are most likely to use ankle compression sleeves. Regular physical activity can take its toll on one’s body, especially the ankles. The pressure on one’s ankles can even be greater with certain sports and activities, such as track and field running. To make sure that their ankles suffer no injury, athletes often wear compression sleeves during these activities to maximize the flow of blood and minimize swelling. This ankle sleeve is designed with athletes in mind. The fabric is nice and breathable, which is great when paired with breathable sneakers. You may even feel like you’re not wearing any footwear with how ventilated these sleeves are. The sleeves also have an especially tight fit, making them great for physical activity. It’ll stay in place no matter what activity you are engaging in. CHECK ON AMAZON ComfiLife Ankle Compression Sleeves – Also Consider 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Customizable fit Focuses on the ankle Great for professionals Can be worn on many foot sizes So far, we’ve covered ankle compression sleeves that were basically tighter and more durable versions of your typical sock. However, this ankle sleeve is designed specifically for ankle therapy and is worn by wrapping the fabric around your ankle. The design is unique, and you may find it difficult to put on at first, but once you get the hang of it, you’ll find it to be very, very comfortable. There are a few reasons as to why you’d want this over sock-based designs. This sleeve gives you more open foot space, as it only focuses on the ankle area. It also gives you more freedom over how tight you want the sleeve to be over your foot, rather than relying on the natural tightness of other sleeves. Other than its unique design that may take a while to get used to, this ankle compression sleeve is great for experienced athletes and novices alike. CHECK ON AMAZON Powerlix Ankle Compression Sleeve – Long Socks 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Unisex design Covers part of the shin Provides wider compression therapy Simple and stylish Some people are particular about the length of their socks, and the same applies to ankle compression sleeves. Some sleeves only extend just beyond the ankle, whereas others go all the way up to the middle of your shin. This sock is of the latter kind, and for people who prefer more coverage when wearing a sleeve. The sleeve is made out of breathable nylon and spandex fabric. It’s got a firm grip on your shin and foot, which makes it great if you want compression in more areas of your leg. It also ensures a tighter fit, so the sleeve won’t just move around as you do. The design is unisex, so both men and women will find this pair of ankle compression sleeves to be particularly useful, and you could even share it with others (just be sure to wash them first, of course). CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Ankle Compression Sleeves Buying Guide Ankle compression sleeves may feel great to wear, but are they really helping your ankle? Here’s what you need to know about them and what type of sleeve is best for you. What Is an Ankle Compression Sleeve? Ankle compression sleeves are pieces of fabric that are worn over and around the ankle. The fabric is tight in nature and squeezes your muscles to help promote blood flow around the ankle. This is a form of compression therapy and can help with swelling and injuries in the ankle. Why Is It Important to Wear an Ankle Compression Sleeve? It promotes blood flow Compression sleeves are commonly used by athletes and those with ankle injuries because it helps promote blood flow. The sleeves compress the muscles and area around your ankle. The pressure is gentle but strong enough to help encourage blood flow. This helps your muscles feel more active and can enable you to more efficiently use the muscles around the ankle. This is a major reason why many athletes use compression sleeves when exercising and performing activities. The added blood flow goes a long way and can help promote the long-term health of an athlete’s ankles. It lessens swelling While many people use compression sleeves as a form of injury prevention, it can also be used as a cure in the event of an actual injury around the ankle. When an ankle is sprained or damaged, it is common for the area to swell up. This can make it difficult to move around and can be a painful experience for those with such injuries. It can affect day-to-day life, which may not be ideal if you have to move around a lot throughout the day. Ankle compression sleeves help with the swelling. It doesn’t just visibly make the swelling less apparent - it also allows the fluid buildup inside your body to be absorbed, resulting in fewer swells after a long workout. The sleeves can also lessen any pain caused by an ankle injury. Things to Consider When Buying an Ankle Compression Sleeve Size When it comes to ankle compression sleeves, size matters, and it matters far more than when buying a pair of socks. Compression sleeves work on the basis of compression therapy, which involves gentle yet constant pressure that improves blood flow. With too little or too much pressure, you may not get the intended effect, and may even result in worsening the injury in some cases. Again, size matters so here’s a quick rundown on what size to get. Generally, for compression sleeves, you’ll want to get a size that matches your foot size. Do note that some companies use standard sizes, whereas others use their own size charts. Be sure to check what sizes they use to avoid confusion and you get the wrong size. If the brand you choose doesn’t have a size that fits your size exactly, go for one size larger, instead of one size smaller. Larger sizes are the safer of the two, and they’ll do their job when your feet become swollen after exercising or doing physical activity. On the other hand, smaller sleeves may apply too much pressure, which may be painful for some to wear. Length The length of the compression sleeve is also critical. While almost all ankle compression sleeves cover the area around the ankle, the actual length of the sleeve may vary. Some are similar to that of typical socks, with the length only extending up to just above the ankle joint. Other socks, however, go even further, with some reaching the middle of the shin. This may not sound important until you realize that these aren’t socks, but compression sleeves. Longer compression sleeves will apply pressure in more parts of your foot, and can even apply some pressure to your leg. If you’re only using the sleeve for your ankle area, then you may not want the extra pressure on your legs, whereas others may prefer that added coverage. Whether you want long or short sleeves is completely up to you. Types of Ankle Compression Sleeves Sock sleeves Sock sleeves are a common type of compression sleeve. Worn like your traditional sock, they are easy to put on and are comfortable to wear. They are also great to wear on shoes with tight fits. The only drawback is that you’re at the mercy of the tightness of the sleeve - you can’t make it any tighter or looser and will have to deal with the standard tightness of the sleeve. Wraps Wraps are the more “professional” type of sleeves, in a sense. They’re worn by wrapping the strap around your ankle, which gives you a more personalized fit. This is great if you want to be in control of the tightness around your foot. Putting on the wrap will take some time getting used to, however. | |||||||||||||||||||
37 | 36 | https://www.si.com/review/badminton-set/ | Badminton is both fun and competitive to play, requiring some cardio and hand-eye coordination. Like tennis, badminton is played with racquets, hitting a soft and light “birdie” across a net that sits a little bit below the height of a volleyball net. With some practice, friends and families can enjoy playing a fun game in their backyard. However, like any sport, playing badminton requires the best equipment, so we've brought you our favorite badminton sets on the market that include everything you need to get started! These badminton sets make the perfect gift for any badminton beginner or pro, because: The rackets are lightweight and strong The nets are easy to set up All pieces in the sets are very durable and high-quality | The Top Badminton Sets of 2022 Street Tennis Club Badminton Set – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Play your heart out on the beach this summer with the Street Tennis Club Badminton Set. This net is 10 feet long and 5 feet wide, big enough for many games of badminton, tennis, or even volleyball. Though it’s so large, the design is simple and lightweight. The net in its included carrying tote is only 6 pounds, so any member of the family can help carry it to the park or the beach. It’s super easy to assemble because the parts are all connected; simply pop out the plastic frame and it will virtually put itself together. This badminton set is definitely the best overall on this list because of the hours of fun your family and friends will get out of it all summer long. PROS Lightweight build Easy to assemble Large enough for big games CONS Not a full-sized net CHECK ON AMAZON Trained Badminton Set – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Get ready for some family fun with this unique badminton set that includes LED birdies that light up, meaning you can keep playing into the evening. Just turn on the light with the button on the back of the cork and enjoy greater visibility in low light conditions. The rackets are lightweight and durable, with rubber handles for extra grip strength. The badminton set also comes with a clear carrying bag for portability. PROS Badminton set comes with a racket carrying case Good choice for beginners or experienced players Rackets are lightweight but sturdy CONS Grip tape on the rackets isn’t very good CHECK ON AMAZON EastPoint Sports Badminton Set – Best for Four-Person Play 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Take the badminton fun to your backyard, the park, or even the beach with this complete badminton set. It comes with a freestanding net that’s easy to set up and big enough for four-person play, four rackets, and two birdies. The badminton rackets feature tempered steel shafts with rubberized ergonomic handles for a sturdy yet comfortable grip. The grommets prolong the string life so that you can enjoy the badminton set for years to come. PROS Net can even be moved around once assembled Excellent badminton set to take on a family vacation Includes stakes to support the net in windy conditions CONS Rackets are not the most durable for long-term use CHECK ON AMAZON Boulder Sports Badminton Set – Honorable Mention 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This badminton set contains a net made of durable nylon and weather-resistant steel that can be used year-round. It is also made to condense into a small carrying case for easy out-of-the-way storage. The net is lightweight and foldable for ease of storage and transportation. The badminton set comes in two different color options to suit your preference and can be used on all surfaces. The adjustable net can be raised to 60.5 inches or lowered to 34 inches within minutes. PROS Designed to be set up or taken down in five minutes or less There are no stakes so that it can be used anywhere The net is made of sturdy nylon and rust-proof steel CONS The poles and net together can be heavy CHECK ON AMAZON Zume Badminton Set – Also Consider 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This net is designed to go with you wherever it’s needed. Its unique design and lightweight construction allow the freestanding base to be set up within seconds without any tools by extending the telescopic poles. This badminton set is perfect for two or four people. It also comes with rackets and birdies for a quick match on the go. It also includes a carrying case to make it easy to transport the badminton set anywhere and store it conveniently after use. PROS Made of lightweight materials for easy lifting It is simple to put away and set up The set comes with everything needed to play CONS It may have stability issues` CHECK ON AMAZON Baden Volleyball Badminton Set 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This regulation-sized net is built tough with steel poles and tournament nylon for unmatched durability. It is supported by adjustable steel poles that can be set up within minutes and accommodate different games from badminton to volleyball. The badminton set also comes with a volleyball, three birdies, and four rackets. The set is perfect for a quick grab-and-go badminton session, thanks to its weather-resistant carrying case. The net is made of durable materials from powder-coated steel poles and thick nylon rope. PROS Designed to be durable The set comes with thick, bright-colored boundary lines The net can be adjusted to match players’ heights CONS The net can take more than one person to move It may not fit in an average backyard CHECK ON AMAZON Franklin Sports Badminton Set 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This badminton set includes four rackets, two birdies, a rope, and six stakes. The net is designed with sturdy poles for durability. The net is simple to set up and is brightly colored for high visibility. Enjoy unlimited fun with this portable badminton set that comes with a convenient carry case to keep all the accessories in one place. The stakes included in the purchase make this a great set for playing on the beach or softer surfaces. PROS Designed to hold up well against the elements The net is made to stay in place without sliding down the pole Height is just right for adults and children to play together CONS The poles may be difficult to disassemble The setup directions may be hard to follow CHECK ON AMAZON | Badminton Sets Buying Guide Badminton is one of the most entertaining, easy, and affordable sports. While you can casually play this game with the bare essentials (rackets and a bridie), you might have to go up a notch with a reliable badminton set if you’re keen to get better at the game! In this section, we’ll be highlighting a few things to aid you in your hunt for the best badminton set. What Is Included in a Badminton Set? As we mentioned earlier, all you need for a breezy game of badminton is just two rackets and a birdie. However, the fun becomes tenfold as you add more equipment to your daily badminton regime. A badminton set ideally includes the following: Badminton rackets Each badminton set comes with at least two and a maximum of 4 badminton rackets. The four badminton rackets become essential when you’re playing badminton in pairs! Birdies The shuttlecocks, also known as birdies, are the core of any badminton set. They’re either made of plastic or a feather-like material. The plastic ones have a better throw and range, are more affordable, and have a better lifespan than their feather counterpart. Badminton net Each badminton set comes with a nylon net that serves as the basis for any competitive badminton match. Hence, you may consider it as necessary for a competitive match as a racket and birdie. Stakes and ropes The stakes and ropes are needed to keep the net in check and correctly tied t the poles. Your net must come with stakes and ropes, or you’ll be looking everywhere for the perfect accessories to fix your badminton net. Boundary lines The boundary lines can be as little as duct tape that can be pasted on a hard surface, some marker that can help you mark a boundary or even additional ropes that work as boundary lines – the essence of a competitive match. A Carrying Case Lastly, a carrying case turns the aforementioned pieces of gear portable and easy to carry. The bag is usually weather-resistant and made up of nylon. How to Choose the Best Badminton Set If you could expand your horizons and consider a few more things before going about your purchase, you’ll be able to get your hands on an ideal badminton set. Here’s how you can do it: Durability Rackets, birdies, net, carrying bag, and poles are the most essential items of a badminton set, making them prone to deterioration if they’re made from anything but the best. For instance, if the nylon strings that make up the impact surface of your racket are poor, you’ll lose your racket in about 5-10 games. Similarly, a shuttlecock (birdie) has a naturally short life, but it shouldn’t be below par. The same goes with the badminton net, as well as poles. The idea is to choose a badminton set that promises quality and reliability. Items The badminton sets come in different packages; basic, standard, professional. The names could be different, but the basic one would only feature two rackets and a shuttlecock. A standard one may offer a couple more utilities, and a professional one would typically have everything from a racket to a badminton net. There’s no need to go overboard if all you need is a simple racket and a birdie. Reviews An ideal way to find out if the badminton set you’re going for delivers value is by checking out buyer reviews from actual customers. This is an excellent practice and will keep you ahead of any regrets. What Are the Benefits of Playing Badminton? Apart from helping you stay on top of your health, badminton has the following benefits: It’s the perfect, low-demanding, hyper-activity game that allows you to have quality bonding time with your friends and family. Badminton is relatively easy to master and offers excellent competition; highly enjoyable by both audience and the players. Since you’re leaping, jumping, and running a lot in your game, playing badminton helps you build more strength. Not only can children easily play badminton, but adults of any shape and size can enjoy it, and that’s one of the loveliest things about this game! How Much Do Badminton Sets Normally Cost? The price of low-end badminton sets starts around $25 and goes as high as $60. However, these are usually made up of cheap materials, and we wouldn’t suggest these. The price of durable and reliable professional badminton sets starts at around $85 and goes as high as $200. On the other hand, the high-end products from renowned brands can cost thousands of dollars and are generally durable products. However, we believe in being economical, and if you’re getting the same value out of a smaller buck, there’s no reason why you shouldn’t get it. | |||||||||||||||||||
38 | 37 | https://www.si.com/review/best-gymnastics-mat/ | Tumbling mats can help provide comfort and safety when doing demanding or risky physical activities. They’re necessary for cheerleading, martial arts, acrobatics, gymnastics, wrestling, and other similar sports. Not all mats meet professional and high-quality standards, however, so we made a list of the four best tumbling mats in 2022 you can currently buy for your activities. | Best Tumbling Mat ProsourceFit Tri-Fold Folding Thick Exercise Mat – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon If you’re looking for a reliable tumbling mat that you can use for years to come, this is a great option. This mat uses the standard tri-fold design, as seen with many others of its kind, but it has a special foam that helps it retain its shape even after long periods of use. PROS Light and portable Tear-resistant Easy to clean CONS Relatively slightly thinner CHECK ON AMAZON BalanceFrom 2″ Thick Tri-Fold Folding Exercise Mat – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Despite being cheaper than other options, this folding mat can still provide high-level comfort, protection, and durability. This six-foot-long non-absorbent mat is made with non-toxic, lead-free vinyl that protects it from tears and punctures. PROS Fitted with carrying handles Moisture absorbent technology Made with high-density foam CONS Might be too firm for some users CHECK ON AMAZON BestMassage Gymnastics Mat – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This mat is an excellent option if you’re looking for a bigger mat with a thick, soft foam. It’s ideally made for gymnastics. PROS Solid but bouncy High-quality, non-abrasive leather material Side stickers for attaching another mat CONS No way to secure the mat when folded up CHECK ON AMAZON Giantex Gymnastics Mat – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This mat is made with premium materials that can help ensure maximum user comfort. It’s filled with an eco-friendly, soft but resilient EPE foam and has an abrasion-resistant high-quality PU leather cover. PROS Nine fun color combination options Four-fold design with handle for portability Zipper seal design for easy assembly and cleaning CONS Relatively expensive CHECK ON AMAZON | Tumbling Mat Buying Guide Physical exercise is essential to stay fit and healthy. Most people don't understand that you don't have to go to a commercial gym to exercise. Practicing gymnastics at home is a great way to improve your skills without leaving the comfort of your own home. Whether you are a new gymnast or an experienced one, having the most suitable tumbling mat will help you acquire skills faster and safer. After reviewing all the options available, we created this guide to help you pick the most suitable choice for your needs. This guide will teach you about all the different types of tumbling mats, the thickness options, dimensions, and much more. What Should You Consider Before Buying a Tumbling Mat? Thickness The thickness is important — for the best performance, be sure to aim for around 1 to 2 inches. An extremely thick mat will make tumbling difficult because the hands and feet sink into the material. Also, a thin yoga mat won't provide any cushioning and protection for your body. For example, kids' mats can be as thick as 4 inches. A thicker mat will be great for kids because it will offer shock absorption and protection. Size Space can be a huge issue when it comes to purchasing a mat. Before you go ahead and buy a tumbling mat, be sure that there is enough space for you to place the mat and perform stunts without hitting something. Since mats are offered in various sizes, it shouldn't be hard to find the perfect mat that will fit in the location you have planned. Most tumbling mats intended for home use are 8 feet long and 4 feet wide. Cover material The outside cover of a gymnastics mat can be made of vinyl or PU leather. Vinyl is a common option because it's highly durable and offers a non-slip surface for safer tumbling. Also, PU leather is the most expensive, but it also feels the nicest and most comfortable. Durability Next up, you will need to ensure that you choose a durable model. The inside material determines durability. If you go for foam models, ensure that the tumbling mat will retain its shape and feel for an extended period. On the other hand, if you prefer an inflatable model, ensure that the materials are resistant to sharp materials. How Much Does a Tumbling Mat Cost? Most of the tumbling mats will cost you from $100 to $800. Many factors go into the price, including thickness, durability, and size. So before you go ahead and buy one, it is best to evaluate your needs and your budget and choose the best tumble mat you can afford. How Did We Choose the Best Tumbling Mats? To pick the best tumbling mats, we have done in-depth research and analysis on all the products. Every product on our list has passed the following factors: Customer Reviews 40% Value 20% Brand 40% We have also tested every product in real life and saw which was the most comfortable for tumbling and exercising. So you can rest assured that this review is 100% genuine and backed with in-depth research. What Types of Tumbling Mats Are Available? Folding mats Folding mats feature a vinyl-covered panel that folds up for easy and simple storage. This panel mat is the most popular option for tumbling mats because it is easy to store and transport. The most popular size of this folding mat is 4 feet wide by 8 feet long. Cartwheel mats As the name implies, the purpose of these mats is for training cartwheels. The mats are usually either paneled or one-piece, with hand placement guides throughout their surface. These are excellent for beginners and especially for kids. Incline mats They are ideal for young gymnasts just beginning to learn how to roll. They allow young tumblers to learn how to roll backward or forward without creating too much stress on their body. We do not suggest that experienced gymnasts train on the incline mat for harder exercises because of the risk of getting injured. Flexi-roll mats Flexi-roll mat is built to look and feel like a competition floor. Of course, it doesn't offer precisely the same feel because it isn't made with springs, but it is the best choice for those that want to get comfortable with the feel of a competition area at their home. The great thing about these tumbling mats is that they are pretty similar to foldable mats, and they can be stored easily when not in use. You simply roll them up instead of folding them and then tuck them away. Conclusion It can be challenging to choose from the mat designs and models available in the market. However, it is easier to select with a proper guide and comprehensive information on what to look out for. Take your time to carefully go through the above-selected models and choose the one that matches your needs. We wish you happy shopping! | |||||||||||||||||||
39 | 38 | https://www.si.com/review/running-sock/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
40 | 39 | https://www.si.com/review/swim-cap/ | You need a reliable swim cap if swimming is a big part of your life. Not only do they protect your hair from chlorine damage and pool bacteria, but they also keep your hair packed and your vision clear. Although swim caps aren't the most attractive piece of swimming gear you can get your hands on, they can also hugely help you with speed by reducing the water flow resistance going against you! Moreover, there are many styles on the market with different features so you can find one that works well for you. For this article, our editors had to go above and beyond to come up with the finest swim caps of 2022 in the market. Since swim caps are a tricky item, we've also got a buyer's guide at the end that will greatly help you with your purchase. These swim caps are the best of the best because they: Effectively reduce drag in the water Won't snag or pull on your hair Will not tear easily | Here are the Top Swimming Caps of 2022 Dsane Extra Large Swimming Cap – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comes in several different colors Elastic band at the bottom helps keep your hair in place Quick-dry fabric Water-resistant with a lining on the inside edges to create a seal If you have long thick hair that you want to protect and keep dry while swimming, this is the cap for you. It’s made from 100% silicone and is big enough to fit most bulky hairstyles. Moreover, the cap is very roomy and the top flattens down in the water if your hair doesn’t have enough volume to fill the cap! CHECK ON AMAZON Firesara Fabric Swim Cap – Runner up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It’s durable and won’t rip Stays in place and doesn’t require readjustments Easy to put on and take off Very breathable with high elasticity and fine workmanship For swim workouts where you need to cover your hair for less drag but don’t want to bother with uncomfortable latex caps, this is an excellent choice. Its lycra fabric conforms nicely to your head and you may even forget it is there. This silicone swim cap is 9-inches wide and contains no latex. It’s designed for medium-to-long hair and contains soft material to prevent snagging. CHECK ON AMAZON Speedo Unisex Swim Cap – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This swim cap fits snugly and is flexible enough to fit over lots of hair Material is durable and the colors won’t fade even after extended use Has a very soft, superior texture Does not pull hair when removing or putting the cap on This silicone swim cap is 9-inches wide and contains no latex. It’s designed for medium-to-long hair as well and contains soft material to prevent snagging! This comfortable training and competition cap comes in a range of colors and patterns. Moreover, it’s meant to give you excellent durability, stretch, and pliability. CHECK ON AMAZON Arena Silicone Unisex Swim Cap – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Fits snugly and does not slide as much Does not stretch even after extended use Available in dozens of bright colors Composition is 100% silicone This comfortable training and competition cap comes in a range of colors and patterns. If you have longer hair, a latex cap’s edges may roll and catch your hair, however, this one will give you a classic fit form for a smooth and comfortable fit. It’s made up of 100% silicone and is designed to keep your hair very much dry even after long underwater swimming sessions. CHECK ON AMAZON TYR Latex Swim Cap 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Super cute designs that anyone will fall in love with Designed with a durable ribbed edge and latex construction that offers drag reduction and tear resistance Come in 14 beautiful colors Universal size that fits both adults and children This lightweight cap delivers the perfect fit, comes in 14 beautiful colors and has a universal size that fits both adults and children! Moreover, it’s’ tear-resistant and slides on easily over hair – without causing any hair pulls. The secure fit ensures that it stays in place while you swim. CHECK ON AMAZON Finis Mermaid Kid’s Silicone Swim Cap 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a universal fit Made up of 100% silicone For both recreational and competitive use Rippled edge for better security at the base This kids’ swim cap comes in a variety of fun patterns and is made of durable silicone. Great for both recreational and competitive use and the universal size fits most kids. The best part? Since it’s made up of 100% silicone, it provides a soft, watertight fit – making the cap odorless and hypoallergenic. CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer's Guide for Finding Top Swim Caps Ever tried swimming without wearing a swim cap on your head? Your hair gets in the way especially if you have long hair, doesn’t it? Swim caps are not only made to keep your hair in place and out of your face but they also make you more hydrodynamic in the water so you can swim better and faster as well as promote pool hygiene. Whether you’re new to swimming and need a swim cap or you’re looking to replace the one you already have, getting your hands on an ideal piece can be challenging. Although it looks like an ordinary piece of swimming gear, there are a lot of factors to consider when choosing a nice swim cap. Selecting the right one depends on where you want to use it and what type of swimming you intend to use it for. Why Do I Need to Wear Swim Caps? While it is not mandatory for you to wear a swim cap, it is advisable that you do. Most swim caps protect your hair from being damaged by the aggressive chlorine found in pools. If you’re preparing to swim in a competition, we strongly recommend using a swim cap to help enhance hydrodynamics that would help you swim better and faster. Letting your hair loose while swimming can be uncomfortable and would definitely increase drag and slow you down. Swimming with a cap on also promotes water hygiene and prevents strands of hair and hair particles from being all over the pool. What Do I Need to Know Before Buying a Swim Cap? Elasticity This is an important factor to consider as it determines how firm a swim cap would remain on the head especially if you have long hair or a larger head. You can determine if a swim cap is elastic if it stretches to a reasonable length and goes back into place. The main purpose of swimming with a cap is to prevent hair from getting loose, tangling, and creating drag. So if a swim cap isn’t elastic enough it loses its functionality. Comfort Comfort is key with swim caps. An ideal swim cap is one that is comfortable to wear, fits your head, isn’t too tight, and does not drag at your hair. A swim cap that contradicts these qualities would make your swim sessions irritable and downright uncomfortable. So be sure that whatever swim cap you buy is comfortable enough to use. Size and shape The size of a swim cap usually varies between large, medium, and small. Small swim caps are for kids and adults with small hair and a small shaped skull. Swim caps of medium size are regular caps and they can fit most head types because of their elasticity. Large caps are mostly for people with long hair to prevent hair from coming out of the cap and interrupting a swim session. What Material of Swim Cap Is the Best? Silicone Swim caps made with silicone are the most popular among swimmers. The material is thick, comfortable, and durable. They protect your hair and are flexible enough to be removed and worn back with ease. They come in different colors and are the best choice for people with latex allergies. Latex These swim caps are made of latex rubber and have a very tight fit. The material is thinner when compared to the silicone and it is more likely to rip if not handled with care. Moreover, it reduces drag which is good for swim races and is great for swimming in a pool with warm water as it prevents your head from overheating. Lycra Lycra is the softest material and the most comfortable to wear when compared with latex and silicone. They are also the most durable and are great for low-intensity water activities. It is easier to pull off and put on and the edges don’t stick together. This swim cap is not water-resistant and may not provide ample protection against the chlorine found in pools. The lycra swim cap often loses its elasticity with time and may become slippery. Maintenance Tips for Swimming Caps The durability of your swim cap ultimately depends on how you take care of it after use. Even the best of them may damage easily if not properly taken care of. After each dip in the pool or wherever you’ve been swimming, a simple rinse with cold water to help remove the chlorinated or salty water will help your swim cap last longer. After a swim workout, don’t just shove the cap in your swim bag because you’re tired. Take it out and air dry it after the cold water rinse. This would help increase the shelf life of your swim cap especially if it is made with latex. If you notice any mold or weird-looking thing growing in your cap, that’s an SOS signal. You have to clean it out immediately with bleach and water. The harsh chemicals in the bleach may reduce the lifespan of your swim cap so it is wiser to do the immediate cleanse after use in order to avoid this. Also, sprinkling talcum powder inside your swim cap after a cold water rinse and air dry will retain all the moisture, prevent your cap from sticking to itself and prevent bacteria or any moldy substance from accumulating inside the cap. | |||||||||||||||||||
41 | 40 | https://www.si.com/review/leg-extension-machine/ | Whether you want to lose weight or tone up your leg muscles, a leg extension machine is just for you. You must buy it if you plan to open up a gym as this machine is a must-have for any gym. Even better, you can add it to your home gym if you want to work on your lower body. It provides a great workout for your legs. We have evaluated many machines and created a list of the best leg extension machines in 2022 for you. If you want to ditch the squats and use a machine for your leg workout, then this machine is perfect for you. We have formulated a buyer's guide to help you buy the perfect leg extension machine. | Best Leg Extension Machine of 2022 Reviewed In Detail Marcy Adjustable 6 Position Bench – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Features an adjustable back pad for six different positions Top-grade and high-density foam padding for increased comfort Steel frame provides durability and resiliency Focuses on upper and lower body workouts It consists of an adjustable back that can be moved to match your routine. It offers a back pad adjustment design modified to an incline, flat, or decline position. You get to train not only your upper body but legs as well thanks to this ergonomic bench’s dual position leg developer. This bench’s top-grade foam padding allows users to exercise comfortably on the equipment. The Marcy Utility Bench’s powder-coated steel frame provides great resiliency, with a maximum weight capacity of 600 pounds. The pads of this machine have a vinyl covering and a hardwearing, powder-coated finish. PROS 6 adjustable positions Foam padding for greater comfort Powder-coated finish for improved durability CONS Extension issues for leg curls Not consistently stable CHECK ON AMAZON Merax Utility Weight Bench – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Equipped with a non-slip grip handle below the seat Weight capacity is 550 lbs. Coated with waterproof leather for low maintenance Padded ankle rollers keep legs in place during decline exercises It is constructed with 12-gauge solid steel with a red-coated finish for strength and durability. Steel plates at the unit base keep the bench stable and protect floors while allowing you to push it to the limit. Ideal for bench press with dumbbells. 6-ladder adjustments and three different seat positions provide ergonomic support as your back angle changes. It allows you to hit all the important muscle groups effectively. Tailor this weight bench for different weightlifting or equipment-free sets. The 2″ thick, high-density, dual-layered padding effortlessly withstand high-intensity workouts. The machine is designed with thicker padding at the end of the seat pad for comfort in the back of the knees. PROS 12-gauge steel construction High-density padding Non-slip handles CONS Stability issues CHECK ON AMAZON XMark Rotary Leg Extension – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Develops quadriceps and hamstrings For use with Olympic and standard plate weights 14″ Chrome Olympic adapter sleeve included 20 position adjustable press arm to fit various leg lengths XMark’s rotary leg extension and curl machine isolate the quadriceps and hamstrings while providing a full range of motion through each movement. This machine sports an 11-gauge steel 2 inch by 3-inch mainframe construction coated in a baked scratch-resistant powder coat finish with bolted-on, skid-resistant feet. It also boasts an oversized chrome cam and a rear weight post for extra stability. Both standard and Olympic weight plates can be used with this machine. A 14″ chrome Olympic adapter sleeve is included for use with Olympic weight plates. PROS 12 thigh positions 20 arm positions 11-gauge steel construction Vinyl-covered rollers CONS Seat uneven Range of motion is somewhat limited CHECK ON AMAZON GOLD’S GYM 20 Olympic Bench – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a 600-pound weight capacity Power Catch uprights are built to withstand the toughest workouts Has 9.5 inches spotters that support you during the bench press You can choose between an incline, decline, or flat surface Build and develop your quads, hamstrings, glutes, and hip flexors with this 6-roll leg developer. Rolled preacher pad isolate your biceps and forearms while ensuring proper exercise form with this preacher pad that’s been rolled at the top for increased comfort. Get a safe, effective workout with these 9.5 inches spotters that support you during bench press and squat type workouts. It has a 600-pound weight capacity, with a 300-pound user capacity and a 300-pound weight set limit. Attach the curl yoke to develop a stronger, more defined upper body, and then quickly remove it when you’re ready to switch gears and work out on the leg developer station. PROS Built to ensure proper form 600-pound capacity Detachable curl capability CONS Too large for smaller people Not enough for those serious about lifting CHECK ON AMAZON Fitness Reality 2000 Super Max 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has an adjustable backrest and foam rollers The seat design eliminates the gap between the backrest and the seat Has an 850-pound weight capacity A 2″ thick foam seat and backrest keep you comfortable It has a weight capacity of 850 lbs. and a 2″ x 3″ steel frame construction. It offers independent backrest and seat angle adjustments. User height is up to 6’4″. 37″ extended backrest support. The seat design eliminates the gap between the backrest and seat at all angles and any position. Moreover, the bench seat has three angle adjustments (0-degree, 8 degrees, and 15-degree degrees). It offers a smooth seven levels adjustable backrest from –15-degree to +85-degree angles. The detachable leg lock-down with four foam rollers (4-inch diameter) is perfect for supporting sit-ups and decline bench presses. You can perform over 20 workout exercises, including bench presses, shoulder presses, dumbbell curls, sit-ups/crunches, dips, and more. It can be folded for storage. Folded dimensions are 53. 5″ L x 24″ w x 10. 8″ H. PROS 850 lb capacity No gap between backrest and seat More than 20 positions possible Adjustable backrest CONS Durability Adjusting seat gap is difficult CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Leg Extension Machines Buyer's Guide Many leg extension machines are available online, but one should pay heed while buying a worthwhile machine. This is because you don't want your money to be wasted on any third-class workout machine. Certain factors need to be considered while buying the workout bench that is most comfortable and effective. For this purpose, we have created this guide to make it easier for you to choose the perfect bench press for your gym. We have taken many things into account to make this purchase effortless for you. What are the key considerations when buying a leg extension machine? Durability The leg machine should be durable and sturdy. Most low-quality machines tend to rust after a certain amount of time. You must make sure that the one you are planning to buy is durable. The parts of the machine should be assembled tightly together, and it shouldn't wear off easily. Easy to assemble The machine comes in different parts, and you have to assemble it once your order has arrived. While buying the bench, you should make sure that it is easy to assemble. For this purpose, you should read all the instructions given to combine the whole machine and buy it. Comfort Comfort is the one thing that you shouldn't compromise. While purchasing a workout machine, you must check whether it is comfy or not. It should be comfortable enough that you can sit on it for long hours of training without hurting your back. You should buy the ones which contain padding on the back and foot, which makes it extremely comfortable. Affordability Staying on budget is important as exercise machines can get quite pricey. There are many options available when buying a leg extension machine as there are many less costly machines. Some others are quite expensive. It depends on your budget and preferences that which one you should buy. Easy to use The machine should be easy to use. Many people have just started working out. It should not give them a tough time in understanding its basics. It should allow the newbies to work out with full confidence. Which features to look for in the best leg extension machines? Leather quality The leather quality of the bench needs to be taken into consideration. Some leather seats are not durable and cheap. These seats get easily torn apart. Others are water and oil resistant, and you should buy those which have these qualities. Weight capacity The machine should be able to carry heavyweight people. Obese people most use leg extension machines to get into shape and lose fat. So, it should withstand the weight of someone a bit heavier. Adjustability Easy adjustability of the seat gives an edge to the machine over the one whose seat is difficult to adjust. The adjustability of the seat, back, and foot should be done with utmost ease. Adjustments are done according to height to provide a more comfortable workout experience. Rust-free metal The body of the machine should be made of heavy-gauge steel construction. It should be durable enough that even if you don't use it for months, it should still work well and don't rust. The machine's components should work perfectly fine even if it is used after a long period. Multiple workouts A leg extension machine should be able to let you perform multiple exercises with one machine. Some machines have features that allow you to do upper body workouts and lower body workouts with the same machine. You should aim for the one with multiple features, which can act as a tool for training different parts of the body. What are the advantages of leg extension machine exercises? Situated in the front portion of the thigh are quadriceps muscles. This is the essential focal point of leg extension exercises. These muscles are called rectus femoris and vastus muscles. The knee extension machine reinforces key connections of the knee joints by expanding the quad muscles' size and strength only if you do it properly. When you want steadier and more grounded thighs, you should consider combining leg extensions with leg curls. This allows higher legs endurance and increases your running speed. Leg extension exercises are among the few selections you can choose from when isolating the quads during your workouts. What is the price range of leg extension machines? Expensive If you are more concerned about the quality and want to be sure that you are investing in a great product, buying a machine from high-end brands is a good idea. The expensive leg extension machines range from 1,000$-2,000$. Mid-range Those who want a great value of money should invest in mid-range products from well-known brands. The mid-range leg extension machines range from 500$-1,000$. Cheap The cheap leg extension machines, which may not be as durable or have issues with stability, range from 70$-500$. | |||||||||||||||||||
42 | 41 | https://www.si.com/review/badminton-birdie/ | Aside from the racquet, the shuttlecock is the most important part of badminton Presently, there are several shuttlecocks in the market with varying features which has made the decision much harder for badminton players. Moreover, the flight height, trajectory shape, and flight distance depend on the features of the shuttlecocks. That’s why you cannot pick a random product and use it to play badminton. So, to ease your dilemma, we have described here the seven best badminton shuttlecocks in 2022. These shuttlecocks are the most popular ones in the market and have better durability than other products. They are manufactured by some of the topmost brands in the sports industry, so there is no confusion regarding the quality of the products. Since we will be talking about seven different shuttlecocks, choosing a single one might feel difficult. We have provided a solution for that also in the form of a detailed buying guide. Hence, you will have all the clarifications you need before picking out the best fit for your game. | Premier Badminton Birdies You Can Find In 2022 Kevenz Goose Feather Badminton Shuttlecock – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It is equipped with a strong ball head having high fight resistance The shuttlecock has been reinforced with solid and unbreakable feather stocks It comes with an aerodynamic design for more stability The shuttlecock has sixteen goose feathers which makes it compact but more lightweight. Each feather has the same length and thickness, which is why the shuttlecock can resist the airflow in case it is hit in the opposite direction of the wind. Besides, the stocks or the feather roots are firmly attached to the rubber base. Hence, they wouldn’t break easily even if you flatten the shuttlecock upside down. In addition, the feathers are arranged in an overlapping manner that increases the stability of the shuttlecock in the air. The ball head of the shuttlecock is made from composite material, which has high elasticity and can bounce back into the air even with a bit of force from the racquet net. PROS Pack of 12 Very affordable Goose feather construction CONS Questionable durability Easy to lose CHECK ON AMAZON Zhenan LED Badminton Birdie – Best For Playing In Dim Light 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It comes with a single button LED switch for playing at night It can attain high speed in the air after a few hits from the racquet The shuttlecocks have LEDs with a life expectancy of 50 hours in total The pack consists of four shuttlecocks having different LED colored green, yellow, blue, and red. So, you will have more options in playing with different colored birdies. Since the shuttlecocks are lit by LEDs, you can easily see them in dark light conditions hassle-free. Besides, the shuttlecock is made from goose feathers which are known for their lightweight nature. The ball head is made from foam having a high bounce factor for making better attacks. Due to its lightweight nature, the shuttlecock will fly faster in the air without getting affected by the wind resistance. PROS Glow in the dark Variety of colors 4 shuttlecocks Affordable CONS Can be fragile CHECK ON AMAZON Yonex Mavis 300 Badminton Shuttlecock – Best For Longevity And Speed 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a unique design whose flight time is equivalent to a feather shuttlecock It is highly durable and cannot be broken or damaged easily It can be played at any temperature due to the unique skirt material Any level of badminton player can use this shuttlecock from Yonex. Instead of using feathers, it is made from hard plastic. However, the change in the material hasn’t affected the flight time, speed, and performance of the shuttlecock. You will still get the traditional feather shuttlecock feel, especially in terms of the speed in the air. If somehow the shuttlecock is smashed, it takes around 0.02 seconds to recover from the force. The ball head is made from high-quality foam, which adds extra bounce to the product. That’s why you won’t have to put too much effort into serving or returning the hit to the opposing team. PROS Pack of 6 Very affordable Better durability CONS Not the best for outdoor play CHECK ON AMAZON Philonext Goose Feather Badminton Birdie – Best For Durable Ball Head 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It is equipped with a ball head having high resistance to wear and tear The birdie stay in the air for a long time without changing the flight course It has a unique feather arrangement for daily use Philonext has introduced a perfect product for badminton enthusiasts who like to play the game outdoors. It has become popular lately because of the heaviness of the ball head, which is the primary source of its stability. Inside the ball head of the product, the cavity is filled with wood grains. The goose feathers of the shuttlecock are arranged in a way to make the product compact and aerodynamic in nature. Due to this feature, the shuttlecock’s flight path remains steady, even if the air resistance is high. PROS 12 piece set Super affordable Ideal for indoor play CONS Not the most durable CHECK ON AMAZON Hiraliy 24 Pack Nylon Badminton Birdie 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It comes with a ball head filled with wood particles for more stability The shuttlecock has a unique design for better momentum It is equipped with a complex skirt design for better flight stability Thanks to the unique skirt design, this shuttlecock can be used for both indoor and outdoor games. In this birdie, you will have a feather skirt made from high-quality nylon that increases the product’s durability. To enhance stability, the ball head cavity is filled with wood grain. Besides, the skirt and the ball head are fixed together with super glue. Hence, you won’t have to worry about the shuttlecock’s durability. As the product is designed uniquely, it follows a proper curved projectile path with steady velocity. PROS Pack of 24 Neon for easy visiblity Good for youths Plays indoor and outdoor CONS A bit heavier than others CHECK ON AMAZON Champion Sports Nylon Outdoor Shuttlecock 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a lightweight construction due to nylon material It can quickly gain momentum in the air after repeated hits A small amount of force will be enough for sending the shuttlecock in the air In this shuttlecock, both the nylon feather skirt and ball head are white in color. This way you can spot the birdie easily even if it is high up in the air. Nylon is the primary material used for the construction of the shuttlecock. Since no wood grain has been included in the ball head, this shuttlecock is lightweight. As a result, it can quickly fly in the air but only when no resistance is there. The compact shape imparts stability to the shuttlecock, making it perfect for indoor games. PROS Pack of 6 For outdoor use Very affordable Lightweight CONS Too light for some Mostly durable but can fall apart quickly when they degrade CHECK ON AMAZON Olennz Goose Feather Badminton Birdie 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has white-colored feathers for enhanced visibility It is reinforced with a composite shuttlecock head for better air stability It’s equipped with flexible feathers that wouldn’t suffer deformation If you are looking for a highly durable shuttlecock made from goose feathers, the Olennz birdies will be the best choice. The feathers are the thick and equal length that makes the shuttlecock’s design aerodynamic. As a result, regardless of the projectile path, it will remain steady during its flight. Besides, the feathers come with unbreakable stocks, which are further glued to the ball head. As the ball has composite filling inside, the birdie has high resistance to wind flow. That’s why it is perfect for outdoor games. PROS Pack of 12 For both indoor and outdoor use Very affordable Generally good durability CONS When they degrade, they break apart quickly CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer's Guide: Finding A Great Badminton Shuttlecock The performance of the shuttlecock depends on several factors, but mainly the wind speed and flow direction. So, if you buy a birdie randomly, you might end up with the worst choice. For casual games, however, having the most appropriate shuttlecock is not that important. But when you are practicing for matches and tournaments, you need to choose the best badminton shuttlecock. If you are baffled by the variety of choices, do not worry much. In the following section, we have presented a brief buying guide. Here, we have explained all the possible factors on which the choice of your badminton shuttlecock will depend. What Are the Factors You Should Consider for Choosing a Badminton Shuttlecock? Shuttlecock material The first factor that needs to be considered is the material used to make the shuttlecock. Usually, the ball head and the skirt are made from different materials. For example, foam and complex composite are the two materials used in the ball heads. On the contrary, nylon or feather is used in constructing the skirt. Feather arrangement and features If you are buying a feather shuttlecock, make sure to check the features of the goose feathers. The number of feathers varies from one shuttlecock to another. But they are usually more than ten in number to make the shuttlecock stable and durable. Additionally, check whether the feathers are thick enough to resist the airflow. Also, ensure that the feathers aren't breaking when pressed down on a surface upside down. Ball head features The ball head is one of the essential parts of the shuttlecock as it comes in contact with the racquet's net. Make sure that the ball head is durable and made from a high-quality material like foam or composite. Moreover, if you want to choose a heavy shuttlecock, ensure the ball head is filled with wood grain. Stability in the air It is essential to consider whether or not the shuttlecock will have proper stability in the air. The movement of the shuttlecock depends on the initial projectile velocity, the wind speed, and the direction of the airglow. Since the air can change the shuttlecock's trajectory, it is essential to get a shuttlecock with steady flight features. That means not having to move here and there to hit the shuttlecock again or miss any attack. Bounce factor Every shuttlecock has a bounce factor. It describes how high the shuttlecock will travel after it is re-hit by your racquet or the flight distance it will cover. The higher the bounce factor, the more will be the trajectory length and height. In fact, with more bounce, you won’t have to apply too much effort during serves and offensive hits. Durability and longevity The last factor that should be considered before you choose a shuttlecock is its durability and longevity. To ensure that you are getting a durable gel, check how strong the feather stocks are and whether or not they bend. Consider thickness as well. The feathers should be thick so that the wear and tear rate can be reduced. In addition, the glue which is being used to connect the feather skirt or stocks with the ball head must be solid and long-lasting. What Are the Differences Between Nylon Feather and Goose Feather Shuttlecocks? Two major types of shuttlecocks are available in the market - goose feather birdie and nylon feather skirt shuttle. Even though both are used to playing badminton, there are specific differences between their performances and features which you should know as a player. For example: Nylon shuttles can travel to a greater length as they usually follow a flat trajectory than the feather shuttlecock. The feather shuttlecocks can attain high speed in the air due to its natural flight properties, which is impossible for a nylon shuttle. In the feather birdies, each feather can be bent but not crushed. However, if you try to bend the nylon shuttlecock, it might break or form a tear. As for durability, feather shuttles are highly durable as compared to the nylon shuttlecock. This is because the feathers used are from natural material which can last longer. In addition, feather shuttlecocks have more stability in the air than nylon shuttlecocks. This is because feathers can resist the wind flow and speed, thereby reducing missed hits or changed trajectory. Final Words A badminton shuttlecock must be stable, durable, robust, long-lasting, and lightweight. The wrong shuttlecock can mean a change in trajectory, both during the serves and re-hits. No matter what the airflow is, the cock will remain steady in this projectile flight without changing its direction. This is why you need the best shuttlecock. It makes the game more thrilling or helps you in practicing continuously. The seven shuttlecocks described here have gained lots of appreciation lately, so choosing one of them won't disappoint you. | |||||||||||||||||||
43 | 42 | https://www.si.com/review/best-sleep-tracker/ | Having trouble falling asleep at night? You might want to try a sleep tracker that monitors your nocturnal wellbeing through heart rate, oxygen saturation levels, and movement, but the best sleep trackers in 2021 do more than just that. These highly advanced gadgets feature smart listening technology and powerful sensors to monitor external factors like ambient noise, snoring, air temperature, and quality, and brightness in the room to determine what might be causing disturbances in your sleep. Sleep trackers can come in wearable and no-contact technology with a range of styles and functions, which is why it isn’t easy to pick out one that will fit your needs and budget. We’re making your hunt for the best sleep tracker easier with some of our top picks based on their features, price, durability, and functionality. We’ve conducted in-depth product research and checked verified customer reviews to find the best sleep trackers that will be the perfect fit for your lifestyle. | Detailing the Best Sleep Trackers in 2021 Fitbit Charge 4 Fitness and Sleep Tracker – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Heart rate tracker Syncs with smartphones over Bluetooth Skin temperature tracker through Fitbit app 7-days battery backup time The Fitbit Charge 4 has some incredible features that make it our top pick on this list of best sleep trackers. It is available in multiple colors and can be synced with the Fitbit app on your smartphone through Bluetooth and an internet connection. It’s water-resistant up to 50 meters and has long battery life that can last up to seven days. The sleep tracker has a built-in GPS that detects the intensity of your daily activity based on key metrics such as pace and elevation to monitor your overall health more efficiently. The 24/7 heart rate sensor picks up any irregularities in your sleeping routine, allowing you to see the analytics on the device’s partner app. The sleep tracker also monitors your blood oxygen levels overnight, showing weekly reports that may allow you to pick up any irregularities in your sleep. CHECK ON AMAZON Withings Sleep – Sleep Tracker – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Detects sleep pattern interruptions Automatically syncs data with the app Easy setup Works with Alexa If you’re looking for the best non-wearable sleep tracker loaded with high-tech features, then this is it. Not as obtrusive as the Fitbit wrist tracker, the Withings Sleep Tracking Pad monitors your sleep cycle every night, picking up any interruptions in all sleep stages and giving customized recommendations on how to get better rest at night. The cutting-edge device has a built-in sensor to detect snoring, a feature that most wearable gadgets don’t offer. It gives users a sleep score every morning derived from the data collected from the previous night, even offering the option for additional coaching through its partner app. The pad needs to be installed under the mattress after which it automatically connects to the Wi-Fi. The sleep tracker can also be synced with smart home systems including Alexa. CHECK ON AMAZON Amazfit Band 5 Sleep Tracker – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Full color AMOLED touchscreen Monitors stress levels Has guided breathing exercises Helps track the menstrual cycle This affordable sleep tracker from Amazfit promises features comparable to some of the best smartwatches in 2021 but at an unbeatable price. The device is exceptionally lightweight and can be worn all day long without requiring frequent charging. The Band 5 has a smart sensor that monitors your blood oxygen and even tracks stress levels which might help identify sleep irregularities. The watch has a special sleep tracking feature that monitors heart rate and the number of hours spent sleeping. This sleep tracker has a 15-day battery life and is available in multiple styles and colors. It is also extremely lightweight, which means that you don’t have to worry about taking it off your wrist or charging it all the time. CHECK ON AMAZON Polar M430 GPS Running Watch and Sleep Tracker – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Integrated GPS tracker Optical heart rate monitor 24/7 activity and sleep tracking Polar’s M430 smartwatch is great for those who prefer functionality over style. The watch isn’t as aesthetically pleasing as the other wearable options on this list but it definitely makes up for it with its features. The watch offers 24/7 sleep and activity tracking with up to one week of battery life. Designed to enhance performance and improve sleep quality, this sleep tracker monitors your heart rate throughout the day, even after you’ve dozed off. The sleep tracker has six LED optical sensors for accurate heart rate readings. The watch doubles as a fitness tracker too, using built-in GPS to track activity metrics such as distance, altitude, and pace. The sleep tracker is waterproof and has changeable wrist straps for more flexibility. CHECK ON AMAZON Wellue O2Ring Wearable Sleep Tracker 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Automatically syncs data over Bluetooth Comfortable silicone design Monitors oxygen levels, heart rate, and sleep patterns Less obtrusive than a smartwatch, this sleep tracker ring is extremely lightweight and doesn’t feel uncomfortable to wear overnight. The ring is made with flexible silicone that feels soft against the skin and will fit fingers of most sizes. The sleep tracker can run for up to 16 hours on a full charge. This compact device is packed with impressive features such as continuous monitoring of oxygen levels which might come in handy if you’re pregnant or trekking in high-altitude areas. It also tracks your heart rate in real-time, allowing you to access the analytics through its partner app, Bibibi. The data collected by the sleep tracker over weeks and even months can be exported from the app in CSV or PDF format. Any abnormalities in the readings are marked in the report to help you adopt healthier habits for better sleep. CHECK ON AMAZON | Sleep Trackers Buying Guide Poor sleep hygiene can be detrimental to your physical and mental health. Sleep interruptions aren’t only limited to disorders like sleep apnea and insomnia, which are known for causing restlessness at bedtime. Factors like temperature fluctuations, nightmares, light, and noise might prevent you from getting restful sleep. It might help to use a sleep tracker at night to identify any culprits that affect your overall sleep quality. It’s important to note that sleep trackers cannot replace medical treatment or diagnose sleep disorders. However, your doctor might find the data collected by the sleep tracker useful in recommending the right recovery plan to get your physical and mental wellbeing back on track. What Are The Best Features Of Sleep Trackers? There are some common features found in every sleep tracker, but some wearable and contactless devices offer more than just the regular sleep time analysis. Let’s take a look at the exciting features some of the best sleep trackers have to offer: Advanced Tracking Most sleep trackers offer heart rate and sleep stage analysis, but if you’re looking for more comprehensive data, some advanced sleep trackers use smart listening technology to pick up any breathing irregularities or loud snoring. The advanced sleep tracking system in contactless devices can also assess the temperature, air quality, and brightness level in the bedroom and suggest improvements to help you get better sleep at night. Detailed Analytics Some sleep trackers offer smart analytics to give you a better picture of your sleeping pattern and allow you to compare certain metrics---like bedtime, amount of shut-eye, and snoring---over several days, weeks, and even months. Some smart sleep trackers will even overlay these metrics to suggest important changes to your environment for better sleep. Wearable sleep trackers also allow you to track your daily activity level to better understand how your sleeping habits affect your overall health and energy levels. Smart Alarm Whether you prefer a contact-free or a wearable sleep tracker, many of these systems offer ‘silent’ or smart alarms that allow you to specify a time window for waking up the next morning. The device determines when to wake you up based on your total sleep time, using soft vibrations instead of a loud alarm. Smartphone App Most sleep trackers will allow you to sync your analytics with its own smartphone app through Bluetooth. Wearable gadgets often have a small LED screen that is difficult to read, whereas non-wearable technology has no screen at all. With a smartphone app, you can conveniently view and control your metrics on your phone whenever you want. Syncing a wearable sleep tracker to your smartphone will also allow you to receive notifications and phone calls directly on the tracker, which is especially useful when you’re away from your phone. Material It’s important to check online reviews before buying a wearable sleep tracker that you’ll probably wear all night. Most sleep trackers are lightweight and come in a variety of designs, colors, and sizes to suit different preferences. But sometimes, a sleep tracker might not match your wrist size or have a design flaw that makes it unsuitable to wear at night. Do your research and read about other people’s experiences before making a purchase decision. Battery life Battery life isn’t much of an issue with no-contact sleep trackers, which only work as long as they’re plugged into the wall or a USB port. However, wearable trackers only need to be charged periodically; therefore you must ensure that the one you’re buying boasts a long battery life so that you can get the most out of it even when you don’t have access to a charger or a charging port for several days. What Are The Different Types Of Sleep Trackers? There are so many different sleep trackers on the market that boast unique designs and features, but when it comes to their technology, these devices can be categorized as wearable or non-wearable sleep trackers. Here’s everything you need to know about these two categories: Wearable Sleep Trackers There are many different types of wearable devices that work as fitness and sleep trackers. These gadgets are commonly worn around the wrist or even fingers that track your activity throughout the day and even when you’re asleep. Wrist Trackers and Smartwatches Smartwatches are the most popular type of wearable sleep trackers which employ special sensors for monitoring the heart rate and activity level. Wrist trackers can be paired with your smartphone through their own app, allowing you to track your progress and identify any factors that might cause disturbances in your sleep. Rings If you’re looking for something that’s less obtrusive with similar features as a smartwatch, then a sleep tracker ring might be a good option. This comprehensive device doubles as a fitness tracker that monitors your body temperature, heart rate, activity level, and key sleep metrics. Like smartwatches, sleep tracker rings can also be synced to a smartphone app for a more in-depth analysis of your nocturnal wellbeing and overall health. Non-Wearable Sleep Trackers Some people want to monitor their sleep activity with technology that isn’t as intrusive as a smartwatch or other types of wearable sleep trackers. If you prefer not to have any skin contact with your sleep tracker, then you might want to look into non-wearable options that can be installed under the mattress and sometimes even come built into the bedding. These sleep trackers use sensors to monitor biometrics like movement frequency, sleep stage cycle, heart rate, and much more. Since these sleep trackers don’t have an LCD screen, they rely on smartphone apps to convey analytics and share helpful tips to improve your sleep quality. How Much Do Sleep Trackers Cost? Sleep trackers can cost anywhere between $50 and $300, depending on the brand and the model. At a minimum, a sleep tracker is able to monitor your bedtime routine and track how much you sleep every night. Sleep trackers on the more affordable end of the spectrum lack a display but can be connected to an app that helps you monitor key metrics. If you’re looking for something more sophisticated, you might want to spend a little more and invest in a gadget that can double as a fitness tracker with a built-in GPS, LED screen, heart-rate monitor and so much more. These sleep trackers are often geared towards the health-minded folks who love staying active. But you don’t need an expensive gadget if all you need to monitor is your sleep. There is are plenty of non-wearable sleep trackers that can be slipped under the mattress and aren’t too intrusive or expensive. How Did We Find The Best Sleep Tracker? We’ve gone above and beyond in our quest for the best sleep tracker to find options that will fit most needs and preferences. Whether you prefer a wearable sleep tracker that can monitor your activity throughout the day or non-wearable ones that are fitted inside or under the bedding, we’ve found the perfect solution for all your sleep-related problems. We’ve evaluated each sleep tracker’s price, features, customer reviews, and brand reputation to curate a list of the best sleep trackers in 2021. It’s important to us that the sleep trackers we recommend are easy to navigate and effective and pair well with their companion apps to give the best user experience for an unmatched price. | |||||||||||||||||||
44 | 43 | https://www.si.com/review/best-youth-size-football/ | No matter their age right now, there will come a day when your little football fan will want to try tossing the pigskin around. However, the average football is much too large for growing hands! The Best Youth-Size Footballs in 2022 offers the perfect solution, giving your child a football that’s just the right size for them to play with and learn to have fun with while playing the game. | Best Youth-Size Football Wilson NFL Super Grip Football – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This NFL-branded, kid-sized football will help your little athlete feel more like a pro as they play! Its bladder is made from butyl rubber, while the exterior is designed for maximum grip. PROS Excellent grip enhances throwing and catching ability Holds up well to being kicked or punted Comes inflated right out of the box, so it’s ready to play the moment it arrives CONS Stitching may poke out from the ball and laces may dig into hands CHECK ON AMAZON Franklin Sports Grip-Rite Rubber Junior Football – Runner up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This rubber junior football from Franklin is designed to reliably hold up to the elements and the hardest level of play. It’s perfectly sized for little hands. PROS The Franklin Sports Grip-Rite Junior Football is lightweight and easy to throw Arrives in the mail already inflated, so kids can start playing right away Amount of grip makes this ball easier to throw, catch, and have fun with CONS Ends are vulnerable to wrinkling quickly with harsher throws On the bouncier side CHECK ON AMAZON GlowCity Glow in the Dark Football – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon When you tap on the football, it glows brightly in a vivid red-orange glow. Unless you are playing with it continually, the item will go on for roughly 40 seconds. Each football comes with one Smart LED with cells that turn on when the ball hits the ground to save battery life. The lights will turn off once you have stopped playing. This is not one of those glows in the dark goods where you have to continuously charge the glow material by exposing it to light. This battery-operated football can last several hours before having to be recharged. PROS Long-lasting and suitable for all levels of play For little hands, youth size Water-resistant, will function in rainy or wet fields CONS Poor craftsmanship CHECK ON AMAZON Rawlings NFL Downfield Youth Football – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon If your little athlete has a favorite team, this football is a perfect choice! It’s emblazoned with a team logo of your choice and offers a high level of grip. PROS The NFL Downfield Youth Football has an incredible grip that makes it easy to toss around and catch Great size for kids to play with as they grow CONS Might be too small for adults Ball must be filled upon arrival CHECK ON AMAZON Under Armour Composite Football 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This Under Armour-brand football is designed to retain a solid grip, no matter whether it’s dry or wet, and is filled with 2-ply foam for guaranteed softness. PROS Comfortable grip makes this Under Armour Composite Football easy to hold, toss, and catch Exterior is durable and high-quality CONS May deflate quickly CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Youth-Size Footballs Buying Guide Having the right ball from the start is the best way to learn and understand the game quickly. There are lots of brands offering quality youth-sized footballs on the market and they all differ in quality and price. The different options can make it overwhelming to decide which youth size ball is the right one for you. If you’re not sure which football works for the needs of your program, event or activity, we have created this guide to help you choose the best youth size football for you, your youth team, or your child. What Material Do I Choose for My Youth Size Football? What your youth size football is made of significantly affects its performance and durability. The most common material options you’ll find will be either foam, rubber (synthetic leather), or genuine leather. Each of these materials has its own specific characteristics that fulfil different needs. Let’s take a look at each of them; Foam These types of footballs are low-cost and very lightweight. The ball’s soft material makes them very good for young children who have just begun to learn to throw and catch. Foam footballs are also great for more confined spaces, such as in a small yard close to windows or between vehicles at a tailgate. Foam balls of higher quality can also be used for recreational games. These kinds of footballs are not as durable as the rubber and leather counterparts, but they remain a favorite among fans because of their affordability and ease of replacement. Rubber or synthetic leather These are a great choice if you are looking for a durable, effective football without breaking the bank. They are much more durable than foam and are more affordable than genuine leather. The ball’s texture is formulated for enhanced grip, making these footballs an ideal choice for practice equipment. They are also more moisture-resistant than the genuine leather and stand a better chance if left out in harsh conditions. Genuine leather Footballs made from this material are considered to be of the highest quality. Due to the tanning process used in treating the leather, genuine leather footballs have an inherent tackiness to them that makes them very easy to grip when dry. They are also the most durable option available, but all these extra advantages come at a higher price point. Additionally, you should also take into consideration the lining and bladder. These features are also very important and tend to help the football retain its shape and structure better over time. To enjoy the benefits of a rubber or synthetic leather or genuine leather football (foam footballs do not have these options available), look for models featuring a multi-layered lining and butyl bladder. What Are the Available Youth Football Sizes on the Market? Youth football sizes for kids ages 6 to 14 are broken into three categories: peewee, junior, and youth. Let’s examine them; Pee Wee Pee wee footballs are designed for the hands of children ages 6 to 9. These small footballs enable children to grip the ball correctly and enjoy the learning process to throw it accurately. Junior Children between ages 9 to 12 are ready for Junior class footballs. Kids this age still have smaller hands than adults, but they also have more experience and understanding of the game. They can handle this ball without issue. Youth Youth size footballs are for players between ages 12 to 14. These balls are closer in size to the official college balls and meet the required needs of experienced players. Players grow quickly at this age; this size football is designed to fit those developing hands. Professional vs Recreational use The reason why you need the football in the first instance should be a crucial decider on the type of youth size football you get in the end. Recreational usage refers to a situation where the young one just needs a ball to occasionally throw in the yard or play a random game with friends. Professional usage applies to kids that play on school teams or in junior leagues. Each of these groups requires different ball characteristics. Let’s check them out: Recreational use Typically, footballs made for recreational use are easy to throw and catch. They stand up to normal wear and feel comfortable in the player's hand. They are usually less costly than professional-grade balls because they are made from composite leather and not genuine leather hides. The texture of these kinds of footballs makes them easier to grip, and the material resists moisture better than natural leather. Competitive use Competitive players get to choose from composite or leather footballs and be okay with either choice. Professional footballs are of excellent quality and are exceptionally suited for daily play. As we mentioned earlier, Leather footballs are pricier than composite balls and are an investment in great gameplay Conclusion One of the most efficient ways coaches and parents can help the development of a young player or team is to ensure that they are using the correct youth football sizes for the kids they are coaching. Football like every other sport starts with the fundamentals. The fundamental way of teaching the game is to make sure you are using the right football for the age group you're teaching. | |||||||||||||||||||
45 | 44 | https://www.si.com/review/football-mouth-guard/ | Every kind of impact sport involves tugging, falling and taking in some blows here and there. When it comes to thrilling sports, football makes the top five; it demands agility, precision, speed and roughness. The athletic prowess it demands also makes it hard to completely avoid injury. However, you can still minimize damage with protective gear like a football mouthguard. A mouth guard, as the name suggests, protects your mouth from high-impact blows and falls during a game. Mouthguards are not only for the protection of your teeth, they’re also designed to guard the jaw, gums, and lips. You can find a huge range of products with different flavors, designs, and prices. Choosing the right one for you amongst all the available options can get tough. We’ve rounded up some of our favorite football mouth guards based on the following features: Protection for teeth and gums Shock absorption Comfortable for long periods of use | Best Football Mouth Guards Worth Considering in 2022 Shock Doctor Football Gel Mouthguard – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Triple-layer, heavy-duty design BPA-free and safe Gel fit liner technology for the perfect fit This mouth guard for football, hockey, lacrosse and basketball features gel fit liner technology that makes the fit comfortable and easy. The gel mold transforms and shapes according to the gums and teeth of the wearer and makes the guard ideal for extended use. The integrated breathing channels in the base and top of the mouth guard make it easier to breathe. The exoskeletal shock frame is heavy-duty and protective against hard impacts. It protects the cheeks, teeth grinding, tongue and keeps the teeth securely in place. All of this combines to add more durability and protection to the mouth guard. This mouthguard has over 7,000 5-star ratings on Amazon and is an Amazon Best Seller, making it our top pick. PROS Good for extended use Easy and comfortable to wear with braces too CONS Inaccurate size guide CHECK ON AMAZON Under Armour Football Mouth Guard – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Integrated bite pad Extended lip guard/shield Low-profile design for comfort This lip and mouth guard is made from a premium high-quality material ensuring complete protection of your teeth and lips as you play. There is an integrated bite pad on the inner side of the lip shield to fit comfortably and snugly around the teeth. The tight fit makes sure there is no tooth displacement even under the hardest of impacts. You can wear this mouth guard both in the strapped, or strapless form. There is no mold in the design of this premium mouth guard. You can instantly fit it in your mouth and get in the game. The bite pads are placed at a lower profile for extra comfort and accurate fit. The lip guard extends wide and tall enough to protect against both upper and lower lip impacts. The large breathing channel allows sufficient airflow for easy breathing. PROS Protects braces too Comfortable fit Ready to use, no need to boil CONS Starts to break apart if chewed regularly CHECK ON AMAZON SAFEJAWZ Mouth Guards Slim Fit – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Fluid fit technology Ultra-slim yet strong gum shields to prevent gagging JawSecure gel base design The SAFEJAWZ mouth guard is not exclusively just a football mouth guard but can also be used for basketball, boxing, lacrosse, tennis, hockey and MMA. It is genuinely a terrific mouth guard for contact sports. You can expect an accurate fit and guaranteed protection against impacts and falls. The incredible retention properties from the fluid fit technology ensure extended and comfortable use of the mouth guard. The fluid fit ensures that the guard automatically shapes around the contours of the teeth and gum. This technology helps the guard stay in its place for a long time without causing pain or discomfort to the wearer. You can also repeat the fitting process with ReModel Tech to get that ideal fit. The special pre-formed gel base in this mouth guard, called the JawSecure, works to protect the jaw from impact as you bite down on the guard. PROS Comfortable for long use Durable and long-lasting Excellent shock absorption CONS Insufficient instructions for molding time CHECK ON AMAZON Loudmouth Football Mouth Guard – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Removable helmet straps 100% medical grade, durable silicone composition Full mouth protection This is a unique one size fits all mouth guard that is designed to protect against teeth, jaw and lip injuries. This mouth guard is made from a high quality 100% medical grade silicone that gives a soft yet durable feel as you bite down into it. The silicone also ensures that the mouth guards last a long time without breaking or bending. Additionally, this mouth guard is designed to provide full mouth protection with its slightly angled cover shape. The large airway makes it easy to breathe and meet oxygen requirements throughout the game. You can also easily fit this mouth guard before the game without any special molding or boiling. There is a removable matching strap included as well that attaches to the helmet. PROS Comfortable and easy to use Extended lip protectors Maximum airflow for increased performance CONS The strap could be better CHECK ON AMAZON Mengdger Youth Mouth Guard 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Premium shock absorption Large airway tunnel Double-layer gel design This multi-sport mouth guard is perfect for young kids, pre-teens and teens. The guard has been designed to protect against impacts and falls during sports like football, lacrosse, hockey and more. It is lightweight, comfortable and perfect for extended use. The edges are curvy making sure the guard doesn’t hurt the gums and inner lip while the children play. The mouth guard comes with a protective case to store the guard and avoid it from getting lost. The gap design makes sure there is ample airflow for the wearer to comfortably breathe in air and stay in the game. The double-layer gel design includes a soft inner gel layer that molds according to the gums and teeth while the rugged outer layer protects from blows and impacts. PROS Lightweight design Includes 3 mouthguard boxes with carabiners for easy use Durable and very comfortable CONS Not suitable for kids with braces CHECK ON AMAZON Best Football Mouth Guards Buying Guide | Best Football Mouth Guards Buying Guide Things to Consider Before Buying a Football Mouth Guard Interior The inner side of your mouthguard will sit in your mouth for hours and will be in direct contact with your teeth. The sides of the mouthguard need to be of the right size and smooth enough not to cause pain or scratches to the cheek tissue or gums. Look out for mouth guards with gel-based interiors. Gel-based interiors allow you to simply bite in and contour the shape of your teeth and gum into the inner lining of the mouth guard. This will make sure that the fit is perfect and comfortable. Airflow You should be able to inhale and exhale just as you normally would with your mouthguard on. You wouldn’t want it to obstruct your breathing during a tense match. Look for a mouth guard with airflow channels designed through it. It can either be in the form of vents or tunnels, so you never run out of oxygen. Material Mouthguards should be constructed from a material that is safe, so it shouldn’t contain any latex, phthalates or BPA in its composition. Many kids are allergic to these materials, so be sure to read the composition before buying. Make sure to choose an FDA-approved resilient material that will be durable and reliable against high-impact hits. Outer shell The outer layer of the mouthguard will also absorb high-impact blows. It’s important to consider the shock absorption capacity of the guard. Most mouthguards are typically made from rubber or plastic material. Purchasing low quality or cheap mouthguards could even cause damage around the gums. How to Clean Football Mouth Guards Regularly cleaning your mouthguard is necessary to keep your mouth free from bacterial infections. Cleaning the mouth guard is easy and you require just a few items to do so. You can either get a specialized cleaning brush for it or could even use a regular toothbrush to do so. If you’re opting for a toothbrush, get one with hard bristles so it cleans up all the corners easily. Use any kind of soap to clean the guard. You can use hand wash, dishwashing liquid, dish soap, or antibacterial soap. Apply the soap and create a lather using lukewarm water. Gently scrub the mouthguard with the brush. Reach out for pockets of plaque and dirt. After that, rinse the mouthguard thoroughly under warm water and wash away all the soap. Rinse it properly to make sure the mouthguard is completely free from soap residue as it can leave a bad taste in your mouth. Place the mouth guard securely in its dedicated container or box and keep it out of reach of pets and/or children. Types of Football Mouth Guards A few types of football mouthguards are: Attached mouth guards The attached football mouthguards are connected to the helmet of the player. It’s the less stylish choice of the two but comes with its own unique advantages. You will never lose such a mouth guard since it is attached to the helmet. If for some reason, the mouthguard falls out you can easily place it back without worrying about finding, cleaning, and then getting back to the game. Detached mouth guards Detached football mouthguards come in a huge variety of designs. They can further be classified into three kinds: Stock mouthguards The stock mouthguard is a ready to use guard that is composed of a copolymer of vinyl acetate, polyvinyl chloride or polyurethane. Generally, this kind is thought of as the least favorable one because they offer minimal protection. They are suited for less intense sports where there are rare chances of a hit or blow to the face of the player. Mouth-formed mouthguards Mouth formed football mouthguards are also called the boil and bite mouthguards. This kind involves a thermoplastic rim that is heated or boiled in hot water to soften it. Then the softened mouthguard is placed in the mouth and bit on. The biting molds the rim according to the contour of the teeth and gums for a comfortable and exact fit. These mouth guards offer better protection than the stock mouthguards. Custom-made mouthguards The custom-made football mouthguards are made in a dental laboratory. It is done by taking an impression cast of your teeth and gums from the dentist and placing a heated thermoplastic material in it. It is then set in place in a vacuum or pressure forming machine, and the softened material conforms closely to the cast. Custom-made mouthguards offer the most protection among the other types. Benefits of Using a Football Mouth Guard Here are a few benefits of wearing mouthguards: They prevent bruising and laceration during impact by acting as a buffer. Prevents tooth dislocation and fractures. Seismic contact protects opposite teeth. Shock-absorbing mouthguards reduce neurologic injury risk. Makes the player more confident in their performance knowing they have proper protection. Prevent damage from grinding teeth during stressful moments. Conclusion Orofacial trauma or injuries can lead to serious and even sometimes life-threatening consequences. Mouthguards protect your teeth, tongue, gums from blows and impacts during the game. Not only just that, but they also prevent jaw-related injuries. We’ve researched in this article some of the best football mouth guards available, along with their details about their types, uses, and maintenance. | |||||||||||||||||||
46 | 45 | https://www.si.com/review/best-rollerblade-for-women/ | Inline skates or rollerblades are all the rage again, meaning we can now relive our childhood's fondest memories while staying fit. Skating is a great way to stay active and healthy while having a lot of fun! But the experience can quickly go downhill if you don't choose the right rollerblades. From wheels to the frame to size options, there are so many technical aspects of inline skates that can make it very hard to buy a decent pair if you haven't done your homework. This buying guide has all the information you need to get rolling. Scroll down to see our top picks for premium women inline skates; we've examined thousands of reviews, product features, and price points. Ready to find your favorite one? Let's get this rollerblade show on the road! You are sure to love the skates on this list because they: Are very supportive of your ankles to prevent twisting Feature wheels that glide smoothly and easily Come in sleek, attractive designs | Our Top Picks For Women Inline Skates Roller Derby Adjustable Women Inline Skate – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon If you think that putting on skates is a real chore, you’ll love the triple buckle closure and lace-free design on this women inline skates, making it quick and easy to get the perfect fit. The length can be easily adjusted at the push of a button, making it a convenient and customizable option for growing feet. The women inline skates are very lightweight, making it easy to chuck them in your backpack and take them anywhere. Planning to skate indoors? No problem! The urethane wheels don’t just give you a smooth glide; they also protect indoor surfaces from scratches. PROS Lightweight construction makes this pair breathable and portable Fast and smooth Silver-5 bearings Comfortable padded liner Urethane wheels are excellent for indoor skating CONS The plastic tongue can be uncomfortable for some CHECK ON AMAZON Bladerunner by Rollerblade Women Inline Skate – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon If you’re new to skating, this might just be the perfect pair to get you started. The stability and control offered by these women inline skates are unmatched. The rollerblades have a supportive shell and padded liner to ensure a comfortable and snug fit. Whether you’re getting your first pair or looking for an upgrade, you’ll love these colorful skates’ sleek look and smooth glide. The buckle and strap keep your foot in place, giving extra security and stability, especially if you’ve just started skating. PROS Generous padding in the liner Supportive shell for more stability and comfort A three-way closure system for a secure fit The composite frame gives good lateral support CONS A bit on the expensive side CHECK ON AMAZON Woolitime Sports Adjustable Blades Women Inline Skate – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Available in two exciting colors, this pair of women inline skates is trusted by buyers around the world. We bet that you will love these so much that you might have difficulty going anywhere without them. The LED lights in the illuminating wheels are powered by movement, so you never need to worry about changing the batteries. The skate frame is reinforced with aluminum alloy for durability and has thick cushioning inside for a comfortable and smooth skating experience. The shoe size can be adjusted by pressing a button to accommodate feet of different sizes. PROS Adjustable to three different sizes Durable aluminum alloy frame for durability ABEC-7 bearings for smooth-rolling wheels Illuminating wheels don’t need batteries Comfortable padding CONS Not the best for rough roads CHECK ON AMAZON | Women Inline Skates Buying Guide Inline skating is a great way to enjoy the outdoors and have the most fun! It is the perfect way to relax while exercising. Ever seen someone skate before? They are usually so graceful and beautiful to watch. They always make anyone want to learn to skate and be badass at it. Inline skating is a great way to get around on wheels, whether for fitness, socializing, or recreational purposes. Inline skates are boots with four wheels directly behind each other, hence the name ‘inline.’ They are primarily used for skating swiftly on smooth ground. If you’re buying women inline skates for the first time, we’re pretty confident that there must be hundreds of questions swimming across your mind, especially if you’re trying to buy them online. We have addressed all the questions. We have also provided information about other important factors to consider before buying women inline skates that suit your needs. Everything You Need to Know About Inline Skates Skate boots Your ability to skate comfortably depends on your boot. Keeping your feet comfortable is very important with skating. Overly tight boots could cause a lot of pain and result in accidents, leading to severe injuries. A soft-shell boot in the right size should be the first thing you look for before making a purchase. Liner A liner is an essential feature in women's inline skates that cushions your feet. They are usually removable and made of different materials such as mesh, vinyl, and leather. There are different forms of liners to consider: Standard liner: These are made with foam and provide comfort for your feet without any unique features Auto-fit liners: They are made of gel pads that contour to the shape of your feet each time you put on your skates. They provide more comfort and support than the standard liners Wheels There are three things to consider about the wheels on a women's inline skate: size, hardness, and the type of skating you intend to do with it. Small wheels range from 57mm or below in size, while larger wheels vary from 60 mm to 100mm. The hardness (durometer) of a wheel ranges from zero to 100, with zero being the softest and 100, the hardest. Wheels less than 80A are considered soft wheels and are primarily suitable for rough terrain. 80A-90A has average hardness and is ideal for smoother surfaces. 90A and above are considered hard and are ideal for aggressive and speed skates. Larger wheels help maintain speed and are usually found on recreational or fitness skates. Small wheels help to provide acceleration and are suitable for aggressive skating. Frames The frame of women inline skates is an essential factor to consider; the lighter it is, the longer you can skate. There are different types of frames, such as plastic, metal alloy, and carbon frames. Plastic frames are usually suitable for beginners. They’re the heaviest, least durable, and least stiff compared to other frames. Metal or metal alloy frames are better than plastic ones but still inferior to their carbon fiber counterparts. The metal frame is lighter and stiffer in comparison to the two. On the other hand, the carbon one is the most efficient of all frame materials. It is also the lightest and most durable of all. Closure type The closure system can vary from one woman inline skate to the other. There’s the standard traditional lace, which works the same way as a regular shoelace. The Velcro straps provide extra support to keep your feet positioned correctly inside the boot. Other closure types, such as the boa and speed lace system or the ratchet straps, provide the necessary support for a good skating experience. What Type of Inline Skates Should I Buy? Recreational skates These skates are used mainly by beginners and casual skaters. They are ideal women's inline skates for less demanding skating sessions. Cross-training skates These skates are also known as ‘x-fit skates’ and are primarily used for workout and fitness sessions. Your skating ability and the location you intend to skate in are essential factors to consider with this type of skate. Speed skates As the name implies, these women's inline skates are made especially for marathon enthusiasts. They have large wheels that are designed for professional-level races. A beginner should not start out with this type of skate. Aggressive skates These are skates designed for jumping, gliding, and performing challenging skating tricks. They usually have large wheels and lighter carbon frames. A beginner or advanced skater should not start out with these women's inline skates. They are ideal for skilled, aggressive skaters. Freestyle skates These are also known as slalom skates. There are mainly designed for accuracy and precision skating, such as weaving around cones or dancing. They are lightweight and tight-fitting and respond accurately to the demand of the skater. What Are the Benefits of Inline Skating? A great cardiovascular exercise Skating is a great activity to increase your heart rate and boost stamina. These components of aerobic exercises reduce heart disease, high blood pressure, and other illnesses. Inline skating can be a great way to strengthen upper and lower body muscles, especially the core. It also improves your posture and gives you better balance. Helps with weight loss and building muscle Skating regularly and vigorously can be a great way to lose weight and achieve a toned body. This activity can burn up to six calories a minute or 360 calories per hour, ultimately leading to fat loss when coupled with a good diet. Improves balance, agility, and coordination Inline skating is about finding your balance on moving wheels. Skating often and learning challenging new advanced tricks can increase your balance, sense of coordination, and agility. | |||||||||||||||||||
47 | 46 | https://www.si.com/review/best-swimbag/ | Whenever you plan to go swimming, it is important to make sure you have a convenient way to carry and store all your belongings and supplies. This is where swim bags come into the picture. Although they might look like regular bags, swim bags offer superior water resistance to protect your belongings from water damage. Using swim bags to carry and organize your personal items and swimming gear can make a trip to the beach or the pool much easier. In this guide, not only will we teach you what to look for and what to avoid when buying a swim bag, but we will also hook you up with a list of top swim bags for 2022 to help you narrow down the ones that fit your style and needs better. We have identified these swim bags as being a cut above the rest because they have: Separate compartments for dirty/wet gear Ergonomic designs for comfortable carrying Plenty of pockets for gear organization | Here are the Top Swim Bags of 2022 Speedo Teamster Backpack – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Spacious interior holds most of your swimming gear easily Convenient and secure zippered pockets and compartments Comes in several fun colors Contains a pull-out bleacher seat for extra cushioning and protection against wet surfaces The Speedo Unisex Teamster is an elite backpack designed to withstand the most grueling conditions. This makes it a tough and practical option for athletes and swimmers. This backpack has a water-resistant bottom and an abrasion-resistance shell which makes it extremely durable. It’s also equipped with multiple pockets for extra storage and a removable dirtbag that can be used to keep dirty or wet garments separate from the rest of the bag’s contents. It’s a great choice for beach or pool supplies with many fun and stylish colors available. CHECK ON AMAZON TYR Alliance Backpack – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Adjustable and padded shoulder straps to make the backpack more comfortable to carry Ergonomic design for lumbar support Available in multiple colors and styles to choose from Comes with an interior laptop sleeve that you can use to store sensitive gear Available in many different colors and sizes, TYR Alliance Backpack is a versatile and functional bag designed to keep all your swimming gear safe and organized while giving you a reliable way to transport it from the beach to the pool. Moreover, this bag is made of 100% polyester with separate compartments to store wet or dirty gear, as well as an inner sleeve for your laptop. One of the best features of this backpack is its ergonomic design which is meant to support your back when you’re carrying too much weight. CHECK ON AMAZON Athletico Swim Backpack – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Secure zippers and drawstring opening to keep the bag’s contents safe The waterproof bottom keeps the bag’s contents dry Extra large size can fit most of your swimming gear Available in two finishes; black and black/pink Backed by a 100% satisfaction guarantee – if you’re not happy, return the product and get a full refund Athletico Swim Backpack is spacious enough for storing most of your camping, swimming, or gym gear. It is easy to carry and has multiple inner compartments to make storage more efficient. This backpack is made with high-quality material to make it more durable. It also has an elevated laptop sleeve and waterproof bottom, making it a great swimmer’s bag to keep your gear safe and dry at the pool or the beach. CHECK ON AMAZON Gonex Swim Bag – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Waterproof wet compartment to store soiled gear separately Includes detachable shoulder straps, can be carried as a cross-body bag Available in fun, bright colors Comes with special compartments for dry and wet clothes The dry compartment is waterproof The Gonex Swim Bag is a multi-purpose bag that doesn’t just store your essential swimming gear but also serves as a luggage bag to carry with you on your travels. The bag comes with webbing handles to hold it in your hands but its detachable padded shoulder straps make it a great cross-body bag as well. It has dual compartments to store wet and dry gear separately. The wet compartment is made with translucent EVA material and is entirely waterproof. Moreover, this bag is easy to carry, spacious, and made to last! CHECK ON AMAZON Athletico Mesh Swim Bag 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Adjustable straps to make the backpack more comfortable to wear Reinforced stitching to give the backpack more strength Two mesh side pockets to hold water bottles Drawstring and cord lock to keep the contents secure This swim bag has separate wet and dry areas to keep your towels and clothes dry in different parts of the bag, allowing you to store items in different compartments when going swimming, camping, or to the beach. You can store a lot of gear in this swim bag, thanks to the large size. Its quick-dry mesh makes the bag suitable for swim gear. Furthermore, you can use this bag for several purposes, such as camping trips, hiking trips, and beach days. Also, keep in mind that the straps might dig into the shoulders since they are not padded. CHECK ON AMAZON Arena Swimming Athlete Sports Backpack 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comes in several different colors and designs Outer and inner compartments for efficient storage Reinforced with water and abrasion-proof bottom Oversized and robust zippers on each compartment, providing ultimate security for the gear These Swim Bags are imported and well-crafted by the best manufacturers for competitive swimmers and athletes, offering adequate space for all swim gear and accessories. With a capacity of 45 liters, these swim bags are the only thing required to carry gear for your swimming or gym session. We also love that these bags are designed for easy loading and unloading of your gear – thanks to the wide-mouth top zippered compartment. CHECK ON AMAZON TYR Big Mesh Mummy Backpack 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has a barrel lock closure to keep the contents secure Contains mesh venting for quick drying Spacious main compartment can fit most of your swimming gear Available in multiple colors Like most bags on this list, this backpack is also designed to be the perfect companion for all your swimming or gym activities. Crafted with the highest quality material, this durable swim bag features mesh venting for enhanced drying time and drainage as well as a spacious main compartment for maximum storage. Both recreational and professional users use these swim bags for workout gear, swimming essentials, and more! The inner pocket doesn’t have a zipper closure – having it would have made it easier to store wet/damp items. CHECK ON AMAZON Disney Kid Swim Bag 8 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The colorful design makes it very kid-friendly Has an adorable 3D printing of Mickey Mouse Comes with mesh side pockets to hold water bottles Made up of 100% polyester This Mickey Mouse-themed swim bag is ideal for children to store their swim gear. Its dimensions make the bag a good size for kids of all ages to carry. They’re made of light polyester material with a drawstring closure for easy access to the bags’ contents. The swim bag also has different compartments to keep all your things stored safely and separately. The mesh side pockets are great to hold water bottles! Keep in mind that it’s a good choice for kids but may not be ideal for adults since it’s small and can’t house a lot of stuff. CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer's Guide: Finding Your Next Swim Bag Buying the perfect swim bag can be a hassle, but it’s really not that complicated. You just need to know what your needs are because those will dictate the type of bag that's right for you. We have compiled a guide to help make your choice easier. How to Choose the Perfect Swim Bag Size This largely depends on your needs. For some swimmers, the bigger the bag, the better its utility. For others, a compact bag is more suitable. If you will not be carrying a lot of items to swimming, then it’s logical to get a portable small-sized swim bag, one that you can carry around comfortably and easily fits in your car or your seat on the bus. If you are just going to the pool or beach to get a quick tan or swim, then a portable swim bag is the way to go. Something simple and portable to contain your sunscreen, sunglasses, and bottled water. It all depends on what you need to carry. If you are going to the pool alone, the basics are fine. If you’ll be taking the kids along, then you’d need something bigger that can also carry things for your kids. If you’ll be engaging in an activity that requires you to take your gear with you, maybe snorkeling or kayaking, then you need a swim bag big enough to fit your equipment. Material With swim bag materials, there are things to consider; are you looking for a water-resistant material or a material that feels comfortable on your skin? Or, even better, are you looking for a material that combines both? Here’s the thing; you shouldn’t have to choose. Simply go for a swim bag with a material that has both. Getting a water-resistant swim bag is important to keep your things safe at the beach or pool, especially if you’ll be taking your phone or other essential items with you. This way, you don’t have to worry about your bag getting wet. You should also go for a swim bag that is durable - something guaranteed to last you for a long time. With proper care, a swim bag can last for several years. But none of that will matter if the bag is of poor quality. Design/Features For design, go with a swim bag that comes with numerous compartments. Any good swim bag should offer a compartmentalized design to separate different types of items. Even with a water-resistant bag, you still need one with different compartments that will allow you to store your wet gear separately from your dry ones. Also, a compartmentalized bag helps you keep your things organized. If you are just going to the pool for a quick swim, then a swim bag with multiple compartments might become more of a hassle than a convenience. You don’t need the inconvenience of sorting through different compartments before finding your swimsuit or sunscreen. Even if the swim bag comes with many compartments, it might not be optimized for organizing items. For example, a bag with too many small compartments might not offer any space to carry clothing items. It’s important to look out for the optimal combination of compartments so you don’t end up with a bag that proves to be more hassle than convenience. Comfort Comfort is crucial, especially if you plan on using your swim bag frequently. For instance, a big swim bag with thin straps can hurt your shoulders. Even if you are not carrying the bag frequently, it can still feel uncomfortable even over a short distance. To avoid discomfort, go for a swim bag with padded, wide, and adjustable straps. These are perfect for carrying your bag for a prolonged duration. Another thing to consider is the weather. During the summer months, you don’t want to carry a bag that will add to your discomfort. To avoid sweaty discomfort, go for a bag that’s made with breathable materials and has a well-ventilated structure. Your best shot is going for a swim bag that uses mesh fabric. This ensures the bag remains dry and cool and does not cause you to sweat when you're wearing it. Weight For weight, know this; the bigger the bag, the heavier it’s going to be. This will not be much of an issue if you won’t be carrying it as much. If it’s an occasional trip to the beach, a heavy bag is not really an issue, especially as they often come with more compartments that can prove to be very useful. If you’ll be using the bag frequently, and carrying equipment with it, a heavy bag is not the best option. If you have to get one, get one with adjustable and padded straps. What Should You Have In Your Swim Bag? Each situation and scenario is different. What you pack in your swim bag depends on the activity at hand. Here are a few of the typical essentials to include in your bag: Water bottle This is important, especially on a hot day. You’d be surprised at how often people forget to take water when going to the pool or beach or swim practice; don’t be one of them. Take a water bottle or two with you to stay hydrated. Consider bringing an ice pack or koozie that will keep your water cold for the duration of your stay at the beach or swim practice. Waterproof case This is for your phone or anything else you’d like to keep dry inside the bag. With a water-resistant bag, you wouldn’t need this, but it never hurts to get one for some extra protection. After all, you could make the innocent mistake of putting your wet gear in the same compartment as your phone, damaging or destroying it. Earplugs If you are a frequent swimmer, earplugs are a necessity. You need them to keep water out of your ears and prevent earaches. You can leave them in your bag permanently (except for when you need to wash them) so you don’t forget to take them with you. Hydrating lube Long-distance and long-duration swimming can often cause chafing or skin irritation, especially in saltwater. A lubricant serves as a barrier between your skin and the water, offering sufficient protection. For long-distance or duration swimming, make sure you carry some hydrating lube in your swim bag at all times. | |||||||||||||||||||
48 | 47 | https://www.si.com/review/best-mouthguard/ | When it comes to thrilling sports, boxing ranks among the top ten for sure. It requires speed, agility, strength, and precision to win a boxing match. But, you are bound to sustain some damage during a match, regardless of your skill level. Hence, you must wear some protective gear, including and especially a boxing mouthguard. A mouthguard, as the name implies, protects your mouth against the high-impact punches you are bound to face during a boxing match. Choosing one for yourself can be tough, but we are here to help. We have compiled the following list of the top-rated boxing mouthguards in 2023 for your consideration. These picks are made with high-quality material, provide impeccable protection, and come with a carry case for hygienic storage, among other benefits. After testing many different options, we have selected these seven mouthguards as our favorites because they: Have a perfect fit Feature unmatched breathability Offer ample protection to the teeth and gums | Comparing the Top Boxing Mouthguards of 2023 Champs Breathable Mouthguard – Best Overall 1 image Key Features Designed for sports combat 3 air holes for optimal breathability Soft-gel inner layer Comfortable fit The fit of this boxing mouthguard is impeccable, providing maximum protection and enhanced comfort to the user. The advanced gel material used in this mouthguard seamlessly adjusts to the shape of your mouth, so it does not feel too unnatural. The outer layer of this boxing mouthguard is rigid enough to withstand high-impact hits with ease, providing relentless protection against the hardest of punches. The soft-gel interior delivers sufficient cushioning to adequately soften the impact of each blow. Also, this mouthguard features air holes at the center that ensure unobstructed breathability throughout the match. BUY ON AMAZON Shock Doctor Gel Max Mouth Guard – Runner-Up 2 image Key Features Durable triple-layered protection Available in plenty of colors Embedded breathing channels Convertible tether The gel-based liner in this mouthguard ensures a perfect fit, but only if you follow the included easy-to-understand instructions as accurately as possible. The mouthguard is available in a variety of colors, so you can pick one that best matches your taste. The innovative design of this boxing mouthguard provides plenty of intricately designed air channels to ensure sufficient breathability, so you can box with enhanced comfort and ease. In addition to securing the teeth in position, this mouthguard also boasts a tough exoskeletal shock-resistant frame that delivers remarkable protection to your teeth, gums, and tongue against even the hardest of impacts. BUY ON AMAZON Venum Challenger Mouthguard – Honorable Mention 3 image Key Features Advanced design for better breathability Rubber frame for improved shock management Storage case included Available in multiple color options This mouthguard comes with a protective case that allows you to store it hygienically and safely, making it easier to carry. The outer frame is made of solid rubber material that provides robust protection against high-impact hits, offering impeccable protection to your teeth. The advanced design of this boxing mouthguard ensures comfortable breathability throughout the match, so you are not left gasping for air in the middle of a fight. The interior boasts a soft gel cushioning that seamlessly contours to the shape of your mouth, providing a well-adjusted and comfortable fit. Also, this mouthguard is available in a variety of colors, so you can pick and choose the one that best matches your unique style. BUY ON AMAZON Nxtrnd Rush Mouth Guard – Also Consider 4 image Key Features Comes in a 2-pack Highly durable for any type of sport Optimal protection with a hard shell and soft gel liner Unlimited defect warranty The matchless durability offered by this pair of boxing mouthguards ensures your teeth remain well-protected even after sustaining the hardest of impacts, thanks to its dual-density frame that also provides impeccable airflow so you can breathe comfortably throughout the match. These boxing mouthguards snap into position comfortably and easily after the molding process, providing exceptional shock resistance to protect your gums, teeth, and tongue, without compromising your ability to speak. The innovative under-carriage channel design ensures smooth airflow. The mouthguards also come with a case for secure and hygienic storage. BUY ON AMAZON SAFEJAWZ Mouthguard 5 image Key Features Cool design Perfect fit guarantee Improved jaw impact protection Multiple colors This stylish boxing mouthguard comes in eight unique colors, offering you a greater variety to choose from to suit your fighting persona. The innovative fluid-fit technology provides a secure fit inside your mouth, so the mouthguard stays fixed in position and protects your teeth for the entire duration of the match. Unlike many other mouthguards, if you are unable to get the fit right the first time, this boxing mouthguard allows you to re-model multiple times until you achieve a fit that feels most comfortable and natural inside your mouth. The preformed base provides matchless protection to your jaw, while the gum shields have an ultra-slim design to prevent gagging. BUY ON AMAZON DAMAGE CONTROL High Impact Mouth Guard 6 image Key Features Designed to protect against hard blows Lots of colors and designs to choose from Comfortable fit The innovative design of this boxing mouthguard provides more shock resistance than many comparative pieces available out there, protecting both your teeth and jaw against the toughest of impacts. The mouthguard does not cause any pain during the fitting process, and easily contours to the shape of your mouth for a precise fit. There is an impressive variety of styles and colors available in this boxing mouthguard, allowing you to pick one that appeals to you the most. The high-precision fit of this mouthguard allows you to breathe easily and comfortably during the match. Also, the unique construction of this piece ensures your speaking abilities are not compromised, so you can chat with ease while wearing this mouthguard. BUY ON AMAZON GuardLab APEX Mouthguard 7 image Key Features Award-winning fit Increased upper teeth protection Comes with a case Comes with fit instructions The pre-indentations on this boxing mouthguard allow you to bite down very precisely to ensure a comfortable and accurate fit. Also, the innovatively designed shape of this mouthguard allows you to breathe and talk easily while wearing it. The mouthguard is made with durable materials that are also completely safe for you as they don’t contain any latex, phthalates, or BPA. In addition to the mouthguard piece, you also get a premium protective case to store it hygienically and safely. The accompanying instructions are also very easy to understand and follow, although you might not even need them due to the easy and intuitive usage method of this mouthguard. BUY ON AMAZON | Buying Guide: Boxing Mouthguard Boxing can be an exhilarating sport, but it is also a very dangerous one if you don’t wear the right protective gear. You must wear gloves to protect your hands, a helmet to protect your head (in some kinds of boxing sports), and a mouthguard to protect your teeth, gums, and tongue. Many people often ignore the importance of wearing a mouthguard especially at the amateur level, and that proves to be a mistake at some point. You must wear a mouthguard regardless of your skill level. But, it’s important to ensure that the type of mouthguard you are wearing can provide sufficient protection to your mouth. Factors to Consider While Choosing a Boxing Mouthguard Not all mouthguards are made the same. In fact, there are many variants that are made with substandard materials so they provide inadequate protection and feel quite uncomfortable to wear. To ensure you get the best boxing mouthguard for yourself or a loved one, here are a few factors that you must consider. Airflow design Although this might not be at the top of your mind while choosing the best boxing mouthguard for yourself, it’s very important to ensure that your chosen variant offers excellent airflow when you’re wearing it. You don’t want to wear a mouthguard that obstructs your breathing, as that can be sufficiently problematic especially during a match. You must look for a mouthguard that has airflow channels embedded in its design, either in the form of vents or an innovative structure that allows air to easily pass through so you can breathe comfortably. Gel-based interior Mouthguards usually come with a gel-based interior that allows you to bite into it to mold the shape of the interior lining according to the contours of your teeth and gums. This ensures that the mouthguard fits you perfectly and comfortably. You must ensure that your chosen mouthguard features a soft gel-based lining on the inside that feels comfortable. You can verify its comfort by checking customer feedback. The high-impact resistant outer shell It is the outer layer of a boxing mouthguard that must absorb the impact of each punch thrown at your face, so it’s important to ensure that it can withstand high-impact punches with ease. Choose a mouthguard that has a robust outer shell with exceptional shock absorbance. Usually, this outer shell is made of strong rubber material, and rubber is good at absorbing shocks. Some mouthguards might also offer plastic material in the outer shell, although this might feel a bit uncomfortable to some users. Appearance Choosing the appearance of a boxing mouthguard is entirely up to your personal preference. While many brands offer a colorful variety in their mouthguard offering, some also offer a variety of styles and patterns, allowing you to find one that best matches your personality, fighting style, and taste. The appearance of the mouthguard is certainly among the least important factors to consider, but it is still worthy of consideration as you would not want to use a mouthpiece that looks and feels out of place. Ideally, your mouthguard should represent your fighting persona in its appearance. Material quality and safety The type of material used to make the mouthguard must be safe for you. This means that it should not include any phthalates, latex, or BPA in its material composition. Also, the material used must be of durable quality, providing you with reliable protection against high-impact hits every time. A good-quality mouthguard can last you a long time, provided you take care of it and store it as instructed. Instructions and ease of use Mouthguards usually come with usage instructions, particularly about the molding process. When you buy a new boxing mouthguard, it will only have a standard gel-based inner layer that can be molded according to the contours of your teeth and gums to provide an accurate and comfortable fit. The molding process must be simple enough for you to understand and follow. Usually, mouthguards have a three-step molding process, whereby you are required to boil the piece to soften the gel and then bite on it to shape the gel. Be careful to stay away from mouthguards that have extra steps in this process. Also, some mouthguards allow you to re-model the mouthguard multiple times until you achieve the best fit, so these ones can be preferred if you’ve often faced an issue with fitting. Carrying case Most boxing mouthguards come with a carrying case, and this is done for two reasons: to provide secure storage space, and to ensure proper hygiene during the storage process. It would be highly unsanitary for you to place your mouthguard directly inside your pocket or gym bag when it’s not being used. You must always store it in its carry case to prevent the buildup of mold and bacteria. Also, make sure you always rinse the mouthguard before use to ensure it does not have any germs on it. How We Chose the Best Boxing Mouthguards Our selection criteria for boxing mouthguards are simple. We gave preference to pieces that are likely to provide excellent protection to your teeth, gums, tongue, and jaw against high-intensity impacts. Our chosen pieces tick all the right boxes when it comes to material quality, durability, design, price, and style. Also, there are some additional benefits provided by our chosen mouthguards that make them worthy of your consideration. Boxing Mouthguards Price Range The price range varies significantly for boxing mouthguards, ranging between $14-$40 apiece. However, unlike other products that have a correlation between their quality and price, some cheaper mouthguards might deliver more value to you than the more expensive options. It is important to consider each option on its individual merits. You should expect to shell out around $25 for a decent mouthguard. | |||||||||||||||||||
49 | 48 | https://www.si.com/review/best-dip-bar/ | Are you a fitness lover who aspires to build six-pack abs and bigger arms? If so, a dip bar is a perfect equipment to achieve your goal. Trainers suggest that regular workout sessions with a mounting bar can help in the faster building of lean muscles. If you are not a big fan of lifting weights, then a dip stand station is the best option for you. Not only does it provide a sturdy platform to do your core and upper body workouts, it also allows you to maintain good posture during the movements, an advantage that you may not otherwise get from training with free weights. However, finding a good quality piece of gym equipment is tricky, so to help you, we have reviewed the best dip bars in 2022. After conducting thorough research, we found these products to be loved and trusted by most customers. They are the best-priced dip bars among a plethora of options available in the market. So, let’s discover what makes them so awesome! | The Best Dip Bar Models of 2022 in Detail Amazon Basic Dip Bar – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Built from durable steel material It is ideal for performing multiple exercises for upper body fitness You can connect additional push-up rings for extra support Reinforced with foam pads on the handle as well as standing legs that gives a non-slip grip This dip bar is perfect for performing tricep dips, leg raises, knee raises, and more similar fitness exercises. Since it is built from high-quality steel material, it is robust and durable for years. Besides, the foam-made non-slip handles allow you a solid and comfortable grip on the dip bar. It also allows you to connect other push-up rings and straps for performing different workout exercises with adequate support. With a compact dimension of 34.25 by 32.5 by 38.4 inches, this mounting bar is lightweight and convenient to move from one place to another. Moreover, you can easily assemble it by using basic tools and following the instruction manual. It also has floor pads that prevent the dip bar from slipping and allows it to bear a weight of 661 pounds. For a smooth user experience, this fitness appliance is backed by a one-year warranty. CHECK ON AMAZON ProsourceFit Dip Bar Stand Station – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This dip bar can withstand up to 400 pounds of weight It has an adjustable height for a more customized experience It comes in three different color options This dip bar is easy to assemble using simple tools Train yourself and build a strong upper body with this robust dip bar. It is ideal for all body heights as you can adjust the bar heights between 31 to 35 inches. Each bar has 24 inches width that allows you to perform all types of upper core strengthening exercises, including push-ups, classic dips, and more. Thanks to the top-quality powder-coated iron material, this fitness tool is solid and lasts for years. In addition, its rubber feet and stabilizing safety connector provide adequate support. Another significant feature of this dip bar is its padded grip that gives you a strong hold on the bars and prevents injuries. You can conveniently assemble and disassemble these paralette bars within a few minutes. Besides, it is lightweight and portable which allows you to work out wherever you go. CHECK ON AMAZON Yoleo Adjustable Dip Bar – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It can be adjusted to three height levels and six width levels This dip stand has a weight-bearing capacity of 500 pounds It has double safety connectors that prevent slipping or wobbling movement of the bar during the workout You can easily assemble this dip bar This dip bar is perfect for in-home as well as commercial gyms. Its unique design and safety stabilizers prevent wobbling or slipping so that you have a stable base to perform all your workouts safely. Made from heavy-duty steel material, this dip bar has a solid build that will remain durable for years. It also features a 1.5mm thick tube with a padded handle that gives you a comfortable and powerful grip. On top of that, you can adjust the bar height as well as width and perform multiple exercises, including reverse push-ups, dips, leg raises, and more. Its compact design occupies minimal space, making it easy to carry and store. CHECK ON AMAZON BalanceFrom Multi-Function Dip Bar – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It allows you to perform multiple upper body exercises to build strength This dip bar comes in three different color options You can adjust its height according to your requirements Its rubber footpad and foam-padded handles allow a safe a comfortable workout Maintain your upper body and core strength with this multifunctional dip bar. It is crafted from heavy-duty steel material which makes it dent-resistant, and long-lasting. You can also prevent serious injuries while exercising using its foam-padded handle that allows a comfortable grip on the bar. Hence, these features make your workout safe and painless. Some other significant features of this dip bar are its adjustable height and compact size that make it easy to store and carry. Moreover, in the latest design, the improved rubber foot pads prevent slipping or wobbling of the bar during the workout. You can maintain your fitness regime regularly as this dip bar comes with two years of warranty. CHECK ON AMAZON RELIFE REBUILD YOUR LIFE Dip Bar – Also Consider 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features You can select between two color options: yellow and black Has an adjustable feature as per your height This dip bar can withstand weight up to 300 pounds Easy, hassle-free installation This dip stand is ideal for performing chest, arms, and leg exercises. Thanks to its heavy-duty steel base, it is robust, durable, and can withstand weight up to 300 pounds. You can also adjust the height of the bar in between the range of 31 to 35 inches. Besides, its soft handle allows you a comfortable and firm grip on the dip bar. The rubber foot strap on this dip bar can make it stand on any surface without wobbling. It also has a safety connector with four holes that can be adjusted for extra support and stability during a workout. This dip bar has a one-year warranty that ensures a superior exercising experience. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Dip Bars Buying Guide After seeing so many dip stand options, you may be left in confusion about which one to buy. We understand your concern about getting the most suitable dip bar for your needs. Hence, we have prepared a comprehensive buying guide that mentions all the crucial factors for purchasing an excellent mounting bar. Let’s discover the various features and benefits of a dip bar. What Is a Dip Bar Used For? A dip bar is used as a workout prop. It helps you perform upper body fitness exercises like push-ups, tricep dips, arm raises, and more. Besides, some mounting bars can be used for performing leg raises and knee raises. Its padded handle gives a non-slip grip during the workout. Trainers also suggest dip stand exercises for triceps and abs building. Hence, you can keep your body in shape without lifting heavy weights with a good dip bar. What Are the Factors to Consider While Buying a Dip Bar? Construction material Some dip bars are built from powder-coated iron, while others are constructed using heavy-duty steel material. These materials are robust and prevent bending or breaking of the bar during the workout. Besides, they make the mounting bars durable for years. A sturdy material also plays a significant role in making the mounting capable of bearing a heavyweight. Hence, do not forget to check the construction material before purchasing a dip bar. Weight capacity Another essential factor to focus on while making the final purchasing decision for a dip bar is its weight-bearing capacity. Most products can withstand weight in the range of 300 and 500 pounds. Make sure to check the weight capacity according to your body weight and keep in mind the weight of extensions or any other appliances you may attach with the dip bar for performing various exercises. Handle The next factor to consider for getting your hands on a top-quality dip bar is its handle. Some stands have foam padded handles that allow comfortable and stronghold while working out. Besides, it puts less strain on your hands and reduces the chances of muscle injuries and severe fatigue. Hence, a good grip handle makes your exercise using the dip bar non-strenuous and safe. Stability Ensure to check the stability features like safety connector and foot of a mounting bar before making the final product choice. Some mounting bars are reinforced with a rubber footpad, while others have foam padded stands to give stability to the bar during the workout session. It also prevents wobbling or slipping of the dip stand. Thus, you can safely perform your exercise without the fear of severe injuries and fractures. Portability If you are a fitness enthusiast who wants equipment that you can take with you anywhere, getting your hands on a portable mounting stand is the best solution. Most dip bars are lightweight and easy to carry around. Besides, if you are a trainer and often go for personal coaching sessions, then a portable dip stand station is the best choice. So, make sure to examine the weight and portability of the product before ordering one. Dimensions A good dip stand has a compact design so that it can be settled in less space. Moreover, some mounting bars can be adjusted in the height range of 10 to 15 inches. It provides you with adequate space for performing a variety of exercises without getting yourself injured. So, do not forget to examine the product's dimension and height adjustment features while purchasing a dip stand. Warranty The next factor to consider before investing in a dip stand station is its warranty period. Some mounting bars have a warranty of a few months, while others for two years. Some companies also provide a lifetime warranty on the accessory of the mounting bars. A warranty policy ensures the decent quality of the product. Also, it helps get a straightforward refund or replacement if the product is damaged or delivered with missing parts. How Much Does a Dip Bar Usually Cost? A good dip bar comes with a satisfying quality at a pocket-friendly price. To help you invest your hard-earned dollars in an incredible dip bar, we conducted thorough research and found that most dip stands cost in the range of $50 to $85. However, the final price is determined by several features like color, weight capacity, the material of construction, and more. How to Assemble a Dip Bar? Most dip bars can be assembled and disassembled in just a few minutes using basic tools. You can refer to the instruction manual delivered with the product for perfectly setting up the station. For more accurate guidance, you can watch some online videos showing the live assembling procedure of the product. If you still have difficulty getting the parts together, you can contact customer care for a detailed explanation. Most mounting stands can be set up single-handedly. Hence, you should get your hands on a dip bar that is simple to assemble without more hassle. | |||||||||||||||||||
50 | 49 | https://www.si.com/review/lacrosse-rebounder/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
51 | 50 | https://www.si.com/review/best-survival-gear/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
52 | 51 | https://www.si.com/review/best-baseball-bat/ | Baseball is one such sport that is enjoyed by people of all age groups. In fact, it is compulsory for kids in many schools as well. A sturdy baseball bat helps in building a strong foundation of the game as you can learn how to swing properly, understand basic arm positions, and other fundamentals of baseball batting with it. You can also bond with your child over a nice game and pass on some batting tricks to them. Thanks to the game’s popularity, there are a number of baseball bats available in the market, due to which it can become confusing to make a purchase. To help you find the best bat, we have sifted through many products and listed below the best baseball bats in 2023 so you can play to your full potential. | Here Are the Best Baseball Bats of 2023 BARNETT Wooden Bat – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a weight of 15 ounces Available in four sizes, i.e., 24, 28, 30, and 32 inches This bat has a solid one-piece construction design Made with composite wood that provides even weight distribution Whether you are a beginner or a professional baseball player, a good wooden bat can do wonders for you. This composite wood bat from Barnett is designed for daily training so that you can refine your skills properly. Moreover, it is light in weight and can handle softballs easily. It is made of high-quality porous wood with even weight distribution that gives you a balanced feel. This product is available in four different sizes for different types of players and can also be used as a defense bat to sway away intruders. BUY ON AMAZON SZYT Baseball Bat – Best For Pocket 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This bat has a maximum diameter of 1.9 inches Lightweight construction, weighs only 14 ounces Has a drop weight of around -14 It is constructed with high-quality aluminum for better durability If you are looking for an affordable baseball bat with which you can have some light practice with kids, then this bat is a perfect choice. It is made of aluminum so it is extremely lightweight and durable. Besides, it has a slim handle with an anti-skid rubber grip that provides you with an excellent grasp while making a swing. But, make sure to use this baseball bat with softballs only; else it might get damaged due to extreme pressure. BUY ON AMAZON KOTIONOK Baseball Bat – Best For Beginners 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has a slip-resistant rubber grip to dampen vibrations Built with good weight distribution for better swing speed Has a sturdy construction that makes it durable Features a modern design with a slender handle For beginners, a light metal baseball bat would be a perfect choice as they are durable and provide a nice grip. This bat from KOTIONOK is designed for players who are still learning the rules of the game. It is constructed with aluminum alloy that makes it durable and lightweight. Besides, it has a nice anti-slip rubber handle that absorbs shock and vibrations so that you don’t feel any pressure on your arm. It is extremely strong and can handle both soft and hard balls. You can use it for daily practices, seasonal matches, and more. BUY ON AMAZON Rawlings Raptor Baseball Bat – Best Value For Money 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This bat is built as per USA bat standards Has a length of 29 inches Drop weight of -10 with a great swing speed Barrel diameter of 2-1/4 inches The Rawlings Raptor baseball bat is built to last. It is designed as per the USA bat standards and has been approved by major leagues as well. This bat is constructed with a high-quality Aluminum alloy that enhances the bat speed up to a certain level. Moreover, it is durable, highly responsive, and has a drop weight of -10, which means that this bat has a good swing speed. It is perfect for kids who are learning the game and want to play in upcoming matches. Besides, this bat also has good flex, due to which it can hit any ball up to a great distance. BUY ON AMAZON Easton TYPHOON Baseball Bat 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This bat has a 2.2mm flex-grip for better comfort It comes with a drop weight of -12 Has a large sweet spot for performing various types of swings It is constructed with a military-grade alloy that increases its durability The Easton TYPHOON baseball bat is constructed with ALX100 military-grade alloy with a concave end cap for better balance and durability. Moreover, it has an enlarged sweet spot so that you can perform all kinds of swings with this bat. It also has a drop weight of -12 and a nice swing speed for proper transfer of energy from the bat’s handle to its barrel. As it has a barrel diameter of 2-1/4 inches, this baseball bat is perfect for young kids. Furthermore, it is designed as per USA bat standards and can be used in league matches as well. BUY ON AMAZON Farsler Baseball Bat 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a length of 25 inches and a diameter of 2 inches This bat has an even weight distribution for better balance It has an anti-skid rubber grip for absorbing shock Lightweight due to the usage of aluminum alloy in its construction This baseball bat from Farsler has a one-piece design for proper weight distribution. Due to its balanced construction, this bat has an excellent swing speed. It is made with aluminum alloy that enhances this bat’s sturdiness and durability up to a great extent while keeping it exceptionally lightweight. This bat also contains a slip-resistant rubber grip to dampen vibrations and shocks that occur due to the transfer of energy towards the barrel. However, this bat is only suitable for softballs and can bend if it comes in contact with hard or machine balls. BUY ON AMAZON Louisville Slugger Baseball Bat 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has an LS Pro grip that is designed with tack and cushion for comfort This bat is constructed with high-quality Sl hyper alloy for strength and durability It has a barrel diameter of 2-5/8 inches It has a one-piece design for even weight distribution The Louisville Slugger baseball bat is made as per the USA bat standards and has been approved by various leagues. It has a one-piece construction with Sl hyper alloy as the main building material. It is stiff and has a balanced design for maximum energy transfer upon contact. Moreover, this bat has a speed ballistic composite end that improves swing speed and helps you get better control over the swing. BUY ON AMAZON | Best Baseball Bats Buying Guide There are certain types of baseball bats available in the market, designed for specific types of players. Whether you are a professional or a beginner, a good bat can help a lot in honing your batting skills. To make sure that you make a wise purchase, we have noted down the important features that will help you purchase the best baseball bat for your seasonal matches. Essential Features That You Must Consider in a Baseball Bat Weight The weight of a baseball bat matters a lot because it determines the number of swings you can take. If the bat is light in weight, then you can take multiple swings and even score a home run easily. But, with a heavy bat, it won’t be possible because it puts pressure on the arm, due to which you might feel tired after two to four swings. Moreover, light bats can hit the ball up to a great distance as they release enough energy into the ball. On the other hand, heavy bats consume the energy while swinging the bat rather than transferring it to the ball or end of the bat. Another thing you should take care of is the drop weight of the bat. Drop weight is the difference between the bat’s length and weight. Higher is the drop weight; lighter is the bat. Professional players tend to go for higher drop weight so that they can easily hit the ball without much pressure. Length The length of a baseball bat varies from player to player. A long bat can make it difficult to swing the bat with enough speed, whereas a short one won’t allow you much coverage. So, how can you select the perfect length? You need to follow some steps to select a bat with the perfect length. Place the handle at the center of your chest, pointing it towards your arm’s side Now, see if you can reach the top of the bat easily or not If you can touch the bat’s top with your fingertips, it is perfect for you Now, position the bat’s handle at the center of your chest and point it outward See if you can comfortably grab the barrel of the bat or not If yes, then it is of perfect length. Now, stand up and place the bat against your leg’s side so that the bat’s handle touches your palm when you reach out If it does, then the baseball bat is of appropriate length Material Apart from the weight and length of the bat, you also need to look for the material used for the bat’s construction. Based on the type of material, there are three types of baseball bats: Composite, Alloy, and Hybrids. Composite bats are the ones made with a single-layered fiber material, usually wood. They are easy to make as the designers can control their weight distribution. Due to this, these bats are available in balanced and end-loaded forms. Balanced bats are the ones with even weight distribution, whereas end-loaded bats have more weight towards the barrel’s end and provide heavier swing weight, making it easier to hit the ball with less pressure. Alloy bats are usually constructed with metal like aluminum and are extremely light in weight. Unlike wood, these bats do not get damaged easily. They are made with a mixture of several metals, which gives the designer complete freedom to handle the drop weight, length, swing weight, and other factors. Hybrid bats, as the name states, are a mixture of alloy and composite bats. Their handle is made with composite material, and the barrel is made with alloy. The benefit of this type of construction is that you get the best of both worlds. These bats have the advantage of anti-vibration and lightweight properties of composite handles and the swing weight, price, and durability of alloy metal. Construction method Manufacturers use either one-piece or two-piece construction methods while designing a baseball bat. What are these types of construction methods? One-piece construction means that the complete bat, from the end to the barrel, is made with a single material, be it wood or any type of metal. These bats have lesser flex and prevent energy loss. They are extremely balanced and provide good swing speed to hit the ball with force. Moreover, they do not have any vibration or dampening effect that usually happens due to extreme pressure. A two-piece construction has a connection between the bat’s barrel and handle. Due to the connector, the vibrations that occur when the hitter comes in contact with the ball are dampened. This fused connector further helps in getting more flex and whip in the swing, which helps in improving the bat’s speed. However, they are expensive as compared to one-piece bats. How Much Does the Best Baseball Bat Cost? The cost of a baseball bat depends on all of the above-stated factors. Whether you are selecting a composite bat with a one-piece or two-piece construction or one that has a higher drop weight, all add up in the bat’s cost factor. The general price range for any baseball bat is between 15 USD to 100 USD. However, there are bats that are tagged at more than 100 USD, mostly used by professional players. Moreover, you also need to know the league rules before buying a bat, as that can make a huge difference in your budget. While some leagues don’t mind much about the bat’s weight, others might have some specific weight restrictions. Final Words A good baseball bat can help a lot in improving your game. It can enhance your swinging skills, help you learn various tricks, and give you an upper hand in the team. That’s why it is extremely important to pay attention to every single detail when buying a baseball bat. Even a minor issue in the bat you get, like the wrong length, can hamper your performance to a great extent. We hope that the products we have reviewed would help you get the best baseball bat for the upcoming game. | |||||||||||||||||||
53 | 52 | https://www.si.com/review/back-extension-machine/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
54 | 53 | https://www.si.com/review/best-ez-curl-bar/ | Picking up the best EZ curl bars in 2021 for free-weight training in your home gym is a wonderful method to gain muscle. Curl bars are better than straight barbells for focusing on different muscle groups and for moving more weight than dumbbells. Curl bars, unlike regular bars, have an angled grip that provides a more natural and comfortable grasp. Even for beginners and amateurs, their lower weight makes them easier to operate. Curl bars are smaller than traditional straight bars, enabling you to do the same movements as an Olympic bar in a smaller space. We searched the market for the finest curl bars and, after extensive testing, compiled a selection of the top curl bars accessible. | Detailing the Best EZ Curl Bar in 2021 Synergee Commercial Olympic EZ Curl Bar – Best EZ Curl Bars Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features High-quality steel that can hold up to 450lbs of weight Can choose between two finishes – Hard Chrome or Black Phosphate Special ergonomic design to reduce tension on wrists No sweating guarantee by Synergee If Arm Day is your favorite day at the gym, this EZ Curl Bar would become your best pal. This bar is great for solitary bi and tri workouts and pull-ups, rowing, climbing, wrestling, and strengthening upper body stabilizer muscles. The Synergee EZ curl bar will give you the arms of your favorite weight lifter, and before you know it, you’ll be flexing confidently. This bar was created with your needs in mind by Synergee. Although the bar is smaller compared to a regular bar, it can still provide the same benefits while taking up less room. the curves allow you to complete more reps with less pressure on your wrists, which is why it makes a perfect addition to your workout equipment. CHECK ON AMAZON Goplus 400Lbs Olympic EZ Curl Bar – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features Copper sleeves and bearings eliminate inertia and protect wrists from injury The 48-inch length and 400-pound load-bearing capability make it easier to workout The curved shape helps to relieve muscular tension Knurled handles help to improve grip while working out Goplus’ Olympic Bar is the ideal solution for residential gyms, professional gyms, club owners, and bodybuilders. This bar is designed with a comfortable knurl and is ideal for building power and muscle. It may be used for deadlifting, a total-body strength exercise that engages several muscle groups in both the upper and lower bodies. It can also be used for various upper body exercises such as bicep curls, rows, chest presses, or shoulder presses. With this one piece of gym equipment, you can work out your full body! This bar is chrome-plated and constructed of high-quality Q235 steel using cold forging and quenching techniques. CHECK ON AMAZON Elevens Super EZ Curl Bar – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features The corrosion and abrasion resistance of black manganese phosphate is unrivaled Has a maximum weight capacity of 300 pounds Thick diamond knurling to help with grip Manufacturer will replace bar for free incase of any issue with product This Elevens super EZ curl bar is 47 inches long, weighs 18 pounds, and has a maximum weight capacity of 300 pounds. The thick diamond knurling on this bar serves as a reference for where you should grasp the bar and provides a firmer grip. Its purpose is to enhance your grip strength, which it accomplishes with the help of mechanically etched patterns that are rationally arranged to offer you your full lifting capability. The EZ Curl Bar’s curved shaft helps athletes prevent wrist injuries and stress. When using a straight curl bar, it is very common to sustain injuries to your wrist. CHECK ON AMAZON XMark XM-3675 EZ Curl Bar – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features Can sustain up to 400lbs of load On self-lubricating brass alloy nuts, the chrome-plated sleeves spin effortlessly Snap ring lock system and brass bushings with a durable chrome finish Has a 28mm grip with medium knurling This is the bar for you if you curl up to 400 pounds on a regular basis. With a maximum strain of 400 pounds, the XMark Olympic EZ Curl Bar is the most powerful curl bar we’ve seen. This 48-inch curl bar is smaller than typical straight bars but can take the large weights you’d need for, example, deadlifts, rows, curls, or presses especially if you’re creating a home gym but don’t have much space. It is also ideal for deadlifting or close-grip bench presses due to the flat gripping area near the collars. This smaller bar will not fit in a squat rack, but it will fit in compact bench press setups, enabling you to execute more movements than a longer bar would. CHECK ON AMAZON CAP Barbell Olympic EZ Curl Bar 5 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features Knurled grips with a diamond design for comfort and security Can sustain a load of up to 200lbs Has sleeves that rotate to relieve strain on the hands and wrists CAP (manufacturer) is a pioneer in the fitness industry The CAP Olympic EZ Curl Bar will help you achieve mass, strength, and contour to your upper arms and lower body. This important weight-training equipment isolates and accelerates bicep and forearm muscle growth while reducing elbow and wrist pain through its curved design. The Olympic EZ Curl Bar is made of cold-rolled steel with a chrome finish and features weight collars, making it an excellent addition to your home gym. The CAP Curl Bar is made of 51,000 PSI tensile strength steel and is intended to fit weight plates with a 2-inch center hole. The length of the loadable sleeve is 7.5 inches. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best EZ Curl Bar Buying Guide Curling or elevating the wrist and forearm upwards to strengthen the upper body increases biceps muscle hypertrophy. The EZ curl bar makes your training more demanding. Excessive twisting on the forearm or wrist, pulled muscles, strained ligaments, and other injuries are common with traditional straight-bar barbells. When it comes to lifting weights, avoiding unnecessary stress and strain to your wrists increases the worth of your workouts. You'll also be able to train on a larger number of muscle groups. This is how to pick the best EZ curl bar for yourself. Straight Bar Vs. EZ Curl Bar: Which One Is Better? There's a strong probability you have already a couple of straight bars in your private gym. What's the point of buying another bar, then? Like the triceps/hammer curl bar, the EZ curl bar is best suited for particular routines. The most significant reason for utilizing an EZ curl bar over a straight bar is the ability to experiment with new grip positions. Almost always, the strain that a straight bar exerts on your wrists or elbows is transferred to your muscles with a curl bar. This minor adjustment – hand placement and grip – will further isolate specific muscle groups. So, if you can't get a good hold on the straight bar or don't seem to be getting enough activation in the muscles you're trying to isolate, try the EZ bar. Which Features Should You Look For In The Best EZ Curl Bars? Curl bars come in a variety of features, sizes, weights, and other configurations. To ensure that you're selecting the proper curl bar for your requirements, look for the following attributes in any curl bar you're considering. Capacity One of the first things you should consider is the weight limit of a twist bar. It's not worth buying if it can't handle enough weight to offer you good exercise. Choose one with a weight capacity at least 50% more than your actual strength level, so you may continue to improve. Olympic Vs. Standard If you already have a home gym, you should purchase a suitable curl bar for your weight. If your curl bar has 2-inch bar ends, ensure sure your Olympic weight plates have 2-inch holes as well. If you have standard size plates with 1-inch holes, choose a bar with appropriate bar ends. Standard bars commonly have threaded bar ends, which makes them clearly identified. Finish Curl bars are built with solid steel cores that are coated in some way to prevent corrosion. The majority of curl bars have a chrome finish, however some have a matte black appearance. While the majority of this option is based on personal opinion, a matte surface will provide a slightly greater grip. How Do You Pick The Best EZ Curl Bars? Compatibility In Weight Since a curl bar can only sustain a particular amount of weight, one of the very first things to take into consideration before buying one is the weight potential of the bar. It's ideal to go above and beyond and go for one with a weight capacity that's at least 50% higher than your current strength level. This allows you to develop and progress. Knurling Knurling refers to the rough design on the grip region of your bars. To improve your grip, the metal is organized in a diamond pattern. Light, moderate, or strong knurling are all options. If you don't wish to develop calluses, moderate or mild knurling is preferable for novices, and an aggressive knurl can be too, well, aggressive. Angles The angles of the "curls" differ from one bar to the next. Some bars have more pronounced angles, while others have less pronounced angles. Choose a curl bar with softer angles if you want something that feels similar to a straight bar. On the other hand, pronounced angles have a lot of advantages if you're only going to use this bar to work up your biceps and triceps. Protection Coating Your curl bar's base will be solid steel, but some manufacturers go the extra mile by applying an ultra-durable protective coating or finish. This coating protects the bar from corrosion and damage and improves its appearance and overall grip. Weight & Bar Length The normal bar is roughly 48 inches long "long, but some bars are a fraction of an inch shorter or longer. A 46 should be used if you have shorter arms or a smaller grip." Perhaps an EZ bar would be a better option for you because it will save space. Another factor to consider is the weight of the bar. Some curl bars are around 10 pounds, while others are up to 25 pounds. If you're a newbie, you should start with a lighter bar. What Are The Advantages Of EZ Curl Bars? Convenience Of Use The cambered gripping region is the fundamental feature that distinguishes a curl bar. They're also 40 percent to 50 percent shorter than regular Olympic bars, allowing you to focus less on balancing the weight and more on accomplishing your lifts. Curl Bar Grip Angle The angle of the curl bar grips offers a neutral grip angle. If you want to practice heavy weightlifting, then this neutrality will come in handy to prevent the chances of injuries or muscle spasms. Muscle Work Curl bars are great at isolating biceps and triceps while doing different workouts that target muscles. At the same time, much depends on the individual lifter's goals and ability to limit movement to simply the arms (when training demands it), the thinner grips on curl bars aid lifters in keeping their elbows pinned to their sides, limiting shoulder assistance. Size The compact size of the curl bar is meant to prevent swaying and other additional movements that a longer bar would create. Curl bars are also great for lifting in smaller locations, such as many home gyms, due to their lower length. A compact curl bar may be a better option in a tight environment than a 7-foot regular weightlifting bar. | |||||||||||||||||||
55 | 54 | https://www.si.com/review/best-hitting-net/ | Are you looking to brush up on your baseball or softball skills? One of the most convenient and effective ways is with a hitting net. These nets allow you to work on your hitting in a safer, more structured environment. Take a look at some of the best hitting nets in 2022. | Comparing the Best Hitting Net this Year PowerNet Baseball and Softball Practice Net – Bext PowerNet Practice Net Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This large 7’x7’ net provides ample space for practicing baseball and softball throws and hits. The lightweight, portable net is easy to carry and can be used indoors or outdoors. PROS PowerNet Practice Net is used and endorsed by pro players Features sock net to better catch and hold balls Great for players of all ages CONS Net assembly may be a challenge and cause fiberglass splinters Some buyers experience the net may not last for a long time with repeated use Taller players over 6’ may have a hard time using CHECK ON AMAZON GoSports Practice Hitting & Pitching Net – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This hitting net is a great training aid to improve strength for baseball and softball players. The net can be used to enhance fielding, pitching, catching, and batting skills. PROS GoSports Hitting & Pitching Net comes with a strike zone pitching aid to improve the accuracy of pitches Metal stakes help net stay securely in the ground Easy to assemble and break down CONS The net isn’t very durable Poles contain fiberglass which may leave splinters May arrive with incorrect or missing parts CHECK ON AMAZON ZENY Baseball Softball Practice Net – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This net is built to withstand the elements to be used outdoors for batting practice. The sturdy net is perfect for catching balls while working on swing mechanics and eye-hand coordination. PROS ZENY Practice Net can be set up easily in minutes with numbered pieces Can be used by adults and youth players The large net provides ample practice space CONS The net’s legs might move when throwing balls Might not hold up after continuous use Threads and stitching might come unraveled CHECK ON AMAZON Rukket 7×7 Baseball & Softball Net – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This durable net provides additional rigidity and improved stability to take the strongest of hits. Great for players of all ages, baseball and softball players can practice batting and pitching. PROS Rukket’s net folds down easily for convenient carrying to different locations Can be used indoors or outdoors CONS The net isn’t durable enough to last a long time Metal fittings on poles may come loose Can be too big for smaller players CHECK ON AMAZON | The Best Hitting Nets Buying Guide Do you want to be a good baseball/softball player? If your answer is yes, you should get a quality hitting net to improve your practice routine. Hitting nets will allow you to practice alone and in a designated space. You can set the net in your house, backyard, or in a park to practice well before any important match. Are you planning to buy the best hitting net for your upcoming important baseball match? The following guide is going to assist you in the best way possible. Why Is a Baseball/Softball Batting Net Important? You can be a pro player in any game you want! The only thing you need to do is to practice hard. All the professional players put in hours upon hours of practice to improve their game. When it comes to baseball practice, you can grab a hitting net and start your practice without delay. Purchasing a hitting net will be well worth the investment. You can now practice wherever and whenever you want, and get the following additional benefits: No need to visit the batting cages. You can practice at any time of the day. No need to wait for others to move; you can start your practice instantly once the net is set up. The convenience of being able to take the net wherever you need it. The net keeps the balls you hit contained in one space so you don't have to track them down later. What Are Some Important Features of a Hitting Net? The market is full of different hitting nets. You may be hesitant to buy one because they can be pricey, it can be hard to find the best, or you just don’t know where to start. To help you meet your practice goals, we have listed some important features to look out for before you buy: Quality As with any product, you want to make sure the hitting net you choose is high-quality. Certain high-quality hitting nets will have a lightweight frame, usually made of steel or fiberglass poles, and a large net, usually with a target area. It should be easy to assemble and come with a carrying bag as well. The net The net should be designed to capture the ball in some capacity. Some nets just dangle and the balls drop to the ground, while others will have a pocket-like design that contains the balls. The net should be thick enough and have enough slack to contain the ball rather than skipping the ball back to the player’s end. Also, the net should be sturdy enough to withstand plenty of use, as a torn net would defeat the hitting net’s purpose. Nowadays, nearly all hitting nets have the ideal design to keep the ball in control. The nets that have a pocket to contain balls really make practicing easier as you wouldn’t have to go retrieve the balls from all over. Size The appropriate size for a baseball hitting net is 7ft x 7ft. For little children, the size will be 5ft x 5ft. A taller option is usually around 8ft x 8ft. Overall, choose the size of net based on the player: the 5ft x 5ft is suitable for children younger than 12 and the 7ft x 7ft is suitable for adults and most children 12 and up. Having the right size ensures the target zone is in the correct area. What Are Some Key Things to Note When Buying Hitting Nets? Now, let’s talk about some of the important considerations that you should keep in your mind when buying hitting nets for baseball or softball: Net material Most nets are designed to be able to withstand the elements, such as rain and UV light. Nets are commonly made with polyester material, or in some cases they are nylon. Nylon tends to be less common and more expensive than polyester. White netting can be damaged by UV light and will discolor over time. Black polyester netting, on the other hand, will not be damaged by UV rays and will hold up well even when wet, so it is probably your best bet. Some nets also have a PU covering along the edges or a mixed fabric netting. A covering does help improve the quality and increase the net’s lifespan. For best quality, look for hitting nets that specify the net material and have reinforcement on the edges. Frame material The frame of hitting nets is commonly made of one of two things: fiberglass or powder-coated steel. These poles are lightweight but sturdy and offer just enough bend. Fiberglass is the most sturdy and most lightweight, but both are viable options. Oftentimes the frames also have rubber portions on the bottom to help keep the net in place. Practicing Before investing in a hitting net, think about what you will use it for. Will you practice your hitting? Pitching? Most hitting nets allow you to practice almost every skill set of baseball or softball, but others may make your practice even easier. Look for nets with extra features like target zones or a pocket that collects the balls so you don’t have to track down scattered baseballs or softballs. Storage and transportation Pick a hitting net that is simple to move and store. A carrying bag is ideal so you can practice wherever, whenever, and have a compact way to store it when not in use. Make sure you get a hitting net that is quick and easy to set up and take down if this is what you’re looking for. What Is the Price Range of Hitting Nets? You can expect to pay anywhere between $30 to $100 depending on the brand, size, and material of the net. Different popular brands have their own pricing due to their brand reputation. The price can also vary due to the different sizes available, as a 5ft x 5ft will cost less than a 7ft x 7ft. Furthermore, hitting nets made of nylon will cost you a lot more than other hitting nets made of polyester. However, polyester is still a reliable option. Price may also determine the sturdiness of the frame, so be wary of extremely inexpensive options as they may be flimsy. | |||||||||||||||||||
56 | 55 | https://www.si.com/review/kids-scooter/ | Scooters are a great option to help your child burn off excess energy. They can help your child get from A to B faster, and develop their balance and motor neuron skills. If your child is interested in thrilling sports, it could start them on their stunt journey. The age and size of your child will affect what size and type of scooter you buy for them. Later in this article, we will discuss several factors and features you should consider to make the best possible purchase for your child. Before you embark on a massive amount of research, check out our list of the top kids’ scooters in 2023. We have undergone a lot of research to find you the best products, so you don't have to. Choose one of our great recommendations, and you will be in your kids' good books for at least a week. | Best Kids Scooter Worth Considering in 2023 Razor Kids Scooter – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Razor A Kick Scooter For Kids is available in different colored handlebars and wheels and some interesting deck designs. This product is made from lightweight and durable aluminum so your child can practice plenty of tricks without being weighed down. It has two wheels offering great maneuverability and a rear brake that is activated with pressure from the heel. The handlebars are adjustable so the scooter can grow as your child does. This scooter folds away, making it easier to transport in your car, and easier to store when not in use. The urethane wheels offer great durability as well as a smooth ride. PROS Foldable Adjustable handlebars Rear brake Available in several colors and designs CONS Some found the handlebars did not extend high enough, even for a 10-year-old CHECK ON AMAZON LaScooota Kids Scooter – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This next option allows your child to ride the scooter while seated until they are comfortable scooting while standing. The handlebars are adjustable to four heights, making them appropriate for children of all ages. Your child can easily balance thanks to the three wheels for added stability, and the deck is also spacious with an anti-slip surface for added support. This self-balancing scooter features lean-to-steer technology, which allows children to steer the scooter by leaning rather than turning the handlebars, thereby improving their balance and coordination. When your child rides the three wheels — outfitted with multicolored LED lights — create a wonderful rainbow glow! PROS Impressive build and quality Perfect for learning children The anti-slip deck offers excellent resistance CONS The seat does not fold CHECK ON AMAZON Den Haven Kids Scooter – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This scooter has three wheels with two of those wheels on the front for excellent stability. This scooter is intended for toddlers from about two years of age. As the handlebars are adjustable, this product could serve up to a five-year-old, depending on their size. The brake is on the rear and it is activated by applying pressure with the heel. The frame is both strong, and lightweight, and is made from a mix of aluminum and carbon steel. The assembly is quick and easy, requiring you to only attach the handlebars. The handlebars are comfortable to grip and this scooter is easy to steer by turning the handlebars as you would with a bike. PROS Adjustable handlebars Rear brake Made from aluminum and carbon steel Easy to use design CONS Some customers needed to remove residual plastic before assembling the scooter CHECK ON AMAZON CHECK PRICE ON CHEWY APOLLO Kids Scooter – Contender 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Made from top-quality aluminum alloy, the APOLLO Kids Scooter can easily withstand day-to-day usage without really showing any kind of tearing. It has a Y-shaped handlebar with two rubberized handles that will provide your kid with the best grip possible. The reengineered neck will provide maximum safety and the 3 bolt clamp will make the entire assembly procedure incredibly convenient. In terms of weight, the max capacity that this model can handle is 220 pounds. It can be used literally anywhere: in the outdoor skate parks, on specific rails, on the sidewalks, and even inside your home. Available in several beautiful designs, this scooter might be the perfect gift for your little one. PROS Offers great performance Easy to assemble Unique look and feel CONS Most users reported poor packaging CHECK ON AMAZON Micro Kickboard Kids Scooter – Most Convenient 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This three-wheeled scooter has a handle height of 17 inches that can be adjusted to go shorter. To operate this scooter the child must lean into the turn, as the handlebars are not made to turn and steer this device. This product is designed for children between the ages of two and five years old. However, this product might still be suitable for children who are small for their age. The frame is made from lightweight and durable aluminum and the wheels are made from polyurethane. The two wheels at the front of this scooter create great stability and will increase your child’s balancing and physical functionality. This product comes with a two years manufacturer’s warranty. Your child will love this product! PROS Three wheels for stability Made from durable and lightweight aluminum Available in several colors Adjustable handlebars CONS Many children find this scooter difficult to turn CHECK ON AMAZON Beleev Kids Scooter – Most Reliable 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This scooter is appropriate for kids that are eight years and older. It is available in 12 different designs and colors. This scooter is foldable, so it will easily fit into the boot of your car when you want to take your child to the skate park or promenade. The handlebars are adjustable so as your child grows, the scooter grows with them. This feature will save you money in the long run because kids grow so fast. This scooter boasts ergonomic grips and front-wheel suspension, for a smooth and safe ride. Feel confident your child is using a high-quality and durable product thanks to its lightweight and strong aluminum and polyurethane construction. Two wheels reduce the security of this scooter, but improve the freedom of movement, and will teach your child better balance. PROS Foldable Adjustable handlebars Aluminum frame Various colors available CONS Customers found the paint flaked easily CHECK ON AMAZON Jetson Jupiter Kids Scooter – Also Consider 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This product is one of the most stylish scooters we have come across. It has a light-up stem, wheels, and neck. It is available in black, blue, iridescent, pink, and red. These lights not only look awesome but will make your child more visible to vehicles and others in general. This product is foldable, so you can easily transport it to a variety of venues for your child. You can also fold the scooter up for tidier home storage. It has a wide deck so your child can fit both feet comfortably and securely. The rear brakes are easy to use by applying light pressure with the heel. This scooter is easy to maneuver. Simply turn the handlebars in the same way you would steer a bike. This scooter is made for children five years and older. PROS Foldable Lights up Wide deck Adjustable handlebars CONS The battery case isn’t secure CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer’s Guide for Finding a Kids Scooter Things to Consider When Choosing a Kid’s Scooter Size A scooter’s handlebar should reach your child’s hip or waist to ensure they feel comfortable and confident while they play. Weight limit Check the weight limit of the scooter you want to buy. If your child is over the weight limit it may break while they are on it, which could cause an injury. Number of wheels You can purchase three or four-wheel scooters that are perfect for children who have never ridden a scooter before. Children 12 years or older will probably prefer a scooter with two wheels. A child who has previously used a three or four-wheel scooter, can use a two-wheeled scooter from ages 5 and up. Deck A low deck with a narrower front than back will help your child control the scooter. This is not a necessity, but it is a feature you may wish to look for. Skateboard deck A skateboard deck allows your child to tilt like they would on a skateboard. This creates an opportunity for your child to improve their balance skills and will engage their entire body for better exercise. A skateboard deck is sometimes accompanied by lean and tilt steering. Lean and tilt steering does not allow you to turn the handlebars as you would with a bike but requires you to lean to the side to turn. Auto shut-off feature Some scooters have an auto shut-off feature that will cut off the power once an issue with the throttle button is perceived. Adjustable handlebars Children grow quickly so you will want a scooter that has adjustable handlebars so you can make them taller as your child grows. Foldable scooters Foldable scooters allow you to transport the scooter to the park if you are not confident the path on the way to the park is safe. Foldable scooters are also great for storing in the home when not in use. Foldable scooters are usually for children aged 5 and above and have two wheels. A foldable scooter with two wheels requires better steering and balancing skills. They also go a little faster compared to three or four-wheeled scooters. Electric scooter For older kids, you can buy speedy scooters of up to 10 mph. Electric scooters usually have hand control acceleration and stronger breaks so your child can stay in control. Children should be supervised when using an electric scooter and wear all the necessary safety equipment. We recommend only buying an electric scooter for children who are 10 years and over, with some experience with non-motorized electric scooters. Electric scooters aren’t just for children. Adults can also reap the benefits of the speed and convenience of an electric scooter. Ride time When choosing an electric scooter, consider the amount of ride time you get between charges. 80 minutes of ride time or more is enough time for your child to play on the scooter. Energy efficiency Look for an electric scooter that doesn’t cost much to run. A children’s scooter shouldn’t cost you more than 30 cents to charge. Stunt scooter A stunt scooter is only suitable for children eight years and above. Stunt scooters are lightweight and sturdy allowing your child to practice tricks at the skatepark, which they could not achieve with other clunkier and heavier models. Stunt pegs If your child loves doing tricks on their scooter, consider adding stunt pegs to your purchase. Stunt pegs will allow your child to try tricks they couldn’t achieve without them. Safety For added safety, choose a scooter that has a front and rear brake. Using them at the same time will ensure the scooter doesn’t tip over. Added accessories If your child has a scooter that is still within their height and skill range, consider replacing the wheels. There are some funky designs available that will make the scooter look almost like a brand new item. You could also change the color and the style of the grips. Customer reviews Once you have narrowed down your scooter selection, read the products accompanying customer reviews. Customer reviews will provide information about the scooter’s durability, and suitability for different aged children. Customer reviews will also give you a good idea about how well the company deals with customer complaints. Warranty The scooter you buy should come with a full warranty. Some scooters only come with a partial warranty that will only cover certain parts of the scooter. A full warranty is better. How We Choose a Kids Scooter To choose the right scooter, we judge how well-made and stable the scooter is. We take into account the number of safety features, and we compare how easy the scooter is to use. We asked children to test these scooters and compared many customer reviews. We only recommend products that are well tested and highly thought of. We also choose scooters that we consider to be good value-for-money. Kids scooter price range When budgeting for a kids scooter, it is important to incorporate the cost of safety gear such as a helmet, elbow pads, and knee pads into the price range. You can purchase a safety set for about $25. A kids scooter can cost you between $25 and as much as $200. For a decent starter scooter for your child, budget from about $50. | |||||||||||||||||||
57 | 56 | https://www.si.com/review/full-size-volleyball/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
58 | 57 | https://www.si.com/review/best-golf-hitting-net/ | When you have to practice golf, visiting the golf range is essential. It's because you cannot have the greens, the pitch, the fairway, the tee, and others at your home. But every time, it's not possible to visit the golf range to practice your shots. Moreover, as golf is played on an open field, rain and other climatic disturbances can cause hindrance in your practice routine. This is why we have presented the best golf hitting nets in 2022 using which you can practice the shots. These nets are smaller and can be set anywhere in your house, like the backyard, lawn, patio, etc. There are several types of golf nets that you can find in the market, like flat nets, enclosed nets, foldable nets, and many more. As shortlisting the best golf nets is nothing less than a nightmare, we have compiled a list of the top products available in the market. | Comparing the Best Golf Hitting Net This Year Hit Run Steal Heavy-Duty Golf Net – Best Hitting Net Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It is reinforced with an upright fiberglass frame for absorbing the ball’s momentum. It has a collapsible design for transportation and easy storage. The net has a large surface area which will help you use the irons, wedges, woods, and even the hybrid sticks. The netted mesh will prevent the ball from bouncing in other directions. If you are a professional golf player and want to set up a driving range for different shots, including the fairways, draws, bunkers, and others, Hit Run has brought you their best creation. The golf net has a 7″X10″ surface area, which will help you in practicing shots in different directions. It has a knotless net mesh design which has increased the product’s durability by ten folds. Thanks to the steel poles at the front of the golf net frame, the meshed net structure will be able to absorb the ball’s momentum with ease. CHECK ON AMAZON Galileo Backyard Golf Hit Practice – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a strong mesh net for enduring repeated hits The surface area is quite large with 12″ width and 6.6″ diameter A golf hit target is present at the middle for practicing chip shots It has a portable and lightweight design. You cannot use every golf net outdoors, especially in bad weather conditions. That’s why Galileo has introduced a robust and sturdy golf net with fiberglass support. This golf net’s frame material can withstand bad weather and also doesn’t form rust easily. The net is made from nylon and polyester mesh for improved durability and better performance. You can use the golf driving range to practice low-impact hits like chip shots. Setting up the golf net and again wrapping it up will take only a couple of minutes which will help in saving both your effort and time. CHECK ON AMAZON Rukket 3pc Golf Net Bundle – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a large surface area of 10x7x3 feet for practicing swings, rough shots, and fairways The golf net has a collapsible design for quick installation and wrap-up It comes with an additional tri-turf mat for better practice techniques The golf hitting net has high durability and longevity. If you are bad at golf and want to improve your posture and the arms and leg movements for the swing shots, this golf net from Rukket will be an ideal choice. It has a knotless netting structure with a ball rollback feature for avoiding mishits. The net is so huge that you can take swings from both outside and inside the driving range. Besides swings, you can also practice fairway and rough shots using this golf net. CHECK ON AMAZON WhiteFang Bundle Practice Golf Net 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a slight titled design for improving the ball’s rollback motion The poles are made with fiberglass for better stability against the weather The net has a 10”x7” surface area for practicing different golf shots No knots are made to create the netted mesh, thereby increasing the product’s durability If you want to have a complete golf driving range arrangement set and accessories, go with the golf net set from Whitefang. You will have the golf net along with a turf mat and six golf balls in this package. Again, 4-ply knotless material is used to manufacture the netting mesh. To provide stability and improve the sturdiness of the golf net, fibreglass support poles are used. CHECK ON AMAZON Spornia Golf Practice Net 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The netting is reinforced with large target material for absorbing the impact forces It is extremely lightweight which can be carried anywhere The golf net has a larger surface area for practicing different hits It has a roll-back feature to prevent bouncing of the balls Only a few golf nets are there, which allows practice sessions with all the golf clubs and luckily, the Spg-7 from Spornia is one of them. You can use all the clubs to improve your postures and make different shots, including swing, bunker, chipping, and putting hits. The golf net has a responsive mesh structure which allows the ball to slowly roll back after the hit without bouncing off to another direction. CHECK ON AMAZON Saplize Golf Practice Net With Hitting Mat 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The golf net has a high impact netting structure for preventing the bounces of the ball It has a large surface area for correcting the mishits The net has anti-tearing properties, which has enhanced its durability The drive range is long for practicing far-away hits If you are looking for a highly durable golf net, you can try the product designed and manufactured by Saplize. It has a netting structure made from polyester and Oxford cloth which can absorb the high impacts of the golf shots. You can practice the driver and chip shots with this golf net with ease. The product is suitable for every golfer who wants to practice at home. CHECK ON AMAZON GoSports Golf Practice Hitting Net – Also Consider 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has a solid frame design for improved sturdiness The golf net has an area of 10” x 7” for more hitting surface area The product has a collapsible design for easy storage It’s perfect for both outdoor and indoor practices If you are looking for a golf hitting net that can be used outdoors and indoors, then this product from GoSports would be a good choice. It has a sturdy and robust design which will allow you to use it for different golf shots, especially the hard swings. The net is made from highly durable nylon material, so the ball will roll back in the same direction after hitting the net. Hence, you won’t have to run after the golf ball after every swing. CHECK ON AMAZON | The Best Golf Hitting Nets Buying Guide Golf can be an expensive sport, and even practicing your hits can be difficult without going to a driving range nearby. And as driving ranges aren’t a common sight in many parts of the world, it’s likely that the only time you actually get to practice golf is in the middle of a real game. You can, however, practice your golf swings at home with no trouble or possibilities for damage. Golf hitting nets allow people to practice the strength and accuracy of their swings safely. Read on to find out how to get the best hitting net for your next practice session. What Is a Hitting Net? Hitting nets are nets designed to absorb the impact of a golf ball, making it the ideal home solution for practicing golf drives. There are different kinds of nets out there, with different designs, but almost all of them feature a large net that catches a golf ball from a significant distance. Depending on the type of net, there may also be target markers and holes that you can shoot in to practice your accuracy. Why Do You Need a Hitting Practice Net for Golf? Hitting nets are more common among golf enthusiasts than you may think, and here’s why. It’s convenient Driving ranges cost quite a bit of money to visit, and it can be impractical to practice golf in the middle of a game. Because of this, many golfers rely on hitting nets to practice their swings. Hitting nets allow anybody with a backyard to practice their form and accuracy without risking damage to property, either theirs or someone else’s. Hitting nets also have features that help golfers improve their accuracy, with target markers and openings that you can shoot your golf ball at. It’s safe Practicing golf at home without a hitting net isn’t impossible. However, it certainly is difficult, and dangerous - you’re mostly restricting yourself to smaller hits instead of trying to really drive it in. With a net, you can afford to add all your strength with each drive without worrying about damaging anything - so long as you hit the golf ball in the net, of course. It’s portable Finally, there’s the portability aspect of the hitting net. Hitting nets can be assembled and disassembled in around a minute, making it great for on-the-go practice. If you want to try out some swings with family or friends, you can bring one of these to a park or their home. You could even lend the net to others and have them return it just as easily. Things to Consider When Buying a Practice Net for Golf Before you go on and buy a hitting net, there are a few things you need to take note of. Here are some of the most important factors to consider: Size Unlike softball nets, which mostly come in the same standard 7 feet by 7 feet size, hitting nets are a little more varied. You have tiny nets that can catch balls when you’re practicing chipping, and large nets meant to handle full-on drives. The type of net you should get must coincide with the kind of swings you intend on practicing. To be safe, you can get yourself the largest standard size for golf hitting nets, which is 10 feet by 7 feet. They’re large enough to handle most drives at a distance, and with their size, you can practice chipping, too. Remember that the net can only extend so far, though - you don’t want to hit outside the net and end up either losing the golf ball or worse, breaking something. Additional Features What makes hitting nets different from one another is the additional features that come with it. While all of the nets are built to catch golf balls, some have added features that can improve your golfing skills or make life more convenient for you. For example, some hitting nets come with a ring target at the center, allowing you to practice your accuracy from different positions. This can be great for people who struggle with accuracy and want to improve it. If all you want to improve on is form and strength, however, it probably isn’t that necessary. Other hitting nets come with bags that allow you to easily pack up and carry around the net should you feel the need to do so. This can be great if you don’t intend on leaving the hitting net outdoors for too long, which is ideal as the nets don’t last very well when exposed to the elements. Practice Net Price Range Despite golf being an expensive sport, you’ll find that the hitting drives are surprisingly affordable. Small chipping nets can cost you no more than $13, and those come with targets to practice your accuracy. On the other hand, larger nets meant for driving will cost you up to $100 for one with good quality. However, do keep in mind that not all hitting nets are this expensive, and most of them are at around the $50 range. You don’t need to spend too much to get a hitting net of good quality that’ll last you a while. | |||||||||||||||||||
59 | 58 | https://www.si.com/review/slide-board/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
60 | 59 | https://www.si.com/review/mma-glove/ | The need for a glove that suits the peculiarities of mixed martial arts led to the development of MMA gloves. These open-fingered gloves are specifically designed for use by MMA fighters. In MMA, the hands do more than deliver blows to the opponent’s face and body; but to master the skill, you need the right gear. MMA gloves are essential for every mixed martial artist. They protect the knuckles while the fighter dazes the opponent with punches. Our reviewers have perused the market to draw up this list of the most reliable MMA gloves you can invest in. These MMA gloves are top-notch because they: Are made from durable yet breathable fabric Have adjustable wrist straps to secure the gloves to your wrist Offer excellent shock absorption and padding | Our Top Picks: MMA Glove Zoobo MMA Glove – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Zoobo MMA gloves could become your go-to boxing gloves if you are looking for quality gear on a budget. They are made of breathable material and offer excellent hand protection. The wristband has a velcro strap for a secure fit and superior wrist support. PROS Three layers of padding to ensure maximum comfort The glove is available in six colors The glove leaves the thumb uncovered, giving the fighter more control when grappling Adjustable velcro wristband Available in multiple colors CONS Not washable CHECK ON AMAZON RDX MMA Glove – Runner up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon RDX MMA glove is made from high-quality synthetic Maya hide that ensures durability. With the RDX gloves, you won’t be needing a new pair of gloves in a very long time. It is ideal for sparring or working on heavy bags. The MMA gloves come in four sizes to accommodate different hands, and there are many colors to choose from to suit your preference. PROS Dual stitched for added durability Available in four colors Open palm design ensures breathability to keep hands dry CONS Sizes can run big CHECK ON AMAZON Liberlupus MMA Glove – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Liberlupus is a lightweight one-fit-all MMA glove. The glove can be used by male and female fighters for heavy bag training and sparring. The MMA gloves are made with synthetic leather for durability and ease of cleaning. It has a 10mm padding that offers excellent shock absorption properties. The cross-cut design on the back allows sufficient airflow to keep the hands dry. PROS Made of wear-resistant synthetic leather Has a natural curve that aids in practicing the grappling technique Adjustable wristband for a custom fit The cross-cut design allows airflow CONS Not ideal to be used against heavy bags Inadequate knuckle protection CHECK ON AMAZON Everlast Pro Style MMA Gloves – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Tired of boxing gloves smelling bad after a few sparring sessions? Everlast Pro’s EverDri technology prevents moisture from getting absorbed into the glove. This will repel any foul odor and keep your hands fresh after every boxing session. The MMA glove is made of synthetic leather for excellent durability and softness. It also has a long wrist strap for secure closure and added support for your wrist against impact. PROS Made of wear-resistant synthetic leather EverDri technology prevents odor buildup Adjustable wrist strap for secure closure and added support CONS Sizes may run big CHECK ON AMAZON Brace Master MMA Glove 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Brace Master MMA glove is well padded to keep the fighter’s knuckles safe while they work on their technique. It is made of premium-quality leather that won’t crack or peel after prolonged use. It has an open-palm design to allow airflow, while the foam padding inside gives the fighter excellent shock protection. PROS It is available in different colors Open palm design allows airflow Excellent padding for shock protection CONS Might be rough on knuckles CHECK ON AMAZON UFC MMA Glove 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The UFC is a lightweight MMA glove built for the long haul. Its breathable and pre-curved finger design aids the fighter’s grappling, while the soft foam padding over the knuckle area gives your hands the protection they need during an intense practice session. The open-finger design facilitates airflow to keep your hands dry and comfortable. PROS The glove is made of high-quality synthetic leather The glove weighs only 3.2 ounces It is available in three colors The glove has an open palm design to ensure palm dryness CONS Material not of the highest quality CHECK ON AMAZON Venum MMA Glove 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Venum MMA glove is a high-quality glove built for maximum comfort. It has a multi-layered design that keeps the knuckles safe during use. With high-density foam padding and PU leather construction, it is a perfect glove for training sessions as well as professional matches. It has a double closure system for a secure fit and superior wrist support. PROS Double closure system for easy access It is made of synthetic leather Available in two colors Adjustable strap reduces the risk of wrist injuries CONS Inner padding can chafe knuckles CHECK ON AMAZON | MMA Gloves Buying Guide MMA gloves are to a mixed martial artist what boots are to a soccer player – an essential gear that protects the wearer and ultimately elevates their performance. Through our review of the best MMA gloves, you have seen the different brands and types of MMA gloves available in the market. The array of options may leave you with the tricky task of settling for one. This buying guide gives detailed explanations and tips that will help you to choose the best MMA glove. The guide also contains a section where frequently asked questions about MMA gloves are answered. What Are the Differences Between Boxing Gloves and MMA Gloves? Boxing gloves and MMA gloves are designed for combat sports. However, the peculiarities of each combat sport differ. The differences between the two gloves will be explained under two headings – design and padding. Design Boxing gloves are full gloves that cover the palms and fingers entirely. On the other hand, MMA gloves do not cover the fighter’s entire palms and fingers because MMA involves grappling. An MMA fighter needs the fingers uncovered to grapple opponents. Padding Boxing gloves are more padded than MMA gloves. The extra padding found in boxing gloves is because boxing involves punching only, while MMA involves the combination of kicking, punching, and grappling. What Are the Types of MMA Gloves? Based on the purpose they serve, there are three main types of MMA gloves – fighting gloves, grappling gloves, and sparring gloves. Fighting gloves Fighting gloves are also called competition gloves. They have less padding than the other types of MMA gloves and are used in competitive fights. They usually weigh 4 ounces and are designed to sting the opponent with every punch. Grappling gloves This category of gloves has room for more finger movement and padding than fighting gloves. Grappling gloves are used for ground training like grappling and clinching. Sparring gloves Sparring gloves are used for practice bouts between two individuals. They have extra paddings to protect both fighters and often weigh more than other gloves. Fighters should not use any other type of MMA glove for sparring to avoid injuries to the sparring partner. What Are the Things to Consider Before Buying MMA Gloves? For long-lasting MMA gloves, there are various factors to consider. When carefully considered, these factors will help you make a sound buying decision. Comfort Comfort is the first factor you should consider when buying a pair of MMA gloves. Comfort entails how well the gloves fit your hands. An oversized pair of gloves will make the fighter clumsy, put them at the risk of sustaining injuries and take the sting out of their punch. Apart from the obvious discomfort that comes with wearing undersized gloves, there is also the risk of limiting the fighter’s punching and grappling range. Thus, getting the correct size is an important factor to consider when buying MMA gloves. Purpose This is perhaps a more straightforward factor. Your answer to the question ‘what do I need the MMA glove for?’ will help you to pick the ideal glove. For example, if the glove is not meant for a competitive fight, that means you are either buying a sparring glove or a grappling glove. The choice between the two will now be narrowed to the specifics of your training. Type of material The type of material used to make the MMA gloves affects durability. Usually, MMA gloves are made of either genuine leather or synthetic leather. Natural leather is the more preferred material of the two but comes at a high cost. On the other hand, synthetic leather is quite cheaper and almost identical to genuine leather. There are different types of synthetic leather used to make MMA gloves. Buyers should look for the best quality to ensure durability. Lace-up gloves vs. Hook and loop gloves Another factor to consider is the choice between lace-up MMA gloves and hook and loop gloves as it relates to fastening the gloves to the wrist. Lace-up gloves have laces like shoes and give the fighter absolute control over the tightness of the gloves. The downside of lace-up gloves is that you need an extra pair of hands to get them tightened. Hook and loop gloves are also known as Velcro gloves. They are fastened through the pressing together of two sides of a fastening fabric. Unlike lace-up gloves, a fighter does not require extra hands to fasten. Also, hook and loop gloves are faster to put on since they do not require the intricate picking of laces to fasten. However, one advantage of lace-up gloves over hook and loop gloves is the added stability they possess. How Much Do MMA Gloves Cost? The price of MMA gloves ranges from $15 to as high as $250. Durability and overall efficiency increase proportionally with the price. Low-end gloves sold for $15 are not expected to have the same durability as the high-end ones sold for $200. One could find a middle ground between cost and durability with the MMA gloves priced between $50 and $150. | |||||||||||||||||||
61 | 60 | https://www.si.com/review/ping-pong-ball/ | Table tennis is arguably one of the most fun team sports. This game has been around for a while and has evolved through a few changes and rule tweaks over the last decades. One of the major elemental changes to the game is the size, style, and material design of the ping pong balls. It doesn’t matter the reason you play the game, even if you play just for fun, you need a quality ball with the right durability to last and keep your game going. Ping pong balls are available in a lot of varieties, so it’s crucial that you know what to look for before choosing the one you want. Balls that are considerably cheaper than the standard ones should be avoided. These kinds of balls usually wear very easily and would definitely affect the experience of the game. To help you in your endeavor, we have created a very impressive list of some of the best ping pong balls in 2022. | Best Ping Pong Ball of 2022 Reviewed In Detail Pro Spin Ping Pong Balls – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made from a safer and more durable poly plastic material Seamless construction allows for consistent and accurate bounce size 40+ and weighs the recommended 2.7g White color Pro Spin Ping Pong Balls are superior quality balls that work great for competitions or family fun. These ping pong balls are durable enough to survive any serve or smash. Plus, their weight makes for a steady and more accurate trajectory. You’ll instantly tell the difference between cheaper and lighter options. CHECK ON AMAZON NIBIRU SPORT Ping Pong Balls – Highest Quality 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Durable and long-lasting Crack-resistant Good bounce Entertainment for your dog Before you purchase a bulk pack of ping pong balls, it’s important to know what you’re looking for! If you want a set of balls that offer superior bounce, spin, and control, then the NIBIRU SPORT balls are the perfect choice for you. Made from durable and long-lasting material, these cuties won’t crack – even if you’re hitting them with all your might! The smooth seams and aerodynamic design make them perfectly rounded and easy to control. You’ll be able to push your training to the next level with this massive pack of balls! Not only are they great for practicing your backhand or perfecting your serves, but the good bounce also makes them great for family games. CHECK ON AMAZON KEVENZ 60-Pack 3 Star Ping Pong Balls – Runner-Up 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Durable with consistent bounce and seamless construction Standard 3-star ping pong balls Weigh 2.75g 40mm size KEVENZ 60-Pack 3 Star Ping Pong Balls are a very durable and effective product. It can be used as a practice ball and is suitable for all sorts of entertainment, including ping pong robots, beer pong games, party decoration, pet toys, et cetera. CHECK ON AMAZON Meihzhouer Colored Ping Pong Balls – Honorable Mention 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made of environmentally safe poly plastic Frosted surface allows for writing and crafts 40mm size and weigh 2.4g Great for a number of uses Meihzhouer Colored Ping Pong Balls are lightweight and very useful table tennis balls that can create entertainment in many ways. They are very useful for teaching as well, because they can be used in classroom games and teaching methodologies. CHECK ON AMAZON Ping Pong Balls 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Three-star rated ping pong ball and is great for training and professional games Weighs 2.7 to 2.85g 40.1 to 40.25 mm in size White color MAPOL 50 White 3-Star Table Tennis Balls are some of the best tennis balls on the market. This table tennis ball is an advanced training ball with great bounce and a lot of power. The balls are very sturdy and can last several months before wearing out or getting broken. This ball definitely improves your rallies and gives you room to take your practice sessions to the next level CHECK ON AMAZON Franklin Sports Table Tennis Balls 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Glow in the dark 40mm in size Weighs 2.7g Seamless construction ensures consistent play Franklin Sports Table Tennis Balls is a 6-pack glow-in-the-dark wonder that buffers any game it is used for. This table tennis ball is made from the highest quality materials and works great whether you’re playing in a competition or in your game room. Take your game to the next level with a set of table tennis balls from Franklin Sports! CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Ping Pong Balls Buying Guide Ping Pong is a game that has stood the test of time from its invention long ago to now. To choose the best ping pong ball for you, you have to consider the brands’ durability, elasticity, seam visibility, and balance of their ping pong balls. These qualities determine if the ball is up to the standard you require. This article aims at giving you a better understanding of the difference between ping pong balls so you can make the best choice on the right type of table tennis ball you would want for your games or practice sessions. What Are the Things to Consider When Buying Ping Pong Balls? Here are some of the important things you need to check out before purchasing a ping pong ball. Demystifying ping pong ball star ratings The stars rating system is a system that worldwide ping pong players have accepted and utilized for quite some time now. This very simple symbol system has created a way for shoppers to tell the value or quality specification of any ping pong ball. They are quite easy to decipher. Basically, the maximum rating any ball can have is the 3-star rating – this represents the highest quality balls. Balls with lesser or no stars indicate that they’re of lesser quality than a three-star ping pong. Their prices also reflect this difference. Quality disparity Sadly, most manufacturers are actually responsible for determining their own star-rating guidelines. As a result, there are a lot of cheap 3-star table tennis balls on the market that don’t match the quality they claim. There is a lot of variation in quality in this market – the best way you can shop wisely is to opt for industry standard brands that have a better brand reputation and more trustworthy rating systems. Shifts in standard and ball material The table tennis ball has changed significantly twice over the past two decades. They were increased from 38mm to 40mm in the year 2000 to create more appeal for spectators of the game. Increasing the ball to a larger size meant the ball would be slower and spin less, leading to longer rallies (although this hasn’t really been proven yet). The next major change came in 2014-2015 when the material used primarily to produce table tennis balls changed. Celluloid was set aside for a more environmentally safer option of non-flammable plastic (sometimes referred to as “poly balls” or “40+ balls”). Although the 40+ balls are a little bit larger than 40mm celluloid balls, the major difference between the two is the type of material they are made from. Tournament and competition balls All ping pong balls used now for professional and competitive ping pong matches are 40+ balls or new plastic table tennis balls. To identify if your table tennis ball is one of the new plastic balls, check that it has “40+” printed on it. Some extra tips to help you To get the most out of your ping pong ball, always ensure that you keep your balls out of direct sunlight, heat, and high humidity conditions. The color of ping pong balls does not factor into the game itself. The color of the ball doesn't change the experience, though it may matter in international competitions (where white- and orange-colored balls are most popularly accepted). In the end, try to ensure that your chosen ball for games and practice is the most visible given the conditions. Also, remember to always pick up your balls when they fall. This is to avoid stepping on them and ruining them, which happens more than you would expect. | |||||||||||||||||||
62 | 61 | https://www.si.com/review/best-dartboard/ | Whether in your garage or entertainment room, a dartboard provides hours of fun and friendly competition. A high-quality dartboard will give you years of gameplay without wearing out or fading. These are some of the best dartboards in 2022 on the market today. | Comparing The Best Dartboards For 2022 Barrington Bristle Dartboard – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This dartboard comes in several beautiful, professional-looking styles that add a touch of elegance to any game room. PROS Fully equipped set comes with everything you need to start playing Will look great in your man cave Some styles come with closing cabinet doors CONS Tends to come without all the pieces needed for hanging CHECK ON AMAZON LinkVisions Dartboard – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This dartboard set comes with everything you need to get started, including the dartboard, steel tip darts, and mounting hardware. PROS Available with aluminum or plastic shaft darts Official tournament size Staple-free bullseye to prevent bounce-outs CONS Plastic shaft darts aren’t very durable so be sure to get the aluminum shaft darts CHECK ON AMAZON Winmau Blade 5 Bristle Dartboard – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This dartboard is designed with thinner wires to increase the scoring area. The triple wheel lock-and-level system allows it to be secured to any surface. PROS Durable Darts rarely bounce out Setup is fast and easy Attractive coloring CONS Doesn’t come with a backboard No darts included CHECK ON AMAZON Viper by GLD Bristle Steel Tip Dartboard – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This official tournament-sized dartboard is equipped with a staple-free bullseye that helps prevent bounce-outs. Includes two sets of steel-tip darts and mounting hardware PROS Mounts easily Darts stick well Numbers are removable Durable construction CONS Numbers are smaller than other boards CHECK ON AMAZON Unicorn Eclipse Pro Bristle Dartboard 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This championship-quality dartboard has a staple-free construction and high-technology wiring design. It has an increased target area and high-visibility number ring and spider. PROS Attractive design No bounce-outs Durable wiring Thin wire CONS Doesn’t sit flush Hardware not included CHECK ON AMAZON TG Champion Bristle Dart Board 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This dartboard has an enhanced, self-healing bristle construction for maximum durability. It’s regulation-sized and has a staple-free frame and wire dividers to help reduce bounce-outs. PROS Comes with mounting hardware Includes game instructions Darts include CONS May need extra nails for mounting CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Dartboards Buyer's Guide If you're looking to start playing darts, then you would obviously need a high-quality dartboard. There's nothing more frustrating than darts not sticking or bouncing off and flying all over the place. Not every board is built equally. Sometimes getting the correct one can make the difference between continuing to play and putting the sport down forever. Since there are a lot of dartboards offered, picking the right one can be difficult. A good dartboard selection can make the game experience a lot more fun, reduce the bounce-outs, and just make you want to play again. The choice of the most suitable dartboard depends on the needs of the user. The model designed for a beginner will not be the same as that designed for a professional. If you find it hard to know which dartboard is the right one for you, then don't worry because this guide will help you. We have gathered all the basic information that you should know before you go ahead and buy a new dartboard. We hope that this will help you make your final and right choice. Let's get started. What Factors Should You Consider When Buying a Dartboard? Size One of the first things that you will need to keep in mind is the size of the dartboard that you're buying. So pick a size depending on the amount of wall space you have available for the board and the number of people that will play. Go for a board that has a 15 inch smaller diameter than the wall space you have available. Standard bristle dartboards are usually between 16.5 and 18 inches in diameter, while electronic dartboards usually go up to 15.5 inches or so. The standard-sized boards are fine for 2 to 6 people, but if you have a group of 8 or more, then you might consider getting a bigger board. Positioning Now that you know that you have the right amount of wall space, let's see how much room space you need to position it properly. When it comes to positioning your dartboard, you will need to ensure that the throw line is placed at least 7 feet and 9 inches from the board. And the bullseye should be exactly 5 feet and 8 inches from the ground. Depth & density Two critical factors that can dictate the quality of your game experience are the depth and density of the dartboard. You do not want your darts to constantly bounce out of the board and crash into the ground. This will not only ruin your floor but also affect your gameplay. Most of the boards come with a depth of 1.5 inches, and it usually works great. However, the density may vary depending on the manufacturer. Hanging Your dartboard will need to go on a wall, so make sure it comes with an appropriate hanging that will allow it to sit securely on the wall. The last thing you want is to knock it off with your darts. How Much Does a Dartboard Cost? The cost of a dartboard can vary depending on the type, brand, extra features, etc. If you want to buy a bristle dartboard, then it will cost you from $50 to $90. But if you're interested in getting an electrical dartboard can cost you anywhere from about $50 to more than $200. How Did We Choose the Best Dartboards? To present you with the most extensive and accurate information, we have analyzed a ton of dartboards and have ranked them by our following criteria: Brand The first factor we have considered while choosing the best dartboards was the brand. The idea was to pick a reliable and genuine brand for our viewers. Top-notch brands are always careful about their reputation, so they will do their best to provide their customers with high-quality products. Price Another criteria that helped us choose the best dartboards was the price. While to some people, the price may not be a factor, others are looking for a more affordable product. So that is why we have managed to make a combination of both. Reviews We have gone through thousands of reviews to make the final list of the best dartboards. There are various users expressing their first use of the product, which helped us a lot in our analyzing process. What Are the Different Types of Dartboards? Paper boards These types of dartboards are the most affordable ones, but they will naturally break down after a short time. So you will need to be particularly careful when you're removing the darts because they can easily get damaged. Bristle boards If you're looking for a dartboard that's inexpensive and suitable for all skill levels, then the bristle board is the one for you. They are the most commonly used boards and are quite long-lasting while also requiring minimal maintenance. However, not all bristle boards are built equal, so you should probably go for those made of high-quality sisal material rather than anything else. Electronic dartboards The electronic dartboard is like a beginner's dartboard. It looks like a real dartboard, but instead, it is made out of plastic and has tiny holes for the darts to fit into. Electronic dartboards are safer and more convenient than traditional ones, and they keep score automatically. They feature a variety of games for you to play solo or with your friend. The electronic dartboard is capable of keeping a tally of points for up to eight players or more. The biggest downside to the electronic dartboard is that it needs an electrical power source to function. Wooden dartboard The wooden dartboard is intended to offer uniqueness, durability, and superior penetration. The highest quality wood dartboards are made out of solid hardwood. These dartboards are excellent for commercial play, as they can resist wear and tear longer than traditional dartboards. Magnetic dartboard Magnetic dartboards are often viewed as a fun alternative to all the other boards. The darts' tips are magnetic, and they stick to the magnetic board when thrown at it. They are especially perfect for kids who get excited by watching others and want to play themselves but are maybe too young to play with real darts. Conclusion As mentioned before, there are numerous types of dartboards and various dartboard manufacturers available in the market. So it won't be easy to pick a dartboard that will match all your needs. However, you can use our information above to help you make the best decision according to your level and budget. | |||||||||||||||||||
63 | 62 | https://www.si.com/review/mens-lacrosse-cleats/ | Lacrosse cleats are a must-have for every enthusiast or wannabe. Finding the right fit for yourself is essential. In the end, if you can't run well, there's no point in trying to score. With the right fitting cleats, you'll be able to focus all your energies on the game. What's the best place to look? You're right here! We've put together the best lacrosse cleats in 2022 so you can make the right choice. We've considered the cost, so you won't need to worry about our suggestions hurting your wallet. Affordability and quality are our top priorities. We've jotted down a helpful buying guide below if you're just getting started and have no idea what you're supposed to be looking for. By doing so, you will be equipped with the knowledge and information you need to make a wise decision. Cleats are a very important part of your lacrosse game, but they shouldn't break your wallet. So, let's cut to the chase and get right to it. | Compare The Best Men's Lacrosse Cleats Of 2022 New Balance Men’s Lacrosse Shoe – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made out of 100% synthetic material Come with a rubber sole and outsole for extra grip Designed with a bootie construction style There are no sew-overlays on the surface of the cleats You can never go wrong with a New Balance lacrosse shoe. This is why this product sits on the top of our list today. The New Balance Men’s Freezelx 2.0 shoe features a sporty style that’s always ready for action on the Lacrosse pitch. It is also cool enough to be worn wherever life takes you. All you need to do is grab a pair and get moving! CHECK ON AMAZON Under Armour Men’s Lacrosse Shoe – High Quality 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The cleats are made out of high-quality textile and synthetic materials Have a synthetic sole for added support For extra stability and support, they have a lightweight woven upper with TPU coated yarns Toe box and heel units are coated with TPU to provide enhanced durability and protection The SuperFoam insole provides maximum cushioning and comfort With the combination of BZM and TPU, the speed plate is extremely lightweight and strong For zonal stability and support, the Under Armour Men’s Lacrosse shoes feature a woven upper that provides a lightweight, sock-like fit and woven-in TPU, coated yarns. The booties are full-length and feature a molded ankle collar for extra support and a snug, comfortable fit. For enhanced durability and protection, the heel unit and toe box are lined with TPU. With high rebound SuperFoam insoles, you can enjoy maximum comfort and shock absorption. BZM and TPU combine to create an ultralight speed plate that is extremely stable and strong. The blades and conical studs are strategically placed to enhance braking ability, multidirectional movement, and razor-sharp cuts. With secondary cleats, you’re able to run faster while making razor-sharp cuts. CHECK ON AMAZON Adidas Men’s Adizero Football Shoe – Perfect for Beginners 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Designed with imported materials Have a synthetic sole and outsole The shaft measures approximately low-top from the arch, giving added grip and support This pair of football cleats will allow you to leave your opponents in the dust. Soft textile uppers combined with the tongue and heel pull on the Adidas Men’s Adizero shoes allow easy entry and ensure a comfortable fit. With cleated outsoles, you’ll have increased grip while stopping and turning. Also, these cleats have a low-profile design that makes them lightweight so you get to enjoy fast-paced play without any noticeable fatigue. CHECK ON AMAZON ASICS Men’s Lacrosse Shoe – Most Lightweight 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Designed with 100% synthetic material and mesh Come with a rubber sole for a firm grip Have a synthetic leather and mesh upper design Lightweight, breathable, and comfortable cleats that provide better performance and fit They are built for multi-functional use With the Gel Cushioning System and Trusstic System, ASICS Men’s GEL-Prevail Mid Lacrosse Shoes take the game to the next level. These mid-profile cleats are made with synthetic leather and mesh uppers for lightweight, breathable performance. They are also multi-purpose due to their exceptional grip and stability that makes them suitable for use in all field conditions. CHECK ON AMAZON Niber Turf Cleats – Most Versatile 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has a rubber sole A lightweight, breathable athletic cleats for men that are made with polyurethane and mesh With an anti-slip rubber outsole and molded design, these shoes offer great grip and lightweight comfort This shoe has a large surface to kick and an asymmetrical lacing system The mesh inside the vest allows for a breathable and comfortable feeling The flexible ground outsole allows players to move with high-speed control and stability on a variety of surfaces, including dry grass (natural grass) and synthetic grass (long blades of synthetic fiber) The Niber Men’s Boys Turf cleats are the premium addition to your gameplay that you’ve been searching for. With their premium DP combination upper, these cleats have rotational traction and are suitable for high-intensity activities. They can also be used on artificial surfaces. The lightweight breathable insole offers low-profile cushioning with hygroscopic properties to absorb sweat and prevent the buildup of odors. CHECK ON AMAZON Reebok Men’s Lacrosse Shoe – Most Supportive 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Designed with 100% synthetic leather and synthetic sole Come with an inner bootie made of neoprene and jersey which provides a snug, supportive fit Have an adjustable TPU ankle protective device that allows you to move your foot with ease while protecting your ankles The Reebok Pump Bulldodge III M3 lacrosse cleats offer you superior support regardless of your position on the field. The pump technology combined with synthetic uppers provides a customized fit that requires a little breaking in. Featuring a mesh collar liner and PlayDry, along with an antimicrobial dual-density footbed, your feet will remain cool and odor-free all day. The ankle protective gear offers excellent protection and is also adjustable so it does not cause any discomfort during movement. You will also love the molded TPU plate that ensures you get to enjoy lightweight traction on the field. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Men's Lacrosse Cleats Buying Guide Please take the time to carefully read this guide. It will help you gain an understanding of what you should be looking for when buying lacrosse cleats if you're new to the sport. Here are four simple questions to ask yourself. Answering these questions can help you find a pair of lacrosse cleats that are the best fit for your needs. What Size Cleats Do You Need? To play lacrosse, you must move a lot. You need footwear that fits perfectly for the game. Your performance and even your physical health could be severely affected if they don't. Consider this when choosing your size. There should be no excessive tightness or looseness in your footwear. Both of these conditions can cause discomfort and blisters. The rule of thumb is to leave a gap of at least half an inch between the top of your lacrosse cleats and your large toe, as you would normally do with running shoes. What Kind of Cleats Do You Need? Lacrosse has an impact on the body as it is a highly impactful sport. Ideally, your cleats should give you sufficient ankle support to prevent injuries from occurring, as that can stop you from playing the sport. Depending on your preference, you can either choose a high, mid, or low top cleat. High top cleats The majority of high-top lacrosse cleats are designed to protect the ankle. Providing stability to your ankle, the laces and heel of the shoes extend well over the top of the foot and under the calf. The best lacrosse cleats for chronic ankle sprains are high tops. Mid cleats Lax cleats may also be purchased in mid-height if that is your preference. Unlike high cleats, these cleats come just above your ankle, giving you some support but not as much as the wraparound protection provided by high cleats. Low cleats If you prefer soccer cleats or have no ankle problems, opt for low lacrosse cleats. Low-cleat shoes are lightweight and flexible and end up reducing the onset of ankle pain. Of course, the type of lacrosse cleats you choose is completely up to you. Should You Opt For Lightweight and Water Resistant Lacrosse Cleat Materials? The best lacrosse cleats are lightweight and streamlined to your taste. Cleats like those you used to find in high school are out of style, whereas you can find many stylish options in the market today. Also, lacrosse-specific cleats are now lighter and more responsive than ever. Playing at the highest pace is easier with the latest version of lacrosse-specific cleats. We all know that there will be rain and mud during lacrosse season, and maybe even snow in some places! Water and snow will soak through the material of your shoes, so make sure the lacrosse cleats you purchase are water-resistant. It is extremely frustrating to play an entire game in soggy lacrosse cleats. Lacrosse cleats made for both boys and girls are generally made with synthetic materials for your feet to stay warm and dry. When you purchase new lacrosse cleats that are made with water-resistant materials, make sure that you are not sacrificing speed. Lacrosse cleats that are too heavy can take away your speed and agility on the field! Materials such as leather and synthetics are lightweight. Each of these material forms offers support without stiffness, is water-resistant, and is breathable. That is why these materials should be preferred. Padded foam and other materials like to hold water, so you get that awful "squishy" feeling throughout the game. Hence, you should avoid these materials to ensure your shoes can survive rainy/wet conditions with ease. What Is Your Budget? We would all love to purchase the best that money can buy. Sadly, this isn't always possible. As you shop for cleats, set yourself a budget. The best way to get an idea of the general price range of the most popular cleats is to browse a few websites or to go through our list of the best men's lacrosse cleats this year. However, do not be too strict about it. You will be able to get the best fit if you give yourself a bit of breathing space instead of settling for less. Having a bit of flexibility doesn't mean not having a limit. It doesn't always follow that more expensive equals better cleats, as we've been saying all along. Your bank account will thank you too! A budget will limit your options, but it results in a more streamlined search. Now you can pick from a smaller selection of lacrosse cleats based on the cut, length, and turf you'll play on. Setting a budget gives you a place to start, as it immediately filters out all the options that are too expensive to consider. The next step will be to look at the lacrosse cleats themselves and decide what type of product you need. Our list of products aims to help you find an ideal fit, considering both price and features. We have selected a few products we believe are the best for general use and regular play. Now you can select the best lacrosse cleats according to your needs. | |||||||||||||||||||
64 | 63 | https://www.si.com/review/best-phone-holder-for-running/ | A lot of people bring their phone with them whenever they go out on runs. They use their phone for music, for tracking progress, or for safety. Having a good running armband can help them run more freely. With armbands, they can go for miles without having to worry about losing their grip on their gadget. Below, we’ve listed the best running armbands that can help make your runs more enjoyable. Read on to find out more about the best running arm bands in 2021. | Best Running Arm Band VUP Running Armband for iPhone – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This easy-to-clean armband is stretchable and fits most arms, with its large (12”-16”) and small (8”-12”) arm slots. It’s designed to enable you to have easy and complete access to your smartphone, even while you’re doing intense workouts. PROS Washable skin-gentle material 360-degree rotatable view Includes key and cord holder Comes in 3 colors CONS May not work well with PopSockets CHECK ON AMAZON E Tronic Edge Phone Armband Sleeve – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Inside its pocket are two headphone holes that won’t affect the armband’s appearance. It is sweat-resistant and waterproof. PROS Reflective logo for added visibility Unisex design Skin-friendly material—no chafing CONS Covers phone screen CHECK ON AMAZON Revere Sport Waterproof Running Armband – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Its advanced Lycra material lets your skin breathe without you having to worry about it slipping. This water-resistant phone case has a larger key pocket and a cash/card pocket. PROS Has night reflector strips Comes with a lifetime warranty Fits arms from 9” to 17” (with extender) CONS May be sensitive to bumps CHECK ON AMAZON TRIBE Water Resistant Cell Phone Armband – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Designed to accommodate most major cell phones and phone cases, this armband allows for full touchscreen functionality with a comfortable, abrasion-free fit. Made with a stretchy and plush Lycra band with a brushed PU finish, this running armband is durable and water resistant, meaning you can enjoy worry-free musical runs in any weather conditions. The area around the phone slot features a highly visible reflective strip for extra safety in low light conditions. A few bonus features include a key storage pocket and tangle-free headphone cord holder. It’s like a Swiss army knife in the form of a running armband for your phone! CHECK ON AMAZON Lovphone Armband 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Featuring a fully enclosed “window” access design, this armband is water resistant, reflective, and designed to flex and stretch without losing its shape. A comfortable neoprene sleeve and adjustable Velcro strap offer a secure and flexible support for most mobile phone sizes. The clear, protective screen panel offers full touchscreen access, and the band offers a place to hold a spare key and a sleeve for headphone cords. Additionally, there’s an extra slot behind the phone holder for storing credit cards and some spare cash, meaning you can leave the house and go for a run with all the essentials you might need without having to fill pockets or clutter your hands. CHECK ON AMAZON Newppon Running Armband 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This armband has stretchy bands to keep your phone safe and secure. The non-slip silicone particles will keep your phone in place without having to take it out of its protective case. The Newppon Running Armband is easy to put on and take off, and the flap can be used to secure any excess headphone cords. PROS Five color options Lightweight breathable fabric CONS Fits 8” to 16” arms CHECK ON AMAZON Yunyilan Universal Running Armband 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This armband is made of 92% polyester and 8% spandex, which makes it quick-drying and gives you the flexibility to fit on any arm size. The discrete design is perfect for any active lifestyle. The Yunyilan Universal Running Armband will fit any phone from 3.5” to 6.5”. It features a key pocket and headphone holes to easily hide extra cables. PROS Fits over long sleeve shirts or on bare arms No need to readjust while working out CONS Only available in black CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Running Arm Bands Buying Guide The 21st century is an era of technology, and people are very into these new technologies. This technological era has made everything very easy and approachable. People of this era are as advanced as this era itself. They want everything perfect and on-time. Out of many technological creations, running armbands are one of the phenomenal inventions. If you’re looking to buy a high-quality running armband, you need to know some essential factors, such as types, price range, and other crucial things you should consider while purchasing the best armband. For this purpose, we’ve explained everything in detail below in this buying guide. What are the Things You Should Consider While Buying Running Armbands? Running armbands are beneficial inventions for people who love to workout. However, choosing a running armband is not that much easy. To choose the best running armband, one has to be very careful about some factors. The best running armbands are those who possess the qualities mentioned below. Quality of the Armband Armbands should be made up of very high-quality material to avoid rash or irritation. The material used in the armband making shouldn’t be cheap or else it will cause allergy. Size of the Armband There are different sizes of armbands available in the market. You should take the armband which fits you perfectly. The flexible straps can adjust the size, but you shouldn’t buy very loose ones. It won’t ensure your phone’s safety while running or working out. The Budget of the Armband The price range of running armbands differs with the quality. The cheap quality ones are cheaper, and the expensive ones are of good quality. The quality matters the most when it comes to the price range. The Durability of the Armband You should keep the durability factor in your mind, too, while buying a running armband. The durability matters a lot. If you use your running armband with care, its durability will be long-lasting. Comfort in the Armband The armband you buy for yourself should be very comfortable. It shouldn’t be irritable or uncomfortable. It should be comfortable as you are buying it for your comfort. It is of no use if it is not comfortable. Sweat Resistant It should be sweat resistant as you sweat a lot during a workout. It should be water-resistant too. If it is not water-resistant or sweat-resistant, then you may face difficulty while doing exercise wearing this type of armband. What is the Price Range of Running Armbands In the Market? The ranges of the running armband depend on their manufacturing material quality. Some are very cost-effective, and some are very expensive. You can easily get your running armband from anywhere. You can also order your running armband from amazon. However, for jogging lovers, running armbands are very important. All the runners should have armbands for their phones and accessories. The most important question is; can every runner afford it? Yes, anyone can afford running armbands as they are of different price ranges. The armbands can be super cheap or super expensive. It all depends on the quality of the running armband. The cheaper ones start from $7 to $10, and the expensive ones can go above $30. What are Different Types of Running Armbands? Nowadays, people are more enthusiastic about workout as they want to look fit in this modern era. They want to accessorize them fully but find it challenging to run with a bag pack. In these situations, the best pick for such people is armbands. Some of the best running armband types are: Grantwood Technology Tune band: It is the all-time best running armband. It is best for clumsy people who most likely drop their phones during every run. Sprigs Armband: Some runners love to listen to music while running. Sprigs armband is a perfect choice for them. Tune Belt Armband: For non-iPhone users, this armband is the best choice. Tribe Armband: This type of armband is best for mediocre people as it is very budget-friendly. Armpocket Armband: This armband is best for people who like to bring many things while jogging. This armband is very spacious as compared to other ones. It is also best for long-distance runners. What Is the Best Way to Use Running Armbands? The way to use your running armband for iPhone or any other phone is very easy. You have to follow some steps: Remove your phone-case first. Secondly, you have to place your phone in the running armband phone case. If you want to hear the music, you can line up the slot for earbud too. Adjust your armband according to your tri-cep size by tightening the straps. Make sure your armband is very comfortable. | |||||||||||||||||||
65 | 64 | https://www.si.com/review/electrolyte-pack/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
66 | 65 | https://www.si.com/review/best-resistance-band-set/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
67 | 66 | https://www.si.com/review/goalkeeper-gloves/ | Good goalkeeper gloves are an integral part of being a successful goalkeeper. The wrong fit can cause the ball to escape your grasp completely. Not the best look when you’re in between the sticks! When playing any sport, proper protective equipment is important to prevent injuries. For example, a poor-quality pair of goalkeeping gloves are likely to lead to broken fingers or sprains. To ensure you or the person you are buying the gloves for remains fit; it is important to invest in a high-quality pair of goalkeeping gloves. To assist you in finding the best possible pair, we have compiled a list of the best goalkeeper gloves in 2022. Continue reading to see our top picks! | Compare The Best Goalkeeper Gloves Of 2022 Sportout Goalkeeping Glove – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features In addition, the Sportout Youth and Adult Goalie Gloves have two support straps so you can catch a ball with the utmost confidence that your wrists are protected from injury. The straps consist of elastic and velcro for easy attachment. These lightweight gloves are made from EVA and latex and will survive the toughest of saves. The Sportout Youth & Adult Goalie Goalkeeping Gloves come in three colors and six sizes. The latex grip is efficient and will never let you down. A new and improved finger backbone design offers better protection to prevent hyper-extension injuries. PROS Great finger and wrist support Lightweight Available in many sizes Ambidextrous hand orientation CONS Non-removable finger saves CHECK ON AMAZON FitsT4 Goalie Goalkeeper Glove – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features In addition, the FitsT4 Goalie Goalkeeping Gloves boast two wrist straps that offer optimum wrist support without sacrificing flexibility. Made from Dumbex latex, these gloves will not split. They also allow your skin to breathe. Perfect for hot days on the soccer pitch! The FitsT4 Goalie Goalkeeper Gloves come in lime green or gold and sizes 6 to 11. They are made from anti-slip and wear-resistant latex on a foam layer for excellent grip and comfort. PROS Durable and breathable material Double straps Both designs available look stylish CONS No finger protector in the thumb CHECK ON AMAZON Blok-IT Goalie Glove – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The outer layer is sticky and water-resistant, meaning you can grip in even wet and slippery conditions. The wrist support is one thick and supportive strap, which is quick to attach and simple to undo. These good-quality gloves are ambidextrous and will look good on boys, girls, men, and women. Blok-IT Goalie Gloves are available in five colors and seven sizes. They are made from breathable and durable material, so you never have to worry about sweaty hands. Strong finger saves will prevent finger injuries time and again. Blok-IT Goalie Gloves are extremely comfortable to wear under any conditions. PROS Durable, lightweight material Strong finger saves Nice androgynous style, suitable for male and female players CONS It contains only one wrist strap CHECK ON AMAZON Malker Soccer Goalie Glove – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The natural, high-quality latex foam cushion inside the gloves will protect your hands from injury as well as strong finger saves. In addition, the double wrist safeguard will keep your muscles compact and reduce the chance of a strain injury. The Malker Soccer Gloves are available in five sizes and two designs. Malker Soccer Goalie Gloves will make you stand out from the crowd with their bright, eye-catching designs. Not only do they look great, but they are also extremely comfortable to wear. Thanks to a large palm surface and a curved design, these gloves make it almost impossible to drop the ball. PROS Vibrant looking design Extremely comfortable gloves Double wrist strap Strong finger saves CONS Not very breathable material and may cause you to sweat CHECK ON AMAZON K-LO Sports Fingersave Goalkeeper Glove 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The outer material is hard-wearing and water-resistant, meaning these gloves can withstand the harshest outdoor games. The finger saves are sturdy and will protect your fingers from bending back too far. This product is sticky with a great grip straight out of the box. K-LO Sports Fingersave Goalkeeper Gloves come in seven sizes and are available in one design. These comfortable gloves are ambidextrous and flexible whilst offering great protection. PROS Comfortable design Water-resistant outer layer A large amount of padding whilst remaining flexible CONS Only available in one color. However, the design looks attractive and will match most kits CHECK ON AMAZON Vizari Junior Keeper Glove 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features In addition, your wrist will feel well protected and supported with the Vizari Keeper Glove’s EVA wristband with elastic closure. This glove is great for playing a casual game with friends or to wear whilst training. The Vizari Junior Glove comes in one masculine-looking design in blue, white, and black. The Duplatex latex foam palm will protect your palms from the hardest hitting ball. These gloves also have added protection on the back of the hand with a fully embossed EVA backhand. PROS Comfortable and flexible Great looking gloves for teenage boys Good value for money CONS Not very much finger support Thinner padding CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Goalkeeper Gloves Buying Guide When you picture your perfect pair of goalkeeper gloves, you may have a specific design in mind. However, we understand that our best gloves in 2021 may not match precisely what you envisioned. If you want to find your perfect gloves, you will need to learn a thing or two about how to find a good pair of gloves, as well as what features are available. Things to Consider When Buying Goalkeeper Gloves Construction Goalkeeper gloves consist of four different parts. Each part has a particular role. Backhand The backhand contains a large amount of padding to help protect the hand when punching the ball. However, the quality of the padding varies, depending on the price. For example, cheaper gloves may have only one layer of foam padding, whereas more expensive and better quality products are often protected with latex. Fingers The most important part of a goalkeeper's hands is their fingers. Fingers are a goalkeeper's best form of defense, as they allow for holding onto the ball. Gloves with finger saves provide the much-needed protection you will need for your fingers when playing. Finger saves are like spines in the finger of the glove, which tighten when force is applied. Some goalkeepers prefer stiffer finger gloves because they offer more control and others prefer a looser fit to allow for better finger flexibility. To decide what kind of fit suits you best, it is best that you go to a store to try a few gloves on. Alternatively, you could buy several goalkeeping gloves a long time before you need them to try out different fits and return the ones you do not want. Palm The type of palm features you look for in your goalkeeping gloves should depend on what you will be using them for. For example, smooth palms will help you catch the ball more easily because they have a clinging agent that will help you cling onto crosses and shots. Opt for a pair of goalkeeping gloves to practice in if you are looking for a pair with dimpled palms. Although dimpled palms do not grip as well as smooth palms, they are much more durable and will last a long time. If you need to change your gloves for training regularly, it will cost you a lot of money. Closure The closure secures the glove to your hand and comes in three types: v-notch, hook and loop, and bandage. If you suffer from sweating hands when playing soccer, you should opt for goalkeeping gloves with a v- notch closure. These closures allow ventilation which will cause you to sweat less and feel more comfortable throughout the game. Hook and loop closures are predominantly made from elastic and have an adjustable strap that can be tightened or loosened. Rather than having a real advantage, these straps simply mean that a product will be suitable for a wider range of people. However, that may be an advantage to teenagers who are still growing. Ideally, you should look for a pair of gloves with double wrist support. One can be either of the above closures, and the other should be a bandage closure. Bandage closures wrap around your wrist, contracting the muscles, just as a regular bandage would. This will reduce the risk of spraining a wrist. Type of glove There are three types of goalkeeping gloves. Have a plan of what type of glove you are looking for before you shop. The three types are match, training, and weather. Match Although match gloves don’t last as long as other types of gloves, they are far superior. They are designed to be used in competitive games for both high schoolers and adults alike. Match goalkeeping gloves are created using quality latex to guard fingers fully. They also feature maximum gripping technology - normally a smooth palm with a good quality clinging agent. Training Training gloves do not grip as well as match gloves, but they far outweigh them in terms of durability. These gloves should not be used for matches. They can be used by elite players and beginner players alike. Weather Weather gloves are made especially for extreme weather to protect the player’s hands from the storm. It is only recommended that you use these in extreme weather. These gloves would make you feel too warm in normal weather conditions. A great benefit of using weather gloves is they have specially made latex palms that get stickier when wet. Cut (or fit) The cut or fit is the description of the way the palm of the glove is made. The cuts/fits available include flat, rolled/gunn, negative, and hybrid. Flat Flat gloves are probably what you imagine when you think of a goalkeeper glove. They are the most traditional cut-off gloves, with one piece of foam material creating the palm. The fit of a flat glove is slightly loose in hand, allowing more movement. Rolled/Gunn Rolled or gunn gloves have a tighter fit, created by“rolled” around palm material that is stitched at the back of the fingers. Negative Choose a negative cut if you have slender fingers, as this cut will give you more control. In addition, this cut provides the snuggest fit of all the gloves. It has the fingers sewn from the inside. Hybrid Hybrid cuts are a combination of rolled/gunn and negative cuts, good for slim hands in general. Customer Reviews When buying goalkeeper gloves, it is always a good idea to check out customer reviews before making your purchase. This is the best way to figure out whether the gloves will fit right and if they’ll stand the test of time. Nobody wants their gloves to fall apart midway through a match! You should also leave your own feedback to help other buyers in the future. Goalkeeper Gloves Price Range Typically, the most popular goalkeeper gloves are going to cost somewhere between $40-$70. However, if you have a limited budget, you can find some gloves for around $20, sometimes even less. On the other hand, if you want a high-tech pair of goalkeeper gloves, you can easily spend over $100, but you’ll only need to spend this much if you play professionally. How We Choose Our Goalkeeper Gloves When choosing the goalkeeper gloves for our list of recommendations, we considered various factors before deciding. Each glove had to meet our high standards for material, cut, durability, value for money, and customer satisfaction. We would not include goalkeeper gloves that we would not use on the pitch ourselves. Rest assured, all of our suggestions will serve you well between the sticks. | |||||||||||||||||||
68 | 67 | https://www.si.com/review/best-lacrosse-stick/ | Lacrosse is a sport that combines discipline, strategy, and teamwork to produce something spectacular. But to get the best out of your experience in the game, you need to get equipped. One of the most important tools to have while playing this game is the lacrosse stick. With dozens of companies out there competing for the patronage of customers, there is a wide array of options to choose from. All you need to play is a lacrosse stick with a meshed head. Young players and beginners do not always have to get the best equipment to be able to play the game. More often than not, the cost of the items is more than what the player needs. In this guide, we have taken out time to select the best lacrosse sticks in 2022. Keep reading to find out which ones made our list and what features they have to offer. | Best Lacrosse Stick STX Lacrosse Stallion Stick – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The STX lacrosse stick helps boost fundamental skills while also having some advanced features Has an STX men’s Stallion U550 head with soft mesh stringing Complete with the unique STX 6000 series alloy handle that has tonal memory marker graphics Has soft mesh stringing and easy ball control for even entry-level players Ideal for a face-off, attack, defense, and midfield players This unique and beautiful lacrosse stick by STX will help improve your attacking game, especially if you are an intermediate player. The Stallion 200 got designed to give you a forgiving response and an all-around rewarding experience. If you are starting in the game of lacrosse, this lacrosse stick is a must-have. The stick’s shaft is made of an alloy which helps boost its durability and strength, allowing you to catch the ball while boosting your level of ball control. It also adheres to the requirements and rules set by NFHS and NCAA. CHECK ON AMAZON Franklin Sports Mini Pro Style Venom Lacrosse Stick – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Ideal for beginners and advanced players alike It comes with a bright blue lacrosse ball and head for visibility and boosting hand-eye coordination as well as motor skills It comes with pro-style netting, which helps boost learning and gives a more forgiving response for every move during practice The thinner ABS shaft allows for easier stick handling as a newbie The package comes with one lacrosse ball and a stick to match The Franklin Sports Youth 34” Mini Pro style lacrosse stick is ideal for young athletes who are still learning the ropes in the game of lacrosse. If you are someone who fancies function, style, and quality. Take your game up a notch with this outstanding stick that has a sturdy build and unique ergonomics. Several features make this lacrosse stick stand out from the crowd. It comes with a bright fluorescent light which helps boost hand coordination as well as fine motor skills. The lacrosse stick gives your game a sense of excitement and fun with its unique graphic wrap. Also, the shaft is thinner, thus allowing easier stick handling for newbies. However, it is not the best stick for high school or college play and competitive gaming. CHECK ON AMAZON CAKLOR Lacrosse Stick – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features At 0.45 kilograms, this lacrosse stick is lightweight and easy to carry around The lacrosse stick’s head is made of soft materials which give it a unique and forgiving response The design and build makes it easy for ball control and catching for all categories of players Compact, durable, and aesthetically appealing The aluminum shaft is perfect for players looking to give their game a little boost Conforms to NFHS and NCAA rules The CAKLOR lacrosse stick has a mesh head crafted from top-quality materials which give it the enduring build it requires. The professionally stung mesh is adjustable to suit your personal preferences. If you are new to the lacrosse world, this is the ideal stick for you! Several features qualify this lacrosse stick to be on our list. The shaft is durable and has an eye-catching starry design on it. It offers great ball control for new players and conforms to NFHS and NCAA rules. This lacrosse stick currently ranks as one of the most sought-after in the market. CHECK ON AMAZON Warrior mako Jr. Youth Lacrosse Stick – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This stick has features that make it the ideal version for youth players Its short length of 37 ½ inches makes it compact and easy to carry around especially for young players The stick is durable and of quality, build making it perfect for rigorous and long-term use If you are looking for a scaled-down variant of your regular lacrosse stick for younger players in the family, this is the perfect option for you. The lacrosse stick is specifically designed for players who may not be ready to handle adult sticks. The lacrosse stick measures 37 ½ inches in length, making it the perfect choice for smaller persons. It also features a thinner handle that will fit comfortably in smaller hands for easy ball control and catching. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Lacrosse Sticks Buying Guide Whether you are a newbie or an expert at lacrosse, getting a lacrosse stick can be challenging. There are several shaft and head combinations you can choose from, which might seem like a good thing but having so many options to choose from can get confusing especially if you don't have the right knowledge to pick the best lacrosse stick. This is why we have compiled some points that can help you simplify the search process. What Are the Different Types of Lacrosse Sticks? Here is a breakdown of the types of lacrosse sticks on the market: Midfield/Attacker lacrosse stick Midfielders and attackers need to be accurate and fast, and this is why they need a short and lightweight stick. But note that there are certain regulations which you have to follow. For instance, the least length required by league rules is 40 inches. Goalie/Defenseman lacrosse stick Defensive players often have a wide array of options when choosing a shaft. Some prefer to use a standard 40-inch length, while others will want a stick that is up to 72 inches long. The core reason for the extended length is that it gives the defenders more effectiveness required for knocking the ball from the opponent's pocket. Note that the longer the stick, the less the accuracy and power. The good thing is that it simplifies pass interception. Complete lacrosse sticks These types of sticks are for players who are just starting out in the game. Large lacrosse companies make lacrosse sticks with a head, shaft, and mesh at an affordable price. These sticks are made using aluminum more often than not, but you can find alternatives made using stronger materials. Female sticks Female lacrosse sticks usually measure between 35 and 43 inches and have a better grip. Like the one made for men, positioning determines the length and style of the stick. Tips for Choosing a Lacrosse Stick Here are a few important things you should remember before you buy your next lacrosse stick: Lacrosse stick material Lacrosse sticks today are made of four distinct materials with each one having its distinct features. The materials include aluminum, titanium, scandium, and composite. Aluminum lacrosse sticks are the more common ones out there as they are best suited for learners and are lightweight yet durable. Scandium possesses the most reliable strength-to-weight ratio, making it one of the most durable materials out there. It ranks as the top choice for professionals and advanced players. Another notable material used in lacrosse sticks is titanium, similar to scandium in terms of durability and weight. This material can withstand the rigorous demands of the field play. The final choice is composite lacrosse sticks made of high-grade carbon fiber. They are perfect for intermediate attacking players because of their strength, agility, and natural grip. Grip These days, you will find grips that come in a texture embedded into the shaft material. You may find sandpaper grips, rubberized grips, or no grip if that is your choice. Most players will want to have a feel of things for themselves as too much grip may hamper hand movement. Shape The shape deals with the stick’s circumference whether it is concave, octagonal, or a combination of different configurations, with each one being more aggressive than the other. Personal preference will determine what you go for in this regard. Some players prefer extra ridges to give them more control, while some will go for a rounded shaft. Shape and grip work together when choosing the right stick. Cost While this should not be the only factor to consider, it usually is the most important one. There are lacrosse sticks made for different categories of people. Your choice of the stick will depend on what you intend to use it for. An expert player shouldn’t be looking to buy a lower-end lacrosse stick. However, an expensive option doesn’t always mean that it is the most effective. Always do your research for reviews and opinions of previous buyers before you decide which one to buy. What Are the Main Parts of a Lacrosse Stick There are two components of the stick you should consider: Lacrosse shaft The shaft is a long rod that is often referred to as the handle held by the player. Most metal alloy shafts are lighter and stronger. Note that different positions need different length sticks depending on your choice. Lacrosse head This refers to the top of the stick, which is used to catch and throw the ball. These heads are usually unstrung or strung and come in different materials, colors and designs. Benefits of Playing Lacrosse There are several reasons why you should get yourself a stick and start playing lacrosse. Here are some of them: Cardiovascular endurance Lacrosse is a game that requires the players to go about the field, which is 60 yards wide and 110 yards long. It suffices to say that a lot of physical effort is required while playing the game. The more you engage in this game, the more likely you will endure rigorous activities. An opportunity to create bonds Joining a lacrosse team is a platform to get to know new people while improving your social interaction. The game requires players to work together and understand each other which is the core of human relationships. An opportunity to learn discipline When you join a team and commit yourself to learning the craft, you will be able to learn some powerful habits. If you want to succeed in this game, you need to invest a lot of energy in practicing to get reasonable success. You will learn to eat healthily, rest, and correct failures and mistakes which are needed. Final Thoughts There you have it! The very best lacrosse sticks out there and how to make the most of them. We've designed this in-depth buying guide after reading thousands of online reviews from other customers and narrowing down the options based on their design, functionality, durability, and price. We believe you can never go wrong following the tips outlined here! | |||||||||||||||||||
69 | 68 | https://www.si.com/review/best-hiking-insole/ | It’s not always possible to get perfect-fitting shoes for hiking and running. However, choosing the right pair of insoles helps promote proper foot movement, can help relieve discomfort, and lets you enjoy your time on the trail even more. Here are some of the top hiking and running insoles in 2022 that’ll help keep your feet happy no matter where you are. | Best Hiking Insole Envelop Gel Insoles – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Made with a dual-layer of gel cushioning, the Envelop Gel Insoles provide the right amount of cushioning and support where needed. Not to mention that regardless of your shoe type, they can be easily trimmed to fit. PROS Price is easy on the wallet Work with high, low or neutral arches Does well at retaining its shape over time CONS Not the best if you need a lot of arch support CHECK ON AMAZON Superfeet Women’s Trailblazer Comfort Insole – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Superfeet Trailblazers are a great choice for adding extra comfort to your hiking boots. They’re designed with a carbon fiber stabilizer and dual comfort foam to reduce fatigue and increase stability while on rough terrain. PROS Designed to not shift in your boots Moisture Wick helps control bad odors Made specifically for women’s feet CONS A little pricey CHECK ON AMAZON STASOLE Anti-Fatigue Insole – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Too much shock absorption can actually make trail running and hiking more difficult. These Stasole Insoles have just the right combination of shock-absorbing gel and high-rebound foam to reduce fatigue while keeping you comfortable on the trail. PROS Promotes a neutral foot motion Adjusts well to all arch types Ideal for boots and athletic shoes CONS Heel area is thick and may not fit in all shoes CHECK ON AMAZON MileStep Massaging Gel Insole – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The MileStep Insoles are designed for maximum comfort. The silicone pads and textured design help massage your foot whether you’re hiking, running, or just standing to look at the view. PROS Great value Easy to trim to fit your shoe Antibacterial fabric helps keep odors down CONS Not a lot of arch support CHECK ON AMAZON Dr. Scholl’s Heavy Duty Support Pain Relief Orthotic 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Designed for men over 200 pounds, these hiking insoles are available in sizes eight through fourteen. They use Arch Guard and Shock Guard technology to reduce impact and distribute weight. PROS Dr. Scholl’s HEAVY DUTY SUPPORT Pain Relief Orthotics helps reduce lower back pain Can accommodate sneakers and work boots Long-lasting durability Easy to insert CONS Less cushion at the front No odor-fighting capability CHECK ON AMAZON Superfeet GREEN Insole 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon These unisex hiking insoles are designed for high arch support. A stabilizer cap at the base supports the heel and provides stability to the high-density foam layer. PROS The Superfeet GREEN Insoles are made for long-lasting comfort Effectively reduce lower back pain Made to fill the entire shoe Wide heel cup CONS Sizes run a little small CHECK ON AMAZON Superfeet Trailblazer Comfort Insole 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Designed specifically for hiking footwear, these insoles have a deep heel cup that prevents slippage. Heel Impact Technology provides a balanced impact on ascents and descents. PROS Superfeet Trailblazer Comfort Insoles maintain their shape well Include moisture wick with odor control Thick cushioning Help to relieve leg and foot pain CONS Not made for running shoes CHECK ON AMAZON | Hiking Insoles Buying Guide Hiking is a very common leisure activity, and as any long-distance walker knows, it can be hard on your feet. Wearing your hiking boots for too long, especially on uneven terrain, can result in you having foot aches, blisters, or hotspots which can be extremely uncomfortable and painful, and can ruin your entire hiking experience. So it follows that comfortable footwear is a necessity to make the hiking experience as enjoyable as it should be. What are hiking insoles? Hiking Insoles are materials that fit inside your hiking shoes and provide stability and support for the arches of your feet. Hiking Insoles function like the shock-absorber in a vehicle, they absorb the shock that comes from walking and reduce the impact on your feet. Hiking Insoles are subtle. They fit on the inside of your shoe without altering it in any way. So it increases support without compromising aesthetics. Why should I get hiking insoles? Long-distance walking, for those that engage in it, is supposed to be a pleasurable experience. And having on the correct footwear is necessary for an optimal experience. With Hiking Insoles, due to the extra comfort and support it provides, the risk of injury to your feet, such as foot aches, blisters, and hotspots, is minimized. And with the extra stability it offers, the risk of over-pronation is reduced as it helps you maintain a natural walking posture even when moving over uneven terrain. Also, for people with footwear fit problems, such as heel slippage, foot elongation, and low or collapsed arches, insoles may help. What factors should I consider before getting hiking insoles? Deciding what insole works best for every scenario can be a tricky prospect. And with so many of those on the market, it is important that you know what features to look out for, those characteristics that make one insole better for you than the others. Factors such as shock absorption, the depth of the heel cups, the fitting, and durability are important, and determine how comfortable and stable your shoes are. Earlier, we gave you a list of the best Hiking Insoles on the market, now, we will guide you on making the right choice for you. Comfort insoles vs sport insoles Hiking insoles fall into two categories: comfort insoles and sports insoles. The comfort insoles are typically made of foam or gel, are very comfortable, and have lower profiles. They are appropriate for less strenuous activities. If what you want is more support and stability under more strenuous conditions, sport or support insoles are better for you. These are made from more rigid materials and offer better stability. They are suited to feet that need more structural support than cushioning. And as such, are more appropriate for hikers that travel across more challenging terrains for prolonged periods. Supportive insoles are best for people with the following conditions: Structural misalignment can cause foot pain, and discomfort in the ankles, knees, hip, back, neck or head. Those who have Plantar fasciitis. Supination or over-pronation as the extra support reduces the tendency for the feet to either supinate or overpronate when walking or running. Shock-absorption The ability to cushion impact is one of the most important properties of an insole. Many insoles have shock absorption technology that converts impacts into kinetic energy and minimizes discomfort or pain on impact. Fit The insoles should be able to fit inside your shoes and leave enough space for your foot. You should look for appropriately sized insoles. Some insoles can be trimmed to get a better fit. Insole profile Your choice for an insole profile should depend on the shape of your arches and the support you’re after. Low Profile insoles are for feet that require only little support. So if you have very low arches, this is the best option for you. Medium profile insoles are ideal for most foot types, while high profile insoles are best for feet that need an extra arch and heel support, or those that have a tendency to overpronate. Insole volume Insoles come in different volumes, so, they take up different amounts of space inside your footwear. For most insoles, the volume is correlated to the arch shape that the insole is designed to fit. Insoles can be high volume, low volume, or medium volume. High-volume insoles are best suited for high-volume shoes such as hiking boots, ski boots, and running shoes. Typically, they work best with high arches. Medium volume insoles are suited to average volume shoes like casual shoes and some athletic shoes. They are more versatile where arch profiles are concerned. While low volume insoles work better for low volume shoes and function optimally for people with very low arches. Material Insoles can be made with many different materials - Air, Foam, and Gel insoles are the most common, and each of these has different characteristics and advantages. Foam insoles are made from memory foam that deforms and takes the shape of your feet. These are very comfortable, light, and inexpensive but not as durable as the air or gel options and have poor breathability. Air insoles contain pressurized air bubbles trapped in foam. It is very comfortable, breathable, and resists compression better than foam insoles. They are the most expensive of the 3 options. Gel insoles contain liquid gel bubbles within the foam and are very resistant to compression. Although they are a comfortable option, they are heavy and so, are great if you’re already wearing heavy shoes. How much do hiking insoles cost? You can purchase a hiking insole for as little as $11, or as much as $50 depending on the material, thickness, and other factors. | |||||||||||||||||||
70 | 69 | https://www.si.com/review/bocce-ball-set/ | Bocce was first introduced in 1902. The sport has undergone tremendous change, and today almost everyone is learning how to play. Bocce balls come in varying construction designs depending on the user's skill level; a set you may use in your backyard may be different than those used in official bocce tournaments. Although there are some slight differences between bocce sets, that shouldn't stop you from learning how to play this fun game. To help you out, we've rounded up the top 7 bocce sets in 2022 on the market and included a handy buying guide so you can buy the best set for your skill level. | The Best Bocce Ball Set Model Of 2022 In Detail Amazon Basics Bocce Ball Set – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Polyresin cover material makes them quite durable 100mm ball diameter gives beginners more control when holding the ball The balls are lighter than some others, which can improve your accuracy To kick off our review, we have this excellent bocce ball set from Amazon Basics. Each ball has a diameter of 100mm and has a polyresin coating, which is known to last longer than alternative coatings because of its high strength. If you need a ball for intense training or for loads of play, this one will withstand the friction. Moreover, these balls are lighter to give the users more control which is essential to help maintain accuracy while aiming. If you are still learning how to hold the ball well, this will be the best for your training. CHECK ON AMAZON Gosport’s Backyard Bocce Set – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The resin withstands intense friction to last longer 90mm diameter and 1lb 11oz weight is good for beginners The balls come in four colors with two etching patterns If you are looking for suitable bocce set for beginners, this set might be what you are looking for. It’s an eight-ball set, each with a diameter of 90mm. Because of its slightly smaller diameter, beginners can hold them tightly and aim at the target with more accuracy. Furthermore, this ball set is made of high-quality resin that proves to be durable and long-lasting. Each ball weighs 1 pound 11 ounces, making them suitable for beginners 12 years and older. Also, this set can accommodate up to 8 players, making it perfect for playing with family or friends. CHECK ON AMAZON Play Store Bocce Ball Store – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Durable composite construction makes the balls durable Carrying bag is very convenient A set consisting of 3.5” and 1.5” diameters, to use at the beginner level and intermediate level If you are an adult who wants to try bocce, this ball set is highly recommended for you. It consists of 8 balls— 4 green and 4 red— that measure just about 90mm in diameter and one pallino for scoring. There are two square-patterned balls and two circle-patterned balls per color so you can play with 2-4 people. Additionally, these balls are made with a polyresin composite and come in a durable nylon carrying bag making it easy to bring the set anywhere you go. Weighing around 1.7 pounds each, these balls have enough weight for beginners to get comfortable with without sacrificing accuracy or ease of use. CHECK ON AMAZON Playaboule Patented Bocce Ball – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Complete bocce ball set with eight balls that light up Regulation-sized balls and pallino The balls are resistant to water, sand, and dirt These are standard US Bocce Federation size balls with 107mm diameters. Each ball weighs about 1.2 pounds, which is a bit less than average but is perfect for younger players. Plus, these balls have a unique light-up design that adds a bit of flair to the standard backyard game. Each ball has a built-in LED light that can stay lit or flash. Not only are the LED lights cool to see, but they allow you to play at night without trouble. This set has 8 balls in 4 colors and a regulation-sized pallino that also lights up. You don’t have to worry about the buttons for the lights to get in the way as they are recessed to avoid interfering with the ball’s roll. CHECK ON AMAZON Ropoda 90mm Bocce Ball Set 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 90mm ball diameter is great for beginners and experienced players alike It is a complete set of bocce balls that can accommodate up to 8 players Very durable resin material construction Next is this set of balls which has everything that you need to get started with the sport. It has a pallino, measuring rope, and 8 balls. These balls come in yellow, blue, red, and green and have one circle-etched ball and one square-etched ball per color, allowing for up to 8 players. To keep your set lasting a lifetime, the balls are made of a crack-resistant resin. Moreover, the set comes with a durable carrying bag that has comfy handles, so you can carry the bocce set wherever you go or store it nicely. Each ball measures 90mm and the pallino measures 40mm in diameter. CHECK ON AMAZON Franklin Sports Bocce Set 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Expertly constructed 40mm pallino scoring jack and 90mm balls All-weather-resistant and durable cover to allow for play anywhere, anytime The balls are designed to help improve your aiming This bocce ball set is recommended for casual players. The balls have a diameter of 90mm while the pallino has a diameter of 40mm. With a solid inner core and hard outer shell, these balls are resistant to wear and tear and can be used in grass, dirt, or sand without worry. The balls also have square and circle patterns deeply etched to allow up to 8 players to play at once. In addition to them being a good size and weight for casual players, the balls are designed to roll evenly and smoothly to eliminate unpredictable paths so you can work on your aim accuracy. CHECK ON AMAZON Rally And Roar Bocce Ball Set 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Perfect regulation dimensions for both professionals and beginners to use High-quality construction and traditional colors and etching Comes with a handy retractable measuring tape Are you looking for a ball set that you can use as a beginner or professional? The Rally and Roar bocce set comes with 8 balls of regulation 107mm diameters. The balls come in the traditional red and blue colors with circle and square etching patterns and are the proper regulation weight of 2.15lbs as well. This is the perfect set for those who want to learn bocce with the proper equipment. In addition to the high-quality, professional-level balls, the set comes with a 50mm pallino and retractable measuring tape. The set can be used in grass, on sand, or on a bocce court, so there are no limits to where you play— this really is the ideal set for official tournament play or friendly backyard competition. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Bocce Ball Sets Buying Guide One key to success in any sport is having the right equipment. If you're just starting out or if you've been playing in tournaments for years, you need a proper bocce set. Learning with the correct equipment is a must, especially if you want to compete at some point. If you begin to play with oddly-sized balls or improper weights, you risk compromising your gameplay— you may throw too hard or too soft, or maybe you don't know how to predict the ball's roll. As a beginner, it is imperative to learn the game the correct way so you have the ability to master your skills and get a true feeling for the sport. Any expert knows that regulation sizes are necessary for tournaments, but some slightly smaller or lighter sets are still great for beginners. In short, whichever level you are at bocce playing, there are things to consider to help guarantee that you purchase the right set. Do I have to say that a beginner ball has a different construction from a professional ball? With that said, let's look at the features to get the best bocce balls as a beginner, professional, or for kids. Which Is the Best Bocce Ball Design for Beginners? Beginners need balls that will give them easy time mastering skills such as proper aim. Also, it would be best if their set consists of various ball designs to help them transition into the intermediary level without incurring the cost of purchasing a new set. Let's look at the features of a beginner bocce ball. Diameter A beginner ball should have a recommended diameter of 90mm or 100mm. This diameter is smaller than the one used in tournament balls to give them a firmer grip which is essential to maintain accuracy. Weight Generally, balls for beginners should have a lighter weight of no more than 2lb. Do you want to know why? The lightweight design gives the user more control, enabling them to improve accuracy when aiming. Once new players are comfortable with their aim, moving up to a heavier ball shouldn't be too challenging. Which Features Should You Look For to Get the Best Bocce Ball Set for Kids? You are just introducing your child to a whole new game. Kids' hands are smaller than adults', and they don't have the same strength either. So which is the appropriate ball to help kids grow their talent? A diameter below 90mm A bocce ball for kids should not exceed the diameter of 90mm. This will fit better in their tiny hands and give them more control. 1lb weight You certainly are not looking for a ball that will leave the child's hands in pain. Kids need balls that are lighter in weight, and usually the recommended bocce ball weight for a kid is approximately 1lb. Outer design The ball's outer cover should at least have a bit of texture to offer a firm grip for children— it will prevent the ball from accidentally slipping out of the kid's hands. A smooth ball that adults use could be too slick for small children to hold onto. Moreover, balls that are brightly colored or have LEDs usually excite children and are likely to keep them focused. Which Is the Best Ball for Professionals? As a professional in bocce, you need a ball that will give you an easy time preparing for tournaments. The ideal ball for practicing for games should meet the US Bocce Federation standards. These features include: Diameter The recommended ball diameter for tournaments is 107mm. Anything less than this may not be allowed in official events. Weight Beginner and intermediate players have the luxury of using lighter balls which makes the game a bit easier. However, if you are preparing for tournaments, you should use a ball that weighs 2lbs as this is the regulation weight. What Are the Features of the Best Bocce Ball Sets for My Family Fun Activity? Similarly, you might be looking for balls to use with your family to have some fun. In this case, there is no specific weight or diameter that you need. Nonetheless, we will help you get a set that will leave your family looking forward to the next game time. Sizing Balls with smaller sizes make the game easier— and you definitely don't want your family to be left feeling like losers. Bocce balls have a diameter of 74mm to 107mm, so balls between 90mm and 100mm are best for most age and skill levels. However, if you are in the company of some experts, there will be no harm in getting balls of 107mm diameter. Weight Bocce balls can't be too light, but a set for the family still needs to accommodate children. Children's bocce balls weigh about 1lb each, but a family set with balls weighing between 1.2 and 1.6 pounds is still great for a variety of ages and skill levels. Which Is the Best Outer Material for a Bocce Ball? The outer cover of the bocce ball should withstand friction and be resistant to weather. Some of these materials include: Wood The first professional bocce balls were made of wood. They were quite long-lasting in comparison to the modern-day materials. However, you could not use these balls in some places like a beach or sandy ground. You can consider these types of balls if all you need is a set to pass the time with but nothing serious. Metallic The next upgrade from wooden balls was the metal construction. These balls have a hallowed design or were filled with light solid materials to prevent them from bouncing. This material will be the best if you need a ball that promises longevity while training. Double polymer This type of material feels like hard plastic. Such balls have more strength and easily withstand wear and tear. Therefore, you can use them on rough surfaces. However, this material is less common and is likely to be quite expensive. Resin Lastly, the resin material is more common and is generally used in tournament balls. Such balls are slightly heavy to give the player more control and they are very durable. Resin bocce balls are great to look out for as you search, and most of the sets we feature are made of resin. Final Words Bocce ball sets have different sizes, weights, and construction materials. Therefore, at the various stages of your bocce career, you will need balls of different sizes and weights. If you are purchasing the ball for your kid or for your family's fun activities, there are still things to consider. Fortunately, we have looked at all things you need to look for— you even have our review of the best bocce ball sets on the market. We hope that your search for the best bocce set is easy and that you enjoy your purchase. | |||||||||||||||||||
71 | 70 | https://www.si.com/review/wrestling-headgear/ | Once you step onto the wrestling mat, a thousand thoughts cross your mind. You size your opponent up and cook up ways to defeat them. One other thought that should always be at the back of your mind is the safety of your ears and how you can end the match injury-free. This is where wrestling headgears come into play. They are worn to protect and prevent injury to the ears, so it is essential to find one that offers adequate protection. The wrestling headgear is personal protective equipment suitable for use during practice sessions and fixed matches. They protect the ears and chin by cushioning the impact of blows to these parts of the head. We would hate to see you waste resources on wrestling headgears that cannot get the job done; that is why we came up with the list of premium wrestling headgears worth the money. | Premium Wrestling Headgear Cliff Keen Wrestling Headgear – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Cliff Keen wrestling headgear is a lightweight wrestling headgear designed for people seeking absolute protection and comfort for their ears and head. The first feature that grabbed our attention was how lightweight this headgear was. It weighs only 8 ounces, making it 43% lighter than several other wrestling headgears. Once worn, it feels like an extension of your body. Additionally, this wrestling gear is available in more than 40 colors. It doesn’t impede your hearing in any way; you will be able to hear your coach’s instructions with the air vent technology that is exclusive to only Cliff Keen products. The headgear is also easily adjustable, and it features deep ear cups to ensure complete protection. PROS It is comfortable and ultra-lightweight Earholes allow you to hear your coach’s instructions Available in a variety of colors and sizes CONS Not moisture resistant CHECK ON AMAZON Matman Wrestling Headgear – Runner up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Matman brings the difference when it comes to manufacturing wrestling headgear. This headgear is built using ultrasoft Neoprene materials that can withstand the intensity of any wrestling match. If you are a parent searching for the most durable wrestling headgear for yourself or your kids, this wrestling headgear is designed to keep your mind at ease so that you can focus on the fight. The wrestling headgear is also moisture and sweat-resistant, meaning you don’t have to worry about irritations. The velcro straps offer comfort and are also a perfect fit ensuring adequate protection to prevent cauliflower ears which is an inflammation of the outer ear caused by hard blows. PROS Available in both adult and ultra-youth sizes It is sweat-resistant It is durable and comfortable CONS Sizes might run small CHECK ON AMAZON Gold BJJ Wrestling Headgear – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon The Gold BJJ is the perfect wrestling headgear for wrestling, Jui Jitsu, and MMA. Athletes will love this wrestling headgear for its versatility and comfort. Whether you want this wrestling headgear for your kids or yourself, the one size fits all means you don’t need to worry about buying the wrong size. It also protects the mouth with the free mouth guard included. The wrestling gear also features earholes that enable you to hear your instructor. In addition to being loved by Wrestling and Jui Jitsu athletes, the Gold BJJ has graced the mats of several Jui Jitsu tournaments like gi to no-gi and open mat, including world finals. The headband on this wrestling gear is elastic. The chin strap is reinforced to ensure that comfort and safety are provided in one kit. PROS It comes with a free mouthguard Prevents cauliflower ear Elastic headband and reinforced chin strap for a secure fit CONS Not suitable for machine washing CHECK ON AMAZON Adidas Wrestling Headgear – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This option from Adidas is the most comfortable, friction-free wrestling headgear you can find in the market. It is called the ‘Wizard Youth Headgear’ because it was designed with the young ones in mind. It is made to pamper your kid’s ears and head while offering absolute protection. The comfort offered by this wrestling headgear is unrivaled. It features injection and compression molded earcups manufactured to perfection to give your ears the best feeling. This wrestling headgear also features a 3-strap system that is reliable, secure, and friction-reducing. PROS Perfect wrestling headgear for kids Compression-molded earcups for comfort Easy to adjust CONS Velcro tends to wear out over time CHECK ON AMAZON | Wrestling Headgears Buying Guide As discussed in the product review section of this article, getting the perfect headgear for yourself or your kids might be a little bit exhausting. Also, you run the risk of buying either inferior products or the wrong sizes and fittings. To avoid these issues, we have compiled a must-read buying guide for all those who intend on purchasing the best wrestling headgear. What Is a Wrestling Headgear? The wrestling headgear is personal protective equipment (PPE) worn to protect the head, ears, chin, and face from injury. And although it is called headgear and worn over the head, this personal protective equipment is designed to protect the ears and chin. They are also referred to as ear guards or ear protectors. What Are the Types of Wrestling Headgear? There are two popular types of wrestling headgears: the face guard and the ear guard. Ear guards Ear guards comprise two cups that fit over the ears. These two cups help protect the ears from wrestling injuries. The cups on this gear are secured using straps that pass under the chin, the back of the head, and over the top of the head. In addition to these, ear guards are usually ventilated to allow for the passage of air and to enable the user to hear the coach’s instructions. Faceguards Faceguards are more expensive than ear guards. However, they offer the ultimate protection against wrestling-related injuries. They are able to protect the ears, nose, face, head, and chin at the same time. Features to Look Out for When Selecting a Wrestling Headgear There are many wrestling headgear manufacturers out there. In order to not to be swayed by flashy advertising tactics, here are some important features that must be present. The Material Used in Making the Shell Cups When in search of wrestling headgear, always check the features section for the type of material used in the design and manufacture of the headgear. The best materials are durable and comfortable. They offer a cushioning effect by providing a certain level of protection to the ears while ensuring breathability. There are two popular cup designs. They include; the hard shell and the softshell. Hard shaped shell Hard-shell cups are usually made of hard plastic. However, this doesn’t make them heavier than their soft-shell counterparts. They make hearing easier for the wearer and are very durable. In addition to this, the hard-shell cups sometimes feature padding on the side of the head; this feature increases their comfortability. With all these pros of the hard shell, you might wonder if there is any downside to it. Actually, there are. One of which is that it is not accepted in some wrestling competitions, examples of such competitions are the Greco-Roman wrestling competition and also international freestyle competitions. The reason for this is because when hit by the opponent it can cause injury to your opponent. Soft shaped shell Soft-shaped shells, on the other hand, are accepted in every type of wrestling competition. They are usually made from polymers or rubber. They are suited for youth wrestlers because of how comfortable they can be to both you and your opponent. The Presence of Adjustable Straps on the Headgear To get a wrestling headgear that fits perfectly, you need to select a headgear that features adjustable straps. These straps are made from a variety of materials that contribute to their fitting. Spandex and Neoprene are two materials used in making straps that we highly recommend. This is because of their ability to offer more grip when compared to textile straps. Also, these two materials do not slide off when you sweat. The number of adjustable straps on your headgear is also a necessary feature to look out for. Many headgears feature about 3-5 straps that help with the headgear's fitting and enable them to stay in place during use. Lastly, some manufacturers also include cushioned chin straps which is a very fantastic feature. Unlike previous headgears with straps that go under the chin and tend to be uncomfortable to the throat. The new chin straps are designed to be placed on the chin. Presence of earholes In addition to the fact that earholes increase your hearing ability, they also help to reduce discomfort to the ears. They allow the passage of air and help to dry out sweat that can cause irritations. What Are the Important Factors to Consider Before Buying Wrestling Headgear? Many wrestling headgear manufacturers choose not to focus on the aesthetics of this personal protective equipment. They try to focus more on the quality, safety, comfort, and fitting of the gear. Quality Choose high-quality headgear made from durable and comfortable materials. Your headgear should be able to take a beating without breaking apart or coming off during a fight. Fitting and adjustability Having to adjust your wrestling headgear every second while in a match is an awkward scene for both you and the audience. To avoid this, your headgear should fit perfectly. Choose the best size. Kids younger than the age of 10 should opt for youth-size headgear. Also, if you have much hair or long hair, you should put this into consideration when choosing wrestling headgear. Your headgear fitting will also have a massive impact on your overall performance when you step onto the mat. So, avoid choosing headgears that are too loose. If it is too loose, your PPE might begin to slip off your ears and face. Loosened PPE also reduces the effectiveness of the headgear and makes you prone to cauliflower injury. Headgears that are tight are also a No-No. They can cause the oxygen supply in that region f the head to be cut off, which will lead to loss of consciousness. Tight headgears can also cause cuts on the ears, neck, and chin. Like loose headgears, the effectiveness of tight headgears is also significantly reduced. Cost When it comes to selecting any PPE, never forego quality for the price. Many decent wrestling headgears wouldn’t cut deep into your pocket. Cheap headgears might be missing a few straps and might be made using lower-quality materials. Headgears generally cost less than $50 and when you compare this to the damage and cost of treating cauliflower ear, you can see for yourself that buying headgear is the cheaper option in the long run. | |||||||||||||||||||
72 | 71 | https://www.si.com/review/best-ankle-weight/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
73 | 72 | https://www.si.com/review/ab-crunch-machine/ | Whenever we hear someone mention a "basic workout," many of us immediately think of six-pack abs. While this is one of the possible benefits of regular core work, it isn't the only reason to incorporate a few ab workouts into your gym routine. Upper body strength may assist you in improving your posture, reducing back pain, and reducing strain on your spine. The core muscles can also help you achieve good form during any activity, reducing the risk of injury and allowing you to stay active for better as you age. Given the numerous advantages, it's understandable that you'd want to include more core work in your workout regimen. For you, we've come up with a list of the best ab crunch machines in 2021. | Best Ab Crunch Machine of 2021 Reviewed In Detail Fitnessery Ab Crunch Machine – Best Abs Crunch Machines Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features For steady, smooth, and fluid motions, a single non-slip rubber wheel is used Stainless steel is used to make the ab roller wheel to ensure long-term durability The handles are cushioned for a secure grip Lightweight and portable The Fitnessery ab crunch machine acts as a personalized fitness trainer. It helps you grow stronger and more powerful six-pack abs, burn calories, build muscle, and improve overall stamina. You can now workout at home with one of the most efficient home exercise equipment on the market. It’s made of durable and long-lasting fiber for solid exercises. Stainless steel, non-slip rubber, and long-lasting Polyvinyl make up the ab disc. The abs roller handles are cushioned with soft EVA foam for added safety and convenience. There are so many variations of ab exercises that can be performed with this ab crunch machine. CHECK ON AMAZON Core Max Smart Ab Crunch Machine – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features Might be stored in small spaces and utilized on a constant basis. There are three degrees of resistance, each of which may be adjusted in a matter of seconds Includes a dietary guide and exercise videos for digital download Combines 8 muscle-burning exercises in just 8 minutes Core Max 2.0 ab crunch machine is a professionally designed piece of equipment that combines 8 muscle-burning exercises in just 8 minutes each day. The power-assisted rebounding system offers resistance and assistance in both directions, boosting performance whilst decreasing fatigue. With three resistance levels to choose from, you can personalize your workout entirely with this ab crunch machine. While you’re seated, you may burn many calories and tighten up. The Core Max 2.0 ab crunch machine includes a dietary guide, exercise videos for digital download, and a fast results workout plan. It is also relatively small and therefore will not take up too much space in your home. CHECK ON AMAZON Entersports Ab Crunch Machine – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features Allows you to targets every muscle area in your body Easy disassembling for packing it into your travel luggage Is a 6-in-1 set with additional equipment for different workouts Enables you to perform both cardio and strength workouts A fitness fanatic has designed the Entersports ab crunch machine 6-in-1 set. Instead of simply working out your abdominal muscles, you may utilize this roller and push-up bars in front, back, sitting, or prone prostrated to strengthen muscles in other areas of your body, such as your biceps and triceps pectoralis, gluteus, and leg muscles. With this 6-in-1 ab crunch machine, you can turn your bedroom, living room, or workplace into a state-of-the-art gym. With this wheel, you may make the most of your leisure time without having to travel to the gym or your house. It’s great for cardio, abs, power, endurance, stamina, and arm and leg work. CHECK ON AMAZON Fitlaya Fitness Ab Crunch Machine – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features The calories burned, workout duration, and repetitions are all shown in a circular pattern on the smart LCD training monitor It can be rolled when not being used. Maximum weight capacity is 440 pounds Height levels may be changed to accommodate varied demands With a steel curve track design that allows more muscles to be used, this ab crunch machine helps you to increase your ab/core workout intensity. The Fitlaya Fitness ab crunch machine has a heavy-duty steel structure for long-term durability. High-density foam-covered handgrips and a high-quality knee cushion provide a long-lasting and comfortable workout. The maximum weight capacity is 440 pounds. In 4 distinct types of training, the height levels may be changed to accommodate varied demands, focusing on the thigh, hip, and abdominal muscles for a more efficient workout. It’s considerably easy to put together with clear and concise instructions. CHECK ON AMAZON MBB Ab Crunch Machine 5 image Photo courtesy of amazon.com Key Features Its ergonomic design prioritizes a pleasant training experience for the user The large and thick cushion protects your various body parts Provides a broad variety of full-body workouts with an emphasis on the core area Also has a rowing machine function This easy-to-use MBB ab crunch machine has three combinations including a fundamental workout, combine exercises, and band exercises that give 21 exercise modes to train your core muscles while boosting your metabolism and triggering fat burning. It is ideal for everyone and can therefore be used by all family members. A new rowing machine function has been added to this ab crunch machine. There are five intensity levels to choose from, according to your training goals. While sitting, you may burn calories and tighten up. To get the most out of your workout, target each muscle group in your body and use it regularly. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Ab Crunch Machine Buying Guide What Is An Ab Crunch Machine's Purpose? There are several ways to acquire beach-ready abs, but ab crunch machines are an excellent alternative for ab sculpting in the privacy of your own home. Whether you want a six-pack (or more) or just want to reduce those love handles, ab machines work by targeting the right parts of your abdominal area. By training your core muscles, abdominal machines give mobility and posture to the rest of your body. Abdominal muscles also influence the posture of your arms and legs. Bending, rotating, lifting, standing, and twisting all engage your abs. Abdominal equipment has been found to improve the abdominal muscles as well as other muscular endurance. They're also good for folks who have neck or back issues and can't do other abdominal workouts because they're too painful. Maintaining a nutritious diet is essential for having abs that are in good shape. There is significant debate about how effective ab crunch workouts are for reducing fat; in order to burn fat, caloric intake must be lowered. More muscle, on the other hand, suggests a higher fat-burning capacity. Strong abs provide various benefits, including less back discomfort, improved posture, enhanced sports performance, greater balance, and functional strength development. A strong core is needed for a multitude of situations, from simple everyday chores like tying your shoelaces to tightrope walking. What Are The Various Kinds Of Ab Crunch Machines? Sit Up Bench A sit-up bench is a multi-purpose piece of equipment that looks like a weight bench but isn't. This can help in crunches, core work, twisting, and pectoral pushes. Ab Wheel A small wheel with handle grips is known as an ab Wheel. The ab wheel evaluates your ability to keep good form and muscular tension across your stomach, including your lower back. Ab Chair An ab chair is a piece of machinery that supports the head, neck, and back during abdominal sit-ups and flips. A padded headrest and hand grips make for a relaxing workout without straining the neck. Ab Glider/Roller An ab glider is a machine with a kneeling pad, handles, and a curved track. The arc movement is started by twisting and holding the two handles to drag oneself along the track. This lets you simultaneously train all of your abdominal muscles. An ab roller stimulates the upper abdominals and helps to prevent neck discomfort while performing the workout appropriately. What Aspects To Look For In An Ab Machine? When shopping for the greatest ab machine for your needs, keep the following in mind: Durability Buying a cheap ab machine from an untrustworthy website is not a good idea. Check customer reviews before purchasing an ab machine to discover how the product performed for them. Top-quality materials, like steel, are used to construct good ab machines. Versatility Considering your ab machine is an investment, you surely want to take all the benefits associated with it. It should be able to tone and improve your core muscles through a variety of workouts. You won't just get a machine that targets your abdominal abs one particular way. Your arms, thighs, and other body parts should be sculpted and built as well. Size Ab machines come in an extensive range of shapes and dimensions. Not all ab machines will fit in your house or fitness center. Ease Of Usage Is mounting and dismounting difficult for you? If that's the scenario, your ab machine may be more difficult to use. Because you'll be using your ab machine every day during your workout, it's ideal to choose one that won't bother you too much. Find an ab machine that is simple to operate, especially for beginners. Stability When it comes to exercising, your safety should always come first, and exercise equipment manufacturers should be aware of this. You should invest in an ab machine that will keep you in place as you work out. It must not shift or tumble over, putting your safety in danger. Dimensions If you're working with a restricted quantity of area, the measurements are crucial to remember. Check to see if the ab machine will fit in the space where you plan to store it or use it. Fortunately, the majority of the ab equipment in this evaluation is small. Weight The weight of your ab machine is vital to consider if you plan to travel with it or have it with you on the road. If you merely want to utilize the goods in your living room, though, you can ignore this specification. Warranty Confirm that the product you purchase is backed by a solid warranty.The service duration is stated below at the time of buying, but check it twice. One year is typical, and this should be sufficient time to reveal any issues. Who Can Benefit From Ab Crunch Machines? Stronger, sexier abdominal muscles and a healthy core are becoming increasingly popular. So, who will benefit the most from ab machines? Recurrent Sightseers Are you usually out and about? Are you having trouble finding time to exercise? You may take your ab machines with you when you choose tiny ab machines. Professionals The pressures of work and home leave many professionals with little time to devote to exercise. You can simply add exercise into your routine with an ab machine in the comfort of your own home or on the go. Athletes If you're serious about getting in shape, you already know that having toned abs and a strong core affects every other workout you perform. Abs should be worked on every day, according to most fitness trainers. Those Who Wish To Avoid Going To The Gym You would not want to bother going to the gym? Do you despise crowds, commotion, or the inconvenience of getting there? You can save the hassle and price of a gym membership by purchasing your own at-home ab machine. People With Chronic Back Pain It can be the difference between walking and being restricted to a chair if you have a strong core. Greater mobility and flexibility can be achieved by committing to abdominal and lower back training. Beginners Starting A Fitness Routine Do you want to get in shape but are unsure where to begin? Maybe the thought of going to the gym or the cost of getting a professional trainer makes you nervous. Perhaps you already have a spin bike at home, which indicates that you're health-conscious and you'd like to expand your fitness options. Investing in an ab machine gives you the freedom and confidence to create your own exercise routine at home. | |||||||||||||||||||
74 | 73 | https://www.si.com/review/best-dip-station/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
75 | 74 | https://www.si.com/review/best-glow-in-the-dark-football/ | When passing a football with our friends and family, no one likes to have to stop because it’s getting dark. When that happens, a lot of us just pull out our glow in the dark footballs. Some even have LED, motion-activated lights that turn on when thrown or kicked. So which is the best one for you? Get ready for some night-time football fun and here our list of The Best Glow-In-The-Dark Footballs for 2022. | What Are the Best Glow-In-The-Dark Footballs for 2022? GlowCity Light Up Football-Official – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This glow in the dark football features impact activated LED lights. When it’s bounced or kicked, the lights will activate and stay on for 30 seconds so you’ll be able to make a backyard touchdown pass. PROS Includes a pump for inflating it Comes with a special tool to help change the batteries Feels and plays like a regular football CONS Just normal catch may not be enough to activate the light, sometimes it needs a harder hit CHECK ON AMAZON NIGHTMATCH Waterproof Glow Football with Two LED – Runner up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Play after sunset with this LED football. It comes with everything you need to start playing, so your fun doesn’t have to stop when the sun goes down. PROS Matrix design makes it easy to grip Batteries included Lights up easily without having to hit it hard CONS Dirt can be difficult to clean out of the open middle section CHECK ON AMAZON Tangle NightBall Glow in the Dark Light Up LED Football – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Never worry about your football going flat again with this unique, open-body design. It’s easy to grip and lights up during movement so you can keep playing after the sun goes down. PROS Squeaks to help keep your dog interested Small five-inch long size is easy for your dogs to grab in their mouths Non-toxic CONS Doesn’t bounce very well CHECK ON AMAZON Spunky Pup Fetch and Glow Football – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon For the ultimate in nighttime puppy fun, you’ll need this toy. Its textured surface is easy to throw and the glow in the dark material lets your dog find it in the dark. PROS Various colors to choose from Durable and non-toxic, so even if it rips or tears it’s not bad for the pup Great for daytime and nighttime use Soft and flexible CONS Doesn’t bounce Bigger dogs destroy them easily CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Glow-In-The-Dark Footballs Buyer's Guide We know how much you love football, so whether you plan on going pro or you enjoy the thrills football brings when you play it, we have drafted the best glow in the dark football buying guide for use in friendly football games and parties. The first football game played at night occurred in the year 1892. It took a while before the next night football game was played. These days, night football games are common. For these matches to be successful large floodlights are needed. Today, glow in the dark footballs are available, and although they are not used for professional football games, these balls can be used by kids and adults at night. What Is a Glow in the Dark Football? A glow in the dark football is a special type of ball infused with chemicals or technology that enables it to glow in low light. These glowing balls come in different sizes and weight. They are made using durable materials that can withstand the rugged game of football. These balls that glow in the dark make it possible for people to have a fun game of football without going through the expense of buying and installing floodlights. Sundown doesn't mean your fun game should come to an end. What Makes Glow-In-The-Dark Footballs Glow? Glow in the dark footballs are powered using various means. Here are some of the safe ways these glow-in-the-dark footballs are able to glow. Battery powered glow in the dark footballs Battery-powered glow-in-the-dark footballs feature built-in LEDs, usually in the center of the ball. These batteries can last for several hours. Additionally, battery-powered glow-in-the-dark footballs are available in a variety of colors. Some types of battery-powered glow-in-the-dark footballs stay glowing throughout use. Others glow due to the motion sensors installed inside them. Whenever the ball is in motion, the ball will glow for about 30 seconds. Another type of battery-powered glow-in-the-dark football is balls that have different light modes like pulse and strobe modes. This type of glow-in-the-dark football is perfect for parties. Sunlight powered glow in the dark footballs Sunlight can power football. This is possible using a compound called phosphor. When the phosphor is used with the materials used in making the ball, the football attains the ability to glow in the dark. These types of glow-in-the-dark footballs can be used from sun up to sunset. After the sun goes down, you don't need to worry about batteries since sunlight charges the ball while it was being used during the day. A typical phosphor compound used in the making of glow in the dark football is strontium aluminate. It is the best choice today because it glows for more extended periods and gives off a very bright glow. They are safe as they are not radioactive and contain no element that gives off radioluminescence. However, they are limited to giving off only a green-blue color. How Much Do Glow-In-The-Dark Footballs Cost? The cost of a glow-in-the-dark football boils down to size, weight, and also the quality of the materials used in making the ball. Naturally, bigger models with brighter glow cost $25-$50. While smaller and less bright balls cost $10-$15. How to Select the Best Glow in the Dark Footballs Here are factors you should not forget to consider when selecting a glow in the dark football The size and weight of the ball We recommend a size three glowing ball for kids. This size is much smaller and lighter than the ones used by pro football players. Size 5 is for adults. It gives off the same feeling as the ones used in real games. For manufacturers that use a different measurement, a glow-in-the-dark football with a circumference of 22 inches is for adults and high school players. Kids between the age of 12-and 14 should play with 19 inches balls, while kids between the age of 8-and 12 can use 18 inches balls. If your kid is not up to the age of 8, there are mini glow-in-the-dark footballs available. The Materials Used in Making the Ball Unlike regulation balls which are made of leather, glow-in-the-dark footballs are made of plastic, rubber, or foam. We recommend glow-in-the-dark balls made of rubber because they are more durable, comfortable to hold, and water and weather-resistant. Glow type There are two popular types of glow-in-the-dark footballs. One is the phosphor glow in the dark football, and the other is the LED glow in the dark football. Phosphor glow in the dark balls is lighter since there are no batteries inside to add to their weight. They are also suitable for use in pools as they are not radioactive. On the other hand, LED glow-in-the-dark balls to have the advantage of not needing to be recharged before and after every use. They can generate a glow with different colors, unlike phosphor balls that are limited to a blue-green color. Safety Safety consideration is essential when choosing a glow-in-the-dark ball. Check and ensure that the ball is not made from radioactive chemicals and also check to ensure that the materials used in making the ball or non-toxic. | |||||||||||||||||||
76 | 75 | https://www.si.com/review/best-booty-band/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
77 | 76 | https://www.si.com/review/best-exercise-bike-seat-cushion/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
78 | 77 | https://www.si.com/review/push-up-bar/ | Push-ups are an excellent strength-training and compound exercise to tone up muscles lining the upper back, chest, arms, and biceps. However, the stress of performing push-ups can get overwhelming, often resulting in excessive joint and muscular wear and tears. Suppose you have carpal tunnel syndrome, a wrist injury, or issues with maintaining consistency. In that case, examining the best push-up bars in 2022 will help you find the right structure to support your unique preferences. You see, push-up bars make push-ups incredibly easier by reducing the stress on the targeted muscle groups and joints. More importantly, they will improve your alignment by allowing you to find a comfortable position as you lift and dip your arms. Fitness enthusiasts looking to challenge their limbs will find push-up bars to be an excellent investment. They will intensify the challenge to speed up your gains, building muscle strength and agility. If you've never used push-up bars before, shopping for this fitness accessory can prove challenging. Our comprehensive buying guide will walk you through all the information you need, alongside exploring some best-selling products. | Best Push Up Bar Worth Considering in 2022 5BILLION Push Up Bar – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Slip-resistant & sweat-absorbent handles High-quality PVC construction Ergonomic support Lightweight & compact Do you struggle with wrist fatigue, hand sweat, and discomfort while performing push-ups? Here’s the ideal solution to enjoy a sturdy, non-slip grip powered by ergonomic support. 5Billion presents an inventive design featuring a bracket board and foam cushioning for enhanced stability. The bars are constructed with premium-grade PVC, a robustly durable material that can support any weight and deliver excellent stability and firmness. The handles are protected with soft, sweat-absorbent foam – by far the most impressive feature. These parallettes bars are highly recommended for high-powered cardio workouts to tone up and strengthen your abdominal and back muscles. PROS Ideal for overcoming wrist fatigue Enhanced support and stability Easily assembling and disassembling Safety enhancements CONS Joints tend to bend Difficulty withstanding excessive bodyweight CHECK ON AMAZON Power Press Push Up Board – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Over 30 push up combinations Hand grips are slip-resistant Comes with a free workout program Color-coded multiple workout positions This is a versatile push-up bar board for anyone looking to increase their upper body strength. The board contains two comfortable, yet non-slip hand grips that can be adjusted in various color-coded positions for different workout combinations. Plus, you also get access to 30+ workouts, a workout calendar, and training videos on the Power Press YouTube channel for free. The board boasts heavy-duty construction allowing it to hold up to 300 pounds. The wide design promotes correct form and various positions for better results. PROS Give a full-body workout in 30 minutes Improves correct posture Reduces joint strain Premium non-slip material CONS Costly CHECK ON AMAZON Juperbsky Push-Up Stands Bars Parallettes Set – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Multipurpose parallettes Weight capacity: 2200 lbs Non-slip handles Abrasion-resistant design Here are the best push-up bars for athletes looking to power their at-home workouts with superior intensity. You no longer have to perform hundreds of push-ups to experience that deep burning sensation in your chest. These multipurpose parallettes allow you to power your push-ups with precision and experiment with different angles and variations. This set is highly recommended for high-intensity training, and it supports various muscle training workouts. For instance, you can use it for push-ups, handstands, v-sits, and even gymnastic exercises. We’re impressed by the sturdy and durable steel construction that refuses to bend and can withstand more than 2200 lbs of weight. PROS Durable construction Ideal for chest and upper body training Comfortable and firm grip Reduces effort and fatigue CONS The grip needs some improvement CHECK ON AMAZON READAEER Push Up Bars – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Lightweight and portable Non-skid design Cushioned handles Ideal for upper-body training Are you looking for a lightweight and portable push-up bar that you can carry around while commuting or long-distance traveling? These ergonomic push-up bars from READAEER are an excellent choice for travelers anxious to align their fitness goals with their nomadic lifestyles. The bars are designed with a non-skid base, with foam-cushioned handles to prevent muscle fatigue and joint aches. The design is very simplistic, and you can toss these in your bag and carry them around without lugging any excess weight. These bars are very well-built, and the non-skid base will prevent the bar from moving or collapsing under your weight. PROS Superior support & comfort Eliminates joint pain Reduces wrist strain Easy to assemble & disassemble CONS Not suitable for high-intensity training CHECK ON AMAZON CAP Barbell Pair of Push Up Bars 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Ergonomic design Heavy-duty steel construction Thick foam padding Beautiful chrome finishing Do you seek high-performance push-up bars with a small price tag? Look no further; this pair from CAP Barbell delivers exceptional value for money with its sturdy and inventive ergonomic design. We absolutely adore the chrome accents and sleek design, and we’re positively amazed by the spectacular finishing, given the nominal cost. The ergonomic design fights off muscle fatigue, reducing the strain on your joints, elbows, wrists, and hands. The gripping handle features a subtle curvature to ensure a natural positioning that eliminates hand fatigue and slippage. The width and height of the bars allow ample room to ensure a high-intensity impact as you stretch those pectoral muscles while deepening your push-ups. The handles are lined with a thick layer of foam to prevent discomfort and maximize precision and firmness. PROS Superior durability Slip-resistant foot pads Eliminates wrist fatigue & discomfort Compact & lightweight CONS Doesn’t support handle rotation CHECK ON AMAZON Redipo Push Up Bars Strength Training – Highly Durable Construction 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Ergonomic design Wrist protection to reduce strain Premium-grade polypropylene construction Chrome-plated finishing Redipo presents a budget-friendly and innovative strength-training tool to build up and strengthen your upper body muscles. You can use these bars at home or carry them around to the gym and your long-distance travels. These slip-resistant push-up stands are constructed with premium-grade polypropylene. We can’t help but admire the steel tube chrome-plating that has enhanced the ergonomic design with anti-corrosion and enhanced load-bearing. The bars deliver exceptional safety mechanisms with their sturdy construction, wrist protection, and non-slip rubber feet. Here’s an excellent pick that will help you perform your strength training session on any given surface. PROS Enhanced wrist support Maximized impact on chest & abdominal muscles Portability for commuting 100% money-back warranty CONS Hard plastic base does not provide a good grip on some floor surfaces CHECK ON AMAZON | Buyer's Guide to Finding the Best Push Up Bars Choosing the Right Materials, Features & Stability Push-up bars are a wise choice to boost your minimalist workout regime without bringing home bulky machines and heavyweight equipment. Push-ups allow real gains, strengthening your core and building agility where it matters most. Adding raised handles with comfortable padding will work wonders at extending your range of motion, intensifying the impact of a standard push-up. The raised handles make it easier for beginners to lower their bodies and enjoy the ease of movement, maximizing the impact on their pectoral muscles. Keep reading to explore the right materials, design specifications, and features to consider for a well-informed buying decision. Materials & Design Specifications Push-up bars are available in a wide array of designs and materials. Typically, these accessories come with two evenly-spaced U-shaped handles to support raising and lowering movements. Innovative designs come with inventive features, such as rotatable handles. These are quite impressive and comfortable, as the handles twist to the left and right as the body moves up and down. Suppose you struggle with stability and range of motion while performing push-ups. In that case, rotatable push-up bar handles will stabilize your core muscles to enhance your performance. These bars come in a variety of shapes, sizes, and materials, primarily plastic and steel. Let's take a quick look at each material to help you find the perfect fit. Plastic Plastic bars are the most budget-friendly options out there, but we strongly advise against overly cheap investments. You see, these cheap plastic bars are awfully flimsy and do nothing to support hand positioning and stability. They are a terrible choice for people who struggle with slippage and hand sweat. The drawbacks of plastic push-up bars outshine their benefits considerably. You see, plastic handles are terribly problematic, especially when the shaft starts hurting your hand after multiple reps. They are notorious for causing hand and chest fatigue, hampering your progress and gains. What's worse, plastic push-up bars feature rubber caps that slide around slippery surfaces, making it difficult to maintain stability. Plastic handles are also increasingly vulnerable to breakage and bending. You've probably guessed it: do not invest in plastic push-up bars unless you weigh less than 160 pounds and can't increase your budget. Square blocks Square blocks are a popular choice for compact and lightweight push-up bars, but these are also constructed with plastic. These are considered ideal for frequent travelers, and the plastic is much sturdier and more durable than standard plastic bars. These blocks feature sharp edges and a broad base so you can comfortably position your wrist and find the correct posture to bend down. Steel & metal Steel and metals are excellent materials to enjoy good value for money and lasting durability. Typically, steel push-up bars come with S-shaped and U-shaped handles to deliver a sturdy hand grip. The cheaper variants come with plastic feet and steel bars, making them increasingly prone to breakage and slippage. We advise investing in solid steel construction to ensure excellent floor gripping and stability. You don't want the handles to bend every time you move, disturbing your posture and focus. It's crucial to invest in handles covered with padded foam grip to avoid hand fatigue and injuries. Ball-bearing twist Push-up bars featuring ball-bearing mechanisms are amazingly functional and highly recommended for beginners and seasoned trainers. These bars come with a pair of circular discs attached to the handles, twisting the handles every time you lift your body. These come with a hefty price tag, but if you want to intensify the challenge of your push-ups, the investment is genuinely worth every cent! Stability & Height The best push-up bras have a decent height to add a reasonable distance between your limbs and the ground. They also offer superior stability to ensure accurate and comfortable body alignment. Height and stability are crucial considerations. They enhance the range of motion, allowing your muscles to contract and expand quickly. Wobbly push-up bars are an utter waste of your money, not to mention the alarming hazards of wrist injuries and muscle wear and tears. Stability prevents the stabilizer muscles in the shoulders from getting overly fatigued and stressed so that you can increase your reps each day. Cushioned Handles Nothing is more distracting and discomforting than steel or plastic handles biting into your hand. It's crucial to look for cushioned handles with protective foam covering to stabilize your wrist and hands with enhanced comfort. Well-padded handles will deliver cushiony support to firm up your grip and prevent slippages. Most people struggle with push-ups because of the pressure the movements exert on the wrists and arms. Cushioned handles can eliminate this pressure to ensure a steady grip and consistent movements. In contrast, unpadded handles give rise to forearm, hand, and chest fatigue. Final Thoughts Finding the right fit for your training and comfort needs is of the utmost significance. You see, the best push-up bars can amplify your workout gains, making it incredibly easy to perform push-ups. Suppose you struggle with push-ups and wish to embrace them to build upper body strength. In that case, buying the best push-up bars is the right choice to challenge your limbs and achieve your fitness goals. Be sure to look for the features and functions mentioned above to evaluate the pros and cons of each product you come across. We also advise reading through customer reviews to get past the manufacturer's branding tactics and identify the product's true worth. | |||||||||||||||||||
79 | 78 | https://www.si.com/review/best-rack-for-dumbbell/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
80 | 79 | https://www.si.com/review/paracord-bracelet/ | Are you a survivalist or an outdoor fanatic? If so, then you understand that it's quite crucial to be as prepared as possible. There are a lot of survival tools available on the market, particularly for people that enjoy adventures. However, most of the time, the most important thing to remember while outdoors is to be as lightweight as possible, so carrying all kinds of things will significantly slow your pace down. Having one of the best paracord bracelets in 2022 is the perfect solution for your situation. These types of bracelets are worn around the wrist and are often equipped with essential survival equipment (knife, torchlight, compass, and keys) that can come in handy if you happen to wander too far from the trail. Furthermore, they are manufactured out of a nylon material that is highly durable, and it's the same one used to make a parachute cord. For this reason, they’re called "para-cord" bracelets. In our article, we will be moving through some of the best models available on the entire internet, so be sure that you bear with us until the end. Without wasting any more time, let's start! | What Are the Best Paracord Bracelet of 2022? Atomic Bear 2-pack Paracord Bracelet – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Includes 2 different-colored paracord bracelets This paracord bracelet comes with a lifetime warranty from the manufacturer It comes with 4 different essentials The perfect companion for your survival trips On the first position of our top-tier list, we have the Atomic Bear 2-pack Paracord Bracelet. It includes 5 gear essentials that can tremendously assist you during your whole survival adventure. A compass for better orientation, a loud emergency whistle in case of an accident during your trip, a fire scraper and a rod striker so that you can easily start a fire, and 12 feet of military-grade paracord wire to get out of every situation. Apart from the functionalities, this can also serve as a fashionable accessory to your wrist. It comes in a packaging of 2 bracelets – the first one is colored black, while the other is orange & black model. Plus, if you’re experiencing any kind of problems with your paracord bracelet, you can contact Atomic Bear, and they will provide you with a free replacement. CHECK ON AMAZON A2S Protection K2-Peak Paracord Bracelet – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The A2S Protection K2-Peak Paracord Bracelet highlights a great build quality They are available in 1 adjustable and 4 fixed sizes It features clear and helpful guidance for your wildlife trip This paracord bracelet is exceptionally lightweight, so you won’t even feel it on your hand The first problems that most people run on when going camping or hiking are the difficulty of igniting a fire and insufficient survival knowledge. With the help of the A2S Protection K2-Peak Paracord Bracelet and a few branches, you will be able to light a fire in no time – just rub the rod to get a spark beneath the branches and slowly blow with your mouth to get it all spread up. Along with that, you will also receive a useful leaflet with all sorts of instructions and survival tips that you can practice on your next trip. Moreover, this paracord is carefully manufactured out of the finest materials to ensure that it will last for several years without any problems. CHECK ON AMAZON Square Garden Survival Paracord Bracelet – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features This bracelet can serve for multiple situations The Square Harden Survival Paracord Bracelet is available in various color schemes It fits wrist sizes below 8-inches This paracord bracelet is the ideal gift for your closest ones Next up, we have the Square Harden Survival Paracord Bracelet, which comes in a pack of 2 and is suitable for wrist sizes that measure below 8-inches. You will be able to purchase this paracord bracelet in different color combinations, including black, yellow, lime green, fuchsia, navy blue & red camo, purple, pink, white, blue, woodland camo, and many more. The entire paracord is hand-woven with a high-grade connecting buckle and first-class polyester. In urgency, the bracelet can be used as a trap to capture animals, a fishing line to catch fish, a laundry line to dry your wet clothes, a rope for any transportation needs, etc. This is definitely the perfect gift for all your friends that enjoy doing crazy outdoor activities. CHECK ON AMAZON The Friendly Swede Paracord Band – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The customer support is extremely friendly and open to any questions This paracord bracelet is fitting for men and women Manufactured out of military-grade parachute cord The Friendly Swede Paracord Band is available in 3 different sizes With ultra-strong parachute cord and stainless steel bow shackle, The Friendly Swede Paracord Band will exceed every small bit of your expectations. You will be able to purchase it in 3 different sizes, including S (fits 6 to 7-inches wrist), M (fits 7 to 8-inches wrist), and XL (fits 8.5 to 9.8-inches wrist). Plus, unlike any other option, this bracelet is also adjustable so that you can have the perfect fit for your wrist – use the included bolt to find the perfect size, and you’re ready to rock. If you aren’t entirely happy with the product, then you will be able to reach out to The Friendly Swede, and they will happily do their best to resolve the entire situation in the shortest duration possible. CHECK ON AMAZON FROG SAC Basic Paracord Bracelets 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features They are amazingly durable and will last for a long time These bracelets quickly absorb oil perfectly Perfect for the entire squad The FROG SAC Basic Paracord Bracelets are hand-made Last but absolutely not least, we have the brand-new and redesigned FROG SAC Basic Paracord Bracelets. There are over 12 different pieces of bracelets included in the packaging, which is more than enough for your entire crew. All of the bracelets highlight a different color design and are extremely easy to set on your wrist – press the buckle clasp, and that’s it. From making your own shelter to using it as fire tinder, the FROG SAC Basic Paracord Bracelets will literally help you with any occasion throughout your wildlife journey. Additionally, paracord bracelets can also be utilized as diffuser bands for aromatherapy intentions. The paracord absorbs oil immediately and can be quickly washed if needed! CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Paracord Bracelets Buying Guide Once you start listing all the available options online, you will soon see that there are more than hundreds of models available from dozens of manufacturers. So, how will you know which is the appropriate option for you and your requirements? Well, have no fear because our buying guide unpacks everything you need to know in order to find the right paracord bracelet for your next survival trip. What to Consider When Purchasing Paracord Bracelets? Size The very first factor that you should, without question, put into consideration when buying your very new paracord bracelet is the size. You can see them offered in various sizes (S, M, L, XL, and XLL), so be sure that you select the ideal one. Usually, the manufacturer will provide a sizing chart where they will specify which category is the most suitable for your wrist size - you can find it somewhere in the product description. Durability You want to ensure that that specific model you're looking at will be able to withstand the entire journey you're going across. So, stick with a paracord bracelet manufactured out of high-quality, durable materials - resistant to any tear or wear. Typically, most of the paracord bracelets can handle several pounds of stress with ease. Color Lastly, while these types of bracelets provide a tone of function, they serve as a fabulous fashion ornament on your hand. Therefore, selecting the right color combination can be just as important as the previous considerations. There are all kinds of designs, but you will need to pick the one that will flawlessly blend in with your outfit. For instance, if you're planning to wear green clothes, select a bracelet with a camo design, while if you want to use it on any type of clothes, go with the basic black color model. How Much Do Paracord Bracelets Cost? If you're in the market for a paracord bracelet, then you should anticipate paying from as low as $8 and all up to $190 for some of the most reliable models available. The price range will typically vary depending on several fundamental factors, including the included paracord bracelets in the packaging, the quality of the material, and the number of additional features it has. Be sure to clearly state your budget so that you can make a more reasonable purchase decision. How Did We Pick the Top Paracord Bracelets? We evaluated various paracord bracelets on the market and selected the best models available on the internet. Here are the main principles that took place in our review process: Reliability (30%) Ratings (25%) Manufacturer (20%) Value (25%) What Features Should You Look For in a Paracord Bracelet? Fire starter pack Making a campfire in the wilderness is one of the essential things that you must do before midnight comes. Some of the paracord bracelets have a fire-steel and a rod striker to make the complete method a lot more comfortable for you and your crew. Compass Usually, there is no internet connection in the wilderness, so your phone is useless. But don't worry, there are a lot of paracord bracelets that even come with a compass to help you find your way whenever you seem that you're lost. Emergency whistle If you accidentally fell and injured yourself, don't worry because most paracord bracelets have built-in whistles. You will be able to use this whistle to pull your teams' awareness. Knife blade The next and probably the most vital feature that you should watch for when getting a paracord is a knife blade. This will help you with various tasks around the camping tent, but it can also serve as a self-defense tool for any dangerous situations. LED brightness An LED light is a convenient item to have on your wrist, especially when it's nighttime and you're far off from your campsite. You will usually see this feature in some premium paracord bracelets that come with a hefty price tag. Conclusion Having the right piece of equipment can tremendously come in handy, especially when you're in nature. With the assistance of our brief guide and best picks, we're more than positive that you will be capable of finding the ideal paracord bracelet for your budget and needs. Happy Adventure! | |||||||||||||||||||
81 | 80 | https://www.si.com/review/best-skirt-for-tennis/ | Tennis is a sport that requires proper attire to ensure you feel comfortable and can move easily during the game. Male tennis players wear shorts, while female players wear skirts. Picking the right type of tennis skirt is important for women to maximize their abilities out on the court. A good skirt will be very comfortable and allow for ease of movement. It will also be breathable and quick-drying, preventing sweat build-up so you feel comfortable during the game. Given how much sprinting and jumping goes on during a match, a good skirt should be made of durable materials so it lasts you a long time. Luckily, there are many great options available for women on the market. To make it easier for you to choose, we have listed below the highest-rated tennis skirts of 2022 after going through plenty of options to find the best ones out there at this time. We cannot recommend the skirts on this enough, and you are sure to love them because they: Are made from lightweight, breathable fabrics to keep you cool Are sweat-wicking so you'll stay dry and comfortable Come in figure-flattering designs | Comparing The Top Tennis Skirts Of 2022 POSHDIVAH Women’s Athletic Skirt – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Elastic closure to ensure a tight fit Machine washable skirt Built-in shorts with two easy-access pockets Moisture-wicking stretchy fabric This skirt is best for serious players who want optimal performance and comfort while playing. The fabric fits tightly and moves with the player, which is ideal for sprinting and jumping. The skirt is easy to care for and wash, and it is wrinkle-free, so it requires little effort to maintain. The fabric is very soft and lightweight, so you will barely feel like you are wearing anything. The brilliant mix of polyester and spandex provides exceptional breathability and stretchability to ensure you can move on the court with greater ease and comfort, allowing you to play with greater finesse. CHECK ON AMAZON Nike Women’s Court Dry Skirt – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comfortable elastic closure Inner shorts with gusset for a great fit Black piping on the side seam Quick-drying fabric This skirt is best for players who tend to play in warm weather and sweat a lot. It does an especially good job of wicking away moisture and drying quickly, which is ideal for hot climates. There are multiple color/design options that many will enjoy. The material is durable, capable of withstanding plenty of repeated use. The inner shorts have a gusset to ensure this skirt offers a perfect fit that stays put throughout the game. It has an overall sporty look, largely thanks to the side seam black-colored piping that looks very flattering indeed. Overall, this is definitely the skirt to get if you would like to both look and feel good. CHECK ON AMAZON TSLA Active Tennis Skirt – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Breathable inner mesh Inner shorts that provide excellent compression Excellent combination of polyester and spandex Provides sun protection to skin underneath This skirt is best for women who want something functional and fashionable but don’t want to break the bank. It offers excellent value for money given the high quality and low price. There are up to 30 color and style options to choose from, so you will definitely find one that suits your personal style. The fabric is very comfortable, lightweight, and breathable, ideal for players of any skill level as it allows free movement on the court. The elastic closure ensures this skirt is easy to put on and take off. It also provides sun protection of SPF 50+, although you would still need to apply sunscreen on all the exposed areas (obviously). All in all, this skirt is perfect for those looking to make a style statement on the court without compromising performance in any way. CHECK ON AMAZON Ekouaer Women’s Active Performance Skort – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Elastic closure with elasticized waistband Breathable wrinkle-resistant fabric Stretchable fit Attractive design options This skirt is best for women who want great comfort but also want to look stylish. It is easy to care for and is wrinkle-resistant. There are many different color and style options available that many will love. The fabric moves with the player, which is great for serious players who sprint a lot. The stretchable fabric and elasticized waistband combine to ensure seamless movement on the court, so you can play to your full potential. Also, the fabric is exceptionally breathable, preventing sweat build-up even after hours of sport on a sunny day. CHECK ON AMAZON Cityoung Pleated Tennis Skirt 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Wide waistband with drawstring closure Two pockets Integrated shorts Back-pleated design Cityoung’s tennis skirt allows you to carry essentials in one pocket and a tennis ball for playtime in another, thanks to its unique two-pocket design that is uncommon in tennis skirts. The wide waistband gives you a better fit than many comparable skirts out there. The wicking system disperses sweat well to help you dry quickly. The brilliant combination of polyester and spandex provides just the right amount of stretchability without compromising fit or comfort. It has shorts inner, although the skirt is thick enough so there is no see-through. Also, it offers an excellent range of colors to choose from, with options that look classy enough to go with almost any top. CHECK ON AMAZON Hoerev Tennis Skirt 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Wrinkle-resistant thick fabric Stylish versatile appearance Hidden zipper closure Machine washable Hoerev’s tennis skirt has a pleated design that looks classy and stylish, so this should definitely be your top choice if you want to look fashionable on the court. The material is deliberately thicker than other tennis skirts on our list, but this factor allows this skirt to actively resist the formation of wrinkles, even after machine wash. And yes, this skirt is machine washable. You don’t have to worry about wearing shorts underneath this skirt as it already comes with a pair of shorts sewn to it. The versatile appearance of this skirt means you can wear it almost anywhere, regardless of your age and the nature of the activity. They go with any outfit and are appropriate for any occasion. CHECK ON AMAZON ZEALOTPOWER Tennis Skirt 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Looks stylish on and off the court Two pockets for keys, wallet, and tennis balls Stretchable quick-drying fabric Built-in mesh shorts ZEALOTPOWER’s tennis skirt has a quick-drying fabric that helps you stay comfortable during even the most intense practice sessions. It has a stretchy material that ensures superb agility so your performance is not compromised during the game. Also, this stretchable fabric combines with the pleated stitching and elastic waistband to provide an exceptional fit, so you look and feel great both on and off the court. CHECK ON AMAZON BLEVONH Tennis Skirt 8 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Lightwear and breathable for different occasions Has a one-side pocket to hold your phone or tennis ball High-waisted design Long inseam on the shorts to prevent chafing Blevonh’s tennis skirt has built-in shorts to help keep you from chafing while providing sufficient coverage throughout the game. The high-waisted design gives you a slender silhouette so you don’t have to compromise on your appearance in order to play your best game. There is a good variety of colors to choose from in this tennis skirt. There is also a side pocket embedded in the shorts that offers a secure and discreet location to store personal belongings like mobile phone or car keys. All in all, this is a very practical choice that you must consider. CHECK ON AMAZON Head Tennis Skirt 9 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Spandex material helps you stay dry throughout the day Pockets large enough to fit a spare tennis or golf ball Moisture-wicking polyester blend fabric Built-in shorts liner Here are the first impressions people will have of you after they see you wearing this tennis skirt by HEAD: she is trendy, sophisticated, and athletic, basically all the characteristics befitting the modern female athlete. That’s enough reason to buy this skirt, but there are plenty of features it offers that make it a compelling purchase. The snug banded waist helps you feel more secure as you make swift movements around the court. This is activewear that you can use for sport or a casual day out with friends, as the design is suitable for both purposes. Also, the blend of polyester and spandex ensures this skirt is amazingly breathable while being stretchable enough to provide a secure and comfortable fit. CHECK ON AMAZON RBX Tennis Skirt 10 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has an elastic waistband for a better fit Stretch woven fabric is good for running and hiking Two side pockets including a compression pocket Stylish minimalistic appearance A common problem many female athletes face when purchasing tennis skirts is the coverage provided by the built-in shorts liner. This is definitely not a problem with the RBX’s tennis skirt, as the integrated shorts inseam measures 4.5-inches, which is pretty amazing as it effectively provides coverage for almost any movement you can possibly make on the tennis court. Another useful feature offered by this skirt that makes it a compelling option on our list is the two side pockets that make it pretty convenient to carry essential items. Plus, the wide elasticized waistband ensures you get to enjoy an excellent fit, so the skirt remains in position throughout the game. CHECK ON AMAZON | Buying Guide: Tennis Skirts Tennis involves a lot of swift movements, and you must wear something that allows you to move as freely as possible. Tennis skirts are designed to facilitate this fast movement, but not all are made the same. In fact, some tennis skirts are made with fabric material that is quite uncomfortable and can lead to chafing, sweat buildup, and skin irritation, making them unsuitable for wearing during either training or professional matches. The best tennis skirts are lightweight, breathable, moisture-wicking, comfortable, and offer excellent coverage with a shorts liner. So, how do you make the distinction between a good tennis skirt and a substandard one? To help you make the right choice, here is all the information you need to make an informed purchase decision. How Did We Choose The Tennis Skirts On Our List? To choose the best tennis skirts, we analyzed the products by taking into consideration the following aspects: 1. Customer reviews We checked the reviews posted by customers to pick out the tennis skirts that have received the best overall aggregate reviews. Customer reviews are perhaps the most important source of information to consider when it comes to vetting products, and that's why we have placed great importance on them while choosing the products on our list. 2. Product features It's important to evaluate each tennis skirt on its individual merits. What fabric material is it made of? Is the stitching durable? Is it breathable? Does it offer moisture-wicking? Does it come with a shorts liner? These, and much more, are important features to consider. We have done just that and found skirts that tick all of these boxes. 3. Price We looked for high-quality skirts available on the market that came with affordable price tags. This allowed us to find options that offer excellent value for money. Of course, there is a direct correlation between the price of tennis skirts and the quality they offer. More expensive options will most likely give you long-lasting durability, enhanced comfort during training sessions, and exceptionally breathability even on a hot sunny day. But this does not mean you must shell out hundreds of dollars every time you need a good tennis skirt. Our list includes some amazing options that deliver phenomenal quality while being light on the pocket, so all you must do is pick out your favorite ones. What Are the Things to Consider While Choosing Tennis Skirts? Here are a few things that should be taken into account while choosing tennis skirts. Freedom of movement The only way you can play to your utmost potential is by wearing a tennis skirt that offers you complete freedom of movement. This means that the fabric should offer sufficient stretchability so it does not pull at your skin when you make swift movements on the court. Always good to have pockets It's a plus if tennis skirts offer pockets. While you would usually need pockets to store personal belongings, tennis attire has pockets to keep spare balls. This comes especially useful during the game as you always have a ball in hand. Appealing design The cut of the skirt is the most important factor to be considered for two reasons: aesthetic and movement. Every design, be it an A-line, plead, or side cut, offers a distinct look and feel that complements the unique style of the player. To find out what works for you, figure out which style appeals to your the most and would feel the most comfortable on the court. As far as movement is concerned, skirts are only as easy to move in as the stretchability of the shorts liner underneath. If the shorts liner is not stretchable enough, you would find it tougher to move on the court. Hence, ensure the fabric material used to make the shorts liner is sufficiently stretchable. What Is the Price Range of Tennis Skirts? The price ranges for tennis skirts vary based on their designs, specifications, and brands. The minimum price range of tennis skirts begins at $9.99, and the maximum price goes to $85 for the options on our list. The price range varies because of the material used, the design, and the product features. What Are the Types of Tennis Skirts? Tennis skirts are also referred to as skorts. They vary in length, with most measuring between 11 to 15 inches. 1. Skorts Skorts tend to look like regular shorts, but they have a layer of fabric covering them from the front. They sometimes come with short leggings beneath them to make a combination of skort and skirt. This skirt style is worn by tennis players of all skill level and is mostly worn for fashion and styling purposes. 2. Skirts Skirts are perhaps the most commonly worn attire by tennis players. They have a shorts liner underneath which provides sufficient coverage during the game. These skirts are also used in schools as cheerleading outfits, or for normal everyday wear. 3. Elastic waistbands These skirts provide comfort while being fashionable and move when the player moves to create a more attractive look as a whole. Sometimes they come with a vertical, lateral zip closure to give the best fit. 4. A-line skirt The A-line skirt gives more comfort to the player during the game. It does not cling to the legs and allows easy athletic movements. 5. Pleated skirt This type of skirt is the traditional one that is worn the most. It has narrow folds which facilitate movement while playing. Some Other Categories of Tennis Skirts Tennis skirts are also categorized in the following classes: Adidas woman's mode tennis skirt is a high-end product; it ranges around $54 because of the sweat-wicking fabric it has used The athletic skort is an affordable tennis skirt priced between $9.99 and $15.99. it comes with a pocket in it and is available in almost every size UV protection tennis skirts are affordable and high-quality skirts that offer protection against harmful UV-rays found in sunlight, at least to the portion covered There are numerous types of skirts available on the market. They have different sizes, colors, materials, and various uses as per consumer preferences. How to Wear a Tennis Skirt? A tennis skirt is styled in numerous ways. We've highlighted below some of the combinations and styles that you can wear a tennis skirt. You can wear a tennis skirt with a jacket or blazer on the top to give a casual and elegant look You can also wear it with a crop top It can be styled with an oversized sweater | |||||||||||||||||||
82 | 81 | https://www.si.com/review/home-workout-bench/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
83 | 82 | https://www.si.com/review/best-step-up-box/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
84 | 83 | https://www.si.com/review/bike-wheel-light/ | Cycling in low-light conditions, either in the early morning or evening, without any lighting on your bike can be quite dangerous. This way, you won't be entirely visible to the incoming traffic, which may result in disastrous accidents and crashes. Apart from the basic headlight and taillight, the bike wheel lights can be a great addition to your bike. They improve your overall visibility and safety throughout the nighttime, particularly when viewed from the side. However, as soon as you start listing all the available options, you will quickly notice that the internet is absolutely flooded with numerous styles and colors. So, we decided to make things easier for you and select some of the best bike wheel lights in 2022 that you can possibly find. Let's start from our number one spot and cycle through all the other products as well. | Picking the Top Bike Wheel Light Of 2022 Active Life 2-Pack Wheel Light – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It includes lights for both of your bike wheels A straightforward installation procedure that doesn’t require any prior experience Works on most types of bike wheel that measure 23 – 29 inches These bike lights come with a lifetime guarantee policy Let’s start up the list with the all-new and redesigned Active Life Bike Wheel Lights. This is a 2-wheel pack that is suitable for both toddler bikes and adult bikes. With their powerful lightning capabilities, these wheel lights will definitely assist you in gaining more visibility from all directions. Furthermore, they also come with a free guidance video that explains the entire setup process in just a couple of steps. To top it all off, the Active Life Bike Wheel Lights also come with a lifetime warranty. So, if they aren’t working properly or you’re disappointed with how they look on your bike, reach out to the support team, and they will gladly answer your request as soon as possible. CHECK ON AMAZON Brightz LED Bike Wheel Light – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features They are assembled in the USA Resistant to any type of weather conditions – rain, fog, or snow These wheel lights are around 7-feet long You can power them using AA batteries In the runner-up position, we have the Brightz LED Bike Wheel Lights, which are carefully manufactured and designed in the USA territory. They are made out of a 7-feet water-resistant tube, and consist of around 20 micros LED lights that illuminate brilliant and vivid colors. The Brightz LED Bike Wheel Lights can be slashed or spiraled throughout the ring to perfectly match your wheel size. In order to turn them on, you will need to insert 3 AA batteries, which are not included in the packaging, so you will be required to additionally purchase them. Usually, one set of batteries can last for around 48 hours and maybe even more, so you can enjoy ride after ride without worrying about replacing them. CHECK ON AMAZON Dorras Waterproof Bicycle Wheel Light – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The bike wheel light designs change every 4 seconds Doesn’t require any additional tools 2 different operation modes that can be controlled with a press of a button The full picture is presented at around 13 miles/h The Dorras Waterproof Bicycle Wheel Light can illuminate up to 30 different kinds of light patterns. You will be able to install this device to your wheels in just a couple of seconds without having to use any additional tools. Once installed, you can select between 2 operation modes – automatic lighting (the lights turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity) and manual switch (turn the lights on and off manually). If you want to enter automatic mode, you will need to hold the on/off button for around 2 to 3 seconds. On the other hand, if you wish to manually turn them on and off, just press the button once. Furthermore, to see the entire pattern design, you will need to reach at least 13 miles/h with your bike. If your speed is below 12 miles/h, the wheel lights will only present half or part of the pattern. CHECK ON AMAZON Sumree Basic LED Wheel Light – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features They are accessible in 7 different color combinations It is built and designed by best brand in this zone The wheel bike lights arrive in a colorful package box They feature 20 LED lights for better lighting capabilities Interested in making your bike more noticeable at night and attractive to the public eyes? Then, you should clearly see the brand-new Basic LED Wheel Lights presented by a pretty popular manufacturer – Sumree. Throughout the last years, Sumree has massively gained trust from their customers and is one of the leading brands in this industry. The wheel lights are available in 7 great color shades, including rainbow, blue, color-changing, green, red, pink, and white. Furthermore, you will be able to switch the lights from “constant” to “flashing” mode to attract even more attention. On top of this, the Sumree Basic LED Wheel Lights comes with a beautiful-looking packaging box, which makes it the ideal gift for one of your best friends or family members. CHECK ON AMAZON TINANA Ultra Bright Wheel Light 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The overall craftsmanship of this bike wheel is astonishing It works on all kinds of bicycles The included screws will firmly keep the wheel light in position Friendly assistance support that is open to all kinds of requests Lastly, we have the TINANA Ultra Bright Wheel Lights. With high-brightness LEDs and a durable design, these lights will certainly exceed every small bit of your expectations – it is definitely worth every penny. Thanks to the screw mechanism, the lights sit on your bike wheels tightly, so you don’t have to worry about them falling down. They are ideal for all sorts of bikes, including folding bikes, roadway bikes, sprint bikes, mountain bikes, etc. If you seem to have any queries or concerns related to this specific bike wheel light, you can freely reach out to their support via Amazon – they will gladly help you. CHECK ON AMAZON | Bike Wheel Lights Buying Guide As we originally stated in the guide, there are absolutely thousands of offerings available. So, how on earth will you be able to find the most fitting one for your bike? Well, don't worry. In our buyer's guide, we will take a peek at some of the most prominent factors you should give thought to when buying your very new bike wheel lights. So, let's hop right into it! What Are Some Vital Things to Look at Before Buying Bike Wheel Lights? Power supply The first thing that you should surely put into consideration when purchasing bike wheel lights is the power supply. Most of them use the next types of batteries: Rechargeable batteries LR battery types CR batteries AAA & AA batteries Usually, the average battery life of the bike wheel lights can range from as low as 8 hours and all up to 50 hours, depending on the type of battery type and lighting system. The ultimate choice will basically come down to your driving requirements and preferences. For instance, if you plan to use your bike on a daily basis, then we strongly suggest that you look for rechargeable models so that you can avoid buying new batteries all the time. On the other hand, if you plan on driving your bike every now and then, you should stick with AAA or AA batteries. Brightness The brightness of the bike wheel lights is also a pretty influential factor to think about. Just remember, the brighter the light, the safer you'll be. Generally, most of the models are made out of powerful LEDs and feature great brightness capabilities. However, just to be on the safe side, be sure to look for wheel lights that have at least 12 pieces of LEDs. Mounting instructions The mounting instructions are a pretty important thing that nearly all of you forget to look for when shopping for your new bike wheel lights. While the majority of the manufacturers will offer you step-by-step guidance in written form, there are a couple of brands that will actually provide you with video instructions that cover that entire installation process from start to finish. Color Lastly, the bike wheel lights can appear in all sorts of designs and shades. This really comes down to your personal preferences - some people may find the purple color more attractive, while others will prefer green. There are a couple of bike wheel lights that will allow you to switch between various colors as well. How Much Do Bike Wheel Lights Cost? The price of the bike wheel lights can vary enormously depending on some crucial factors, including the type of model you're looking at, the brightness of the LEDs, the manufacturer that stands behind them, the overall battery life, and the number of wheel lights included. Typically, you should anticipate paying from as little as $19 for some basic models and all up to $90 for some of the best ones on the internet. Don't forget to state a clear budget range and eliminate all the bike wheel lights that are far off your scope. How Did We Pick the Best? We examined hundreds of bike wheel lights throughout the whole internet network and succeeded in picking the best ones possible. Here are the factors that assisted us during the process. Reliability - This is the most fundamental factor, particularly for us. We did our best to find bike wheel lights that offer great reliability and will last for several years without any problems. Testimonials - We carefully reviewed numerous testimonials and noticed what customers genuinely think about that specific bike wheel light and whether they are really satisfied with their purchase decision. Manufacturer - There are literally a ton of manufacturers that are selling bike wheel lights. That's the reason why we tried to include the most reputable brands only. What Are the Main Kinds of Bike Wheel Lights? Light strip The light strip wheel lights typically include around 18 or more LEDs that are separated from each other in an identical way as the Christmas tree lights. The main advantage of these particular wheel lights is that they can complete the full-circle effect pretty quickly. However, they usually require more batteries to function. Spoke light The spoke light device has fewer LEDs and is attached to one spike of the wheel. They usually create a cool-looking pattern while driving. However, in order to get the full-circle effect, you will need to reach high speeds of at least 15 miles per hour, and sometimes this can be pretty hard. Wheel hub light They are connected to the wheel hub and can present you with the lightning effect almost immediately. However, the brightness of their effect is slightly darker and less visually appealing. Also, it can be pretty challenging to find the proper model for your bike since their clamp mechanism is limited. | |||||||||||||||||||
85 | 84 | https://www.si.com/review/best-boxing-short/ | Boxing shorts can become part of a boxer’s identity. If you want to be noticed in the ring, you will want a pair of boxing shorts that capture your personality and set you apart from the rest. If you fight an opponent with similar features to yourself, some people may only be able to tell you apart from your boxing shorts. Especially if they are sat far from the ring... or if you are bruised and battered! Boxing shorts should keep you covered will you move. They should also be comfortable and made from a material that keeps you cool and doesn't hold you back. Some boxing shorts also offer both mild protection and back support. When fighting in a tournament, you should consider designated dress code rules. With so many boxing shorts available on the market, it is difficult to have the confidence that you can buy something suitable to wear. To assist you in finding your perfect pair, we have created a list of the best boxing shorts of 2022. | Best Boxing Short Worth Considering in 2022 Anthem Athletics Boxing Short – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Aggressive side slits allow you to plunge forward and kick freely without fear that your shorts will tear. The Anthem Athletics Classic Muay and Thai Boxing shorts have a 4-way stretch crotch with freedom of movement in mind. The material is a lightweight fiber to keep you cool and is machine washable. These stylish minimalistic shorts come in a variety of colors. The pull string waist allows you to tighten the waist whilst stretching to let you move more freely. PROS Pull string waist to tighten or loosen as you see fit Side slits allow for easy movement Four-way stretch crotch also allows for easy movement Light and machine washable CONS Some boxers may prefer a bolder design CHECK ON AMAZON Tuff Boxing and Muay Thai Short – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Above all else, we totally recommend these boxing shorts for any woman serious about Muay Thai, boxing, or any other form of combat sport. The Tuff Boxing and Muay Thai Shorts come in a range of different colors and beautiful designs. They are unisex and available in a variety of sizes for adults and children. These shorts will make you stand out from the crowd. They have a stretchy waist and are made from a lightweight microfiber fabric. In addition, these shorts are handwash only. PROS Beautiful design Lightweight microfiber Unisex shorts are great for any person, but these look particularly good on women CONS Some might find these shorts too short No side slits CHECK ON AMAZON NAMAZU Muay Thai Short – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features These shorts are unisex and suitable for adults and children. The lightweight material is also moisture-wicking, meaning it will draw sweat away from the skin – a necessary part of the body’s natural cooling process. NAMAZU Muay Thai Shorts come in several striking designs and bright colors. These shorts are made from 100% polyester with a satin sheen that adds a little glamor to the ring. PROS Lightweight Moisture-wicking fabric Bright eye catching design CONS These shorts are very short – but maybe you want to show off your massive thigh muscles! CHECK ON AMAZON MMA BJJ Unisex Cross-Training Athletic Short – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features These shorts are made using a breathable fabric with sweat-wicking capabilities, keeping you cool under pressure. The double-stitched reinforced lycra panels allow for complete motion in every direction. These shorts also come with a massive 5-year warranty. If that doesn’t show confidence in the item’s quality, I don’t know what does. The MMA BJJ Unisex Cross-Training Athletic Shorts are perfect for a multitude of activities. They are made with stretch fabric and an inner pull string waist. The velcro and hook closure is comfortable and reliable. PROS Made with stretchy, moisture-wicking, and breathable fabric.buying Long warranty The secure yet comfortable fastening Not too short a length CONS Some people may prefer shorter and less skin-tight shorts CHECK ON AMAZON MRX Men’s Boxing Short 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features If you suffer from back pain when boxing, these are the shorts for you! The thick elasticated waist constricts your back muscles and gives it support. MRX Men’s Boxing Shorts are available in four colors. They are made from polyester and have a shiny satin finish. These shorts look how you would imagine traditional boxing shorts to look. The extra stretch of soft advanced material allows great flexibility and movement. PROS Traditional style Back support Made from moisture-wicking and lightweight material CONS Sizing may run a little small CHECK ON AMAZON Farabi Sports Muay Thai Short 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Nono-pores technology provides a fast moisture-wicking effect, keeping you drier and cooler in any situation. Farabi Sports Muay Thai Shorts have a thick elasticated waist which acts as abdomen protection and back support. These shorts have augmented slits that will help you run rings around your opponent. Farabi Sports Muay Thai Shorts look fabulous with black and gold satin and a beautiful high-quality embroidered tiger. The high-quality satin material is lightweight and cool to wear literally and figuratively. PROS Moisture-wicking material Back support Augmented side slits for better flexibility CONS Only available in one color and design CHECK ON AMAZON LAFROI Men’s MMA Cross Training Boxing Short 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The velcro and drawstring keep these shorts secure whilst allowing for flexible movement. The LAFROI Men’s MMA Cross Training Boxing Shorts are suitable for various sports, not only boxing. The shorts possess a subtle pocket which will be useful for a variety of sports. LAFROI Men’s MMA Men’s Cross-Training Boxing Shorts come in several striking designs that look like they have manga and anime influences. These shorts are made from anti-tear polyester, which is lightweight and moisture-wicking. PROS Variety of designs to choose from Lightweight and moisture-wicking material CONS No side slits CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Boxing Shorts Buying Guide If you would like to learn more about how to buy the right boxing shorts, you may want to check out our handy buying guide. We have broken down the most important factors to consider, as well as the price you should expect to pay for a quality pair of shorts. Things to Consider When Buying Boxing Shorts There are many things you should consider before buying your next pair of boxing shorts. These include: Size Wearing the wrong size boxing shorts can affect your entire performance. If your shorts are too small, they will feel constrictive and prevent you from moving as easily. Shorts that are too small can cause chafing and sores. Buy shorts that are too large, and they may fall and lose you the game, as well as give the audience more than they bargained for. To ensure you get the right-sized shorts, try them on if you are visiting a store. If you are buying your shorts online, make sure you check the manufacturer’s sizing chart. Every manufacturer sizes their clothing slightly differently. In addition, you should order several pairs of shorts you can easily return. This is so you can try them all on and return the ones that do not fit. To make sure you have the time to do this, order the shorts you like the look of at least a month before you are due to wear them. Quality To ensure you get good-quality boxing shorts, there are a few things you should look for; always check customer reviews. If you buy a product from a store, you can search for the same product on Amazon and read the customer reviews. Make sure the material is breathable, with a certain amount of stretch. Check that the fastenings are strong and fasten, and undo them a few times whilst you try the shorts on. Make sure there are no spaces along the seam or frayed thread. Look for reinforced seams or flatlock stitching. Features Many boxing short features will improve your performance in the ring. For example, thick elasticated waistbands will act as back support. You might also appreciate silicon-lined waistbands or breathable panels. There are many more features available that you may come across on your search for your perfect pair of boxing shorts. However, most features are simply a bonus. Stretchy material You may prefer the feel of tight shorts compared to baggy shorts. If this is the case, you will want shorts made with stretchy material, so they do not impede your movement. Side slits Look for shorts with side slits. Side slits allow you to move your legs more freely without being fully constricted. If the material is not stretchy and does not have side slits, they need to be very baggy and short to create the same freedom of movement. Lightweight Your boxing shorts must be lightweight so that you can move quickly around the ring. Lightweight material will also keep you cooler and therefore make you sweat less. Dehydration due to sweating can considerably affect your performance in the ring. Moisture-wicking material Opt for shorts made from a moisture-wicking material. Moisture-wicking material pulls sweat away from the skin. Removing sweat from the skin is a necessary part of the body’s natural cooling process. Keeping cool will massively increase your performance in the ring. Visuals The way you look in your boxing shorts matters as much as how comfortable you feel in them when you are in the public eye. You want to feel good when you get out in the ring in front of an audience. You want to feel confident, and you only want to be judged by your boxing skills instead of your appearance. A vibrant pair of shorts can become part of your stage persona and make you more easily identifiable to crowds of people. What Shorts Do You Need for Other Combat Sports? You may find that many boxing shorts can also be used for other sports. Some shorts, however, require some special features. MMA / Grappling shorts Mixed Martial Arts combines various martial arts, which means both kicks and grappling are also used. If you were going to use a pair of boxing shorts to do MMA, they would need extra features. MMA shorts are generally longer and slim-fitting than regular boxing shorts. Muay Thai shorts Muay Thai shorts are often made with satin material and are much shorter than boxing and MMA shorts. Thai shorts have notoriously flashy designs, but more subtle designs are also available. In addition, there has been a resurgence in ‘Retro’ style Muay Thai shorts in recent years. These shorts are square-cut with slimmer legs and two arched leg slits. Standard Muay Thai shorts are also typically fairly short. The wide legs of these shorts provide maximum flexibility. Some Thai fighters roll the waistband of their standard Muay Thai shorts to increase the flair and increase the ability to move in them. Kickboxing shorts / Hybrid shorts Many fighters who do MMA and Muay Thai choose to wear kickboxing shorts because the merged K1 style is like Muay Thai and MMA anyway. Various brands currently design kickboxing/ hybrid shorts to be usable across various sports, hence the name hybrid shorts. These shorts are similar to MMA shorts but shorter and lighter in weight. Vale Tudo Shorts / Compression shorts Vale Tudo shorts/ compression shorts are skin-tight shorts that are used in MMA fighting. They have less material than other shorts to reduce the amount of friction created and to have less material to cling onto. Boxing Shorts Price Range Boxing shorts can cost anything between $15 and up to $130. But, of course, you pay more for bigger brands, and in the case of boxing shorts, a higher price usually means better quality. How We Choose the Best Boxing Shorts When choosing the best boxing shorts for our recommendations, we look at the quality of the shorts, the material used, breathability, value for money, and customer satisfaction. Also, we only recommend boxing shorts that we would wear ourselves. | |||||||||||||||||||
86 | 85 | https://www.si.com/review/best-gym-bag/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
87 | 86 | https://www.si.com/review/best-pop-up-soccer-goal/ | When it’s time to play, the last thing you want to do is wait! A pop-up soccer goal makes it quick and easy for little soccer fans to get moving and playing whenever they please. It's portable and lightweight, perfect for spontaneous outdoor games with friends and family or practicing your soccer skills on the go. These goals are designed for easy setup on demand and can be taken down in seconds. Find out our top picks for pop up soccer goals below that are sturdy yet lightweight, and will fit your budget. We have selected the goals on this list because they: Can be set up and taken down quickly and easily Come with carrying cases, making them highly portable Have well-made, high-quality netting that won't rip | Pop Up Soccer Goals Worth Considering GOLME PRO Pop Up Soccer Goal – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon if you’re looking for a pop up soccer goal that is easy to carry and set up, Golme Pro is the perfect pick. The portable goals come in a set of two, complete with a convenient carrying bag to enjoy a soccer game at the park or the beach. The compact pop up soccer goals can be twisted open within seconds for easy setup and shut flat for convenient storage. The indestructible frame and high-density net make an excellent combination for a pop up soccer goal that will last you for years. It is made with an ultra-reflective net for increased visibility. The portable soccer goal also comes in various sizes to accommodate players of all ages and skill levels. PROS Easy to set up Folds completely flat for storage Stakes to keep the soccer goal secured Comes with a carrying bag for portability CONS It can be tricky to fold up after use The corner brackets can seem flimsy CHECK ON AMAZON PUGG 4 Foot Pop Up Soccer Goal – Runner up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Designed to maximize performance and portability, PUGG offers a set of two foldable pop up soccer goals. The twist-to-close design allows them to collapse into one-inch compact goals that can conveniently fit into the carrying case that comes with the purchase. The pop up goals are suitable for most surface types and include pegs to keep the goals stable on grass, sand, or turf. The high-quality knitted poly net has a hex-braid pattern for extra durability. The pop up goal is made of a single-piece spring steel frame protected by a premium denier nylon sleeve. PROS Collapsible design for easy setup and storage The goal is made of sturdy steel frame and nylon net Includes pegs to keep the goal in place Comes with additional replacement spikes CONS May be too small for older children The included storage bag may tear after use CHECK ON AMAZON GreEco Pop Up Goals Foldable – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Looking for a pop up soccer goal that is easy to assemble? GreEco offers a portable option with a twist-to-close mechanism that collapses into a one-inch compact goal. Available in four colors, these portable goals come in a set of two with their own carrying bag for convenience. The pop up soccer goals have a reflective lining for night-time visibility so that you can enjoy hours of uninterrupted play. The purchase also includes 8-inch pegs to keep the goal stable on soft surfaces like grass or sand. The fiberglass poles and reinforced net offer unmatched durability that will last for years. PROS The pegs keep the goals steady in the ground Goals set up and come down easily Come with carrying bag for easy transportation Available in multiple colors CONS Stakes may bend when pushed into the ground The stake elastic may break after use CHECK ON AMAZON Amazon Basics Pop-Up Soccer Goal Net Set – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Released by AmazonBasics, this simple pop up goal comes in a set of two and can be set up with a simple twist. It is made of Oxford cotton blend with nylon netting and fiberglass poles for extra durability, making it a reliable and economical option. The pop up soccer goals are great for young players and can be set up anywhere. They come with a handy carrying bag for storing the goals once they’ve been collapsed after use. The portable goals are best for soft surfaces such as sand or grass and may not be very sturdy indoors. PROS Sets up quickly Come with carrying bag Colors stay vibrant, even if left in the sun These goals can be folded up for storage CONS Only suited for young soccer players Cannot be used on hard surfaces CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Pop-Up Soccer Goals Buying Guide Pop-Up soccer goals afford you the luxury of playing the beautiful game however you want and wherever you want. Trust us when we say that the level of convenience that pop-up soccer goals provide is unmatched! We see that you are in the market for these portable soccer goals. So, we’ve come up with this detailed buyer's guide to take you through all there is to know about pop-up soccer goals; the best features and how exactly you may choose one for yourself! What to Look For When Buying Pop-up Soccer Goals? Are you wondering what exactly makes or breaks a portable soccer goal? How to choose the best pop-up soccer goal? Well, we looked at three main variables in quality for a pop-up soccer goal when coming up with this list and recommend that you do the same. Material & durability Pop-up soccer goals consist of a frame and a net. The frame is either made from plastic, PVC, or metal. While plastic goal frames are lightweight and cheap, PVC frames are generally more firm and durable. Metal (usually aluminum) goal frames are found in the most premium portable soccer goals. They rank highest at the longevity scale. However, due to their density and the hefty price tag attached to them, metal frames are less common in pop-up soccer goals. Most pop-up soccer goals boast nylon netting, though nylon tends to fall apart after extended usage. Thus, the best pop-up soccer goals come with nets made of a sturdy rope mesh, like something you'll find in regular goal posts. Portability & convenience What good is a portable soccer goal if it isn't.... portable? We thus recommend opting for pop-up soccer goals that are lightweight, easy to pack and set back up again. Ideally, you shouldn’t ever worry about having to carry these bad boys to your next practice session. The best of these portable goals even come with storage bags! Warranty The best pop-up goals usually come with a significant price tag attached to them. Thus, it doesn't hurt if the manufacturer backs the product with a reassuring warranty. These warranties can be anywhere between a year to even five years! Warranties provide a sense of security and are thus one of the factors to look out for in pop-up goals. Tips for Buying Pop-up Soccer Goals After evaluating dozens of portable soccer goals, our team came up with this list of buyer tips that we believe will prove extremely helpful to you when in the market for one. Pegs or weighted? Most pop-up soccer goals are lightweight and so should be anchored to the ground with their pegs. Others are weighted and do not need any anchoring. So, if you are wondering which one is best for you, here’s some guidance. It really comes down to your personal preference. If you are okay with your game being restricted to playgrounds, backyards, and other soft surfaces, we recommend going for the portable and cheap option of pop-up goals that require anchoring. If, however, you would like to play on concrete surfaces and are willing to pay the premium, then a weighted option may be what you need. Size We recommend considering the age of the players who would be using it when you're deciding on the size of the goal that you need. 2-to-4-foot mini pop-up goals are great for kids aged six or less, and even for adults when it is time for drills or casual pick-up games. However, for ages 6 to 10, we recommend opting for portable goals measuring 6 x 12 feet and 6 x 18 feet for those in their pre-teens. A regulation-sized goal is 8 x 24 feet and a similar-sized portable goal would help adults both hone their skills in practice and in tearing the field during a match. How Much Do Pop-up Soccer Goals Really Cost? Are They Worth It? You can find a decent pop-up soccer goal for $40 to $100. This price range will get you plastic or PVC soccer goals that are around 4 to 8 feet in width. If, however, you are looking for the best portable soccer goals that money can buy, you can find ones in the range of $100 to $250. The cheapest pop-up soccer goals do not cost more than $10 to $20. Small (usually 4 feet or less in width) and composed of cheap materials, these portable goals are sure to break down after a dozen or more kicks. We thus do not recommend giving them any thought when in the market for a portable goal. At this price, the size of the goal would be large (close to regulation size), and the materials would be top-notch. Storage bags will also accompany the goals for added convenience and portability. The premium price tag will also sometimes get you nets that boast fancy features like shock-absorbing technology and a secure locking system. How We Choose the Best Pop-up Soccer Goals Meticulously researched and personally evaluated by our team of soccer enthusiasts, these portable goals provide the best of both form and functionality. We are in no way implying that these products do not have a few pros and cons. However, we looked at every individual use case for portable goals and these products were the ones that aced most of them. To come up with this list of the best pop-up soccer goals, we also went through the genuine reviews of customers who bought and reviewed them on Amazon, Target, and Best Buy. The opinions of others helped us get as much unbiased information as possible and aided us in making a more informed decision. There are a plethora of brands that offer portable soccer goals. With so many options to choose from, it can be hard for the average person to make an informed decision all by themselves. So, we utilized personal experience and the reviews of other buyers to choose the best pop-up soccer goals for you. | |||||||||||||||||||
88 | 87 | https://www.si.com/review/recumbent-exercise-bike/ | If you've ever been to a gym or even a fitness center, you probably know how a recumbent bike looks like. These are exercise bikes that focus on providing the user with as much comfort and support as possible during their workout. The best recumbent bikes will provide you with back support, typically cushioned or padded, a set of handlebars near the seat, a digital screen, and a lot more. We have gone through extensive research in order to provide you with the best recumbent bikes for 2021. Read on! | Best Recumbent Exercise Bike NordicTrack Commercial Studio Cycle – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The NordicTrack brings the quality you can expect from a high-end gym into your home. This recumbent bike has everything that you can ever wish for while doing an intense workout. It features a digital touchscreen and iPod-compatible Bluetooth audio. Its 22-inch HD touchscreen allows for 360-degree rotation and streams iFit content directly. The fashionable design is backed up with serious quality, including 24 resistance levels from silent magnetic resistance. It can handle 350lbs of weight capacity. Lastly, it comes with a 10-year frame warranty. Go beyond regular workout stats and use your heart rate, elevation, and intensity to learn more about your workout and visualize your progress. Enjoy thousands of on-demand workout skills without leaving your home. This recumbent bike has a silent magnetic resistance that delivers a smooth, quiet workout with every use. PROS It has a smooth motion of the wheel You have 24 resistance levels to pick from It offers smooth motion of the wheel CONS It requires a power connection to operate CHECK ON AMAZON Marcy Recumbent Exercise Bike – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The Marcy recumbent bike is both compact and strong in its design. With heavy-duty construction, you can pedal with peace of mind. It also features standard magnetic resistance, with 8 resistance options. It supports a maximum weight capacity of 240lbs. The seat and backrest are padded with high-quality foam, and it’s pretty straightforward to mount and dismount before. And finally, it also has an LCD screen that allows users to track their fitness through various metrics. Even though it’s only a basic model and doesn’t have any special features, it offers a comfortable training setting for light cardio. The bike is also the perfect piece of equipment for individuals that struggle with joint pains or injuries. This bike will perfectly fit in your home workout space, as it is pretty compatible. PROS It is pretty easy to use and install before and after the workout It is a pretty affordable option when compared to others Offers up to 8 levels of resistance CONS There isn’t any port for entertainment CHECK ON AMAZON SCHWINN 270 Recumbent Bike – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Suppose you are looking for a recumbent bike for seniors to have a comfortable, stable, consistent, and low impact workout, then without any dilemmas. In that case, you should get a Schwinn recumbent bike. The range of resistance, flexibility, and four profiles makes this the ideal choice for multiple users. The most useful features that you will love about Schwinn 270 recumbent bike are the 29 workout program, 25 resistance levels, the option to download workout data, mobile phone connectivity, and a lot more. It has a maximum weight recommendation of 300 lbs. It also has an adjustable fan to keep you cool while you’re working out. PROS Light in weight and easy to fit It has pretty comfortable seating with a padded touch You can pick from 25 resistance settings CONS The only con that we can consider is that it has a pretty complex user manual CHECK ON AMAZON MaxKare Recumbent Exercise Bike – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features With the seat adjustable lever, it is pretty easy for you to move the seat front and back. The handles are also made out of vinyl foam and have a heart rate device installed in them. This recumbent bike will help you track your exercise data, including time, distance, calories, and heart rate. The iPad holder can let you enjoy exercise and entertainment at the same time. With transportation wheels, you will easily move the bike to wherever you want. Enjoy the fun of exercise! The MaxKare Recumbent bike gives you a smooth and quiet riding experience. It has 8 different magnetic resistance systems, and the max weight capacity is 300lbs. Ergonomically designed seat and backrest equipped with a comfortable, high-quality sponge. PROS It has an adjustable pedal strap A tablet or phone holder that can come in handy LCD monitor displays and tracks your exercise data CONS The pedal straps aren’t as durable as the other products on the list CHECK ON AMAZON Nautilus Recumbent Bike 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features With enhanced Bluetooth connectivity, the user can set, track and control progress with popular app-based tracking tools. And with the world app, you are able to discover a wide variety of route lengths, and new destinations added each month. Order it right now! The Nautilus R614 model is a recumbent bike with many features to offer and comes for a great price. With this bike, you will get 25 brake resistance levels, a multifunctional console, including a sound system and fan. The DualTrack blue backlit LCD console displays up to 29 customizable workout programs for you to choose from. It has an adjustable padded seat that can handle a maximum user weight of 300 pounds. PROS It has access to the Explore The World app Padded seat with ventilated back on sliding seat rail It has a pulse tracker CONS The only con that we can mention – slightly expensive than the rest CHECK ON AMAZON Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Recumbent Exercise Bike 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features You can hunt your exercise progress with the LCD monitor. With the 8 levels adjustable tension control system, you can easily maximize your workouts. This fitness machine has a pretty wide bike seat with back support. Grab the padded handlebar for intense cycling sessions. Utilize the integrated display to hunt your distance, RPM, speed, calories burned, and pulse. Maintain the stability of your recumbent bike with the help of built-in levelers. After your workout, you can easily move this portable bike using the built-in transportation wheels. When we compare it to other recumbent bikes in this price range, the Sunny SF-RB4602 offers all the things you can ever wish for. It has an impressive user weight capacity of up to 250 lbs. And not only that, due to its angled seat adjustment system and long base frame, it can suit tall users up to 6’5″ while providing a healthy leg extension. PROS Built-in transportation wheels for easy portability Adjustable 8-level magnetic tension system Large seat and back cushion CONS Assembling the piece is quite difficult CHECK ON AMAZON Progear 555LXT Magnetic Tension Recumbent Bike 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It has three computer goal workout settings of distance, time, and calories burned. ‘Step Thru’ design allows simple on and off the bike. 250 pounds weight capacity. Durable and stable steel frame construction. Widescreen Computer LCD provides large numbers for easy viewing. Computer features odometer, time, distance, speed, calories burned, and RPM. 14 levels of smooth Magnetic Tension resistance. Fully lab tested for durability and endurance. Cushioned backrest provides lower back support. 250 pounds weight capacity. User height range of 5’0 to 6’3″ It also has a built-in water bottle and phone holder for easy access when working out. The PROGEAR 555LXT bike really can help you accomplish your fitness goals and help make you healthier than ever. It allows you to program your workout aims, whether it is time, distance or calories burned targets, to achieve the workout you want. ‘Quiet Drive’ belt system allows quiet and uninterrupted workout sessions. PROS It consists of 14 levels of smooth magnetic tension 3 Computer goal workout settings Extended cushioned seat size for all of the users CONS The seat appears stiff CHECK ON AMAZON | Recumbent Exercise Bikes Buying Guide Famous for their outstanding comfort level and ease of use, recumbent bikes will surely help you on your way to fitness. Nowadays, this kind of stationary bike can be found in just about every fitness center, making it one of the most popular sports equipment on the market. However, if you're a new user, the chances are you'll end up being quite confused by the number of varying features and price ranges that you will encounter while shopping for your new recumbent bike. It's crucial to make a smart choice when buying a recumbent exercise bike. So that is why we created this guide to help you choose the best recumbent bike for your needs and circumstances. What Should You Consider Before Buying Recumbent Bikes? Size & Space It's particularly important to consider the size of recumbent bikes as they can take a big part of your space. Make sure that you measure out a chosen space in your house where the bike will go, and if you are pretty short on space, then you can consider buying a foldable recumbent bike that you can easily store out of sight when you aren't using it. Resistance Without the resistance, your body will not feel the result of the training. That's why it is important that you get a recumbent bike that creates an adequate level of resistance. A good machine should come with various resistance levels. Magnetic resistance is good since you can pick the amount of resistance that you need. A bike with at least 8 resistance levels is a great place to start. It is ideal for newbies and seasoned fitness needs. Some of the bikes on our even have over 20 resistance levels for a great challenge. Capacity The weight capacity of the recumbent bike is something that you need to consider. You need to ensure that your weight falls within the range of the bike. For example, if you see that the weight is not within the range, then that recumbent bike isn't for you. In most cases, people with bigger weights will damage the bike easily. The tear and wear can also be high under such circumstances. Durability Whether you are looking for a professional recumbent exercise bike or one for personal use, durability is key. It will allow you to experience the best times with your recumbent bike and for a long time. Steel Frame: Be sure to look for recumbent bikes with the type of frame. Steel is highly durable and can withstand the most demanding workouts. Anti-Corrosion: Again, look for a bike that comes with the best anti-corrosion touch. A good example is one that has a powdered finish. This finish keeps luster and prevents any dulling. How Much Do Recumbent Bikes Cost? The recumbent bike is actually a big investment, and you can expect them to cost from as low as $130 and all up to $3.000 or even more. Of course, an expensive recumbent bike will provide a range of accessories that you don't even need. And some of the most expensive models are simply overpriced, as you can find much more affordable recumbent bikes which offer just the same features. Fortunately, this particular equipment is available in different price ranges, which makes it entirely suitable for people of various budgets. How Did We Choose The Best Recumbent Bikes? We have researched hundreds of recumbent bikes before making the final decision. And every product on the list passed the CBV test (Customer Rating, Brand, and Value) Customer Reviews Buyers have posted their honest impressions online, and these types of reviews have really helped us. We have gone through hundreds of them and managed to choose recumbent bikes only with the best rating. Brand When picking recumbent bikes, the brand is maybe the most important thing. The best brands will always offer quality products to their customers. Value Since there is a huge gap in the price range, we didn't want to include highly-priced products and offered features that you won't even use. We've managed to pick the best quality recumbent bikes at the most affordable prices. What Are The Most Important Features Of The Recumbent Bike? Odometer An odometer is a digital meter that will show you different workout parameters. Basic LCD screens are the most common and can only be found on more expensive recumbent bikes. This screen displays various workout parameters, including: Heartbeat rate Time elapsed Distance traveled Current speed Calories burned This is a pretty significant feature to have for any workout. It lets the person that's working out trace their progress. The data gathered will also come in handy when you want to progress to the next level. Seat A comfortable seating place is a pretty important feature to have. You may not think about it just now. However, it'll become obvious as you move on. Padded seats provide great comfortable seating. As such, you can work out for a pretty long time without feeling tired and uncomfortable. Built-in USB port and speakers If you are looking for a top recumbent bike with the most modern features, an integrated USB port, and speakers, then you can expect to pay a little bit more. You can listen to music during the hard training session and also charge your phone or other devices if you need them. Conclusion We've reviewed the best and most trusted brands to bring you the top recumbent bikes on the market with choices for all prospective buyers. We really hope that this buyer's guide will help you in the final purchase decision. | |||||||||||||||||||
89 | 88 | https://www.si.com/review/helmet-headphones/ | We can all agree that helmets and headphones don't really go so well together. Either your headgear will not be able to incorporate loose wires from earphones or the headset will not be designed to keep snugly in place while wearing a helmet. The prospect of listening to your favorite music while cruising down the street or ski slope isn't out of reach. Say hello to the best helmet headphones in 2022. Helmet headphones are specifically tailored to meet your audio needs while your ears are safely tucked away under a helmet. Whether you are snowboarding, riding a bike or skiing, you don't have to take off your helmet to listen to music or make a call. These earpieces are designed in a way that keeps them safely in place and provides you with volume and playback controls without having to fidget with your helmet. We’ve picked our favorite helmet headphones based on these specifications: Compatible with a wide range of phones Reliable battery life Water resistance | Best Helmet Headphone Worth Considering in 2022 WildHorn Outfitters Alta Helmet Headphone – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features 40 mm drivers that offer HD sound over Bluetooth 5.0 Playback time of 10 hours Compatible with the majority of audio-ready helmets Resistant to water, dust, and sweat WildHorn Outfitters Headphones are our top pick because of the simple, modern design, premium sound and long battery life. The high-definition audio quality of the Alta Helmet Headphones is delivered by 40 mm drivers over Bluetooth powered by a 5.0 chipset, and promises balanced dynamic sound and deep bass at any volume level. You can control your music, respond to calls with the built-in hands-free mic, and even activate your phone’s assistant by simply pressing on the ear cups of this headset. CHECK ON AMAZON JZAQ Motorcycle Helmet Bluetooth Headset – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Fits most helmets Phenomenal battery life of 50 hours playtime and 200 hours standby Rated IPX7 for water resistance Connects to 2 phones at the same time The JZAQ Motorcycle Helmet Bluetooth Headset does things a bit differently and allows you to wirelessly connect to two phones simultaneously. Both phones will display the battery percentage of the earpiece. This helmet headphone comes equipped with a 900 mAh battery that takes only 2 hours to fully charge. A full battery on these earphones will get you 50 hours of non-stop music or talk-time and around 200 hours of standby power. While this headset checks all marks on fit, battery, and connectivity, the volume, noise cancellation, and sound quality are pretty average. It’s quite good for the low price, though. CHECK ON AMAZON VR-robot Motorcycle Helmet Headset – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Supports Bluetooth 5.0 coverage within 20-30 meters of the device Detachable design that fits into most helmets Phenomenal price point 8 hours of battery time and 160 hours on standby Powered by a Bluetooth 5.0 chipset, the VR-robot Wireless Motorcycle Helmet Headset allows you to go hands-free when it comes to listening to music or receiving calls. The high-powered connectivity means that you get a lag-free experience when vibing to some tunes. These Bluetooth helmet headphones boast a decent battery that gives you 8 hours of non-stop playing time and 160 hours of standby time from just a 2-hour charge. Customers particularly love its price to performance ratio and the loud sound quality. CHECK ON AMAZON THOKWOK Helmet Bluetooth Headset – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Powered by Bluetooth 3.0 with the option to connect the headset via audio cable Can connect up to 3 riders in an 800-1000 meter range 300-hour standby and 8 hours of playtime on a 3-hour charge Decent sound quality for the low price point Water-resistant Whether you’re out on a biking trip with your pals or would like to ski in a formation and need to be in constant communication with your companions, you should look no further than the THOKWOK BT-S3 Helmet Bluetooth Headset. This helmet headset allows you to connect with up to 2 other riders for a seamless intercom experience. We particularly loved the Bluetooth range on this bad boy which is a full 1 km, without obstacles though. You can even connect your phone to it and listen to music and answer calls wirelessly or via the audio cable that comes included. CHECK ON AMAZON LEXIN Motorcycle Bluetooth Headset 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Can connect with 10 users simultaneously for intercommunication within 2 km Can play and share music with another user over Bluetooth 5.0 15-hour battery life with a standby time of 1 week IP67 rating for water resistance The LEXIN B4FM Motorcycle Bluetooth Headset turns the entire helmet intercom headset thing up a notch. You can pair this bad boy with up to 9 other riders over a range of 2000 meters for the ultimate formation ride. Along with communication, you can even share the music that you’re listening to with another user. A fan-favorite feature of these helmet headphones is their great battery life. You get a talk/playtime of 15 hours straight and a standby power of up to a week on a single charge. The sound quality is also decent and there is minimal loss when you’re cruising down the highway at high speeds. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Helmet Headphones Buying Guide Cruising down the highway or riding down a ski slope while listening to your favorite music or communicating with your friends sounds fun. Don’t let buying a pair of helmet headphones get in the way. Here is a comprehensive buyer's guide. What Are the Different Types of Helmet Headphones? While most articles on helmet headphones classify the devices as wired or wireless, we decided to ditch the wired ones entirely. So, in this article, we'll be looking at these two types of wireless helmet headphones: Standard helmet headphones Helmet intercom headsets So, it goes without saying that you must decide on a type depending on your needs before moving on to purchase. Let's now take a brief look at the two types of helmet headsets: Standard Helmet Headphones Standard helmet headsets are just like your normal headphones except that they effortlessly fit into your biking or skiing headgear. They stay put while on the ride and offer wireless connectivity that lets you play music, answer calls, and listen to the radio or GPS instructions without having to fidget with your phone. A complete hands-free experience. Helmet Intercom Headsets Intercom Bluetooth headphones offer all that the standard models offer except they also allow you to pair up your device with other users. This is great for when you'd like to go on a ride or would like to snowboard down the hill while being in constant communication with your partners. Intercom models like the LEXIN B4FM Motorcycle Bluetooth Headset even allow you to share your music with other users. Pretty neat if you ask us. Factors To Consider When Buying Helmet Headphones Now that you know all about the two types of wireless helmet headphones, here are two things that you must consider when in the market for one: Fit & Comfort First and foremost, you must consider the size and fit of your new helmet headset. While most models are compatible with most types of headgears, it is still wise to compare the size and thickness of the earset with the dimensions of your helmet. You must also consider the overall snugness and comfort of the headset's fit. We recommend that you check out the customer reviews to get a better idea of this. Battery Life Trust us when we say that you don't want your headset to die on you while you're speeding through the highway or about to freestyle down the ski slope. So, make sure that your new headset has decent battery life. Along with considering charge time, you must also look at the playback and standby time. Playback time basically means how long your headset can play sound in the form of music or voice chat before dying. Standby time is like the headset's shelf life before the battery will drain out and it will need a recharge. Regardless, you must always charge up your headset before going out on a long drive. We also recommend that you opt for helmet headphones that display their battery percentage on your phone when connected. Buying Tips for the Best Helmet Headphones These two killer tips will help you make a more informed choice when looking for a new pair of helmet headphones: Connectivity As far as connectivity on wireless helmet headphones goes, the devices on this list are powered by Bluetooth. The exact chipset can either be 3.0, 4.0, or 5.0. While a greater number usually means better connectivity, we recommend that you check out the customer reviews that talk about the overall connection experience. What you should be looking for is a headset that offers quick connection, a large range, and a relatively lag-free audio experience. Water Resistance Whether you need a helmet headset to communicate with your fellow skiers or simply need one to listen to GPS instructions while speeding down the motorway, it's wise to invest in something that offers some sort of water resistance. You can get a better understanding of water resistance and its ratings here. Moreover, if you need a pair of headphones for skiing or snowboarding, you must also consider its resistance to low temperatures. How Do We Choose the Best Helmet Headphones? When compiling our top-picked list, we looked at these two things: Mic Support All the Bluetooth helmet headsets in our best-of list offer mic support. This is important as an integrated mic allows you to seamlessly talk without having to connect an external mic that might cause discomfort. We also ensured that the integrated mics were of decent quality and the spoken word can transmit without distortions. Sound Quality While the headset's mic determines the quality of the sound that we input, its drivers dictate the quality of the output sound. This can be in the form of voice or music. We ensured that all our top-picked wireless helmet headphones boasted decent drivers that produced a good sound that was loud and clear enough to listen to or enjoy while at high speeds. | |||||||||||||||||||
90 | 89 | https://www.si.com/review/best-sports-headband-for-men/ | We all love to workout and play sports but it can be so distracting when we constantly have to wipe the sweat off our foreheads to keep it from running into our eyes. That’s why a lot of us wear sports headbands. They help absorb and redirect sweat so you can stay focused on the game or your workout. So which is the best sports headband for men in 2022 one for you? Check out now our top picks for the best sports headbands for men. | Comparing the Best Men's Headband Temple Tape Headband for Men and Women – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This four-inch wide headband is thin and lightweight so it can even fit under a helmet. And the stretchy material does well at wicking sweat so it doesn’t feel soaked at the end of an intense workout. PROS Quick-dry fabric No-slip design ensures the headband stays in place Great choice for hot-weather sports where you plan to sweat a lot CONS No size options CHECK ON AMAZON Tough Headwear Winter Fleece Ear Band Cover – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon When it’s time for cold-weather sports you’ll be glad you have a nice fleece headband like this one. It’s smart design fully covers your ears to protect them from the cold and wind. PROS Slim design can be used with ski helmets or hard-hats Does well at staying in place Helps you stay warm without messing up your hair CONS Only one size option CHECK ON AMAZON WharFlag Sports Headband Bandana – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Get a six-pack of these multiuse headbands and you’ll have a variety of fun patterns to wear with any outfit. Plus the wide design means you can easily wear it as a headband, neck scarf, or even a face mask. PROS Made from lightweight microfiber polyester Available in subdued colors or bright, funky patterns Quick-drying fabric CONS Thin fabric and stitching is not the most durable long-term CHECK ON AMAZON Halo Headband Sweatband for Both Women and Men – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon With a unique silicone band across the forehead area to redirect sweat away from your eyes and a quality moisture-wicking fabric, this headband is the ultimate in hot weather sweat control. PROS Nice variety of color options Tapered fit designed to fit most heads Anti-microbial protection for odor control CONS A little pricey CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Men's Sport Headbands Buying Guide A sports headband is often worn by men involved in sports like tennis, football, badminton, athletics, etc. These accessories are still pretty popular among athletes around the world for many reasons. Not only do they help prevent sweat from dripping down your face, but it also keep your hair out of the way. And in some cases, they can keep your head warm while you're exercising in the cold weather. Of course, with so many headbands to pick from, how do you know which one will be the most suitable for your head AND your needs? You can pick from one of our suggestions above, or you can use our guide below to help you find the most suitable sports headbands for your needs. What to Consider Before Buying a Sports Headband for Men? Fit One of the essential things to put into consideration while searching for a sports headband is ensuring that it perfectly fits your head. Of course, a headband that's too loose is going to move around, but picking the right one might also move towards the back of your head—plus, they can be painful. And when you're actively running, it is pretty disturbing to continuously have to adjust your headband. Make sure to get your measurements correctly before clicking the buy button because what fits many people might not fit you. Material You want your sports headband to absorb sweat and stop it from dripping down your face while you exercise. This means that you will need to look for a headband made of a material that quickly absorbs sweat, such as polyester and nylon. You also want to look for a material that dries quickly so the headband doesn't feel icky on your head. Furthermore, you might want to search for a fabric that won't smell after it absorbs all of your sweat. Width The width depends on your personal preference. Some people prefer sports headbands that are only one or two-inch wide, while others prefer wider sports headbands, covering the entire forehead as well as a part of their hair. If you want your headband to also give warmth, you may want to choose a wide one so that it can cover your ears as well. This can be especially important if you're training outside in all types of conditions. Wider headbands also do a great job of ensuring thick, long hair stays off your face. Thickness Some users prefer their headbands to be thick because it allows the material to absorb more sweat. Others prefer their headbands to be thin so that they don't even feel that they're wearing a headband. This depends on your needs, so pick correctly! What Is the Price Range of the Sports Headbands for Men? The sports headband's price range mainly depends on the material it is made from and the brand that made it. It can typically range from as low as $5 and up to $100 for the top-tier headbands. We suggest you spend a little more so that you can get a quality headband. How Did We Choose the Best Sports Headbands for Men? When picking our top sports headbands for men, we have put into consideration a variety of factors. So here are some of the most important ones: Customer reviews- we have analyzed a bunch of customer ratings before developing the final list. These reviews give you first-hand and complete information from real-world users about their Football Headbands For Men. Product reliability - The endurance and durability of the sports headbands for men should be a major indication of how long you will be able to use them. So that is why we have put this as the second factor when making a list. Value- When making the final pick, we have also put into consideration the price of the sports headbands. Whether you are looking for budget-friendly, top-tier, or something in the middle, we have managed to pick various headbands that will fit everyone. What Are the Most Common Features of a Sports Headband? UV Be sure to protect yourself against the ultraviolet radiation from the sun. There are headbands that are designed for best protection in sunny environments. Although these ones can be more expensive, it is worth every single penny. Machine washable Not everyone has the time or the tolerance to hand wash their headband after an exercise or run. So it is pretty important to look for headbands that are machine washable. You can notice this in the specifications or product description. Color Headbands come in all kinds of colors and designs. So since you will be wearing it daily, you should think about getting a design or color that will be the most appealing to you and will match your sportswear and equipment. Some of the brands only offer a limited selection, while others include camo and stripes in their selection. Conclusion Headbands for sporty people provide comfort and prevent sweat from entering their eyes. We have made a list of our best sports headbands for men, and now, you can choose the most suitable one from our list depending on your preferences and needs. | |||||||||||||||||||
91 | 90 | https://www.si.com/review/best-plyo-box/ | Most fitness trainers suggest using plyo boxes to practice exercises that will increase your muscles' tensile strength. While doing them, your muscles will be extended to the maximum level, followed by an immediate contraction. To help you practice plyometric exercises perfectly, we have handpicked the most durable and the best plyo boxes in 2022. These boxes have different heights and dimensions, allowing you to practice jumping exercises to enhance the strength of your extensor and flexor muscles. The options that we have chosen are ideal for both gym and home use so that you can comfortably perform your favorite exercises anywhere. Let's see why these plyo boxes are so well-reviewed and loved by thousands of customers. | Best Plyo Box Yes4All Wooden Plyo Box – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made from high-quality wooden ply boards for increased longevity Two surfaces with holes created on it for easy portability There are internal bracing locks at the box’s edges for solid construction Comes with rounded corners, which will help in jumping with full force This plyo box from Yes4All has a cuboidal structure which means that you will have three different jump height options to choose from, depending on your fitness level. With this durable wooden box, you can perform several exercises for better speed, agility, and increased muscle tensile strength. In addition, the cut-out handles on the plyo box will allow you to carry it from one place to another with ease. The edges have a puzzle lock system to ensure that the box has a solid construction, making the product indestructible. CHECK ON AMAZON BalanceFrom 3-In-1 Plyo Box – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comes with three different height options Made from foam material for durability and reduced injury risk Has an anti-skid surface that will prevent accidental falls during the box and squat training Lightweight jump training box for better portability If you want to buy a plyo box that is functional and durable, then this is the best option. Unlike the usual plyo boxes, this one is made of foam material and has an anti-skid surface so that you don’t fall off accidentally while training. The rectangular plyo box has three different heights marked with different colors for easy identification to ensure that you are using the right height to increase muscle strength and agility. CHECK ON AMAZON JFIT Adjustable Plyo Box – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features All four top corners are covered with rubber padding to prevent injuries Comes with a non-slip rubber feet The set has a stackable design for better storage Frame is built with heavy-duty steel for durability Usually, plyo boxes are used for jump and squat training. However, JFIT has introduced a set of single-height benches that you can use for different exercises for enhanced agility. The ploy box set has an open design, with a steel framework and rubber feet to prevent skidding while jumping. The stackable design of the plyo box set makes it extremely compact, great for storage, and smaller workout spaces. In addition, you can adjust the height of the box set to ensure that your muscles are trained in different ways for increased agility and movement speed. CHECK ON AMAZON Garage Fit Wooden Plyo Box – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has puzzle joints for handling the weight of about 350 pounds Comes with rounded corners to reduce the chances of getting injured Has three different height settings for better jump training Equipped with a center support structure If you want a piece of equipment for stimulating different muscles in your body simultaneously, this wooden plyo box will be a perfect choice. Even though normal ply boards are used in the construction, their edges have locking designs that provide a solid structure to the overall product. In addition, this plyo box comes with three different height options, unlike the square options that only have one height. So, you can change the jump’s height by simply rotating it and placing it flat on any plain surface. CHECK ON AMAZON Bound 3-In-1 Wooden Plyo Box 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has a solid construction to provide better durability for squat jump training The square design is great for helping beginners practice explosive exercises The box can be dismantled to save storage space Comes with pre-drilled holes for quick assembly If you are looking for a durable, multi-functional wooden plyo box, this is one of the best products you can get in the market. You can practice different exercises with this box, including squat jumps, step-ups, and many more. It is made with plywood of 3/4″ thickness, which increases the entire box’s durability. You can dismantle the plyo box easily, thanks to the different square drives and screws that come with the pack. All six faces of the box can be fitted tightly using just a simple mallet, making the assembly quick and easy. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Plyo Boxes Buying Guide Plyo boxes are one of the most versatile pieces of gym equipment with which you can practice a wide array of exercises. However, the main purpose is to train your muscles explosively to increase tensile strength and endurance. From step-up jumping to box squat jumping, several exercises can be done using these plyo boxes to help you stay in shape and tone your muscles. All the products that we have mentioned in this buying guide come with different features set to cater to the needs of gym trainees of all fitness levels. If you're not sure which option is ideal for you, we encourage you to read this buying guide for a better understanding of the materials, features, and price range of different plyo boxes available on the market. What Are the Different Types of Plyo Boxes? Plyo boxes may be a simple piece of equipment, but it has a few different types that you must know about before buying one. In the section below, we have outlined some of the most common types of plyometric boxes you'll find in the market: 3-in-1 plyo box The 3-in-1 plyo boxes have different heights because of their rectangular design. Therefore, you can rotate them for jumping and squat training at different heights. These plyometric boxes are perfect for both beginners and pro trainees alike. Stackable jump training boxes The stackable plyo box doesn't have flat faces covering the edges. Rather, a heavy-duty steel frame is used to manufacture the plyometric box with surface padding. These products are available in sets of four to six individual boxes having different sizes. Since they have an open frame design, you can stack one plyo box over the other for storage. Wooden plyo box You can understand from the name itself that these plyo boxes are made from wooden boards, solid wood, or plywood. In addition, they usually have puzzle interlocks with bracings on the insides for improved durability and solid construction. Soft plyo boxes Another common type of plyo box is the soft kind. They are made from high-density foam with a rubber material covering the surfaces. Hence, you won’t have to worry much about getting injured during the training exercises using these boxes. What Are the Factors You Need to Consider When Choosing the Best Plyo Box? Size And weight The first factor you have to consider before choosing the best jump training box is its size. These boxes are usually found in two different shapes- a cuboid and a cube. All the edges have the same dimensions in the cubical boxes, while the cuboidal boxes have different heights. Based on the shape of the box, the weight will also vary. You have to make sure that the boxes are lightweight so that you can carry them with ease. Construction material You also need to pay attention to the construction material of the plyo boxes. Usually, steel, wood, and foam are three major materials used to design the plyometric jumping boxes. Steel is used to manufacture the stackable boxes' framework as it provides higher durability and endurance to the frame. Wooden plyo boxes are mainly made from wood boards like plywood, fiberboards, and even solid woods. These are lightweight and better for beginners. If you want to use the foam plyo boxes, you need to make sure that only high-density foam is used. It is because the HD foam can resist early sagging with ease. Portability No matter what kind of box you plan to buy for jump training, it should have a portable feature. For example, in some products, you can see two opposite faces with holes. Using the holes, you can carry the box from one place to the other. In addition, if the box is lightweight, you won't have to invest too much physical energy moving the product. Jump surface Before choosing a plyo box, you need to make sure that the jumping surface on which you will land is not slippery or made with thin material. Having an anti-skid surface in the plyometric box will help you control your motion and maintain balance immediately after the jump. Also, it will prevent slipping off the surface and injuring yourself in the process. Purpose Lastly, the choice of the best and the most appropriate plyo box will depend on your purpose. For example, if you want to train your muscles differently for improving agility and tension, a 3-in-1 plyo box will be the ideal choice. Similarly, for CrossFit training and heavy-duty exercises, a high-density foam plyo box is the best choice. What Are the Features to Look For in a Plyometric Box? You need to ensure that the feet on stackable plyo boxes have an anti-slip grip that will keep the box stable while you're jumping on it. In the hollow wooden plyometric box, there should be a central framework for increasing the construction stability of the product. Also, you need to check whether or not the plyo boxes have a proper joinery structure. For example, internal bracing in the boxes enhances the durability while the puzzle joins along the edges provide a solid construction design. How to Get the Best Results With a Plyo Box To use the plyo box, you must first ensure that the floor is not slippery or wet. In case the floor is made from slippery material, use an anti-skid mat to cover the surface. Subsequently, place the box flat on the floor, making sure that it is the correct height. Once you are sure about the box's stability, you can start practicing the jumps, squats, step-ups, and many more exercises. | |||||||||||||||||||
92 | 91 | https://www.si.com/review/grip-trainer/ | Physical fitness is very much essential in these times when we don’t have much time to hit the gym every day. Nowadays, strength training is top-rated, and people are paying attention to their physical health. When doing different exercises like chin-ups, deadlifts, and much more, the grip should be proper. For making things easy, grip stretchers are the best as they will help you improve the grip for better training. Especially when you are going to do the lifting, you need them! Get the best grip trainers in 2021 for your workout and medical needs. Some of the best products that you might consider buying are as follows: | Best Grip Trainers Worth Considering in 2021 NIYIKOW Hand Grip Strengthener – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Best for hand exercise for people suffering from Carpal Tunnel Tendonitis and Arthritis Comes with adjustable resistance; you can adjust it starting from 22lbs to 132 lbs Perform exercise anywhere you want, be it your office or home Made from high-quality and durable plastic Get this hand grip strengthener in two different colors that include black and grey. This product is excellent as it will strengthen your forearms, wrists, fingers, and hands. Moreover, it also helps you in injury rehabilitation and improves your grip. It will also help in relieving stress and improve your stamina. PROS Adjustable Resistance Fits all hand sizes Lifetime warranty CONS May not hold up under frequent use CHECK ON AMAZON GRM Strength Trainer – Best Value 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features You can easily set the resistance from 11 pounds to 132 pounds The hand strength grips are going to provide more diversity to your hand exerciser A kit includes finger adjustable grip trainers, a finger exerciser, and much more The handgrip can be used by athletes, rock climbers, golfers, and tennis players Get this product in three different colors that include black, red, and blue options. The material used for the product’s construction is ABS material, TPE soft rubber, and stainless steel spring. It weighs 14.07 ounces, and its dimensions are 7 x 5.6 x 2.2 inches. You can use this product for forearm exercise by adding a mechanical counter to the bottom. PROS Soft rubber grip Workout kit included Great for all hand sizes CONS Wears with frequent use CHECK ON AMAZON IronMind Hand Gripper – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comes in 11 strengths for a custom fit; made by a company in the USA It comes with excellent built quality, and it is also an affordable option You can use it for playing baseball, golf, training for shooting, OCR, and climbers Wear it when you are going to do weight lifting for a better grip Get this product in different sizes as per your need. It is one of the best hand strengthening and training tools at the same time that you can consider buying. This product has knurled aircraft-grade billet handles made from aluminum. It is precise, durable, and built quality is very good. PROS 11 strenghts for custom fit High quality Aluminum handles CONS Rough grip can be uncomfortable CHECK ON AMAZON Friendly Swede Stress Ball – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Great for focussing, relieving stress, and training hands along with the forearms This item can be used by both adults and kids who want to make their grip better Egg shape design that comfortably fits inside your hands The material used for manufacturing is thermoplastic rubber Get these hand therapy squishy balls in small, medium, and large size options. The item weighs 7.2 ounces, and its dimensions are 6.46 x 2.99 x 2.36 inches. More importantly, these are available in different colors with three levels of progression, which include 20, 30, and 40lb resistance. PROS Lots of color choices Friendly design Good for kids and adults CONS Sticky texture Lacks durability CHECK ON AMAZON Pnrskter Store Hand Grip 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features It will help you in balancing your grip muscles and expanding muscles Great for people who suffer from carpal tunnel, tendonitis, and arthritis Suitable for all ages and will fit nicely in all different hand sizes The rally value for this product is 30 to 50 lb This company offers two different products that include a hand grip strengthener and a finger exerciser. The product we are going to discuss is the handgrip. The high-quality silicone is used in making this item. It is hard to tear, and you can easily wash them when you need to! Perfect for improving the skill of fingers and strengthening your wrists. PROS Fits all hand sizes Includes 6 PC kit Lots of different colors CONS Not good for small hands Not good for beginners CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Grip Trainers Buying Guide Want to improve your finger or grip while doing different kinds of sports or weight lifting? If you are going to say yes, you should get the grip strengthener for your hands and finger! You will see different varieties of grip stretchers when visiting the market. But before you step out and move toward the market, you should keep the following essential details in your mind as below: What are the different types of grip strengtheners? Let's begin our discussion with different types of products that you can buy for improving your grip. Spring-based These are fitted with the handles, which are further separated by the bound spring and hinge. Note that spring and tension are responsible for determining the overall resistance. Articulated These are particular pieces of equipment that will do the raining by individually squeezing your fingers. The construction of this equipment includes springs that will separate the contact patches from the central platform. Coil This type is made using a metal coil. When you grip it, the coil will go back to its original position on each negative rep. What important features to check when buying a grip trainer? Now, let take a look at the vital features that you should look at when you are going to buy a grip strengthener for your use: Fixed vs. adjustable Resistance is an important thing which you should ignore! Note that there are two types of strengtheners are present! One has a fixed one, and you can easily adjust the resistance as per your choice. These are best for releasing stress. On the contrary, adjustable ones are very versatile as you can do exercise for an extended period in one piece of equipment. The only drawback in this type is that they have moving parts, so durability is not that great. Resistance level The core element when doing exercise is the resistance levels. It is best to pick a grip according to your level of expertise or relevant to the result you want to get! For instance, a pro athlete will not use the same strengthening as the person in rehabilitation. Usability Not every grip stretcher is made for everyone. You have to be fully aware of your needs and ensure that the product you will pick is easy to use. Check the product or read the specification before buying to know about the ergonomics. How do we pick the products for you? Our readers are a source of inspiration for us. As they like to read our guide, this motivates us to write the best and bring the best product as per their need. Wondering how we are picking the products for you? Below is the answer for you, and you can do the same thing to find the best product you want to purchase: Customer reviews Reviews available on Amazon and other retail websites help in making the right decision. Carefully read the reviews given by the people as they have used that particular product. Brand Carefully pick the brand from where you are going to buy a product. You should know their track record of providing that particular product or service. Buy things from a brand with a good reputation. Price The product you are planning should fall within your budget. Always compare the price of a single product between two or three companies. After that, pick one that is close to your budget. If you are confident about getting a quality product, don't hesitate to spend a little extra. How to use a grip trainer? There are different ways to use the strengtheners for improving the strength of your grip: Place your thumb on one side. On the side, you have to place your index and middle fingers for squeezing the equipment. You can also consider squeezing the equipment with your thumb and middle finger. Some people might use their thumb and index finger to press the strengthener. People can also use their thumb and wrap the four fingers around the equipment for squeezing. To squeeze the grip trainer, you can place your palm on one side, ring, and pinky finger on the other side. | |||||||||||||||||||
93 | 92 | https://www.si.com/review/best-volleyball-set/ | Volleyball is a game that can be played by people of ages. It’s a fun game that requires and can build stamina and teamwork. A portable net can provide a way to improve hand-eye coordination, balance, and other reflexes while playing at home or at the park with family and friends. Competitive and non-competitive players alike, look no further than The Best Volleyball Sets for 2022 listed below. | Comparing the Best Volleyball Sets this Year Baden Champions Volleyball Set – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This net is made for all-season fun including everything needed for competitive play. Pump, ball and racquet include jumping right into the game. PROS The pole height on the Baden Champions Volleyball Badminton Combo Set is built to adjust to suit player needs Designed with thick boundary lines to avoid tangling Set up quickly with minimal effort CONS Volleyball looks smaller than standard size Badminton racquets are made with light materials CHECK ON AMAZON Park & Sun Sports Spiker Portable Outdoor Volleyball Net System – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This set is designed for quality fun with family and friends at home or while enjoying the outdoors. The net is made with industrial-strength materials for long-lasting game play. PROS Park & Sun Sports Spiker Sport: Portable Outdoor Volleyball Net System is designed with stakes that dig deep for support Net is made to be used for sand or grass setups Designed with a taut net that won’t sag CONS Poles aren’t fully adjustable CHECK ON AMAZON Amazon Basics Outdoor Volleyball Set With Net – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This straightforward volleyball set is designed with everything needed for a quick match or historical tournament. PROS AmazonBasics Outdoor Volleyball And Badminton Combo Set is designed with easy to follow instructions Made to withstand everyday use and poles are developed to not leave holes Boundary lines and net are bright for heightened visibility CONS Full net length is 30 feet CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Volleyball Sets Buying Guide Volleyball as a sport can be played both professionally and leisurely. You don’t need a lot of skills to play the game, either. A little enthusiasm and team spirit and you’re good to go. To get started in this fun-filled and athletic sport, as a beginner or a professional who wants to include extra training hours at home or a newly married couple who wants to host the next barbeque event, you need to acquire a volleyball set. This set doesn’t have to be expensive if you don’t want it to be, as there are affordable options in the market that can give you the desired result you want. A volleyball set comes with a volleyball, a net, and a host of other support equipment such as boundary markers, pump, poles, ropes, stakes, and bag. In this article, you will learn the basic features to look out for when purchasing a volleyball Set. What Are the Features to Look Out for in a Volleyball Set? The purpose When buying a volleyball set, it is important that you define the purpose of your purchase. Finding out why you need a volleyball set will help you decide on which type to go for. There are several types of volleyball sets; from the portable vs permanent set, to the complete net system vs net only, to the indoor vs outdoor set. Portable vs permanent Buying a portable volleyball set probably means you’re a beginner at the sport, or you need it for leisure (picnics and beach hangouts). While this set is a great option, it is not as durable, so you may have to replace it with time. It won’t take you long to set it up; a couple of minutes and you’re ready. They are less expensive than the permanent sets. They are usually used for recreation, so they are an outdoor set. The good thing is that you could set it up in any environment; grass, sand, granite, to name a few. Your portable set usually comes with a bag so you can pack it up for later and store it indoors when it’s not in use. The permanent volleyball set requires more precision and effort when setting them up so it could take longer than a couple of minutes. They could be used indoors and outdoors and usually come with regulation-sized nets and poles. These sets are more durable than the former because they could be used professionally for competitive plays or leisurely for casual fun. You can install or uninstall the poles of a permanent set at will. Professionals or schools might find this more fitting to their cause. You do not need a complete set system if you are going to a public beach or park. You can easily get a net only for this purpose. However, if you’re playing at home, you might need to set it all up, so a complete net system will do. The former is best for serious plays, and the latter is strictly for leisure. The indoor set could work if you have enough space in your home or school. The balls and poles are lighter and have smoother surfaces. The outdoor set is advisable if you want to play at the beach or the park. Outdoor volleyballs are much heavier to withstand winds and other natural elements. They are also more durable, have rougher surfaces, and are water-resistant. The Design/Accessories The design and accessories should be considered when buying a volleyball set. For instance, you could go for sets with telescopic poles and it should be aluminum or steel, not iron, so it doesn’t rust quickly. It should have adjustable handles and well-stitched net tapes. You should be able to adjust the net tension and the height of the poles. The net system should be designed for easy assembly and portability if it is a portable set. It should also come with a durable bag. There are several interesting features to look out for when buying a volleyball set: the color, stakes, boundary markers (ropes and straps), air pumps, whether it could be set up close to the pool, or if it comes with an on-net scorekeeping system. Make sure the one you get suits your needs, both short-term and long-term needs. The Size/weight The size also matters a lot. If you’re getting a professional set, those usually come with a regular-sized net and are more durable. If it’s for leisure, you should get a size that’s fitting to your cause, especially if there are kids involved. The Quality/Material The quality of a volleyball set should be well considered. Even though quality usually depends on price, you can still get affordable options from good brands. The materials of the net and poles should be of good quality. Thick poles and net should last you longer. You should also decide on the material of your volleyball. It could be synthetic or leather. A thick synthetic volleyball will last you long and can be used for any purpose. Leathers are usually used by professional leagues and are often more durable, although there are various grades of leathers, so the durability often depends on the grade. You can compromise on the two by going for composite leather, a hybrid of the two. They are usually less expensive. Other types include rubber, youth which is kids-friendly, and women-only volleyballs which are smaller and lighter than those of the men. The ease of use If you’re a beginner, then you should go for a volleyball set that is easy to use. There are several brands that cater to specific needs and skillsets. Some for professional games, others best for beach use or indoor games. You should get a set that is easy to set up and disable if the need arises. Read the product information to ensure that what you’re going for is the right skill set. The price The price of a volleyball set varies. While there are expensive options, there are still less expensive options. Find one that works with your budget but is still of good quality. The purpose of your use will, of course, determine your budget. A portable set is less expensive than a permanent or professional set, and a complete net system is more expensive than a net only. If you are planning to be conservative in your spending, then you might have to ignore a couple of fancy features or you could go for sets sold on discounts or best deals. | |||||||||||||||||||
94 | 93 | https://www.si.com/review/leg-abductor-machine/ | There is no debate on why it is a great idea to work on your abductor system. The abductor is responsible for shifting your body away from the centerline and targeting your thighs and hips. The best leg abductor machines will allow you to target abductor muscles particularly, rather than free exercises. This guide will assist you in spotting the best leg abductor machines available on the market. We've got you covered, whether you're short on space and need a small leg press or have a full-size home gym with room for a hack squat and leg press sled. From incline plate-loaded designs to cable pulley systems that fit into existing home gyms, we'll guide you through what to anticipate from each form of abductor exercise. | Compare The Best Leg Abductor Machine of 2022 Leikefitness Leg Abductor Machine – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The adjustable design allows it to accommodate people of all sizes and shapes Foldable and movable machine is easy to store and use Made of heavy-duty steel frame, PU leather, and PP foam The maximum weight carrying capacity of 330 lbs. Look no farther than the Leikefitness leg abductor machine if you’re searching for a space-saving option that will help you strengthen your glutes, quads, and core. Don’t be fooled by the timid name; this rugged machine is an essential tool for increasing lower body muscular growth. It is made of a heavy-duty steel frame with a foam foot holder to provide maximum support and stability during workouts. The comfortable rear cushion and non-slip footplate are constructed while considering the needs of athletes to withstand the higher strain. This leg abductor machine is extremely easy to use and store. You don’t need to assemble it. Just unpack it, unfold the cushion, and fix it with the pin, as simple as that. CHECK ON AMAZON YNXing Leg Abductor Machine – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made of an eco-friendly PVC material The foam protective handle quickly absorbs sweat Lightweight design makes it simple to use and store The S shape construction provides strong toughness and elasticity The YNXing leg abductor machine is compact and portable, allowing you to reduce weight whenever and wherever you choose. Correct leg form, straightening your chest posture, slender arms, and strengthening the back are only a few examples of what you can achieve with this multi-functional machine. Because of the triangle form of this leg abductor machine, the legs have to work harder to get the deep muscle effect. The handle is attached to the solid steel pipe and maybe tightened arbitrarily and securely. You also have multiple color options to choose out for this particular model of leg abductor machines. CHECK ON AMAZON Aduro Leg Abductor Machine – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Features spring steel core The handles include a sweat-absorbent Soft foam cushioning provides a pleasant grip while ensuring your safety It’s small and light, making it portable and convenient to use Exercise with the Aduro leg abductor machine to get smaller abs, legs, arms, thighs, and other areas. The construction materials are iron and ABS plastic that makes it versatile and sturdy. It also comes with sweat absorbent handles which help provide you with a comfortable grip whilst working out. The Aduro leg abductor machine is lightweight for easy storage and that is why it woks great as a home gym exercise equipment. Aduro offers a LIFETIME no-hassle warranty on this leg abductor machine; if you have any problems with it, Aduro will replace it or give you a full refund. CHECK ON AMAZON Popsport Leg Abductor Machine – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Rollers with a smooth motion help guide your legs into place Features an extremely strong steel structure Maximum weight carrying capacity of 330 lbs. Comes with a user manual The Popsport leg abductor machine features strong construction and a steering wheel assembly that provides a robust and progressive stretch. A cushioned seat with a backrest, padded foot supports, a gear system and a detachable self-locking rotating wheel are included with the Pro leg stretch machine. The Popsport leg abductor machine has adjustable width, so you may extend your legs depending on what you feel is the appropriate extent. You can sit back or lean forward. The options are endless with this leg abductor machine. This is ideal for maintaining flexibility in any activity. It can be used at home or in the gym. CHECK ON AMAZON Batterymon Leg Abductor Machine 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Compact design is simple to carry and store Made up of spring-loaded steel core for durability Lightweight equipment is excellent for at-home strength training Features 5.5cm bold spring for improved resistance The triangular design is much more stable and stronger When the Batterymon leg abductor machine is not in use, the compact design makes it simple to transport and store. The multifunctional design of this equipment enables you to do effective arm, shoulder, buttock, thigh, and leg toning workouts. This leg abductor machine has a spring-loaded steel core that is coated in 33cm of soft foam to provide comfort and support. Simply notify Batterymon if you are dissatisfied with their goods for any reason. Within 6 months of your purchase, they are prepared to refund or replace the item. It is a piece of simple equipment that aids with stress reduction as well as joint flexibility and mobility. It’s ideal for strength training at home. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Leg Abductor Machine Buying Guide Leg abductor machines for total body or leg abductors are available on the market in a variety of styles. Martial artists, athletes, and yoga practitioners can use these stretching devices to improve their flexibility by targeting practically every major muscle area. Here is what you should know about leg abductor machines before you make the final choice. Which Factors to Look For in the Best Leg Abductor Machines? Construction and quality Even while home leg abduction machines aren't manufactured to the same high standards as commercial gym equipment, you can still acquire a well-made machine for your home gym. Look for qualities that are long-lasting, such as a strong steel frame and smooth-moving components. Design Home leg abduction machines come in a variety of shapes and sizes, so don't be startled if some of the products on this list don't look like the commercial gym machines you're used to. Some types need you to sit on the floor and only have a few sections and pieces for resistance and extending the abductor's muscles. Others have a raised seat (similar to the equipment you'd find in a commercial gym) and a full set of weight plates, but they're more expensive. Available space Because many leg abduction machines demand your legs to be fully stretched in front of you, they are usually quite long. Others, particularly those that imitate commercial gym models, take up a lot of floor area. You'll want to make sure you have enough room for a full range of motion by comparing your available space to the dimensions of the machine you're contemplating buying. Motion capacity Some of the greatest leg abduction machines provide you with a full range of motion with your legs, which is crucial if you want to improve hip flexibility. Others even let you stretch your upper body while abducting your legs. Price and guarantee When it comes to price, home leg abduction machines are all over the place. Basic models with one or two moving components can cost as little as $50, while you can spend up to $2000 on more complex equipment similar to those seen in a commercial gym. If you choose a more advanced model, make sure to read the manufacturer's warranty policy to see if the frame and moving parts are covered. Why Should You Use Leg Abductor Machines? Leg abductor machines have a lot of advantages. Why do sportsmen favor abduction machines over other machines to train themselves? If they want to heal as quickly as possible from a sports injury or boost their stamina, leg abduction machines are a perfect choice. The benefits of this crucial equipment are to help you appear stronger and be the better version of yourself. Sitting and exercising are incompatible, yet this machine is one of the few that allows the user to sit comfortably while exerting force and stress on the hip muscles. Because the machine only allows you to lift a tiny amount of weight and the load is not shifted to your body, you are less likely to suffer from injuries. Abduction also reduces the effect of knee valgus, a frequent knee condition in young women or people with muscular imbalances that give the knee a knock-knee appearance. It also activates muscles and enhances performance, both of which are essential for improved sports performance. Most people have weak pelvic muscles due to spending more time sitting, which prevents them from participating in sports. Weak gluteus muscles might cause several limitations in the workplace. Patellofemoral pain syndrome (PFPS) and iliotibial (IT) band syndrome result from the weakening of the abductor. The weakness in the gluteus medius, in particular, can be addressed by the abduction of the muscles, which reduces muscle soreness. How Do You Pick the Best Leg Abductor? The most important factor to consider when purchasing leg abductor equipment is comfort. There are a few other things to consider as well: Solid construction Leg-training equipment is often built with a sturdy material that allows for safe use and efficient performance. Always opt for lightweight materials that are easy to transport and store. Padding and foam Many consumers have expressed their dissatisfaction with the lack of cushion and padding. So, for added comfort, make sure the machine you're considering buying has a padded seat, knee cushions, and handles. Adjustability If you want the best results, you need to modify the length and width of your leg stretching machine. It makes it possible for multiple members of the same family to use the same device simultaneously. Smooth operation The stretching movement should be gentle, and the return movement should be smooth as well. Angle of stretching For most users, a maximum stretching angle of 180° is sufficient. A leg stretcher that extends beyond this angle may injure you. Wrist straps Wrist bands make holding the leg abductor machine while stretching your legs like a breeze. The woven pieces of cloth or leather wrapped around your wrist help keep everything in place. They can also help you avoid getting hurt. Excellent warranty Most manufacturers include a limited or unlimited warranty that can last anywhere from 90 days to 5 years. Some leg abductor machines may not come with any kind of guarantee. So, before you buy something, make sure a guarantee covers it. Ergonomic design Ergonomic design is required to assist users in correctly positioning themselves. A leg stretching machine should be easy to use, safe, and comfortable to work with. It should also be lightweight and easy to transport. Simple to assemble Some leg stretchers are pre-assembled, while others may need to be put together. To assemble it correctly, carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions. Also, check the machine's measurements to ensure that it will fit through your door if you're thinking of placing it outside. A leg stretching machine can improve your flexibility and help you get the most out of your workouts. How to Use a Leg Abductor Machine? Here are some important tips for you to get the best results by using leg abductor machines: Make it a routine Muscle tightness can be felt by anyone, regardless of age. As a result, understanding and practicing simple stretching exercises might be beneficial to your general health. Leg Stretching for Adults is a great way to get your legs in shape. As people get older, they often experience stiffness in their muscles and joints. Simply incorporate stretching exercises into your routine to make it easier to move around and stay limber for longer. Cautionary Note Before beginning any stretching workout with a stretching machine, consult a doctor or a fitness professional. Before you use any of this equipment, it's a good idea to figure out how flexible you are. It may also assist you in avoiding injury. | |||||||||||||||||||
95 | 94 | https://www.si.com/review/mens-skating-shoes/ | The best men's skating shoes in 2022 are designed to help withstand endless ollies, grinds, and flip tricks. But just because they offer these benefits doesn't mean they can't be worn like regular sneakers when you're not sliding down a stair rail. These skateboarding shoes look good and can be worn whenever you want. Skateboarding as a sport has increased in popularity over the years and has even made its Olympic debut in the 2022 Tokyo Olympic Games. We've scoured the web to bring you a definitive list of some of the most advanced and great-looking skating shoes on the market right now. Further on, we have presented a very helpful buying guide to highlight the factors you must consider to make an informed buying decision. | Detailing the Best Men’s Skating Shoe in 2022 DC Men’s Pure Skate Shoe – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Has cup soles that provide foot and ankle support Lightweight and have a padded tongue and collar that provides even more comfort and support to your feet This product is designed with ventilation holes that help your feet breathe while on the move to prevent the buildup of sweat and odors The unique design of these shoes allows you to wear them as casual sneakers as well DC shoes have been around since 1994 and they just keep coming up with amazing shoes. The DC Men’s Pure Casual Skate Shoes are built with a cup sole that provides extra foot and ankle support. It is also designed with reinforced insoles that give extra protection for your feet when doing landing stunts. The upper of these shoes is made with a wonderful combination of materials including leather, nubuck, or suede (depending on the variant you pick), giving the shoes a stylish appearance while ensuring long-lasting durability. CHECK ON AMAZON Vans Old Skool Low-Top Trainers – Runner Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Vans Old Skool Low-Top Trainers are unisex and look good on both males and females The Old Skool design is trendy They are comfortable, you can easily wear them all day every day Reinforced rubber soles for landing protection Vans iconic gum rubber sole for optimum stability You might know Vans only for their everyday shoes. And yes, they’re great. But the brand is also perfectly capable when it comes to making skating shoes, and this can be seen in the Vans Old Skool Low-Top Trainers. With reinforced areas all around and the brand’s iconic gum rubber sole, you can be confident of extra protection and stability while performing skating stunts. So whatever stunt you pull, you can be sure that your feet will remain firmly planted on the board without sliding off. What’s more? This incredibly stylish pair of skate shoes double up as easily wearable everyday shoes. CHECK ON AMAZON adidas Men’s Daily 3.0 Skate Shoe – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Designed with gum rubber outsoles Constructed with reinforced suede uppers Have ankle cushioning for added protection They are lightweight so you can move around easily They can be worn casually as well due to their unique design Driven by a relentless pursuit of innovation and a long history deeply rooted in connection with the sport, the German sportswear giant Adidas has wrestled its way into the skateboarding footwear industry. The Adidas Men’s Daily 3.0 Skate Shoes combine classic models from the brand’s lifestyle and Originals line with a few more upgrades like extra cushioning, more traction, and tougher design to create the perfect street skater shoes for men. CHECK ON AMAZON Lugz Men’s Flip Sneaker – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The padded insole and vulcanized construction of the Lugz Men’s Flip Sneakers provides enhanced protection Come at an affordable price Have a lightweight design that makes them comfortable to wear Breathable construction to prevent the buildup of sweat and foul odors They come in multiple colors to suit your fashion preferences Lugz Men’s Flip Sneakers offer a good in-board feel and flexibility. If you’re into street skating and you’re going to be doing some ground tricks then this is the perfect pair of skating shoes for you. These shoes also come at a very affordable price. The upper is made of breathable, lightweight canvas material. Plus, the Lugz Men’s Flip Sneakers come in a variety of colors and can be worn casually as well, so you can get a lot of use out of them. CHECK ON AMAZON Etnies Kingpin Skateboarding Shoe 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Have an upper leather design Feature a padded tongue and collar The soles are made of very tough rubber material Low-top construction allows for swift movement during skating The Etnies brand is a fan favorite in the skateboarding and extreme sports community. They have been around since 1986 and are known for their decidedly chunkier skating shoes compared to ones being offered by competitors. The extra size of the Etnies Kingpin Skateboarding Shoes provides enhanced durability, ensuring the shoes deliver long-lasting utility. Plus, word on the street is that some models get their rubber sourced from the prestigious tire manufacturer Michelen that provides the utmost grip and performance. CHECK ON AMAZON Globe Men’s Tilt Skateboarding Shoe 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Rugged and fully padded to provide an excellent combination of durability and comfort Step-in sock liner for extra comfort Features rubber outsoles for excellent grip TPR Ollie Reinforcement Globe is another big player in the world of skateboarding. This Australian brand has been in existence since 1985. It is with this in mind that the Globe Men’s Tilt Skateboarding Shoes can certainly be trusted. There is much to love with this design: the suede outlook, rubber outsoles, and the Ethylene Vinyl Acetate sole that is designed for enhanced comfort. These cool shoes can also be worn casually and would rock with any outfit you put on. CHECK ON AMAZON eS Men’s Accel Og Skate Shoe 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Have an advanced cup sole construction They offer a high-quality suede upper Puffy, soft-textured tongue to keep foot snug Perforated on the sides for optimal foot ventilation to prevent sweat/odor buildup The eS brand is revered within the world of skateboarding. It is a sister brand of Etnies and has been around since 1995. The eS Men’s Accel Og Skate Shoes are a chunkier, more padded kind of skating shoes. They offer good ventilation, are made with authentic materials for durability and longevity, and feel very comfortable to wear and provide an exceptional grip. And, of course, these shoes have a classic style so you can keep the retro vibe going. After all, the art of skateboarding still holds its 90’s roots. CHECK ON AMAZON | Best Men’s Skating Shoes Buying Guide You need to buy a pair of skating shoes to keep your feet planted on the board and to provide support around the ankles. This helps to prevent injury as you perform all kinds of stunts. Enabling you to safely perform these stunts is what separates skate shoes from regular sneakers. So, unless you fancy a trip to the hospital with broken bones or torn ligaments, you need to make sure you invest in the right pair of skating shoes. Fortunately, the best men's skating shoes in 2021 offer an exceptional design that allows you to skate with utmost comfort, ease, and safety. There are plenty of skating shoes in the market, each offering its distinctive style and set of features. So choosing the right shoes for skateboarding might be just as difficult as a novice skater balancing on a stair rail. To help you make an informed decision, we've developed this guide. In this guide, you'll find out everything you need to consider when choosing the best skate shoes to take your skills and tricks to the next level. What Are the Types of Men’s Skating Shoes? There are three types of skating shoes, and the difference lies in the height of the shaft. High-top skating shoes High-top shoes have their cut placed higher than other shoes. The cut usually ends above the ankle. Owing to this, they offer additional padding for safety, protection, and stability, as well as enhanced cushioning especially around your ankles. High-top skating shoes will keep your feet warmer, but they don't breathe very well so your feet might end up sweating more than usual with this type of shoes. Low-top skating shoes Low-top shoes are cut much lower and are the most common in the skating world. Although you don't have as much padding with this type of shoes, they are made with a lightweight material that allows you to move easily and comfortably while wearing them. Also, sufficient cushioning and dampening are made possible in this type of shoes thanks to highly-developed insoles. Mid-top skating shoes This type exists for those skaters who are not sure of whether to get high or low-top skating shoes. This type offers the best of both worlds: a high degree of damping that is unique to low-top shoes, excellent stability and support that high-tops offer, and sufficient breathability to keep your feet cool and dry. What Should You Consider When Choosing Skating Shoes? Now that we have discussed the types of skating shoes, it is important to know what these shoes offer in terms of performance. The following are some of the most important attributes to consider when buying skate shoes. Stitching Good skating shoes should be double stitched or, if possible, triple stitched. If you look over the shoe and see that it is just glued together, don’t buy it. Stitching helps the shoes keep together for much longer. Material High-quality men's skating shoes are made from suede or leather. Synthetic material that is as strong as leather also works well. Also, the kind of material the shoe sole is made out of is important to consider. With this aspect, you do need to be careful because many brands promise "extra strong leather" but deliver something else, so make sure you're buying from a well-known brand. If you're not planning on doing very aggressive skating, then canvas material is also acceptable. Reinforcement Skating destroys shoes! When you're skating, you're working against the materials and stitching of the shoes. For this, it is necessary to get shoes that provide some kind of reinforcement. It isn't enough for a pair of shoes to be made out of suede; they need to have good reinforcement as well. The idea is that the shoes should look like they can take a beating. Extra rubber on the toe cap, on the side, and/or around the heel are just some of the numerous reinforcements that skate shoes offer. Weight We’ve said that good skating shoes need extra reinforcement, but there needs to be some balance. If the shoes are too heavy, then you won’t be able to pull off many tricks with them. So regardless of what your skate shoes are made of, they need to be light in weight. But not too light. Don’t go overboard here: if it feels incredibly light, then it might not offer the right balance. You are looking to skate, not to fly. Grip and sole The sole of skating shoes is supremely important to consider when buying skating shoes. The sole of the shoe is in direct contact with the board, and so it should be made with a grippy gum rubber, at least enough to be able to grip a skateboard with enough strength so you don't slip and fall. Truly, many skating accidents happen because the shoes worn provide insufficient grip, so make sure to check the grip provided by the pair of skating shoes very carefully before making a purchase. Should I Get a Vulc or Cup Sole? Vulcanized soles, also known as "Vulc", offer the best flexibility and in-board feel owing to their gummy, pliable feel. But they lack heel support due to their flat shape. If you're a street skater or mostly perform ground tricks, then Vulc soles are excellent for you. Cup sole, or "cups" as it is affectionately called by most skaters, offers more protection than the traditional Vulc sole. Cup soles create a thicker barrier between you and your board, offering more foot and ankle support. Unfortunately, they allow for very little board feel. | |||||||||||||||||||
96 | 95 | https://www.si.com/review/best-bike-moving-arm/ | ||||||||||||||||||||||
97 | 96 | https://www.si.com/review/best-inflatable-kayak/ | We all love kayaking, but we hate lugging around large and cumbersome hard-shell kayaks. That’s why most of us buy inflatable kayaks. A quality inflatable kayak is surprisingly durable, can be inflated in just a few minutes, and can easily be transported in the trunk of a car. So which is the best one for you? Check out now our top picks for the best inflatable kayaks in 2022. | The Best Inflatable Kayak Models In Detail Intex Excursion Pro Kayak – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This large inflatable kayak can hold up to 400 pounds, so it’s ready for you and your fishing gear or another person. It’s made from a durable PVC material and comes with two integrated fishing rod holders. PROS Mounting bracket for accessories like a GPS or fish finder Weighs just under 40 pounds Comes with two paddles and a pump CONS Not the best long-term durability if used on rough waters CHECK ON AMAZON Sea Eagle 370 Deluxe Inflatable Portable Sport Kayak – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon With a weight capacity of 650 pounds, this kayak can hold up to three people and plenty of extra gear. But when it’s time to take it to and from the water, you’ll love that it only weighs a little over 30 pounds, so it’s easy to carry even if you’re by yourself. PROS Two rear skegs make it easy to control Takes just 6 minutes to pump up Comes with paddles, pump, and carrying case CONS Seats don’t provide a lot of support CHECK ON AMAZON Driftsun Rover Inflatable White-Water Kayak – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This inflatable kayak has 1000D reinforced PVC sides that are ready to take a beating. It comes with a pump, paddles, and everything you need to get started. When you’re finished, fit it all in the carry bag for easy transportation back to your vehicle. PROS Tall backrests provide plenty of support 600-pound weight capacity Tie-down points for extra gear or action cameras CONS A little pricey CHECK ON AMAZON KLYMIT LITEWATER DINGHY, Inflatable Travel Kayak – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon If you’re looking for an inflatable boat you can take along on your backpacking trip, you’ll love this KLYMIT inflatable raft. It only weighs 44 ounces and packs down to the size of a thermos. When inflated, you can easily paddle around a lake or calm river. PROS Arrow shape makes it stable while still letting you use a standard paddle Includes a dry sack pump to inflate Tie-off zones for attaching gear CONS Not suitable for speed or rapids CHECK ON AMAZON | Inflatable Kayaks Buying Guide Inflatable kayaks have taken the kayaking space by storm. As replacements for the more traditional hardshell kayaks, they have proven to be viable alternatives. Our review of the best inflatable kayaks has given you a glimpse of the array of quality inflatable kayaks available in the market. This buying guide will help you to simplify your buying decision. The guide explains the differences between inflatable kayaks and rigid kayaks; it also explains various important factors that should be considered before buying an inflatable kayak. The final section of the buying guide is dedicated to answering frequently asked questions about inflatable kayaks. What Are the Differences Between Inflatable Kayaks and Rigid Kayaks? One of the first questions that many people ask is, “why should I choose an inflatable kayak over a rigid kayak?” This section answers this question by highlighting the major differences between inflatable kayaks and hardshell kayaks. Weight Inflatable kayaks are the lighter of the two. Hardshell kayaks are almost two times as heavy as inflatable kayaks. Due to their low weight, inflatable kayaks are easier to transport than hard shells. Transport and storage As stated above, inflatable kayaks are easier to transport because of their feather-like weight. Also, they are easier to store away because they shrink to a smaller size once deflated. Hardshell kayaks remain in their rigid form, making them harder to store. Setting up For every use, you will have to pump air into an inflatable kayak. The inflation could take between 5 to 10 minutes. You also have to deflate an inflatable kayak after every use. Hardshell kayaks are always ready to use. What Are the Things to Consider Before Buying Inflatable Kayaks? Considering the abundance of inflatable kayaks available in the market, some factors need to be considered to ensure you make a sound buying decision. These factors are explained below. Type of material Inflatable kayaks are made of synthetic fabrics like PVC, Hypalon, and nitrilon. PVC is the most widely used material for making inflatable kayaks. Kayaks made of PVC are durable but are also susceptible to the harsh effects of UV rays. Hypalon is also durable when used to make inflatable kayaks. Inflatable kayaks made of Hypalon are also resistant to the harsh effects of UV rays. However, they are more expensive than PVC inflatables. Nitrilion is a relatively new material used to make inflatable kayaks. It is used to construct heavy-duty inflatable kayaks. Kayaks made of nitrilion are the most expensive of all. Overall, the type of material used to construct the inflatable kayak will affect the kayak’s durability. Thus, this factor should be prioritized when buying an inflatable kayak. Ease of setting up You should also consider how easily you can set up the inflatable kayak before buying one. Ease of setting up essentially refers to how easily you can inflate and deflate the kayak before and after each use. You should be on the lookout for a kayak that is easily inflatable. Weight capacity The inflatable kayak’s weight capacity should be considered before splashing the cash on a new kayak. You should check the kayak’s weight capacity in relation to your weight and the weight of others (people, pets, and gears) that will share the kayak with you. If you exceed the kayak’s weight capacity, the kayak will get damaged easily. Length The length of the inflatable kayak determines speed and maneuverability. Longer inflatable kayaks are faster than shorter ones. Shorter inflatable kayaks have the advantage of being more easily maneuverable. Thus, you should consider what you need most from your kayak – speed or maneuverability? Sit in inflatable kayak vs. Sit on top inflatable kayak The kayak’s seat position is another important factor to consider before buying one. There are two seat options for inflatables – sit in and sit on top. Do you want a kayak seat that protects your lower body from harsh weather conditions with a cockpit-like enclosure, or do you prefer a vantage sitting position where you have an ample view of the surrounding? Your answer to this question will help you to choose between the two. The noticeable disadvantage of sit-in kayaks is the limited view that comes with them. On the other hand, sit-on-top kayaks have the disadvantage of exposing the lower body to harsh weather conditions. Paddle vs. Pedal inflatable kayak Paddle inflatable kayaks require the use of a double-bladed paddle to propel the kayak forward. It is an energy-intensive option. Pedal inflatable kayaks are propelled by pedals mounted inside the kayak. They are more leisurely and require less energy. However, they are more expensive and require more maintenance than paddle-propelled inflatable kayaks. How Much Do Inflatable Kayaks Cost? The price of an inflatable kayak depends on several factors. The choice of a pedal or paddle system is one of the main factors that determine the price. Also, the type of material used to make the kayak is another factor that determines the price. You can get low-end inflatable kayaks for as low as $350, while high-end inflatables cost between $1,500 and $3000. Inflatable kayaks within the range of $650 and $1800 offer a balance between cost and efficiency. | |||||||||||||||||||
98 | 97 | https://www.si.com/review/speed-punching-bag/ | The speed bag, as the name suggests, is designed to offer a unique punching experience with a bag that moves very quickly. It helps build stamina and improve hand-eye coordination to make you a better boxer. The bag comes shaped like a teardrop and usually hangs downwards from a low ceiling. Whether you are looking for a speed bag to condition your muscles or you need something that helps build endurance while improving your reaction time, you need a punching bag that can support your individual goals. Although speed bags are usually available in gyms, you should get one to train at home as it requires very little space to install and use. To help you make the right choice, we have come up with the ultimate list of the top-rated speed punching bags of 2022. We have selected these top-of-the-line bags for this list for the following reasons: They feature premium craftmanship They are well-balanced They are suitable for all skill levels | Comparing The Top Speed Punching Bag Of 2022 Everlast Everhide Speed Bag – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made of top-grade synthetic leather material Reinforced durability-enhancing seams Medium-sized bag Bladder is included The Everlast Everhide is an excellent workout companion and a great boxing speed bag for beginners and people looking for a good quality non-leather bag. It is durable and comes in a shape that provides accurate rebounds whenever it is hit. The Everlast Everhide features a welted seam combined with reinforced lacing; this ensures enhanced durability of the ball since both of these features guarantee that the ball won’t fray over time. In addition to this, the shape of the Everlast Everhide also guarantees that you will be able to time your reflexes perfectly. CHECK ON AMAZON Meister SpeedKills Leather Speed Bag – Runner up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comes in a variety of sizes, so it is easy to choose a size that suits your needs Made of high-quality leather Lightweight leather bladder Centered build for excellent rebound consistency The Meister leather speed bag is made using top-grade cow leather hide. It is available in three different sizes ranging from small (7.5″ x 5″) for experts, medium (9.5″ x 6″) for intermediates, and large (10.5″ x 7″) that is recommended for beginners. This bag comes with a bladder constructed from lightweight latex. Latex has been proven to be lighter and faster than regular rubber, so this bag is great for building stamina. This speed bag is made from cowhide, which means that it can take a beating and will still maintain its shape and form. You will also be pleased to know that it comes in three different sizes that anyone can use, whether you are a beginner, intermediate user, or expert. CHECK ON AMAZON Hunter Speed Bag – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Lined with multiple layers of durability-enhancing poly-cotton material Balanced construction Latex lightweight bladder Made of durable cowhide material This speed bag manufactured by Hunter company consists of a latex bladder that needs to be inflated regularly, which might sound like a chore but it’s worth it considering the lightweight design of this bag that guarantees high rebound accuracy. The Hunter speed bag features a tie design which means that the bladder inside can be replaced anytime. It also comes with a swivel for attaching the speed bag to any suitable surface. The bladder can easily be inflated using a football pump. Another great feature of the Hunter speed bag is that the inside is lined with four layers of poly-cotton material; this makes it durable and tear-resistant. CHECK ON AMAZON Title Boxing Speed Bag – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Made using the highest quality materials Comes in a variety of sizes Triple reinforced leather assures users of its durability Shell is made of top-quality leather material The Title Boxing speed bag comes in a black leather exterior and is available in sizes ranging from XXS (4″ x 7″), L (7″ x 10″), M (6″ x 9″), and S (5″ x 8″). This speed bag features a gyro balance, which helps develop and quicken your reflexes, eye movement, and hand-eye coordination. The leather is triple reinforced, assuring you of this bag’s ability to take a beating and still maintain balance. Title Boxing has also included a bladder made from butyl rubber to give you the best workout experience. CHECK ON AMAZON Cleto Reyes Speed Bag 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Perfect bag for people who prefer a banana bag which is the Mexican style of the speed bag Hand-crafted to the tiniest detail Available in three sizes Fortified nylon lining for enhanced durability Handcrafted in Mexico, the Cleto Reyes speed bag weighs 0.1kg and is an absolute beauty. Each aspect of this bag’s construction ensures enhanced durability and reliable performance. The bag is made with tough leather material and features a fortified nylon lining, both of which give it sufficient endurance to withstand fast and heavy punches. Like several other speed bags already mentioned, this speed punching bag also comes in three different sizes, labeled extra small, small and medium. Beginners should consider using the bigger sizes, while pros should prefer smaller sizes. CHECK ON AMAZON Pro Impact Speed Bag 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features Comfortable to use even without knuckle protection Perfect for people who want small sized speed bags Top-grade latex bladder Triple-reinforced seams for enhanced durability The Pro impact speed bag is built for boxers and Muay Thai athletes. It is built to last. The exterior is made of faux leather, and it features a latex bladder that ensures it wouldn’t leak after a few beatings. This bag is made using the highest quality synthetic leather that ensures enhanced durability, so the bag maintains its shape and form even after extended use. It features triple-reinforced seams that guarantee that the ball will move in the right direction when struck. Also, this bag comes in three different sizes, so you can choose one that suits your level of expertise the best. CHECK ON AMAZON MaxxMMA Speed Bag 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Key Features The frame is very sturdy Great for both children and adults since the height can be adjusted Comes with a durable and thick board for mounting the swivel Includes handpump with the needle This height-adjustable speed bag from MAxxMMA is designed to be used by a boxer of any skillset. It comes with everything you need to make installation completely stress-free, including a swivel and a hand pump with a needle. As this bag is height-adjustable, practically anyone can have a go at it after adjusting the height to suit the boxer. This speed bag measures 10″ x 7″ in size, and it has a 24-inch diameter. The bag also comes with a 1.5″ thick board that provides enhanced stabilization during use, resulting in an improved training experience. CHECK ON AMAZON | Buying Guide: Speed Punching Bags Even before the days of boxing greats like Muhammad Ali, speed bags were part of essential training. Boxers and MMA fighters used speed bags to improve hand-eye coordination, build stamina, and condition muscles. Today, you can use a speed bag for conditioning muscles, even if you are not a professional boxer. Speed punching bags are great for maintaining optimal fitness. At the end of this buying guide, you will see clearly the thin line that separates the best speed bags and regular ones. You will also see why you should include a speed bag in your exercise routine. This air-filled bag has two main parts: the swivel, and the bag itself. The swivel attaches the bag to the board and ensures it doesn't go flying off when hit. The bag, on the other hand, is made of a tough leather or synthetic exterior. The inside of the speed bag contains a soft rubber bladder which is usually air-filled. This makes the bag both tough and lightweight, allowing you to punch with force without worrying about damaging the bag while ensuring it moves fast enough to challenge your reflexes. What Is a Speed Bag? Unlike a full-size punching bag that requires pure force and is used for building punching power, a speed punching bag is more for building reflexes, improving hand-eye coordination, and stamina. It comes in various shapes and sizes, and choosing the right kind of speed bag is key to ensuring you get the most benefit out of your training sessions. A speed bag has a lightweight and small design, although it is usually made with durable materials to ensure it can take plenty of punches without tearing. What Are the Benefits of Using a Speed Bag? Here are some of the many benefits that you can derive from using a speed punching bag. Helps improve hand-eye coordination The most important benefit you can get out of training on a speed bag is the improvement of hand-eye coordination. You need to develop a rhythm while punching the speed bag to keep up with its movement. This task is easier said than done as you have to time the rebound of the bag with your eyes and try to hit it at the same spot to prevent it from spinning off. As a boxer or MMA fighter, your ability to move and punch quickly will define your competitiveness, and that's what makes training on a speed bag absolutely essential. It builds shoulder arm strength Keeping your hands up and hitting the bag is an excellent exercise for your shoulders and arms. Over time your shoulder and arms will begin to get toned. How is this possible, you may ask? Well, since the bag is placed slightly higher than eye level, you have to keep your hands up to hit the bag. This will engage shoulder and arm muscles throughout the session, with repetitive hits pushing the muscles to become more toned. Helps you develop accuracy When you train on a speed punching bag, you must time each punch perfectly and aim to hit the bag on the same spot every time. This, combined with the fact that the speed bag is one of the smaller types of punching bags, helps make your punches more precise. The benefit is obvious; during a boxing match, you'll be able to hit your opponent exactly where you want to hit without missing. It improves your punching speed It's called the speed bag, so it certainly is excellent for increasing your punching speed. The speed bag is capable of going back and forth at incredible speeds. You will need to react quickly to be able to hit it accurately. It is excellent for improving endurance and stamina Your endurance and stamina will be tested with the speed bag. Over time you will be able to keep punching the bag for longer and with more accuracy. Pro boxers know that the most challenging thing to do during a fight is to keep your hands up for a long time. The speed bag helps tackle this issue by training you to be more resilient. Features to Look For When Buying a Speed Bag The outer shell and bladder material Both the exterior and interior of the bag should be made from the highest quality materials. Some manufacturers prefer to use leather from cowhides, while others choose synthetic leather. When it comes to bag material, athletes usually prefer genuine leather as it offers the most durability. But real leather speed bags are usually quite expensive, and should only be sought if you are a pro-athlete and want to throw heavy punches on the bag. The material used in manufacturing the bladder of a speed bag is also essential to consider. Bladders made from latex are the best as they have been proven to last longer than regular rubber and plastic bladders. Also, latex bladders ensure the bag remains lightweight, allowing you to enjoy fast movements. Also, speed bag bladders are quite cheap and can be replaced without needing to change the bag. The swivel and mounting There are three popular ways you can mount a speed bag. There is the hanging method of mounting the speed bag. The hanging speed bag needs to be attached to a swivel. The swivel ensures that the bag always comes back after every strike. Other ways of mounting the speed bag include the double end method and the free-standing method. Free-standing speed bags are the easiest to install, while double-end speed bags may be challenging to install. However, they are the most stable of the three styles of mounting a swift bag. The shape and size The size of the bag will significantly affect its speed and the energy required to continue hitting the bag. For one, smaller speed bags move faster while large speed bags require more strength and endurance. You must note that what one manufacturer considers small might be labeled as large by another manufacturer so, check the size specification before buying. The durability Durable speed bags are made from the highest quality materials and are usually sewn with reinforced seams. Additionally, welting can be done to increase the durability of the speed bag. | |||||||||||||||||||
99 | 98 | https://www.si.com/review/best-hitting-tee/ | Hitting tees are not just for little leaguers and tee-ball players. Go to a high school or college batting cage, and you’ll find plenty of ballplayers bending over, putting a ball on the tee, lining up, and cracking the ball with their bat. You’ll even find that the top players in the major leagues still use baseball tees to practice their swing and measure their exit velocity. For those of us who are serious about improving our batting skills, a baseball tee can be our best friend. They help you practice your batting to improve strength and speed without needing a pitcher. A good tee should be durable, hard to tip over, and not interfere with your swing. Which is the best one for you? Get ready to improve your game and check out our top picks for baseball tees. We have selected the seven tees on this list as stand-out products because they: Have strong, wide bases so they won't tip over Are adjustable so you can customize the height as per your preference Have rubber tips so you feel the ball, not the tee | Baseball Tee: Our Top Picks MacGregor Baseball Tee – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This durable rubber baseball tee features a broad metal base so it’s hard to tip over. It has an adjustable batting height for players of all ages. It is also easy to clean and transport so that you can take it anywhere that you want to. PROS Adjustable hitting height from 20 to 36 inches Wide, solid metal base keeps the tee stable Weatherproof to withstand the elements Easy to transport CONS Plastic might not hold up to lots of use Durability issues with the screw that holds the tee to the base CHECK ON AMAZON TANNER TEE the ORIGINAL | Premium Baseball Tee – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon For serious batting practice, this is the baseball tee to have. It features a pro-style rolled rubber top, so you feel the ball and not the tee while hitting. While more expensive than standard options, the Tanner baseball tee is heavy-duty, which will last you throughout your baseball career. PROS Rolled rubber top is much more durable than a solid rubber top Adjustable from 26 to 43 inches Handcrafted in the USA Can fit in a bat bag for easy portability CONS Needs a bit more weight at the base for optimal stability CHECK ON AMAZON Jugs T – Pro Style Batting Tee – Most Stable 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This quality batting tee has a sturdy weighted base that lets you swing as hard as possible without tipping it over. The base even has a handle opening, making it easy to pick up and carry. While on the pricier side of the aisle, the Jugs T baseball tee is used by every level of baseball players, so you know you’re getting the real deal. PROS Adjustable height from 24 to 46 inches Flexible rubber top lets you feel the ball and not the tee Stem unscrews from the base for easy transport Upper tee stem won’t slip down while being used CONS On the more expensive side Tee may be a bit wobbly when fully extended CHECK ON AMAZON Franklin Sports MLB 3 Position Baseball Tee – Budget Pick 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This is an excellent choice for young kids looking to practice their batting skills. It’s simple and easy to set up, even for young ones, so that they can practice on their own. We wouldn’t suggest this to older ballplayers because of the marginal quality. For a younger ballplayer, there’s nothing wrong with this baseball tee! PROS Large home plate-style base Adjustable height from 20 to 36 inches Comes apart for easy storage Move the tee to three hitting zones on the plate CONS Made of plastic CHECK ON AMAZON PowerNet Softball Baseball Tee 5 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This portable baseball tee is lightweight and foldable for easy transportation. Instead of having a heavy weighted base, it has long tripod-style legs that unfold to give it stability. Pop it in your baseball bag next to your bats, and you can take it anywhere and have it set up in no time! PROS Only weighs 2.5 pounds Rolled rubber top doesn’t interfere with your hitting Adjustable height from 27.5 to 44 inches Extremely portable CONS Durability issues with the plastic collar that holds the tees Rolled rubber top may come off if mistreated CHECK ON AMAZON Franklin Sports Kids Baseball Tee 6 image Photo courtesy of Amazon Getting your youngster started in the game of baseball is probably one of the first sports they’ll ever be a part of. Guide your child as they learn to swing and develop hand-eye coordination with this baseball tee and pop-up pitcher. The set includes a collapsible bat and helps kids practice alone. PROS Ideal for kids as young as three The height is adjustable from 21 to 25 inches The bat included in the set is collapsable CONS Tee height may not extend far enough for taller kids The plastic bat may not withstand prolonged use CHECK ON AMAZON Gonex Baseball Tee 7 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This metal baseball tee has three legs that lock into place for batting practice and fold up when not in use. Store and transport it in the black carrying case with handles. Use it for both baseball and softball to save some time and money in the future! PROS Rubber top won’t damage bats Adjustable height ranges from 27 to 44 inches Easy to set up and take on the go The rubber top is replaceable CONS Not meant to be left outdoors Parts may sustain damage if used incorrectly CHECK ON AMAZON | Baseball Tees Buying Guide If you could take every baseball player the world has ever seen, both great and small, back to where it all began, chances are they used a baseball tee—and probably still do—to hone their skills. Baseball tees are indispensable tools for baseball beginners like kids who want to learn the basics and develop the coordination required for a great swing. To strike a pitched ball, the player must combine good eye and hand coordination with perfect timing—two separate elements that are undoubtedly hard to do simultaneously for most beginners. As baseball tees hold the ball stationary, the player hones the coordination between their eyes and hands, and once perfected, they can move on to learning how to time their strike, a step at a time. This fixed position offers the ideal control environment to figure out what you are or are not doing right. Advanced players, too, use them to practice and further refine their skills. A good baseball tee also makes an excellent substitute for a human pitcher – your child can practice for hours on end while it holds up the ball faithfully. But much more than just being able to hold up a ball goes into qualities that make a baseball tee exceptional. We have given you an outline of the best baseball tees that stand out from the bunch, but which to choose? We are here to help. With this buying guide, we give you a list of considerations you should make and qualities you should look out for when pitting one baseball tee against another to make an informed choice best suited to your needs. Adjustability When scouting for a baseball tee, you always want to go with one that comes with an adjustable stem. The only thing better than a baseball tee with the correct height is a baseball tee with adjustable height. An adjustable baseball tee will allow you to practice striking the ball at different heights to simulate the variability of a pitcher’s throw. Adjustable baseball tees are also great for kids to keep using as they grow. A fixed baseball tee will confine your swing to a particular height and, through muscle memory, may make you less accurate with pitches that are not within close range of the tee’s height. Adjustable baseball tees will almost always come as telescopic units that can easily be lengthened or shortened with a control system. The height range is also another essential factor to consider. The wider the height range, the more variability you get. However, note that the longer the baseball tee, the less balanced it will be as its center of gravity moves upwards. Construction The durability of the baseball tee is one quality that must not be compromised. The baseball tee must be tough enough to withstand the thousands and thousands of hits that’ll be the sacrifice for honing your skills. The durability will depend on its constituent materials and its design. Ideally, you want to look for baseball tees made of alloys or composites that will be weather-resistant and impact-resistant. It should also come with a holding cone made of a flexible material, like rubber, that won’t damage your bat. Some modern baseball tees come with built-in air blowers that keep the baseball suspended in the air and not touching the tee. They boast excellent durability as the tee is very unlikely to get damaged. Even the worst possible swinger would have a hard time hitting the tee as they are given a much clearer view of the ball. However, the disadvantages of these suspension baseball tees are their vulnerability to sudden gusts of wind and high price tag. You will also need a power source to run the air pump, increasing costs and limiting where they can be used. Stability As great as your swings may be, you or someone else will likely strike the tee too low at one point or the other. To reduce the chances of it crashing down and getting damaged further, the baseball tee must be very stable. Look for a baseball tee with a broad base to balance its tendency to tilt when struck. Also, ideally, the baseball tee should be weighted. A good amount of weight will keep the baseball tee well-grounded and less likely to topple over. If properly weighted and stable, you will make fewer adjustments and spend more time practicing. Price You may have seen a baseball tee you love, but you may not love its price tag as much. A baseball tee can cost anywhere from $25 for a low-budget unit to $120 for a high-performance one. Special models like air suspension baseball tees can go for as high as $250, with a baseball set added as an incentive. Take your needs into consideration when looking at prices. Are you looking for the best of the best? Or are you looking for something that is more mid-range and gets the job done? We have plenty of options for all ranges. Portability The portability of the baseball tee is another essential factor to consider. The ideal baseball tee should easily disassemble into smaller units or collapse into a compact unit for easy storage or transport. And while it should be easy to take apart or collapse, it should also be effortless to put back together. With the right portable tee, you can practice anywhere: at home, in a park, or at the field. | |||||||||||||||||||
100 | 99 | https://www.si.com/review/best-wrestling-knee-pad/ | Even if you have all the right moves, your wrestling isn’t complete without the right gear. To be fully protected when hitting the mat, you need high-quality knee pads to keep your knees protected from mat burn and provide a cushion to help ease tension. These are some of the top choices for the best grapplers in 2022. | Best Wrestling Knee Pad Worth Considering Bodyprox Protective Knee Pad – Best Overall 1 image Photo courtesy of Amazon These unisex knee pads are available in small/medium and large to fit knees of all sizes. They are lightweight to make them more comfortable. PROS Bodyprox Protective Knee Pads, Thick Sponge Anti-Slip provide good elasticity to stretch as needed while still retaining their shape Non-slip keeps them in place without having to constantly adjust them CONS Not effective for outdoor use CHECK ON AMAZON Vergali Wrestling Knee Pad – Runner-Up 2 image Photo courtesy of Amazon These knee pads consist of an EVA foam pad to provide flexibility and comfort when your knee lands on the mat or court. The pads contain elastic to keep them in place. PROS Vergali Basketball and Wrestling Knee Pads for Youth and Adult are washing machine safe Made of nylon/spandex combo to wick away moisture Lightweight and flexible CONS Not as effective on hardwood courts CHECK ON AMAZON McDavid Knee Pad – Honorable Mention 3 image Photo courtesy of Amazon This knee pad provides excellent compression to help stabilize the knee during wrestling, basketball, softball and more. This pad is made from premium materials that keep it both warm and breathable. PROS McDavid Knee Pad with Thick Gel Insert for Impact Absorption is breathable for better ventilation Made of neoprene for additional warmth CONS Only comes with one knee pad CHECK ON AMAZON Bucwild Sports Knee Pad – Also Consider 4 image Photo courtesy of Amazon These knee pads are made from quality polyester and spandex for protection and stretch for enhanced comfort. These pads work for various sports like wrestling, soccer and baseball. PROS Bucwild Sports Knee Pads/Padded Compression Pro Knee Sleeves contain advanced sweat-wicking material 10mm EVA foam padding for enhanced protection CONS Tend to slide off the knee CHECK ON AMAZON | Wrestling Knee Pad Buying Guide Wrestling knee pads are essential to such a rough combat sport as wrestling. They improve knee stability, strength, and cushion hard falls, and drastic maneuvers. They are quintessential to the sport, and you should settle for nothing but the best wrestling knee pads on the market. With so many great options available, it can be easy to get overwhelmed and end up with subpar equipment. In this guide, we go over features and factors that should help you navigate the market better. What Are the Factors to Consider When Choosing a Wrestling Knee Pad? There are a handful of factors you must consider when shopping for a wrestling knee pad. Weight Though it's an uncommon factor, it dramatically affects a wrestler's overall performance. Wrestlers should aim for well-balanced average weighted knee pads with decent protection. Heavy-duty knee pads that provide better impact protection and compression usually weigh too much and might end up slowing down the athlete. On the flip side, knee pads that are too lightweight might not provide enough protection and make the athlete prone to injuries. Balanced knee pads are the safe and responsible middle ground. Durability Wrestling is a high-impact sport, and a wrestler's gear is expected to take a great deal of punishment, and protect them without falling apart. Great knee pads should be able to shrug off scrapes, absorb impacts, and take blows repeatedly for months without fail. You should prioritize materials like Lycra spandex, neoprene, and gel-filled pads for the best durability. Versatility Wrestling knee pads are typically knee sleeves paired with shock-absorbing pads, and they provide different levels of flexibility and mobility depending on their length and material composition. You might prefer more or less mobility depending on your wrestling style and physiology. Price Price is another major component of choosing the perfect wrestling knee pad for you. The prices of sports equipment go up depending on what brands, perks, and materials you're interested in. More flexibility, breathability, and mobility typically mean a higher price point; however, the equipment upgrade is not always worth it. Search for products that offer the best value for the price, and only choose knee pads within your means. Sizes Wrestling knee pads like most equipment come in various knee sizes and lengths. Though knee pads are elastic, wrestling knee pads still have somewhat strict size configurations. A knee pad that is too small for you will be stretched to the limit with each use which will increase the chances of breaking or failure. Inversely, a knee pad with too much slack will slip off during matches, and spars. Consult a manufacturer's size chart before you choose what size of knee pads you buy. Ensure it's exactly your size, or it's close enough. What Types of Wrestling Knee Pads Can You Buy? Functionally, most wrestling pads are identical. They protect the knee from wear and tear, impact, etc. However, the construction materials are the main differentiators between the different types of pads. There are wrestling pads that feature foam, high-density sponges, layered on other types of interesting lightweight materials. What Style of Wrestling Pads Can You Buy? You can purchase different styles of wrestling pads both online and at physical stores. You can opt for different colors, paddings, and brand designs. Some brands even offer their users custom services that allow them to place decorative graphics, or logos on their wrestling knee pads. |